Home

1761-6.2, MicroLogix 1000 with Hand

1. S s O x S Ae ee Se ee eG LOL LEREELELELE LES QOCMOOCOOCOOCOCOOOOOCOC OOO ee oc yo no n 13 i 4 5 16 W u8 9 WO Wil 2 3 4 115 Ine 117 1 18 ne a awl A vot oft vot ba vot 0 2 08 vot 0 4 05 0 6 O 7 vot 0 8 0 9 0 10 ve OC JODO OOOOOCOOCOOOOO oe p VAC 2 VDC 1 voc 2 voc 3 VAC 2 VDC 1 voc 2 voc 3 VAC 1 com com com com a VAC 1 COM 1761 L32BWA Input Voltage Range OV dc 5V dc 14V dc OV dc 5V dc 14V dc 26 4V dc 55 C 131 F 30V dc 30 C 86 F 1761 L32BWA Output Voltage Range OVac 5Vac IGAV ac OVde 5V dc TOEN de 7 77 Z Z vA Operating Range 2 10 Chapter 2 Wiring Your Controller 1761 L10BWB Wiring Diagram Sinking Input Configuration Note Refer to page 2 2 for additional input configuration options 14 30 VDC lt 14 30 VDC gt vDC VDC VDC VDC Com Com Ohh t Yt OOOOOOOOOCOOOM NOT NOT DC 1 0 1 1 2 1 3 DC 1 4 5 NOT NOT NOT NOT USED USED COM COM USED USED USED USED
2. L S S CO ER e D D amp 1761 L32AWA Input Voltage Range OV ac 20V ac 79V ac 132V ac m Z or 1761 L32AWA Output Voltage Range OVac 5Vac 264V ac OVde 5Vde 125V dc es 7 Operating Range 2 7 Chapter 2 Wiring Your Controller 2 8 1761 L10BWA Wiring Diagram Sinking Input Configuration Note Refer to page 2 2 for additional input configuration options 14 30V de lt gt VDC VDC VDC a g O Q f gt VDC Com OOOOOO oodo E OO HOSo 2V DC 1 0 J COM L DC OUT 2 1 3 DC 4 5 NOT NOT NOT NOT COM USED USED USED USED 85 264 VAC 7 is ch A vac yac l vac l NOT VAC voc 0 0 voc O 1 voc 0 2 voc 0 3 USED USED USED NOT NOT OL Q OOO OOOO OO T VAC 1 COM COM COM VAC 1 COM 1761 L10BWA Input Voltage Range OV de 5V de 14V dc OV dc 5V dc 14V dc CA CR 26 4V dc 55 C 131 F 30V dc 30 C 86 F mm JAKIA On 1761 L10BWA Output Voltage Range
3. Mnemonic sik y ae Name Instruction Type HSL 171 Piani Counter High Speed Counter IIM 138 A Input with Program Flow Control INT LD INT HINT F 158 nterrupt Subroutine Application Specific IOM 139 di Output with Program Flow Control JMP 130 ump to Label Program Flow Control JSR 132 ump to Subroutine Program Flow Control LBL LD LBL H LBL 131 Label Program Flow Control LD 20 Load Basic LDI 21 Load Inverted Basic LDT LD 26 Load True Basic AND LEQ LEQ 60 LEQ LD LEQ LEQ 59 Less Than or Equal Comparison OR LEQ Leg H 61 AND LES LES 57 LES LD LES LES 56 Less Than Comparison OR LES LEs H 58 LFL 115 LIFO Load Data Handling LFU 116 LIFO Unload Data Handling AND LIM LIM 72 LIM LD LIM LIM 71 Limit Test Comparison OR LIM um H 73 CR 135 aster Control Reset Program Flow Control AND MEQ MEQ 69 EQ LD MEQ MEQ 68 ar Comparison for Comparison OR MEQ MEQ H 70 OV 106 ove Data Handling PP 12 emory Pop Basic PS 10 emory Push Basic RD 11 emory Read Basic SG 200 essage Communication UL 82 ultiply Math VM 107 asked Move Data Handling Multiple displays Appendix B Programming Reference Mnemonic nek y gen Name
4. Item Description 1 Port 1 DB 9 RS 232 DTE 2 Port2 mini DIN 8 RS 232 3 Port3 DH 485 Phoenix plug DC Power Source selector switch cable port 2 power source external external power source connected to item 5 5 Terminals for external 24V dc power supply and chassis ground For additional information on connecting to the AIC see the Advanced Interface Converter AIC and DeviceNet Interface DNI Installation Instructions Publication 1761 5 11 Chapter 3 Connecting the System DF1 Isolated Point to Point Connection 1761 CBL AM00 or 1761 CBL HM02 Nw MicroLogix 1000 2 3 AlC gt 1761 NET AIC i PC Selection Switch Up 24V dc the AIC via port 2 DH 485 Network Connection Not needed in this configuration since he MicroLogix 1000 provides power to L 1747 CP3 or 1761 CBL AC00 MicroLogix 1000 Series C or later discrete and all analog a PC PC to port 1 connection from or port 2 port 1 or port 2 1761 CBL AM00 to MicroLogix or 1761 CBL HM02 AIC 1761 NET AIC 2 24V dc A user sup
5. s CHO So 9 3 f gQ f 85 264 VAC 7 AN wc l vac vac vac l ovac LI WN voc 0 0 voc 0 1 voc 0 2 voc 0 3 voc 0 4 05 OOOOO OOOO OOO CIO t s slie e o VAC 2 VDC 1 voc 2 voc 3 VAC 2 VDC 1 voc 2 VDC 3 VAC 1 com com com com VAC 1 COM 1761 L16AWA Input Voltage Range OV ac 20V ac 79V ac 132V ac SoZ ZL a 1761 L16AWA Output Voltage Range OVac 5Vac 264V ac OVde 5Vdc 125V dc 7 7I z Z W Operating Range Chapter 2 Wiring Your Controller 1761 L32AWA Wiring Diagram lt 79 132V ac att lt L2 N LI L2 N SI LELEL 79 132V ac cio ee REEELLELLELE LSA i dooodododdoddoooddceocvovovubvoub C 14 I5 6 7 W8 19 V10 V11 1 12 13 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 17 1 18 1 19 USED USED COM COM l os Y O O HO 7O Hooy i 85 264 VAC 7 j f SA VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC WN voc 0 0 voc Of voc 0 2 0 3 voc Of 0 5 0 6 O 7 voc 0 8 0 9 0 10 0 11 DOOODOOOOCOOOOODOCOOOOO
6. T DCIN AE vac vac l vac l NOT NOT NOT 24V voc 0 0 voc 0 1 voc 0 2 voc 0 3 USED USED USED 0000 0000TA s s VAC 1 voc 2 voc 3 VAC 1 voc 2 VDC 3 voc 1 com com com VDC 1 com 1761 L10BWB Input Voltage Range OV de 5V de 14V dc 26 4V dc 55 C 131 F 1761 L10BWB Output Voltage Range OVac 5Vac 264V ac OVde 5V de 125V dc 777 z Z Z Operating Range 2 11 Chapter 2 Wiring Your Controller 1761 L16BWB Wiring Diagram Sinking Input Configuration Note Refer to page 2 2 for additional input configuration options lt _ 14 30V de gt lt 14 30V de ee ee HA OOOOQOCOOOOOODO CM NOT NOT DC 1 0 1 1 2 1 3 DC 4 15 We I7 1 8 9 USED USED COM COM T DCN 7 ire NE We ok o on ke ok aococoogqococgocgccgqggg S S C e VAC 1 VDC 2 VDC 3 VDC 4 con COM CoN wa a COM L 1761 L16BWB Input Voltage Range OV dc 5V de 14V de 26 4V dc 55 C 131 F BOOW ZL a
7. VAC 1 VDC1 J ypc 1761 L16BBB Input Voltage Range OV de 5V de LN dc mm J or 1761 L16BBB Output Voltage Range 26 4V dc 55 C 131 F OV dc 20 4V dc 26 4V dc 2 15 Chapter 2 Wiring Your Controller 1761 L32BBB Wiring Diagram Sinking Input Configuration Note Refer to page 2 2 for additional input configuration options Sinking Configuration Sourcing Configuration lt t 14 30V de gt lt _ 14 30V de gt B erre LOPEE LOREREREPPRPRFERE ooooodododdoodddocodoodddddla NOT NOT DC 10 Wl W2 I3 DC 4 15 6 7 We 19 M0 ld y2 13 114 115 16 1 17 1 18 19 USED USED COM com HO HO O O HO O Sourcing Outputs f ocn 1 A vac l ac DC DC NOT W voc 0 0 voc O 1 24 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0 11 24v USED ooocrcocorcrcoccrooorrcoaagaoaoa voc1 COM COM COM 1761 L32BBB Input Voltage Range OV de 5V dc 14V dc 26 4V dc 55 C 131 F 1761 L32BBB Output Voltage Range OV dc 20 4V dc 26 4V dc WLLL LLL
8. L Sourcing Inputs Sinking Inputs lt 14 30 VDC VDC VDC for Sinking VDC for Sourcing for Sinking Eee ee CEEEEEL SE OLOLOOLOLOOQ OOOO OOOO 24V DC 1 0 yl V2 i ER 4 15 We 17 We 19 M10 111 1 12 113 114 1 15 1 16 1 17 1 18 i VDC for Sourcing hi a fo F Ho HS D fo fo Q HoSc 4 C HO So P D fo Q HoSo 4 HoSo 4 2 2 Chapter 2 Wiring Your Controller 1761 L32BWB L32BBB Wiring Diagrams also apply to 1761 L20BWB 54 L16BWB L10BWB L16BBB Sinking Inputs Sourcing Inputs 14 30 VDC gt lt 14 30 VDC VDC for Sinking VDC for Sinking VDC for Sourcing VDC serait oe ae ee OL EELEEE eee ee z RAS gt fo fo fo fo 1 fo 1 hh fo 49 h eeleeee TURE CERGRGGKC NOT NOT DC 1 0 yl 1 2 i gt oc l4 5 M6 I7 18 19 110 V 112 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 17 1 18 1 19 as USED USED COM COM Sourcing Inputs Sinking Inputs gt lt 14 30 VDC gt lt 14 30 VDC VDC for Sourcing VDC for Sourcing VDC
9. SEQUENCER OUTPUT EN 9 10 File N7 62 DN Mask Dest Control Length FFFF N7 7 R6 6 9 Position 0 force the sequencer to increment on the next scan R6 6 Rung 4 4 Ensures that the high speed counter preset value N7 7 is immediately applied to the HSC instruction High Speed Counter HSL HSC LOAD Counter C570 Source N7 5 Length gh 4 Rung 4 5 nterrupt occurred due to low preset reached c5 0 FRED RETURN IL 4 Rung 4 6 Signals the main program file 2 to initiate a drilling sequence The high speed counter has already stopped the conveyor at the correct position using its high preset output pattern data clear 0 0 0 This occurred within microseconds of the high preset being reached just prior to entering this high speed counter interrupt subroutine The drill sequence subroutine resets the drill sequence start bit and sets the conveyor drive bit 0 0 0 upon completion of the drilling sequence interrupt occurred Drill Sequence Start due to high preset reached C520 B3 aa dee em peste eee a a LERE IH 32 Rung 4 7 END This rung accesses I O only available with 32 I O
10. Input Terminal Used High Speed Counter Type High Speed Counter Functionality p Page 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 Up eo uses a single ended Up NotUsed NotUsed NotUsed 14 5 Up Up Counter operation uses a single ended with external reset and hold input with external reset and hold inputs Upt NotUsed Reset Hold Pulse and direction cae uses both pulse CountT Direction NotUsed NotUsed ene Bidirectional operation uses both pulse 14 9 Pulse and direction nanan 3 anai with external reset and hold Sane inputs with external reset and Count Direction ResetT Hold Bidirectional operation uses both up and Up and down down inure Upt DownT NotUsed NotUsed Bidirectional operation uses both up and 14 10 Up and down f f fwith extemal resetandtoid ie inputs with external resetand UpT DownT ResetT Hold Encoder ee le B NotUsed NotUsed Encoder Bidirectional operation uses both 14 12 uadrature encoder inputs with external with external reset and hold ae and hold rns A B Z Hold One difference between Up Counters and Bidirectional Counters is that for Bidirectional Counters the accumulator and preset values are not changed by the high speed counter when the presets are reached The RAC and HSL instructions must be used for this function The Up Counters clear the accumulator values and re load the high preset values when the previous preset is reached 14 5 Chapter 14 Using High S pee
11. Move 13 Source 120 0 96 Dest N7 25 0 lt 4 Rung 2 5 END 15 17 Chapter 15 Using Communication Protocols 15 18 Example 4 Continuously Reading and Writing Data with a MicroLogix Controller In this example a communication link is created between two Series C or higher MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers This example creates a master slave communication link between two controllers one controller reading and writing data to another controller with a MicroLogix 1000 as the master The communication link is set up for continuous operation with automatic recovery Performance in logic is as fast as possible with the primary restriction being the communication link protocol DH 485 or DF1 full duplex and the baud rate Although the DH 485 protocol is demonstrated here this example can be used with either DH 485 or DF1 protocols To run this on DF1 you would only need to change the active protocol bit rungs 2 2 and 2 3 the default primary protocol bit S2 0 10 in the status file and the message instruction variables For maximum possible communication performance throughput select DF1 full duplex running at 38 4k baud Rung 2 0 This rung monitors both message instructions for errors or lockup conditions and restarts communication whenever the link becomes valid Lockup condi
12. Example of Nesting Subroutines to Level 3 An error occurs if more than the allowable levels of subroutines are called subroutine stack overflow or if more returns are executed than there are call levels subroutine stack underflow Using JSR When the JSR instruction is executed the controller jumps to the subroutine instruction SBR at the beginning of the target subroutine file and resumes execution at that point You cannot jump into any part of a subroutine except the first instruction in that file You must program each subroutine in its own program file by assigning a unique file number 4 15 Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area Asterisks appear on the display to indicate that the HHP is waiting for data entry i e a number To enter the function code press _ rs P010 JSR SBR 3 12 4 Chapter 12 Using Program Flow Control Instructions Using SBR The target subroutine is identified by the file number that you entered in the JSR instruction This instruction serves as a label or identifier for a program file as a regular subroutine file This instruction has no control bits It is always evaluated as true Use of this instruction is optional however we recommend using it for clarity Important The instruction must be programmed as the first instruction of the first rung of a subroutine Since it mu
13. 15 15 Chapter 15 Using Communication Protocols 15 16 Example 3 Report on Exception Change of State Write Data from a MicroLogix Controller In this example a communication link is created between two Series C or higher MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers where one controller is writing data to another The communication link is set up for continuous operation with automatic recovery Performance in logic is as fast as possible with the primary restriction being the communication link protocol DH 485 or DF1 full duplex and the baud rate Although the DH 485 protocol is demonstrated here this example can be used with either DH 485 or DF1 protocols To run this on DF1 you would only need to change the active protocol bit rung 2 2 the default primary protocol bit S2 0 10 in the status file and the message instruction variables For maximum possible communication performance throughput select DF1 full duplex running at 38 4k baud Rung 2 0 This rung monitors the write message instruction for errors or lockup conditions and restarts communication whenever the link becomes valid Lockup conditions are situations that may arise if the communication path is somehow corrupted Some examples would be power lost at destination device or a cut cable Error conditions are typically caused from noise on the communication link faulty device s on the network etc Write Message Message Er
14. St yaa ee ee ee ey fo f f fo h h f h f f fo fo fo fb fo f fo fo fo fo eeleleeeeeceesceecesoseecons NOT NOT AC 0 USED USED COM yl 1 2 3 a 4 5 We 17 We 19 V10 111 2345s T 85 264 VAC 7 A vac I EI L2 N l vac l voc 0 0 voc 0 1 VAC 0 2 0 3 VAC O 4 0 5 0 6 0 i VAC 0 8 0 9 0 10 0 11 OOO OOO OO OOOO OOO OOO Q a 8 S amp O D D 1761 L32AAA Input Voltage Range OV ac 20V ac 79V ac 132V ac im YY or 1761 L32AAA Output Voltage Range OV ac 85V ac 264V ac Chapter 2 Wiring Your Controller 1761 L16BBB Wiring Diagram Sinking Input Configuration Note Refer to page 2 2 for additional input configuration options 14 30V de gt 14 30V de VD VDC ol E DET Eie lOrEERI G ooocooocoodooa NOT NOT DC O VL I2 3 DC 4 5 We 7 8 I8 USED USED COM com Sourcing Outputs O DCN Tey vac l vac Dc DC NOT 24V voc 0 0 voc 0 1 24 O 2 0 3 0 4 O 5 24 USED 0000 000 000000 t s
15. HHP Display Mnemonic saa Use This Instruction When the Input HLES F LD LES 56 appears first on a rung or block is placed in series with any previous input LES pores l instruction in the current rung or block re is placed in parallel with any previous in re ORtES 2 put instruction in the current rung or block You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area The example below shows how to enter the LD LES instruction Use the same procedure to enter the other LES instructions only substitute the function code with one from the table above P000 HLES SRCA N11 0 P000 HLESt SRCB 100 9 5 Chapter 9 Using Comparison Instructions Less Than or Equal LEQ Ladder representation LEQ LESS THAN OR EQUAL Sour Sour ce A ce B N7 11 0 100 Execution Times usec when False True LDLEQ 23 60 AND LEQ 24 00 OR LEQ 24 00 To enter the function code e 6 60 7 00 7 00 Use the LEQ instruction to test whether one value source A is less than or equal to another source B If the value at source A is less than or equal to the value of source B the instruction is logically true If the value at source A is greater than the value of source B the instruction is logically false Source A must be a word address Source B can be either a constant or word address Negative integers are stored in two s complement form Entering the
16. High Speed Counter 4 C520 14 30 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions Instruction List File 2 Rung 0 Initializes the high speed counter each time the RRUN mode is entered The high speed counter data area N7 5 N7 9 corresponds with the starting address source address of the HSL instruction The HSC instruction is disabled each entry into the RRUN mode until the first time that it is executed as true The high preset was pegged on initialization to prevent a high preset interrupt from occurring during the initialization process FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 hd NS LD 1 st Pass 51 15 0 06 MOV SRC 1 0000H Output Mask only use bit 0 ie 0 0 0 DEST N5 06 MOV SRC 0 0000H High Output Pattern turn off 0 0 0 DEST N6 06 MOV SRC 32767 0000H High Preset Value counts to next hole DEST N7 06 MOV SRC 1 0000H Low output pattern turn on 0 0 0 each reset DEST N8 06 MOV SRC 0 0000H Low preset value cause low preset intat reset DEST N9 NL HSL High Speed Counter CNTR CO Output Mask only use bit 0 ie 0 0 0 SRC N5 LEN 5 File 2 Rung 1 This HSC instruction is not placed in the high speed counter interrupt subroutine If this instruction were placed in the interrupt subroutine the high speed counter could never be started or initialized because an interrupt must first occur in order to scan t
17. 2 16 Chapter 2 Wiring Your Controller 1761 L20AWA 5A Wiring Diagram Note Refer to pages 2 20 through 2 22 for additional information on analog wiring lt _ 79 132Vace gt lt 79 132V ac lt L2 N L1 L2 N Analog ee ea a fo f fe f fe fe fo fe fb fo f f 0000000000000000 eeS OOOCO NOT NOT AC 1 0 1 1 2 1 33 AC 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1A IA 0 IAA IA IAR IAB 1A USED USED COM com SHD vi v e SHD I I E p Seva T r a nD on A on os A oa os oe oi So Sh o o eleleleelele eleeleleleleeleeeiele J 8 S S amp LI lt tine gt VAC 2 VDC 1 VDC 2 VAC 2 VDC 1 VDC 2 VAC 1 COM COM COM VAC 1 COM 1761 L20AWA 5A Discrete Input Voltage Range OV ac 20V ac 79V ac 132V ac ei A m YA or 1761 L20AWA 5A Relay Output Voltage Range OVac 5Vac 264V ac OVde 5Vdc 125V dc 7 EA ZZZ Operating Range 2 17 2 18 Chapter 2 Wiring Your Controller 1761 L20BWA 5A Wiring Diagram Sinking Input Configuration Note Refer to page 2 2 for additional discrete configuration o
18. wo Allen Bradley MicroLogix 1000 lea f l Ag with Hand Held 4 Programmer HHP le Cat No 1761 HHP B30 Hi Important User Information Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements including any applicable laws regulations codes and standards The illustrations charts sample programs and layout examples shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Allen Bradley does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication Allen Bradley publication SGI 1 1 Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control available from your local Allen Bradley office describes some important differences between solid state equipment and electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration when applying products such as those described in this publication Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication in whole or in part without written permission of Allen Bradley Company I
19. 0c cee eee eee 14 20 High Speed Counter Interrupt Enable HSE and Disable HSD 14 21 Update High Speed Counter Image Accumulator OUT 0000 14 23 What Happens to the HSC When Going to RRUN Mode 0000 14 23 High Speed Counter Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine PET ONC SION E MeN ONG sraa niie e a eS E adh ch dian ape ol beam ace 14 28 Chapter 15 Types of Communication 22 csecsGa veges seed eserseve da cderwneres 15 1 Message Instruction MSG c0c cisaewes We lS bee eue swe dada ee 15 2 Timing Diagram for a Successful MSG Instruction 0008 15 9 MSG Instruction Error Codes a uwewes So o0 ade ou Gena shed aad say 15 11 Application Examples that Use the MSG Instruction cece eae 15 12 Chapter 16 Programming Examples 4 lave cervdee ate bias teraria nania sa xs 16 1 Programming Considerations jos fyi cdi cy ddd Bay dk ee wedded 16 8 Chapter 17 Entering the Program Monitor ccc eect eee eee eee eens 17 1 Editing Considerations 44 4i0c se ewetva een teed sewed s eee seeds 17 3 Eding MOUCS 100 weg Breve ce een reruns inner Enteni erar uea ees 17 3 Deleting Instructions and RUNGS cece eee eee eee teens 17 6 Searching for Specific Addresses 2 ununa 17 8 toc v Table of Contents MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual After You ve Entered Your Program Common Procedures Troubleshooting Your System Hardware Reference
20. 10 STE 12 SELECTABLE TIMED ENABLE 13 14 15 16 17 END Use the STS instruction to condition the start of the STI timer upon entering the RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode rather than starting automatically You can also use it to set up or change setpoint frequency of the STI routine that is executed when the STI timer expires This instruction is not required to configure a basic STI interrupt application The STS instruction requires you to enter the parameter for the STI setpoint using the HHP s program configuration menu option Upon a true execution of the rung this instruction enters the setpoint in the status file S30 overwriting the existing data At the same time the STI timer is reset and begins timing at timeout the STI subroutine execution occurs When the rung goes false the STI function remains enabled at the setpoint you ve entered in the STS instruction Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions Entering the Instruction You enter the instructions from within the program monitor functional area The following items apply when entering the instructions Whenever you see asterisks on the display the HHP is waiting for data entry i e a number e You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key WY Then if you want to edit that operand press DEL or FUN DEL and enter new parameters Press E
21. P008 FMSG LOCAL B7 0000H P008 FMSG TARG R91 82 P008 FMSG LEN 2 15 8 Chapter 15 Using Communication Protocols imi i e following section illustrates a successful timing diagram for a Timing Diagram for a The following ll ful g diagram for a MSG Successful MSG Instruction instruction in a Series D or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controller or a MicroLogix 1000 analog controller Target node processes packet Target node Target node successfully and returns data Rung goes True receives packet sentreply read or writes data success 1 J B 5 6 Control Block Status Bits 1 Cd Bit10 EW 0 i Enabledand Waiting Bit15 EN 0 Enabled 1 i Bit 14 ST Ee Start 1 1 stig oy DW Done TAA i l Bit12 ER 9 Error i f 1 Bit9 NR a re ee ae Negative Response 1 1 t Bit8 TO 0 Time Out 1 The EW bit is set 1 and the ST DN NR and TO flags are cleared If the transmit buffer is not available the EN flag remains false 0 2 When rung conditions go true and the transmit buffer becomes available the EN flag goes true 1 The EN bit remains set until either the DN ER or TO bit is set The TO bit has no effect unless the ST bit has first been set 3 Ifthe Target Node successfully receives the MSG packet it sends back an ACK acknowledge The ACK causes
22. Retentive Data Program Files lt Program Files CPU Important If you want to ensure that the backup data is the same for every micro controller you are using store the program in the memory module before saving it Then when making edits to the program load the program from the memory module 6 5 Chapter 6 Programming Overview 6 6 Normal Operation During normal operation both the micro controller and the HHP access the program stored in the RAM Any changes to retentive data that occur due to program execution or programming commands affect only the retentive data in the RAM The program files are never modified during normal operation However both the CPU and the HHP can read the program files stored in RAM EEPROM RAM Backup Data CPU Workspace Retentive Data Retentive Data Program Files Program Files Power Down When a power down occurs only the retentive data is transferred from the RAM to the EEPROM The program files do not need to be saved to the EEPROM since they cannot be modified during normal operation If for some reason power is lost before all of the retentive data is saved to the EEPROM the retentive data is lost This may occur due to an unexpected reset or a hardware problem EEPROM RAM Backup Data CPU Workspace Retentive Data lt Retentive Da
23. 5 7 Chapter 5 Quick Start for New Users 2 Arrow right to RRUN ACTIVE MODE RPRG lt RPRG ERRUN gt 3 Select remote run mode The program is checked and if accepted the home screen appears If you get a fault code refer to chapter 20 to clear the fault MICRO RRUN FREE 729 FILE 02 RRUN now appears in the upper right hand corner of the screen Also the number of free instruction words is displayed Reviewing What You ve Done So Far You are now monitoring the program file vi Preparing to enter a new program Placing the controller in program mode Clearing the current program vi Entering and running the program Entering the new program Changing to run mode E Monitoring operation _ Monitoring the program Monitoring the data Continue on with the next section to monitor the operation of your program 5 8 Chapter 5 Quick Start for New Users Monitoring Operation You can monitor the operation of your program by viewing the program files and the data files Monitoring the Program You should now be running the program MICRO You can test the operation of your program by monitoring the relay instruction states Instruction state boxes appear to the right of each bit instruction When filled these boxes indicate that logical continuity exists in the program 1 From the home screen access the program monitor R001 O 1 0 You return to the las
24. Dest N7 9 ol 4 HSL HSC LOAD Counter C530 Source N7 5 Length 5 4 14 29 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions Rung 2 1 This HSC instruction is not placed in the high speed counter interrupt subroutine If this instruction were placed in the interrupt subroutine the high speed counter could never be started or initialized because an interrupt must first occur in order to scan the high speed counter interrupt subroutine High Speed Counter HSC HIGH SPEED COUNTER CU Type Encoder Res Hld CD Counter C5 0 DN High Preset 12501 Accum 4 Rung 2 2 This rung forces a high speed counter low preset interrupt to occur each RRUN mode entry An interrupt can only occur on the transition of the high speed counter accum to a preset value accum reset to 1 then 0 This is done to allow the high speed counter interrupt subroutine sequencers to initialize The order of high speed counter initialization is 1 load high speed counter parameters 2 execute HSL instruction 3 execute true HSC instruction 4 optional force high speed counter interrupt to occur Lst High Speed Counter Pass Sal RC SSS Annn SSS iS SS SS SS SS RESET TO ACCUM VALUE 15 Counter C50 Source Li
25. Total Memory Usage Total Memory Usage from above Total Memory Remaining Procedure 1 Input scan time output scan time housekeeping time and forcing 210 177 110 1024 Appendix B Programming Reference Estimating Memory Usage for Your Control System Use the following to calculate memory usage for your control system 1 Determine the total instruction words used by the instructions in your program and enter the result Refer to the table on page B 16 Multiply the total number of rungs by 0 75 and enter the result Do not count the Start of File or End of File screens in each file To account for controller overhead use 177 To account for application data use 110 Total steps 1 through 4 This is the estimated total memory usage of your application system Remember this is an estimate actual compiled programs may differ by 12 To determine the estimated amount of memory remaining in the controller you have selected do the following Subtract the total memory usage from 1024 The result of this calculation is the estimated total memory remaining in your selected controller Important The calculated memory usage may vary from the actual compiled program by 12 Execution Time Worksheet Use this worksheet to calculate your execution time for logic program Maximum Scan Time us discrete 330 ps with forcing analog 250 us without forcing analog 2 Estimate your
26. 3 ig Input Proximity ich Paint Sprayer Signals tch 1 0 1 AWCE Spray Enable 0 0 3 B3 0 B3 1 B3 2 B3 3 Bit Shift o Re 1 0 gt 1 Blue Paint Gun 0 0 0 Yellow Paint Gun 0 0 1 Red Paint Gun 0 0 2 N7 2 N7 1 N7 0 FIFO Blue gt Red c Blue c Blue J E 49 Appendix E Application Example Programs E 50 Spray Booth Operation Overview An overhead conveyor with part carriers hooks carries parts from a previous operation to the spray booth Before the part enters the spray booth two items are checked on the conveyor The first check is for part presence and the second check is for the needed color This information is stored and accessed later when the part carrier is in the paint spraying area A proximity switch is used to check for the presence of a part on the carrier and a barcode reader is used to determine color choice When the part carrier reaches the spraying area the previously stored information is accessed If there is a part on the carrier it is painted according to its bar code and if the carrier is free paint is not dispensed The bit shift and FIFO instructions store the part presence and color information before each carrier enters the spray booth Both of these instructions place data into their data structures every time a part carrier actuates the shift limit switch If the proximity switch senses a p
27. 4 Rung 2 4 Loads the high speed counter with the following parameters N7 0 0001h Output Mask high speed counter control only 0 0 0 gripper N7 1 0000h Output Pattern for High Preset turn OFF gripper release part N7 2 100d High Preset loaded from table in the rung above N7 3 0001h Output Pattern for Low Preset turn ON gripper grab part N7 4 Od Low Preset home position when encoder triggers Z reset Home Position Reached CS0 HS Las SS4S5S3 4555 HSC LOAD LP Counter CSRO Source N7 0 Length 5 First Pass Bit S 1 Fossey poses 15 Rung 2 5 Starts up the high speed counter with the above parameters Each time this rung is evaluated the hardware accumulator is written to C5 0 ACC HSC HIGH SPEED COUNTER CU Type Encoder Res Hld CD Counter C5 0 DN Preset 100 Accum 2 fon E 35 Appendix E Application Example Programs E 36 Rung 2 6 When the pick and place head reaches either its home position to pick up a part or its destination bin to drop off a part start up a dwell timer The purpose of this is to keep the head stationary long enough for the gripper to either grab or release the part Bin Location Dwell Timer R
28. 500 500 Source B 117501 Source B N7 0 ol Pelosi pane Dest T4 0 PRE 500 4 Rung 2 1 Subtracts 2 5 seconds from Timer delay each time the decrement push button is depressed Do not go below 5 0 seconds delay Decrement Timer preset I 0 GRT B3 SUB GREATER THAN OSR SUBTRACT 9 Source A T4 0 PRE 1 Source A T4 0 PRE 500 500 Source B 7501 Source B N7 0 o tors Dest T4 0 PRE 500 4 Rung 2 2 TON Input conditions to allow TIMER ON DELAY dwell time on the drill Timer T4 0 Timebase 0 01 Preset 500 Accum 0 4 E 55 Appendix E Application Example Programs Adjustable Timer Instruction List Program File 2 Rung 0 Adds 2 5 to Timer delay each time the increment push button is depressed Do not exceed 120 0 seconds delay Note that N7 0 250 E 56 FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 l LD Increment Timer preset I 8 0 S7 LES AND LES SRCA TO PRE 500 SRCB 11750 29 OSR AND OSR B 0 0 80 ADD SRCA TO PRE 500 SRCB NO 0000H DEST TO PRE 500 File 2 Rung 1 Subtracts 2 5 seconds from Timer delay each time the decrement push button is depressed Do not go below 5 0 seconds delay FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME
29. SS 5 S355 355535555555 55 5555555 OEE Source A N7 11 6 0 Source B 105 4 100 000 102 000 change 1 4 in 1 4 in drill increments increments bit have Ihave soon occurred occurred B3 B3 0 0 ae aa aa A J iss Aeee PSS esses 16 F7 4 100 000 102 000 1 28 1 4 in 1 4 in second increments increments free have Ihave running occurred loccurred clock bit B3 B3 S 4 aa aida b isS ss5S gt i SSSs5 gt bsSss gt 16 I7 7 More rungs are added to this subroutine atthe end of chapters 10 and 11 This branch accesses I O only available with 32 I O controllers Therefore do not include this branch if you are using a 16 I O controller 9 14 Chapter 9 Using Comparison Instructions Instruction List File 7 Rung o Examines the number of 1 4 in thousands that have accumulated over the life of the current drill bit If the bit has drilled between 100 000 101 999 1 4 in increments of paper the change drill light illuminates steadily When the value is between 102 000 103 999 the change drill light flashes at a 1 28 second rate When the value reaches 105 000 the change drill light flashes and the change drill now light illuminates FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 10 MPS 66 GEQ AND GEQ 1 4 in Thousands SRCA N1 0000H SRCB 100 40 OUT 100 000 1 4 in increm
30. 1761 L16BWB Output Voltage Range OVac 5Vac 264V ac OVde 5V dc 125V dc 77 7 i ZA 2 Operating Range 2 12 Chapter 2 Wiring Your Controller 1761 L32BWB Wiring Diagram Sinking Input Configuration Note Refer to page 2 2 for additional input configuration options Sinking Configuration lt Sourcing Configuration OP Pe ee ae ee ee ee a oaod oooga ieee Tee a 1 0 1 I2 i Pei 4 15 We I7 I8 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 17 1 18 n ce A ine af ne di E o2 0 3 ac 0 4 0 5 O 6 O 7 wc 0 8 0 9 0 10 oii o s eieleleieleielsieieieieisieieisie s Ai et 1761 L32BWB Input Voltage Range OV dc 5V dc 14V dc 26 4V dc 55 C 131 F ZII ma LZ LIL or 1761 L32BWB Output Voltage Range OVac 5Vac 264V ac OVde 5Vdc 125V dc 777 A 4 Operating Range 2 13 Chapter 2 Wiring Your Controller 2 14 1761 L32AAA Wiring Diagram lt 79 132Vac lt
31. ANB See page 6 9 U 0 IN access the function code table FUN ENT enter data you ve typed or confirm a prompt ENT Data Monitor From the data monitor functional area you can view and edit the data values used in your controller programs The data is separated into Output Input Status Bit Timer Counter Control and Integer data files Screen Definition The following figure shows an example of an Output data file and identifies its main sections For examples of other data files see Viewing Data Table Files on page 18 28 Word Address Force Indication 0 0 00 FOx Bit Address 0000001010110011 Bit Data Section Description Bit Address The address of the bit the cursor is currently on Word Address The address of the word currently being viewed Indicates that the bit currently being viewed is being forced X N if forced on and x F if forced off If no force exists this field is blank Force Indication Bit Data A binary representation of the data 4 13 Chapter 4 Using Your Hand Held Programmer 4 14 Data Monitor From Data Monitor you can access these areas Menu Mode Program Monitor Multi P oint Function How to Complete Tasks You complete tasks by pressing the appropriate key or key sequence from the data monitor screen To Press access the menu options T change the controller s mode See page MODE 18 23 O access the multi point functio
32. Data B White Orange l Orange with White Stripe Terminal 5 Data A To prevent confusion when installing the communication cable cut back the white with blue stripe wire immediately after the the insulation jacket is removed This wire is not used by DH 485 Grounding and Terminating the DH 485 Network Only one connector at the end of the link must have Terminals 1 and 2 jumpered together This provides an earth ground connection for the shield of the communication cable Both ends of the network must have Terminals 5 and 6 jumpered together This connects the termination impedance of 120Q that is built into each AIC as required by the DH 485 specification End of Line Termination Belden 3106A or 9842 Cable 1219 m 4000 ft Maximum Jumper Chapter 3 Connecting the System Connecting the AlC Important Only Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers support DH 485 network connections You can connect an unpowered AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC to the network without disrupting network activity In addition if a MicroLogix 1000 controller powers an AIC that is connected to the network network activity will not be disrupted should the MicroLogix 1000 controller be removed from the AIC The figure below shows the external wiring connections and specifications of the AIC AIC Advanced Interface Converter 1761 NET AIC
33. Dest N7 8 0 4 Low preset value cause low preset int at reset MOV MOVE Source Ol Dest N7 9 0 4 HSL HSC LOAD Counter C530 Source N7 5 Length 51 4 E 4 Appendix E Application Example Programs Rung 2 1 This HSC instruction is not placed in the high speed counter interrupt subroutine If this instruction were placed in the interrupt subroutine the high speed counter could never be started or initialized because an interrupt must first occur in order to scan the high speed counter interrupt subroutine High Speed Counter HSC HIGH SPEED COUNTER CU Type Encoder Res Hld CD Counter C5 0 DN High Preset 1250 Accum Rung 2 2 Forces a high speed counter low preset interrupt to occur each RRUN mode entry An interrupt can only occur on the transition of the high speed counter accum to a preset value accum reset to 1 then 0 This is done to allow the high speed counter interrupt subroutine sequencers to initialize The order of high speed counter initialization is 1 load high speed counter parameters 2 execute HSL instruction 3 execute true HSC instruction 4 optional force high speed counter int
34. Entering the Instruction Mnemonic HHP Display n Use This Instruction When the Input LD OSR HosR 28 appears first on a rung or block AND OSR OSRE 29 is placed in series with any previous input instruction in the current rung or block You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area The example below shows how to access the LD OSR instruction Use the same procedure to access the AND OSR instruction only substitute the function code with the one provided in the table above P000 HOS Rr B 0 8 7 Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Output OUT Ladder representation Execution Times usec when True False 4 43 4 43 To access the OUT instruction press OUT 1 Set SET and Reset RST Ladder representation L U Execution Times usec when True False SET 4 97 3 16 RST 4 97 3 16 8 8 Use an OUT instruction in your ladder program to turn On a bit when rung conditions are evaluated as true An example of a device that turns on or off is an output wired to a pilot light addressed as 0 4 OUT instructions are reset when e You enter or return to the RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode or power is restored e The OUT is programmed within an inactive or false Master Control Reset MCR zone e Rung conditions are evaluated as false Important A bit that is set within a subroutine using an OUT instruction remains set until
35. If SLC500 ML1000 is selected as the target device a target address must be entered e Target Offset If CIF is selected as the target device you must enter a value for the offset into the CIF Message Length specifies the length of the message instruction in elements 1 word elements are limited to 1 41 3 word elements are limited to 1 13 Important When running a MicroLogix 1000 program on an SLC 5 03 or SLC 5 04 processor the MSG control block length increases from 7 to 14 words If you plan to run a MicroLogix 1000 program with one of these processors make sure that the program has at least 7 unused words following each MSG control block Chapter 15 Using Communication Protocols The following table illustrates combinations of message types and target devices and their valid file types Command Type ye Initiating Device Np ii Target Device Valid File Types SLC500 ML1000 Write icroLogix 1000 0 I S B T C R MicroLogix 1000 0 1 S B 7 C R N SLC500 ML1000 Read icroLogix 1000 O I S B T C R N MicroLogix 1000 0 1 S B 7 C R N CIF Write icroLogix 1000 O I S B T C R MicroLogix 1000 N7 CIF Read icroLogix 1000 O 1 S B T C R N MicroLogix 1000 N7 LC500 ML1000 Write icroLogix 1000 0 I S B T C R SLC 500 0 1 S B T C R N SLC500 ML1000 Read icroLogix 1000 0 1 S B T C R N SLC 500 02 1 S B T C R N CIF Write icroLogix 1000 0 I S B T C R S
36. Masked Move MVM 11 16 entering parameters 11 16 entering the instruction 11 16 execution times 11 16 function code 11 16 instruction parameters C 7 ladder representation 11 16 operation 11 17 updates to arithmetic status bits 11 16 valid addressing modes C 7 valid file types C 7 Master Control Relay 1 3 Master Control Reset MCR 12 6 entering the instruction 12 6 execution times 12 6 function code 12 6 instruction parameters C 7 ladder representation 12 6 valid addressing modes C 7 valid file types C 7 master password 18 2 master sender communication 15 1 math instructions 32 bit addition and subtraction 10 6 about 10 1 Add ADD 10 4 Clear CLR 10 11 Divide DIV 10 9 Double Divide DDV 10 10 in the paper drilling machine application example 10 15 Multiply MUL 10 8 overview 10 2 changes to the math register S13 and 14 10 3 entering the instructions 10 2 overflow trap bit 5 0 10 2 updates to arithmetic status bits 10 2 using indexed word addresses 10 2 Scale Data SCL 10 12 Square Root SQR 10 11 Subtract SUB 10 5 using arithmetic status bits 11 9 MCR Master Control Reset 12 6 memory module clearing programs 19 5 installation 4 3 loading programs 19 2 storing programs 19 3 using 19 1 Memory Pop MPP 8 10 entering the instruction 8 12 execution times 8 10 function code 8 12 ladder representation 8 10 using 8 11 Memory P
37. from the DIN rail 20147 Using Mounting Screws To install your controller using mounting screws Important Leave the protective wrap attached until you are finished wiring the controller ounting 1 Use the mounting template from P Template page A 8 o 2 Secure the template to the mounting surface Make sure your controller L is spaced properly js 3 Drill holes through the template 4 Remove the mounting template 5 Mount the controller Comps Dy Py SS ae Poly Protective Wrap remove after wiring Mounting Your Controller Vertically Your controller can also be mounted vertically within an enclosure using mounting screws or a DIN rail To insure the stability of your controller we recommend using mounting screws To insure the controller s reliability the following environmental specifications must not be exceeded op Description Specification aaa JA 0 C to 40 C 4329F to 113 F Operating Shock 9 0g peak acceleration 11 1 ms duration Panel mounted 3 times each direction each axis Operating Shock 7 0g peak acceleration 11 1 ms duration DIN rail mounted 3 times each direction each axis Bottom A DC input voltage derated linearly from 30 C 30V to 26 4V A Greater than or equal to 50 8 mm 2 in Note When mounting your controller vertically the nameplate should be facing downward Grounding G
38. 38 Operation The operation of the BSR instruction is shown in the figure below The screens shown above the figure are the condensed screens that appear after instruction entry is complete P011 BSR B2 P011 BSR 38 P Unload Bit R4 10 f 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 RESERVED 69 68 67 66 65 64 Data block is shifted one bit ata time from bit B 69 to bit B 32 38 Bit Array 82 Source Bit 10 6 If you wish to shift more than one bit per scan you must create a loop in your application using the JMP LBL and CTU instructions 13 5 Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions Sequencer Instructions Overview Sequencer Output SQO and Sequencer Compare SQC Ladder representation SQO SEQUENCER OUTPUT EN File B3 1 Mask oror DN Dest 0 0 0 Control R6 5 Length 4 Position 2 SOC SEQUENCER COMPARE EN File B3 8 Mask FFFO DN Source I 0 0 Control R6 3 FD Length 4 Position 2 Execution Times usec when True False SQO 60 52 27 40 SQC 60 52 27 40 13 6 The following general information applies to sequencer instructions Entering the Instructions The following items apply when entering the instructions e Whenever you see asterisks on the display th
39. 6 Reset the cursored bit to 0 ANB seso po 0000000000000000 i 7 Return to the output data file Top 0 0 00 0000000000000000 Notice that bits O 1 and O 5 are set to 0 These bits turned off when you reset bit B O to 0 8 Return to the home screen ESC MICRO RRUN FREE 728 FILE 02 5 11 Chapter 5 Quick Start for New Users Reviewing What You ve Done So Far Congratulations You have finished entering running and monitoring a sample program using the MicroLogix 1000 HHP vi Preparing to enter a new program Placing the controller in program mode Clearing the current program vi Entering and running the program Entering the new program Changing to run mode vi Monitoring operation Monitoring the program Monitoring the data The program MICRO that you created in this chapter is actually part of a bigger application example provided in appendix D called Paper Drilling Machine In that application the rungs you entered for MICRO control the movement of the conveyor belt and drill bit shown below Drill Manuals with Drilled Holes gt Q am Conveyor Belt I What to Do Next If you want more hands on experience chapters 8 through 14 show you more portions of this application example If you follow through and add the rungs provided at the end of each of those chapters you will have the complete program entered by the time you reach the end of chapter 14 Appendix D contains the c
40. Chapter 12 Using Program Flow Control Instructions This instruction when its rung is true stops the controller from scanning the rest of the program file updates the I O and resumes scanning at rung 0 of the main program file 2 If this instruction s rung is false the controller continues the scan until the next TND instruction or the END statement Use this instruction to progressively debug a program or conditionally omit the balance of your current program file or subroutines Important If you use this instruction inside a nested subroutine execution of all nested subroutines is terminated Do not execute this instruction from the user error fault routine file 3 high speed counter interrupt routine file 4 or selectable timed interrupt routine file 5 or a fault will occur Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To enter the function code press a P006 TND OIOKOLORD Suspend SUS Ladder representation SUS SUSPEND Suspend ID 604 Execution Times usec when True False 10 85 7 87 To enter the function code press A A E en When this instruction is executed it causes the controller to enter the Suspend Idle mode and stores the Suspend ID in word 7 S7 at the status file All outputs are de energized Use this instruction to trap and identify specific conditions for program debugging and system troub
41. Chapter 15 Using Communication Protocols Responder Slave Communication Responder products can only reply to other products These devices are not capable of initiating an exchange of data they only reply to requests made from initiator products The Series A and B MicroLogix 1000 controllers are in this class Message Instruction MSG The MSG is an output instruction that allows the controller to initiate an exchange of data with other devices The relationship with the other devices Ladder representation can be either peer to peer communication or master to slave communication MSG The type of communication required by a particular application determines READ WRITE MESSAGE en the programming configuration requirements of the MSG instruction Read Write WRITE DN Target Device src500 mL1000 P Control Block n7 0 P Entering Parameters Control Block Length 7 Execution Times usec when True False 180 48 This only includes the amount of time needed to setup the operation requested It does not include the time it takes to service the actual communication as this time varies with each network configuration As an example 144ms is the actual communication service time for the following configuration 3 nodes on DH 485 2 MicroLogix 1000 programmable controllers and 1 PLC 500 A I Series programming software running at 19 2K baud with 2 words per transfer 15 2 When ent
42. Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Rung 6 When the drill has drilled through the book the body of the drill actuates the DRILL DEPTH limit switch When this happens the DRILL FORWARD signal is turned off and the DRILL RETRACT signal is turned on The drill is also retracted automatically on power up if it is not actuating the DRILL HOME limit switch Drill Drill Depth LS Forward O 0 0 4 U 4 3 17at pra td l Drill Pass Home LS Retract Sl I 0 0 0 Fases RARR 17 F has hy 15 5 Rung 6 2 When the drill is retracting after drilling a hole the body of the drill actuates the DRILL HOME limit switch When this happens the DRILL RETRACT signal is turned off the DRILL SEQUENCE START bit is turned off to indicate the drilling process is complete and the conveyor is restarted priate Dead Drill Home LS Retract Retract I 0 0 0 0 0 SS PSs saaaS lS aaa eS UY SS 2 Drill Sequence Start Conveyor Start Stop Instruction List File 6 Rung 0 This section of ladder logic controls the up down motion of the drill for the book drilling machine When the conveyor positions the book under the drill the DRILL SEQUENCE START bit is set This rung uses that bit to begin the drilling operation Because the bit is set for the entire drilling operation the OSR is required to be able to turn off
43. Glossary inrush current The temporary surge current produced when a device or circuit is initially energized instruction A mnemonic and data address defining an operation to be performed by the controller A rung in a program consists of a set of input and output instructions The input instructions are evaluated by the controller as being true or false In turn the controller sets the output instructions to true or false Instruction List program A program written in a list format using mnemonics The program is used by a programmable controller to control devices instruction set The set of general purpose instructions available with a given controller TVO Inputs and Outputs Consists of input and output devices that provide and or receive data from the controller jump Change in normal sequence of program execution by executing an instruction that alters the program counter sometimes called a branch In ladder programs a JUMP JMP instruction causes execution to jump to a labeled rung ladder logic A program written in a format resembling a ladder like diagram The program is used by a programmable controller to control devices LED Light Emitting Diode Used as status indicator for controller functions and inputs and outputs LIFO Last In First Out The order that data is entered into and retrieved from a file low byte Bits 0 7 of a word logic A process of solving complex problems through the
44. L SET Drill Retract 0 2 0 File 6 Rung 2 When the drill is retracting after drilling a hole the body of the drill actuates the DRILL HOME limit switch When this happens the DRILL RETRACT signal is turned off the DRILL SEQUENCE START bit is turned off to indicate the drilling process is complete and the conveyor is restarted FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 l i LD Drill Home LS 1 5 0 22 Sal oli AND Drill Retract 0 2 0 42 UY RST Drill Retract 0 2 0 42 U RST Drill Sequence Start B 32 0 41 L SET Conveyor Start Stop 0 0 0 E 20 Appendix E Application Example Programs File 7 Rung 0 Examines the number of 1 4 in thousands that have accumulated over the life of the current drill bit If the bit has drilled between 100 000 101 999 1 4 in increments of paper the change drill light illuminates steadily When the value is between 102 000 103 999 the change drill light flashes at a 1 28 second rate When the value reaches 105 000 the change drill light flashes and the change drill now light illuminates FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 10 MPS 66 GEQ AND GEQ 1 4 in Thousands SRCA N11 0000H SRCB 100 40 ys OUT 100 000 1 4 in increments have occurred B 16 L1 MRD 66 GEQ AND GEQ 1 4 in Thousands SRCA N11 0000H SRCB 102 40 J OUT 102 000 1 4 in increments have o
45. Not Applicable source direct B N Not Applicable length always 5 IIM Immediate Input with slot direct ot Applicable Mask mask immediate direct 0 1 B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct length immediate 1 10 C 5 Appendix C Valid Addresssing Modes and File Types for Instruction Parameters Instruction Description Instruction Valid Addressing Valid File Types Valid Value Parameters Mode s Ranges INT Interrupt Subroutine Not Applicable IOM Immediate Output with slot direct 0 Not Applicable Mask mask direct indexed direct 0 1l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 length immediate 1 32 MP ump label number immediate 0 999 SR ump to Subroutine subroutine file immediate 3 255 number LBL Label label number immediate 0 999 LD Load source bit direct 0 1 S B T C R N Not Applicable bit level LDI Load Inverted source bit direct 0 1 S B T C R N_ Not Applicable bit level LEQ Less Than or Equal To source A direct indexed direct 0 1 S B T C R N_ Not Applicable source B immediate direct 0 1 S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct f min f max LES Less Than source A direct indexed direct 0 1 S B T C R N_ Not Applicable source B immediate direct 0 1 B 7 C R N_ 32 768 32 767 indexed direct f min f max LFL LIFO Load source immediate direct 0 1 S B T C R 32 768 32 767 indexed direct NO LIFO array ind
46. Separate wiring by signal type Bundle wiring with similar electrical characteristics together Separate input wiring from output wiring Label wiring to all devices in the system Use tape shrink tubing or other dependable means for labeling purposes In addition to labeling use colored insulation to identify wiring based on signal characteristics For example you may use blue for de wiring and red for ac wiring 2 5 Chapter 2 Wiring Your Controller Wiring Diagrams Discrete Input and Output Voltage Ranges 2 6 The following pages show the wiring diagrams discrete input voltage ranges and discrete output voltage ranges Controllers with dc inputs can be wired as either sinking or sourcing configurations Sinking and sourcing does not apply to ac inputs Important This symbol denotes a functional earth ground terminal which provides a low impedance path between electrical circuits and earth for non safety purposes such as noise immunity improvement ATTENTION The 24V dc sensor power source should not be used to power output circuits It should only be used to power input devices e g sensors switches Refer to page 1 3 for information on MCR wiring in output circuits 1761 L16AWA Wiring Diagram i 79 132Vac gt 79 132V ac L2 N IN k rat PEERI RREZ fo OOOO QQ NOT NOT AC 1 0 1 1 2 BAC 4 USED USED COM com O os Oo s e 7 s e 4
47. 11 19 output specifications controller A 4 function code 11 19 output voltage ranges instruction parameters C 8 ladder representation 11 19 updates to arithmetic status bits 11 19 valid addressing modes C 8 valid file types C 8 Or Block ORB 8 12 entering the instruction 8 13 execution times 8 12 ladder representation 8 12 using 8 13 Or Inverted ORI 8 4 entering the instruction 8 5 execution times 8 4 instruction parameters C 8 1761 L10BWA 2 8 1761 L10BWB 2 11 1761 L16AWA 2 6 1761 L16BBB 2 15 1761 L16BWA 2 9 1761 L16BWB 2 12 1761 L20AWA 5A 2 17 1761 L20BWA 5A 2 18 1761 L20BWB 5A 2 19 1761 L32AAA 2 14 1761 L32AWA 2 7 1761 L32BBB 2 16 1761 L32BWA 2 10 1761 L32BWB 2 13 analog controllers 2 22 ladder representation 8 4 overflow trap bit 5 0 10 2 using 8 5 valid addressing modes C 8 overview valid file types C 8 Or True ORT 8 6 entering the instruction 8 6 execution times 8 6 function code 8 6 ladder representation 8 6 using 8 6 OR Or bit input instruction 8 3 word output instruction 11 19 bit instructions 8 3 branch instructions 8 9 comparison instructions 9 2 counter instructions 8 21 FIFO and LIFO instructions 11 23 high speed counter instructions 14 2 math instructions 10 2 move and logical instructions 11 13 Selectable Timed Interrupt STI function 13 15 timer instructions 8 14 ORB Or Block 8 12 overwrite mode 17 4 ORI Or
48. 18 After You ve Entered Your Describes how to configure run and monitor your Program program Describes how to perform additional procedures using the 19 Common Procedures HHP menu A Troubleshooting Your Explains how to interpret and correct problems with your Troubleshooting 20 System micro controller system Provides physical electrical environmental and Appendix A Hardware Reference functional specifications Explains the system status file lists the HHP function Append E Programing Rerereneg codes and provides instruction execution times Reference i j Appendix C e Provides a listing of the instructions along with their Instruction Parameters parameters and valid file types Appendix D Understanding the Contains descriptions of the DF 1 protocol and DH 485 PP Communication Protocols network aor Provides advanced application examples for the Reference Appendix E Application Programs high speed counter sequencer and bit shift instructions Reference Appendix F Optional Analog Input Explains how to calibrate your controller using software Software Calibration offsets Glossary Contains definitions for terms and abbreviations that are specific to this product 3 For More Information As part of our effort to preserve protect and improve our environment Allen Bradley is reducing the amount of paper we use Less paper means more options for you In addition to traditional printed publicat
49. EM Control R6 0 Length 34 Position 9 Execution Times usec when True False FFL 61 13 FFU 73 78 4 34 x position value AN 33 67 Entering the Instructions 34 90 You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area While entering the FFL instruction you see these screens To enter the function code o enter the function code press P000 FFL SRC P000 FFL FIFO N12 P000 FFL CTRL RO FFL FFL 11 25 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions While entering the FFU instruction you see these screens To enter the function code press P000 FFU FIFO P000 FFU DEST N11 P000 FFU CTRL R 0 P000 FFU LEN ee ee 3a P000 FFU POS ke kK ke k k k 9 Operation The operation of the FFL FFU instruction pair is shown on the following page The screens shown to the left of the figure are the condensed screens that appear after instruction entry is complete 11 26 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions P000 FFL SRC Destination Position N10 0 N11 B ib 0 Za FFU instruction unloads 1 data from stack N12 at 000 FFL F FO position 0 N12 j N12 0 14 D 15 3 000 FFL R00 ee 4 3 4 P 9 17 5 6 M 34 words are 18 allocated for FIFO a 2 stack starting at 00 FFU FIFO 19 7 N12 ending at N45 N1 2 0 eer er rere Source 20 8 oe owe ooo
50. Ensures that the operator cannot select a paper thickness of 0 If this were allowed the drill bit life calculation could be defeated resulting in poor quality holes due to a dull drill bit Therefore the minimum paper thickness used to calculate drill bit wear is 1 4 in debounced debounced BCD BCD value value EQU MOV EQUAL 4 MOVE Source A N7 12 Source 1 ol Source B 0 Dest N7 12 o 4 4 Rung 7 5 Keeps a running total of how many inches of paper have been drilled with the current drill bit Every time a hole is drilled adds the thickness in 1 4 ins to the running total kept in 1 4 ins The OSR is necessary because the ADD executes every time the rung is true and the drill body would actuate the DRILL DEPTH limit switch for more than 1 program scan nteger N7 12 is the integer converted value of the BCD thumbwheel on inputs I 0 11 1 0 14 Drill Drill Wear 1 4 in Depth LS OSR 1 increments I 0 B3 ADD OSR ADD 4 24 Source A N7 12 0l Source B N7 10 0 Dest N7 10 0 4 Appendix E Application Example Programs Rung 7 6 When the number of 1 4 in increments surpasses 1000 finds out now many increments are past 1000 and stores in N7 20 Adds 1 to the total of 1000 1 4 in
51. HHP User Manual I 20 Load LD 8 3 entering the instruction 8 3 execution times 8 3 instruction parameters C 6 ladder representation 8 3 using 8 3 valid addressing modes C 6 valid file types C 6 Load Inverted LDI 8 4 entering the instruction 8 5 execution times 8 4 instruction parameters C 6 ladder representation 8 4 using 8 5 valid addressing modes C 6 valid file types C 6 Load True LDT 8 6 entering the instruction 8 6 execution times 8 6 function code 8 6 ladder representation 8 6 using 8 6 loading programs from a memory module 19 2 lock program function 18 17 setting 18 17 logical addresses using mnemonics to specify 6 8 Low Voltage Directive 1 1 M machine control principles of 6 1 manuals related P 5 Masked Comparison for Equal MEQ 9 9 AND MEQ entering parameters 9 9 entering the instruction 9 9 execution times 9 9 function code 9 9 instruction parameters C 7 ladder representation 9 9 valid addressing modes C 7 valid file types C 7 LD MEQ entering parameters 9 9 entering the instruction 9 9 execution times 9 9 function code 9 9 instruction parameters C 7 ladder representation 9 9 valid addressing modes C 7 valid file types C 7 OR MEQ entering parameters 9 9 entering the instruction 9 9 execution times 9 9 function code 9 9 instruction parameters C 7 ladder representation 9 9 valid addressing modes C 7 valid file types C 7
52. Keeps track of the hole number that is being drilled and loads the correct HSC preset based on the hole count This rung is only active when the hole selector switch is in the 3 hole position The sequencer uses step 0 as a null step upon reset It uses the last step as a go forever in anticipation of the end of manual hard wired external reset hole hole 3 hole selector selector preset switch switch sequencer bit 0 bit 1 I 0 I 0 SQO J SEQUENCER OUTPUT EN 9 10 File N7 50 DN Mask FFFF Dest N7 7 Control R6 4 Length Position 0 4 force the sequencer to increment on next scan R6 4 522 len onienien onion en nen nian EN This rung accesses 1 0 only available with 32 1 0 controllers Therefore do not include this rung if you are using a 16 1 0 controller 13 21 Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions Rung 4 2 s identical to the previous rung except that it is only active when the hole selector switch is in the 5 hole position hole Ihole 5 hole selector selector preset switch switch sequencer bit 0 Jbit 1 20 20 600 a SSS Sees Ses SEQUENCER OUTPUT EN 9 10 File N7 55 DN Mask FFFF Dest N7 7 Control R6 5 Length 7 Position Ol force the sequencer to increment on
53. LOAD PROGRAM STORE PROGRAM The options available for use with the memory module appear You can scroll through the options using the down arrow key These options are e load program from the memory module to the controller e store program from the controller to the memory module e clear program in the memory module Each of these options is described in this section For information on installing and removing the memory module see page 4 3 ATTENTION Always remove power from the HHP before inserting or removing the memory module This guards against possible damage to the module as well as undesired controller faults 19 1 Chapter 19 Common Procedures Retrieving a Program from a Memory Module You can retrieve a program from a memory module using the LOAD PROGRAM option Follow the steps below 1 Put the controller in RPRG mode if it is not already in that mode 2 Go to the menu and choose the option MEM MODULE 3 Select LOAD PROGRAM LOAD PROGRAMI PROGRAM2 A sub menu appears listing the names of the programs contained on the memory module If there are no programs dashed lines appear in place of program names In such a case since there are no programs to load you must press ESC to exit the sub menu 4 Arrow down to the program you want to load and select it aS le n times LOAD PROGRAM3 LOADING Various screens appear to indicate the program is loadi
54. Note Refer to page 2 2 for additional discrete configuration options Refer to pages 2 20 through 2 22 for additional information on analog wiring lt 14 30V de gt lt 14 30V dc Cann VDC voc VDC VDC ar ee rae Q 2 4 2 9 a A fo a 0 Be A OOOOOOCOOOCOOCOCOOOOOOOOOO NOT NOT DC 1 0 fl 2 Ip DC I4 5 We I7 I8 9 1 10 I 11 1A ao IA A A a2 IAB 1A USED USED COM COM SHD vi v 6 SHD I I e cN l A vat vac l ovac VAC oA OAU OAD OA 24V voc Si voc 0 1 Voc 02 0 3 voc 0 4 0 5 0 6 O 7 USED SHD V I 6 OOOO OOOOOOO OLOO O jogo S VAC 1 COM VDC 1 COM S I VDC 2 VDC 3 VDC 2 COM VDC 3 COM 1761 L20BWB 5A Discrete Input Voltage Range OV de 5V dc 14V dc Analog lt Channel gt 26 4V dc 55 C 131 F m JA oO 5 1761 L20BWB 5A Relay Output Voltage Range OVac 5Vac 264V ac A dc N dc 125V dc Zt TZ Operating Range 2 19 Chapter 2 Wiring Your Controller Minimizing Electrical Noise on Analog Controllers Grounding Your Analog Cable 2
55. S always resets 10 11 Chapter 10 Using Math Instructions To enter the function code amp Fun 9G Hi fen Scale Data SCL Ladder representation SCL _ SCALE Source N7 0 100 Rate 10000 25000 Offset 127 Dest N7 1 377 Execution Times usec when True False 169 18 6 78 10 12 Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area When this instruction is true the value at the source address is multiplied by the rate value The rounded result is added to the offset value and placed in the destination Important Anytime an underflow or overflow occurs in the destination file minor error bit S5 0 must be reset This must occur before the end of the current scan to prevent major error code 0020 from being declared This instruction can overflow before the offset is added Entering Parameters The value for the following parameters is between 32 768 to 32 767 e Source must be a word address e Rate is the positive or negative value you enter divided by 10 000 It can be a constant or a word address e Offset can either be a constant or a word address Dest must be a word address To enter the function code press A A E Chapter 10 Using Math Instructions Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S0 0 Carry C is reserved sets if an overflow is detected otherwise rese
56. The Following Probable Cause Recommended Action Error Exists EE POWER 7 1 Monitor Status File Word S6 for major error RON code ae 2 Remove hardware software condition causing FOR fault Application Hardware S oftware Major 3 Use the hot key sequence FAULT DEL to fault Fault Detected clear the fault 4 Attempt to enter RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode If unsuccessful repeat recommended action steps above or contact your local Allen Bradley distributor Refer to the following key to determine the status of the LED indicators L Indicates the LED is OFF HM Indicates the LED is ON L Indicates the LED is FLASHING FZ Status of LED does not matter 20 2 Chapter 20 Troubleshooting Your System Identifying HHP Errors displays an error message screen as shown here When an error occurs while accepting edits the MicroLogix 1000 HHP Program Verification Error Location Label Error Code Hex ERR xxxxH ff rrr lt message gt Advisory Message file and rung numbers Use the tables in this section to find the error code and the associated recommended action s you should take to clear the error The tables are grouped by error type as described in the table below If the error code begins with a then the error type is 0 Hardware 1 5 6 or F Communication 2 Miscellaneous 3 Program Verification Hardware Error Messages Er
57. When entering hexadecimal characters you may need to access the following additional characters not displayed on the keypad To Access This Press This Key Character Sequence A Jem 7 A CRE 9 A e 4 AN JE 5 A You can change the radix for output input bit and integer data files See page 18 30 for more information The program is made from the logic you enter into the micro controller Ladder logic instruction programming which you may already be familiar with is one method used to enter logic Another method is called Instruction List Boolean programming Your MicroLogix 1000 HHP uses this type of logic programming An overview of ladder logic and instruction list programming is provided below Understanding Ladder Logic Instruction Programs Ladder logic is a graphical programming language based on electrical relay diagrams Instead of having electrical rung continuity ladder logic is looking for logical rung continuity A ladder diagram identifies each of the elements in an electromechanical circuit and represents them graphically This allows you to see how your control circuit operates before you actually start the physical operation of your system input instructions output instruction 0 JF 1 E 0 l 1 6 11 Chapter 6 Programming Overview 6 12 In a ladder diagram each of the input devices are represented in series or parallel combinations across
58. You can use more than one HSL instruction in your program The HSL instructions can have different image locations for the additional parameters ATTENTION Do not change a preset value and an output mask source with the same HSL instruction as the accumulator is approaching the old preset value If the high speed counter is enabled and the HSL instruction is evaluated true the high speed counter parameters in the HSL instruction are applied immediately without stopping the operation of the high speed counter If the same HSL instruction is being used to change the high speed counter controlled mask source and the preset the mask source is changed first and the preset second The preset is changed within 40 us after the mask source If the original preset is reached after the new mask source is applied but before the new preset is applied the new outputs are applied immediately High Speed Counter Reset RES Ladder representation c5 0 RES Execution Times usec when True False 51 00 6 00 To enter the function code press A FUN ae me ENT Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions The RES instruction allows you to write a zero to the hardware accumulator and image accumulator The Counter referenced by this instruction has the same address as the HSC instruction counter and is entered as CO Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional are
59. gt as you move the cursor right or left in the program 18 24 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program Using Short Cut Keys The following table shows the short cut keys you can press to go directly to the file and rung you want to monitor To go to Press the following key sequence MON file ORB rung ENT number aj i number MON file ORB gt ENT number a designated rung in the current file e g 4 MON gt rung enr number Monitoring Data Table Files a designated file and rung e g 5 3 rung 0 of a designated file e g 10 0 The data table files contain information used in your program By monitoring the data table files you can watch how the data changes as your program runs Data table files that you can monitor include Output O Input 1 Status S Bit B Timer T Counter C Control R Integer N See page 18 27 for example displays of each data table file To monitor a data element used as an instruction parameter begin at the program monitor display 1 Arrow to the instruction parameter you want to monitor 2 Access the data monitor to view the data table for the current instruction mon ent 18 25 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program 18 26 3 Scroll through the bits of individual data files or through the data file table using the keys described in the table below To Pr
60. gt ENT P000 TOF ADDR T1 E Bele P000 TOF PRE eaw 90 P000 TOF ACC ek kK ke ek k 0 P000 TOF BASE 0 01 SEC 8 18 Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Once instruction entry is complete the parameters are condensed to two screens as shown here P000 TOF P 120 A P000 TOF 0 01 SEC When the controller changes from the RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode to the RPRG mode or user power is lost while a timer off delay instruction is timing but has not reached its preset value the following occurs e Timer Enable EN bit remains set e Timer Timing TT bit remains set e Timer Done DN bit remains set e Accumulated value ACC remains the same On returning to the RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode the following can happen Condition Result If the rung is true TT bit is reset DN bit remains set EN bit is set ACC value is reset If the rung is false TT bitis reset DN bitis reset EN bitis reset ACC value is set equal to the preset value ATTENTION The Reset RES instruction cannot be used with the TOF instruction because RES always clears the status bits as well as the accumulated value See page 8 27 Important The TOF times inside an inactive MCR Pair 8 19 Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Retentive Timer RTO Use the RTO instruction to turn an output on or off after its timer has been on for a preset time interval The RTO instruction is a retentive instruc
61. in the home position before allowing the conveyor to move Binion Cy Drill On Off O 1 If you went through chapter 5 Quick Start for New Users you already completed a portion of this example s main program file and saved it under the program name GETSTART Adapt that program to the drilling example by adding the two shaded instructions Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Ladder Rungs Rung 2 30 Starts the conveyor in motion when the start button is pressed However another condition must also be met before we start the conveyor the drill must be in its fully retracted position home This rung also stops the conveyor when the stop button is pressed START Drar STOP Machine Button Home LS Button RUN Latch T 0 T0 T 0 B3 HISS E Sa aia 6 5 7 0 Machine RUN Latch B3 Resa Sasa sss s 0 Rungs 2 0 through 2 2 will be added in chapter 14 Rung 2 4 Applies the above start logic to the conveyor and drill motor Machine Dien I Conveyor RUN Home LS Enable Latch B3 TO 0 0 eh ere re eee ee oe coool eit Ss rsr Te 0 5 5 Drill Motor ON 0 0 See hje 1 Instruction List File 2 Rung 30 Starts the conveyor in motion when the start button is pressed However another condition must also be met before we start the conveyor the drill bit must be in its fully retracted position home This rung also stops the conveyor
62. instruction list program E 44 adder program E 41 operation overview E 40 spray booth E 49 instruction list program E 53 adder program E 51 operation overview E 50 time driven sequencer E 25 instruction list program E 26 adder program E 25 operation overview E 25 O l 9 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual l 10 using the MSG instruction 15 12 application specific instructions about 13 1 bit shift instructions overview 13 2 Bit Shift Left BSL 13 3 Bit Shift Right BSR 13 4 in the paper drilling machine application example 13 20 Selectable Timed Interrupt STI function overview 13 15 sequencer instructions overview 13 6 applying logic to your schematics 6 11 basic instructions about 8 2 bit instructions overview 8 3 branch instructions overview 8 9 counter instructions overview 8 21 in the paper drilling machine application example 8 28 timer instructions overview 8 14 baud rate changing 19 6 19 7 limitations for autoswitching 3 13 bidirectional counter operation 14 9 overview 14 5 bidirectional counter with quadrature encoder operation 14 13 overview 14 5 bidirectional counter with reset and hold operation 14 9 overview 14 5 bidirectional counter with reset and hold with quadrature encoder operation 14 13 overview 14 5 bit file B 6 4 bit instructions And AND 8 3 And Block ANB 8 12 An
63. must provide the following application specific information e N2 Counts per Revolution i e the number of encoder pulses per revolution i e the number of pulses until reset This value is entered in whole counts For example you would enter the value 1000 into N2 for a 1000 count A B Z encoder e TO PRE The Rate Measurement Period i e the amount of time in which to sample the accumulation of counts This value is entered in 01 second intervals For example enter the value 10 into TO PRE for a 1 second rate measurement period For an accurate frequency and RPM calculation to occur the value entered must divide evenly into 100 For example valid 20 10 5 4 2 1 and invalid 11 9 8 7 6 3 Once you have entered these two values the following information is provided e NI Counts per last Rate Measurement Period This value is updated each end of Rate Measurement Period with the number of counts that have elapsed Use this value if your application requires high speed calculations such as velocity N4 Frequency This value is updated once per second with the number of pulses that occurred in the last second This value frequency is calculated pulses Frequency Hz 1 second e N5 RPM This value is calculated once per second using the frequency value N4 together with the counts per revolution value N2 For example if N4 contained the value 2000 indicates 2000 Hz and you had specified a 1000 c
64. program files 18 25 motor starters bulletin 509 surge suppressors 1 9 motor starters bulletin 709 surge suppressors 1 9 mounting template controller A 7 mounting the controller using a DIN rail 1 13 using mounting screws 1 14 MOV Move 11 15 Move MOV 11 15 entering parameters 11 15 entering the instruction 11 15 execution times 11 15 function code 11 15 instruction parameters C 7 ladder representation 11 15 updates to arithmetic status bits 11 15 valid addressing modes C 7 valid file types C 7 move and logical instructions And AND 11 18 Exclusive Or XOR 11 20 Masked Move MVM 11 16 Move MOV 11 15 Negate NEG 11 22 Not NOT 11 21 Or OR 11 19 overview 11 13 changes to the math register S13 and S14 11 14 l 21 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual I 22 entering parameters 11 13 entering the instructions 11 13 overflow trap bit 5 0 11 14 updates to arithmetic status bits 11 14 using indexed word addresses 11 14 MPP Memory Pop 8 10 MPS Memory Push 8 10 MRD Memory Read 8 10 MSG Message 15 1 MUL Multiply 10 8 multi point function description 4 15 how to complete tasks 4 16 screen definition 4 15 using 18 31 automatically entering addresses 18 32 changing multi point addresses 18 33 manually entering addresses 18 31 removing multi point addresses 18 34 Multiply MUL 10 8 changes to
65. s BCD input value SRCA N13 0000H SRCB N14 0000H 101 FRD debounced BCD value SRC N14 0000H DEST N12 0000H 22 AND Math Overflow Bit S0 1 0 42 U RST Math Error Bit S5 0 0 12 MPP 106 MOV this scan s BCD input value SRC N14 0000H DEST N13 0000H File 7 Rung 4 Ensures that the operator cannot select a paper thickness of 0 If this were allowed the drill bit life calculation could be defeated resulting in poor quality holes due to a dull drill bit Therefore the minimum paper thickness used to calculate drill bit wear is 1 4 in FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 50 EQU LD EQU debounced BCD value SRCA N12 0000H SRCB 0 106 MOV debounced BCD value SRC 1 DEST N12 0000H 11 33 Using Program Flow Control Instructions This chapter contains general information about the program flow instructions and explains how they function in your application program Each of the instructions includes information on e what the instruction symbol looks like typical execution time for the instruction e e how to use the instruction e how to enter the instruction In addition the last section contains an application example for a paper drilling machine that shows the program flow control instructions in use Program Flow Control Instructions HHP n Function Display Mnemonic Code Name Purpose Page JMP 130 ump to Label yun J ump forward or b
66. the master During a polling sequence the master polls a slave either repeatedly until the slave indicates that it has no more message packets to transmit or just one time per polling sequence depending on how the master is configured An additional feature of the DF1 half duplex protocol is that it is possible for a slave device to enable a MSG instruction in its ladder program to send or request data to from another slave When the initiating slave is polled the MSG instruction command packet is sent to the master The master recognizes that the command packet is not intended for it but for another slave so the master immediately rebroadcasts the command packet to the intended slave When the intended slave is polled it sends a reply packet to the master with the data the first slave requested The master again recognizes that the reply packet is intended for another slave so the master immediately rebroadcasts the reply packet to that slave This slave to slave transfer is a function of the master device and is also used by programming software to upload and download programs to processors on the DF1 half duplex link Several Allen Bradley products support DF1 half duplex master protocol They include the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 and enhanced PLC 5e processors Rockwell Software WINtelligent LINX and RSLinx version 2 x and higher also support DF1 half duplex master protocol Typically the master maintains an activ
67. to retract up out of the book When the drill body is fully retracted the drill body hits another limit switch indicating that it is in the home position Hitting the second limit switch unlatches the drill sequence start bit and causes the conveyor to move the book to the next drilling position Conveyor Operation When the start button is pressed the conveyor moves the books forward As the first book moves close to the drill the book trips a photo eye sensor This tells the machine where the leading edge of the book is Based on the position of the selector switch the conveyor moves the book until it reaches the first drilling position The drill sequence start bit is set and the first hole is drilled The drill sequence start bit is now unlatched and the conveyor moves the same book to the second drilling position The drilling process is repeated until there are the desired holes per book The machine then looks for another book to break the photo eye beam and the process is repeated The operator can change the number of drilled holes by changing the selector switch Drill Calculation and Warning The program tracks the number of holes drilled and the number of inches of material that have been drilled through using a thumbwheel The thumbwheel is set to the thickness of the book per 1 4 inch If the book is 1 1 2 inches thick the operator would set the thumbwheel to 6 When 25 000 inches have been drilled the Change Drill Soon pilot
68. valid addressing modes C 8 valid file types C 8 NOT Not 11 21 number systems 6 10 radixes used 6 10 numeric constants 6 10 0 One Shot Rising OSR 8 7 AND OSR entering parameters 8 7 entering the instruction 8 7 execution times 8 7 function code 8 7 instruction parameters C 8 ladder representation 8 7 valid addressing modes C 8 valid file types C 8 ladder representation 8 7 LD OSR entering parameters 8 7 entering the instruction 8 7 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual execution times 8 7 OSR One Shot Rising 8 7 function code 8 7 OUT Output 8 8 instruction parameters C 8 ladder representation 8 7 valid addressing modes C 8 OUT Update High Speed Counter Image Accumulator 14 23 valid file types C 8 Output OUT 8 8 operating cycle controller s 6 2 Or OR bit input instruction 8 3 entering the instruction 8 4 execution times 8 3 instruction parameters C 8 ladder representation 8 3 using 8 4 valid addressing modes C 8 entering the instruction 8 8 execution times 8 8 instruction parameters C 8 ladder representation 8 8 update high speed counter image accumulator 14 23 valid addressing modes C 8 valid file types C 8 output branching 6 13 valid file types C 8 output contact protection selecting 1 7 word output instruction 11 19 output file O 6 4 entering the instruction 11 19 execution times
69. valid file types C 5 High Speed Counter Load HSL 14 15 entering parameters 14 15 entering the instruction 14 15 execution times 14 15 function code 14 16 instruction parameters C 5 ladder representation 14 15 operation 14 16 valid addressing modes C 5 valid file types C 5 High Speed Counter Reset RES 14 19 entering the instruction 14 19 execution times 14 19 function code 14 19 instruction parameters C 8 ladder representation 14 19 operation 14 19 valid file types C 8 High Speed Counter Reset Accumulator RAC 14 20 ladder representation 14 20 entering parameters 14 20 entering the instruction 14 20 execution times 14 20 function code 14 20 instruction parameters C 8 operation 14 21 valid addressing modes C 8 valid file types C 8 high speed counter wiring 14 5 high speed counter applications wire the controller for 2 23 home description 4 7 how to complete tasks 4 8 screen definition 4 7 HSC High Speed Counter 14 4 HSD High Speed Counter Interrupt Disable 14 21 HSE High Speed Counter Interrupt Enable 14 21 HSL High Speed Counter Load 14 15 identifying controller faults 20 11 IIM Immediate Input with Mask 12 8 Immediate Input with Mask IIM 12 8 entering parameters 12 8 entering the instruction 12 8 execution times 12 8 function code 12 8 instruction parameters C 5 ladder representation 12 8 valid addressing modes C 5 valid fil
70. voltage reaches an on or off state to when the micro controller recognizes that change of state The higher you set the response time the longer it takes for the input state change to reach the micro controller However setting higher response times also provides better filtering of high frequency noise You can apply a unique input filter setting to each of the three input groups e Oand e 2and3 e 4to x where x 9 for 16 I O point controllers and x 19 for 32 I O point controllers The minimum and maximum response times associated with each input filter setting can be found in the tables that follow Response Times for High Speed dc Inputs 0 to 3 applies to 1761 L10BWA 1761 L16BWA L20BWA S5A L32BWA L10BWB L16BWB L20BWB 5A L32BWB L16BBB and L32BBB controllers Sato ok Nominal Filter Maximum ON Maximum OFF Duty Cycle Khz g ms Delay ms Delay ms 6 600 0 075 0 075 0 075 5 000 0 100 0 100 0 100 2 000 0 250 0 250 0 250 1 000 0 500 0 500 0 500 0 500 1 000 1 000 1 000 0 200 2 000 2 000 2 000 0 125 4 000 4 000 4 000 0 062 8 000 8 000 8 000 0 031 16 000 16 000 16 000 This is the default setting Response Times for dc Inputs 4 and Above applies to 1761 L10BWA 1761 L16BWA L20BWA 5A L32BWA L10BWB L16BWB L20BWB 5A L32BWB L16BBB and L32BBB controllers Nominal Filter Maximum ON Maximum OFF Setting ms Delay ms Delay ms 0 50 0 500 0
71. 1 S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 destination direct indexed direct O 1 S B T C R N Not Applicable control direct R element level Not Applicable length 1 255 position 0 255 SQR Square Root source immediate direct 0 1 5 B 1 C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct f min f max destination direct indexed direct 0 1 5 B T C R N Not Applicable STD Selectable Timed Not Applicable Disable STE Selectable Timed Not Applicable Enable Indexed addressing is not allowed when using T C or R addresses c 9 Appendix C Valid Addresssing Modes and File Types for Instruction Parameters c 10 Instruction Description Instruction Valid Addressing Valid File Types Valid Value Parameter Mode s Ranges STS Selectable Timed Start file immediate direct 0 1 5 B 1 C R N always equal 5 indexed direct time immediate direct 0 1 5 B 1 C R N 0 255 indexed direct SUB Subtract source A immediate direct 0 1l S B T C R N 32 768 32 76 indexed direct f min f max source B immediate direct 0 1 S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct f min f max destination direct indexed direct 0 1 5 B T C R N_ Not Applicable SUS Suspend suspend ID immediate 32 768 32 767 TND Temporary End Not Applicable TOD Convert to BCD source direct indexed direct 0 1 S B T C RN destination direct 0 1 S B T C R N Not Applicable TOF Time
72. 1 of Decodes a 4 bit value 0 to 15 turning on the corresponding bit in the 16 bit 11 7 16 destination Encodes a 16 bit source to a 4 bit value Searches the source from the lowest to ENC 103 Encode 1 of 16 to 4 the highest bit and looks for the first set bit The corresponding bit position is 11 8 written to the destination as an integer COP 104 Copy File The COP instruction copies data from the source file to the destination file The 44 49 FLL 105 Fill File FLL instruction loads a source value into each position in the destination file MOV 106 Move oves the source value to the destination 11 15 MVM 107 Masked Move oves data from a source location to a selected portion of the destination 11 16 Performs a bitwise AND operation This differs from the AND input instruction QAD ie And discussed in chapter 7 11 18 OR 109 Or Performs a bitwise inclusive OR operation This differs from the OR input 11 19 instruction discussed in chapter 7 XOR 110 Exclusive Or Performs a bitwise Exclusive OR operation 11 20 NOT 111 Not Performs a NOT operation 11 21 NEG 112 Negate Changes the sign of the source and stores it in the destination 11 22 FFL 113 FIFO Load The FFL instruction loads a word into a FIFO stack on successive false to true transitions The FFU unloads a word from the stack on successive false true 11 25 FFU 114 FIFO Unload transitions The first word loaded is the first to be unloaded LFL 115 LIFO Load The LFL instruction loads a word i
73. 10 function code 11 13 instruction parameters C 5 ladder representation 11 10 using 11 12 valid addressing modes C 5 valid file types C 5 First Instruction on Rung screen 17 2 FLL Fill File 11 10 forcing inputs and outputs 18 35 forcing external input data file bits 18 35 guide to forcing 18 37 forcing external output circuits 18 38 guide to forcing 18 39 FRD Convert from BCD 11 3 function codes listing B 13 functional areas HHP 4 7 data monitor 4 13 home 4 7 menu 4 8 mode 4 10 multi point function 4 15 program monitor 4 11 G general editing keys identifying 4 4 general specifications A 2 controller A 2 HHP A 9 GEQ Greater Than or Equal 9 8 getting started 5 1 entering and running the program 5 4 monitoring operation 5 9 preparing to enter a new program 5 2 what to do first 5 1 what to do next 5 12 Greater Than GRT 9 7 AND GRT entering the instruction 9 7 execution times 9 7 function code 9 7 instruction parameters C 5 ladder representation 9 7 valid addressing modes C 5 valid file types C 5 LD GRT entering the instruction 9 7 execution times 9 7 function code 9 7 instruction parameters C 5 ladder representation 9 7 valid addressing modes C 5 I 15 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual l 16 valid file types C 5 OR GRT entering the instruction 9 7 execution times 9 7 function code 9 7 instr
74. 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions To enter the RRUN mode and retain the HSC ACC value while having the HSC Outputs and Interrupt Subroutine reassert themselves apply the following Ladder Rungs Rung 2 0 Unlatch the C5 0 HP and C5 0 LP bits during the first scan BEFORE the HSC instruction is executed for the first time Sl Rung 2 1 S1 t5 Instruction List File 2 Rung 0 HSC LOAD 777MM U HSL Counter CSU Source N7 0 Length 5 C520 HP 520 U LP HSC HIGH SPEED COUNTER CU Type Encoder Res Hld CD Counter C5 0 DN High Preset 1000 Accum ol 4 Unlatch the C5 0 HP and C5 0 LP bits during the first scan BEFORE the HSC for the first time instruction is executed FUN GRAPHIC CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC 20 LD 171 HSL File 2 Rung 1 FUN GRAPHIC CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC 20 l I LD 42 U RST 42 U RST File 2 Rung 2 FUN GRAPHIC CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC 170 HSC PARAMETER NAME ADDRESS CNTR CO SRC NO LEN PARAMETER NAME ADDRESS PARAMETER NAME ADDRESS TYPE CNTR CO PRE ACC FORCES FORCES FORCES Encoder Res H1d 1000 0000H 14 25 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions 14 26 Example 3 To enter the RRUN
75. 162x9 161x4 16x0 203 072 Chapter 10 Using Math Instructions Ladder Rung B3 B3 ADD osr ADD 0 1 Source A B3 1 0101010110101000 Source B B3 2 0001100101000000 Dest B3 2 0001100101000000 s 0 ADD ee 0 Source A 1 Source B B3 3 0000000000000011 Dest B33 0000000000000011 B3 SUB E SUBTRACT 31 Source A B3 3 0000000000000011 Source B 1 Dest B3 3 0000000000000011 s 5 U 0 Instruction List FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE 20 I LD B 0 0 29 OSR AND OSR B 1 0 80 ADD SRCA B1 0101010110101000 SRCB B2 1940H DEST B2 1940H 10 MPS 22 AND S0 0 0 80 ADD SRCA 1 SRCB B3 0003H DEST B3 0003H 13 MRD 22 AND B 31 0 81 SUB SRCA B3 0003H SRCB 1 DEST B3 0003H 12 MPP 42 U RST S5 0 0 When the rung goes true for a single scan B1 is added to B2 The result is placed in B2 If a carry is generated S0 0 aA set 1 is added to B3 If B1 is negative B 31 set lt _ 1 is subtracted from B3 Overflow trap bit 5 0 is unlatched to prevent a major error from occurring at the end of the scan FORCES 10 7 Chapter 10 Using Math Instructions Multiply MUL Ladder representation MUL MULTIPLY Source A N7 4 0 Source B 60 Dest N7 6 0 Execution Times usec when True False 57 96 6 78 To enter the function code press AN Dara e 10 8 Use the MUL inst
76. 18 25 the character 6 9 EQU Equal 9 3 Equal EQU 9 3 AND EQU entering the instruction 9 3 execution times 9 3 function code 9 3 instruction parameters C 4 ladder representation 9 3 valid addressing modes C 4 valid file types C 4 LD EQU entering the instruction 9 3 execution times 9 3 function code 9 3 instruction parameters C 4 ladder representation 9 3 valid addressing modes C 4 valid file types C 4 OR EQU entering the instruction 9 3 execution times 9 3 function code 9 3 instruction parameters C 4 ladder representation 9 3 valid addressing modes C 4 valid file types C 4 error recovery model 20 10 errors download B 10 going to run B 9 hardware 20 2 HHP communication 20 4 hardware 20 3 identifying 20 3 miscellaneous 20 5 program verification 20 5 identifying 20 11 MSG instruction 15 11 powerup B 9 run B 10 establishing communication 3 12 19 7 European Union Directive compliance 1 1 example programs adjustable timer E 55 bottle line E 29 event driven sequencer E 27 on off circuit E 47 paper drilling machine E 2 pick and place machine E 34 RPM calculation E 40 spray booth E 49 time driven sequencer E 25 using the MSG instruction 15 12 Exclusive Or XOR 11 20 entering the instruction 11 20 execution times 11 20 function code 11 20 instruction parameters C 10 ladder representation 11 20 updates to arithmetic status bits 11 20 va
77. 2 N for probable cause and 0 l recommended action Is the Run LED On Place the controller in constantly RPRG mode Is an input or output LED showing proper status No Refer to page 20 2 for probable cause and recommended action Is the Fault LED On Correct the condition causing the fault Yes Yes Refer to page 20 2 for probable cause and recommended action Return controller to RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode Test and verify system a Y y operation 20 10 Identifying Controller Faults Chapter 20 Troubleshooting Your System While a program is executing a fault may occur within the operating system or your program When a fault occurs you have various options to determine what the fault is and how to correct it This section describes how to clear faults and provides a list of possible advisory messages with recommended corrective actions Clearing Controller Faults There are three ways you can clear a fault e manually by viewing the fault display e automatically using the Fault Override bit S1 8 or the Run Always bit S1 12 and cycling power e implementing the user fault routine and clearing bit S1 13 within it Manually Clearing Faults You can manually view and clear a fault by accessing the fault display Label Fault Code Hex igs 1 FLT FLT xxxxH mes
78. 2 15 1761 L16BWA 2 9 1761 L16BWB 2 12 1761 L20AWA 5A 2 17 1761 L20BWA 5A 2 18 1761 L20BWB 5A 2 19 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual 1761 L32AAA 2 14 1761 L32AWA 2 7 1761 L32BBB 2 16 1761 L32BWA 2 10 1761 L32BWB 2 13 wiring recommendations 2 3 X XOR Exclusive Or 11 20 I 29 ON Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley a Rockwell Automation Business has been helping its customers improve productivity and quality for more than 90 years We design manufacture and support a broad Allen Bradley range of automation products worldwide They include logic processors power and motion control devices operator interfaces sensors and a variety of software Rockwell is one of the world s leading technology companies lt x Ji fi A Worldwide representation Argentina e Australia e Austria e Bahrain e Belgium e Brazil e Bulgaria e Canada e Chile e China PRC e Colombia e Costa Rica e Croatia e Cyprus e Czech Republic e Denmark e Ecuador e Egypt e El Salvador e Finland e France e Germany e Greece e Guatemala e Honduras e Hong Kong e Hungary e Iceland e India e Indonesia e Ireland e Israel e Italy e Jamaica eJ apan e J ordan e Korea e Kuwait e Lebanon e Malaysia e Mexico e Netherlands e New Zealand e Norway e Pakistan e Peru e Philippines e Poland e Portugal e Puerto Rico e Qatar e Romania e Russia CIS e Saudi Arabia e Singapore e Slovakia e
79. 2 55 seconds or decrease it to 1 as your application requires Important If the watchdog value equals the current scan time value a watchdog major error will be declared code 0022 To change the setting 1 Access the program configuration menu 2 Arrow up to the option WATCHDOG SCAN and select it 4 times WATCHDOG SCAN x 10 ms 10 3 Type in a new scan time 4 Enter the setpoint and return to the home screen DOLD 18 11 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program 18 12 Setting the Input Filters This option allows you to select input filter response times for the 1761 L16BWA and 1761 L32BWA micro controllers The input filter response time is the time from when the external input voltage reaches an on or off state to when the micro controller recognizes that change of state The higher you set the response time the longer it takes for the input state change to reach the micro controller However setting higher response times also provides better filtering of high frequency noise gt INPUT FILTERS LOCK PROG You can apply a unique input filter setting to each of the three input groups e Oand 1 e 2and3 e 4to x where x 5 for 10 I O point controllers x 9 for 16 I O point controllers x 19 for 32 I O point controllers and x 11 for analog controllers Important The input filter response times for the 1761 L16AWA and 1761 L32AWA micro controllers are fixed at 8ms Selecting any othe
80. 20 Inputs on analog employ digital high frequency filters that significantly reduce the effects of electrical noise on input signals However because of the variety of applications and environments where analog controllers are installed and operated it is impossible to ensure that all environmental noise will be removed by the input filters Several specific steps can be taken to help reduce the effects of environmental noise on analog signals e install the MicroLogix 1000 system in a properly rated i e NEMA enclosure Make sure that the MicroLogix 1000 system is properly grounded e use Belden cable 8761 for wiring the analog channels making sure that the drain wire and foil shield are properly earth grounded e route the Belden cable separate from any other wiring Additional noise immunity can be obtained by routing the cables in grounded conduit A system may malfunction due to a change in the operating environment after a period of time We recommend periodically checking system operation particularly when new machinery or other noise sources are installed near the MicroLogix 1000 system Use shielded communication cable Belden 8761 The Belden cable has two signal wires black and clear one drain wire and a foil shield The drain wire and foil shield must be grounded at one end of the cable Do not earth ground the drain wire and foil shield at both ends of the cable Foil Shield Insulation Black Wire Dr
81. 20 1 type 1 2 wiring 2 3 wiring diagram 2 15 1761 L16BWA features 1 2 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual grounding 2 1 input voltage range 2 9 mounting 1 12 output voltage range 2 9 preventing excessive heat 1 12 spacing 1 12 troubleshooting 20 1 type 1 2 wiring 2 3 wiring diagram 2 9 1761 L16BWB features 1 2 grounding 2 1 input voltage range 2 12 mounting 1 12 output voltage range 2 12 preventing excessive heat 1 12 spacing 1 12 troubleshooting 20 1 type 1 2 wiring 2 3 wiring diagram 2 12 1761 L20AWA 5A features 1 2 grounding 2 1 input voltage range 2 17 mounting 1 12 output voltage range 2 17 preventing excessive heat 1 12 spacing 1 12 troubleshooting 20 1 type 1 2 wiring 2 3 wiring diagram 2 17 1761 L20BWA 5A features 1 2 grounding 2 1 input voltage range 2 18 mounting 1 12 output voltage range 2 18 preventing excessive heat 1 12 spacing 1 12 troubleshooting 20 1 type 1 2 wiring 2 3 wiring diagram 2 18 1761 L20BWB 5A features 1 2 grounding 2 1 input voltage range 2 19 mounting 1 12 output voltage range 2 19 preventing excessive heat 1 12 l 7 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual spacing 1 12 troubleshooting 20 1 type 1 2 wiring 2 3 wiring diagram 2 19 1761 L32AAA features 1 2 grounding 2 1 input voltage
82. 28 Rene hot Triggers a one time event 8 7 OSR AND OSR 29 Output Output Represents an output driven by some combination of input logic OUT 40 E tput P Energized 1 when conditions preceding it permit power continuity in the 8 8 memes rung and de energized after the rung is false Set Output Turns a bit on when the rung is executed and this bit retains its state when SET a Latch the rung is not executed or a power cycle occurs gy Reset Output Turns a bit off when the rung is executed and this bit retains its state when z RST 4 Unlatch the rung is not executed or when power cycle occurs 4 Continued on following page Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Branch Instructions Function Mnemonic Code Name Purpose Page MPS 10 Memory Push Stores the rung state that is present immediately preceding the MPS instruction 8 10 MRD 11 Memory Read Reads the rung state stored by the MPS instruction and resumes operation using 8 10 that rung state MPP 12 Memory Pop Removes the rung state stored by the MPS instruction reads it and resumes 8 10 operation using that rung state ANB 13 And Block Places two blocks of logic in series with each other ANDs them 8 12 ORB 14 Or Block Places two blocks of logic in parallel with each other ORs them 8 12 Timer Counter Instructions Function Mnemonic Code Name Purpose Page TON 0 Timer On Delay Counts timebase intervals w
83. 4 watreraae a oawsobe ies 2 21 Analog Voltage and Current Inputand Output Ranges 2 22 Wiring Your Controller for High Speed Counter Applications 2 23 Chapter 3 Connecting the HHP ciccecaawans bean vace eve dente eeaswawaeea sd 3 1 Connecting to a DH 485 Network 10 cece naaa 3 3 Connecting the AICS ccc cs een aed es wekee eda diate eadedad saad 3 6 Establishing Communication 0 ccc eee eee 3 12 DeviceNet Communications cccceeeeeee a 3 13 toc i Table of Contents MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual Using Your Hand Held Programmer Quick Start for New Users Programming Overview Using Analog Using Basic Instructions toc ii Programming Chapter 4 About Your HHP Gace apeeueee ean era ereweeee aoa tues oeewleda 4 1 Installing the Optional Memory Module 1 ccc cece eee eee ees 4 3 The Keys You Use 2 wc iaSeveueugeeueeee epereyouseedius pogede 4 4 Identifying the Power Up Sequence 0 ee eee eee eee 4 6 Understanding the HHPs Functional Areas cece eee eee ees 4 7 Changing the HHPs Defaults cc cau adues sees a ce dase dene eawe ba cw oe 4 17 Chapter 5 Whatto DOFINS cyt td arid emit hd nE a e E dda eed 5 1 Preparing to Enter a New Program 002 hceksewbadia ions adeeys 5 2 Entering and Running the Program vac2k dup iwavoduedeceesaeawegad 5 4 Monitoring O peratioN sess sted aes rrt osainen aE ae eueeas 5 9 Whatta Do NEXE
84. 500 1 00 1 00 1 000 2 00 2 000 2 000 4 00 4 000 4 000 8 00 8 000 8 000 16 00 16 000 16 000 This is the default setting Appendix A Hardware Reference Response Times for ac Inputs applies to 1761 L16AWA L20AWA 5A L32AWA and L32AAA controllers Nominal Filter Maximum ON Maximum OFF Setting ms Delay ms Delay ms There is only one filter setting available for the ac inputs If you make another selection the controller changes it to the ac setting and sets the input filter modified bit S 5 13 8 0 Controller Dimensions Refer to the following table for the controller dimensions Controller 1761 Length mm in Depth mm in Height mm in LIOBWA 120 4 72 L16AWA 133 5 24 L16BWA 120 4 72 L20AWA 5A L20BWA 5A 73 2 87 L32AWA 200 7 87 L32BWA L32AAA 80 3 15 L10BWB L16BBB 120 4 72 L16BWB L20BWB 5A 40 1 57 L32BBB 200 7 87 L32BWB Add approximately 13 mm 0 51 in when using the 1761 CBL PM02 or 1761 CBL HM02 communication cables Copy the template on the following page to help you install your controller A 7 192 nm l 125 nm ei 4 92 in 102nm 4 01 iny 1761 L1I6BVA 1761 L16BBB 1761 L16BWB 120nm 1761 L10BVA 1761 L10BWB 1761 L20AWA 5A 1761 L20BWA 5A 1761 L20BWB 4 72 in 1761 L1GEAV A 133 nm 1761 L32AWA 1761 L32BBB 1761 L32AAA 5 24 in 1761 L32BVA 1
85. 52 6 60 HNEQ LD NEQ 53 appears first on a rung or block AND NEQ 21 92 7 00 SRE Scare is placed in series with any previous inpu ORNEQ 21 92 7 00 NEQ AND NEQ 34 instruction in the current rung or block Giad is placed in parallel with any previous in NEQ OR NEQ E put instruction in the current rung or block You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area The example below shows how to enter the LD NEQ instruction Use the same procedure to enter the other NEQ instructions only substitute the function code with one from the table above To enter the function code press P000 HNEQr SRCA A e e ee Len i P000 HNEQr SRCB 100 9 4 Less Than LES Ladder representation LES LESS THAN RSA Source A N7 11 0 Source B 100 Execution Times usec when True False LDLES 23 60 6 60 AND LES 24 00 7 00 ORLES 24 00 7 00 To enter the function code Chapter 9 Using Comparison Instructions Use the LES instruction to test whether one value source A is less than another source B If the value at source A is less than the value of source B the instruction is logically true If the value at source A is greater than or equal to the value of source B the instruction is logically false Source A must be a word address Source B can be either a constant or word address Negative integers are stored in two s complement form Entering the Instruction
86. 7 7 END Instruction List File 7 Rung 1 Resets the number of 1 4 in increments and the 1 4 in thousands when the drill change reset keyswitch is energized each drill bit change This should occur following FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 LD drill change reset keyswitch I 8 0 85 CLR 1 4 in Thousands DEST N11 0000H 85 CLR 1 4 in increments DEST N10 0000H File 7 Keeps a runnin the current dr in 1 4 ins t because the AD would actuate Integer N7 12 inputs 1I 0 11 FUN GRAPHIC CODE SYMBOL 20 Idi 29 OSR 80 Chapter 10 Using Math Instructions Rung 5 g total of how many inches of paper have been drilled with ill bit Every time a hole is drilled adds the thickness o the running total kept in 1 4 ins The OSR is necessary D executes every time the rung is true and the drill body the DRILL DEPTH limit switch for more than 1 program scan is the integer converted value of the BCD thumbwheel on T 0 14 PARAMETER MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES LD Drill Depth LS I 4 0 AND OSR Tool Wear OSR 1 B 24 0 ADD SRCA N12 0000H 1 4 in increments SRCB N10 0000H 1 4 in increments DEST N10 0000H Rungs 7 2 through 7 4 are added at the end of Chapter 11 File 7 Rung When the numbe increments are 1000 17 4 in accumulator to FUN GRAPHIC CODE SYMBO
87. 9 6 instruction parameters C 6 ladder representation 9 6 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual valid addressing modes C 6 valid file types C 6 LFL LIFO Load 11 28 LFU LIFO Unload 11 28 LIFO Load LFL 11 28 entering the instruction 11 28 execution times 11 28 function code 11 28 instruction parameters C 6 ladder representation 11 29 operation 11 29 valid addressing modes C 6 valid file types C 6 LIFO Unload LFU 11 28 entering the instruction 11 28 execution times 11 28 function code 11 29 instruction parameters C 6 ladder representation 11 29 operation 11 29 valid addressing modes C 6 valid file types C 6 LIM Limit Test 9 10 Limit Test LIM 9 10 AND LIM entering parameters 9 10 entering the instruction 9 10 execution times 9 10 function code 9 10 instruction parameters C 7 ladder representation 9 10 valid addressing modes C 7 valid file types C 7 LD LIM entering parameters 9 10 entering the instruction 9 10 execution times 9 10 function code 9 10 instruction parameters C 7 ladder representation 9 10 valid addressing modes C 7 valid file types C 7 OR LIM entering parameters 9 10 entering the instruction 9 10 execution times 9 10 function code 9 10 instruction parameters C 7 ladder representation 9 10 valid addressing modes C 7 valid file types C 7 I 19 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer
88. A E Chapter 10 Using Math Instructions Use the DIV instruction to divide one value source A by another source B and place the rounded quotient in the destination If the remainder is 0 5 or greater the destination is rounded up Source A and B can either be a word address or a constant however both sources cannot be a constant The destination must be a word address Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S0 0 Carry C always resets sets if division by zero or overflow is detected otherwise resets On overflow the minor error flag is also set The S0 1 Overflow V value 32 767 is placed in the destination If S2 14 math overflow selection bit is set then the unsigned truncated overflow remains in the destination sets if result is zero otherwise resets undefined if overflow is set sets if result is negative otherwise resets undefined if overflow is set 0 2 Zero Z 0 3 Sign S Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area P000 DI V SRCA 100 P000 DI V T00 PRE P000 DI V C01 PRE Changes to the Math Register The unrounded quotient is placed in the most significant word the remainder is placed in the least significant word 10 9 Chapter 10 Using Math Instructions Double Divide D DV The 32 bit content of the math register is divided by the 16 bit source value a
89. ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 gt LD Decrement Timer preset 1 9 0 63 GRT AND GRT SRCA TO PRE 500 SRCB 750 29 OSR AND OSR B 1 0 81 SUB SRCA TO PRE 500 SRCB NO 0000H DEST TO PRE 500 File 2 Rung 2 FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 I LD Input conditions to allow dwell time on the drill 0 TON TIMR TO BASE 0 01 PRE 500 ACC 0000H Calibrating an Analog Input Channel Appendix Optional Analog Input Software Calibration This appendix helps you calibrate an analog input channel using software offsets to increase the expected accuracy of an analog input circuit Examples of equations and a ladder diagram are provided for your reference Software calibration reduces the error at a given temperature by scaling the values read at calibration time The following procedure can be adapted to all analog inputs current or voltage For this example the 1761 L20BWA SA with a 4 mA to 20 mA input is used The overall error for the MicroLogix 1000 is guaranteed to be not more than 0 525 at 25 C The overall error of 0 525 at 20 mA equates to 164 LSB of error or a code range of 31043 to 31371 Any value in this range is returned by an analog input channel at 20 mA The expected nominal value at 20 mA is 31207 After performing a software calibration the overall error is reduced to 5 LSB 0 018 or a code range of 31202 to 31212 The graph shown below shows the linear relationshi
90. ANI and program to determine if a bit is Off When the instruction is executed if the Or Inverted ORI bit addressed is off 0 then the instruction is evaluated as true When the instruction is executed if the bit addressed is on 1 then the instruction is evaluated as false Ladder representation Bit Address State LDI ANI and ORI Instruction 0 True 1 False Execution Times usec when True False Examples of devices that turn on or off include LDI 154 1 72 e motor overload normally closed N C wired to an input 1 10 ANI 1 94 2 12 e an output wired to a pilot light addressed as 0 4 oe aa e a timer controlling a light addressed as T3 DN 8 4 To access the LDI instruction press LDI To access the ANI instruction press ANI lk 5 To access the ORI instruction press ORI 6 Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Using LDI Use the LDI instruction for normally closed contacts that appears first on a rung or block Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area P000 FHi F 1 6 0 Using ANI Use the ANI instruction for normally closed contacts placed in series with any previous input instruction in the current rung or block Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area 17 0 Using ORI Use the ORI instruction for normally closed contacts placed in parallel wit
91. BSR FFL FFU LFL or LFU that the length parameter does instruction points past the end ofa not point past the data file data file Reload the program and enter the RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode 0034 INVALID TIMER A negative value was loaded to a If the program is moving values timer preset or accumulator to the accumulator or preset word of a timer make certain these values are not negative Correct the program and re enter RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode 0035 INVALID FOR FILE The program contains a Temporary Correct the program and End TND instruction in file 3 4 or re enter RRUN RCSN or 5 when it is being used as an RSSN mode interrupt subroutine 0037 INVALID HSC PRE Either a zero 0 or a negative high 1 Check to make sure the presets are valid 2 Correct the program and re enter RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode 20 15 Chapter 20 Troubleshooting Your System Fault Code Hex 0038 Advisory Message RET IN FILE 2 Description A RET instruction is in the main program file file 2 Recommended Action Remove the RET instruction and re enter RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode 0040 OUTPUT VERIFY WR When outputs were written and read back by the controller the read failed This may have been caused by noise m Refer to proper grounding guidelines in chapter 2 Startup your system Contact your local Allen Bradley representative if the error persists UIN 0041 EXTRA OUTPUT
92. Configuration Using this bit you can control access to a controller file To program this feature select Future Access Disallow when saving your program When this bitis cleared it indicates that any compatible programming device can access the ladder program provided that password conditions are satisfied 1 15 First Pass Status Use this bit to initialize your program as the application requires When this bit is set by the controller it indicates that the first scan of the user program is in progress following power up in the RUN mode or entry into a REM Run or REM Test mode The controller clears this bit following the first scan This bit is set during execution of the startup protection fault routine Refer to S 1 9 for more information 52 0 STI Pending Status When set this bit indicates that the STI timer has timed out and the STI routine is waiting to be executed This bit is cleared upon starting the STI routine ladder program exit of the REM Run or Test mode or execution of a true STS instruction S2 1 STI Enabled Status and Static Configuration This bit may be setor reset using the STS STE or STD instruction If set it allows execution of the STI if the STI setpoint S 30 is non zero If clear when an interrupt occurs the STI subroutine does not execute and the STI Pending bit is set The STI Timer continues to run when this bitis disabled The STD instruction clears t
93. Flags B 2 S 1L low byte Controller Mode Status Control low B 3 S 1H high byte Controller Mode Status C ontrol Hi B 3 S 2L low byte Controller Alternate Mode Status Control low B 5 S 2H high byte Controller Alternate Mode Status Control Hi B 5 S 3L low byte Current Scan Time B 6 S 3H high byte Watchdog Scan Time B 7 S 4 Timebase B 7 5 Minor Error Bits B 7 S 6 Major Error Code B 8 S 7 Suspend Code B 11 S 8 to 12 Reserved B 11 S 13 S 14 ath Register B 11 S 15L low byte DF1 Full or Half Duplex Node Address B 11 S 15H high byte DF1 Full or Half Duplex Baud Rate B 11 S 16L low byte DH 485 Node Address B 11 S 16H high byte DH 485 Baud Rate B 12 S 17 to 21 Reserved B 12 S 22 aximum Observed Scan Time B 12 Continued on next page B 1 Appendix B Programming Reference Word Function Page 5 23 Reserved B 12 S 24 Index Register B 12 S 25 to 5 29 Reserved B 12 S 30 STI Setpoint B 12 S 31 and 32 Reserved B 12 Status File Descriptions The following tables describe the status file functions beginning at address SO and ending at address 32 Each status bit is classified as one of the following e Status Use these words bytes or bits to monitor controller operation or controller status information The information is seldom written to by the user program or programming device unless you want to reset or clear a function such as a monitor bit e Dynami
94. Handling Appendix B Programming Reference Hoe eames Menoyo Name msrueton Tye AND LIM 8 09 37 33 1 75 LIM LD LIM 7 69 36 93 1 50 Limit Test Comparison OR LIM 8 09 37 33 1 75 CR 4 07 3 98 0 50 Master Control Reset Program Flow Control AND MEQ 8 09 28 79 1 75 EQ LDMEQ 769 28 39 1 50 an Comparison for Comparison OR MEQ 8 09 28 79 1 75 OV 6 78 25 05 1 50 ove Data Handling PP 0 40 0 25 emory Pop Basic PS 0 40 0 25 emory Push Basic RD 0 40 0 25 emory Read Basic SG 26 180 34 75 essage Communication UL 6 78 57 96 1 50 ultiply Math VM 6 78 33 28 1 50 asked Move Data Handling NEG 6 78 29 48 1 50 Negate Data Handling AND NEQ 7 00 21 92 1 75 NEQ LD NEQ 6 60 21 52 1 50 Not Equal Comparison OR NEQ 7 00 21 92 1 75 NOT 6 78 28 21 1 00 ot Data Handling OR bit input 2 12 1 94 1 00 Or Basic OR word output 6 78 33 68 1 50 Or Data Handling ORB 0 40 0 25 Or Block Basic ORI 2 12 1 94 1 00 Or Inverted Basic ORT n a 1 94 1 00 Or True Basic AND OSR 11 88 13 42 1 25 a ia T T One Shot Rising Basic OUT basic instruction 4 43 4 43 0 75 Output Basic Update High Speed OUT high speed counter 7 00 12 00 0 75 Counter Image High Speed Counter Accumulator RAC 6 00 56 00 1 00 HighSpeed Counter High Speed Counter RES timer counter 4 25 15 19 1 00 Reset Basic RES high speed counter 6 00 51 00 1 00 ee
95. High Speed Counter Interrupt file 4 This file is executed when an HSC interrupt occurs It can also be used for a subroutine program e Selectable Timed Interrupt file 5 This file is executed when an STI occurs It can also be used for a subroutine program e Subroutine Program files 6 15 These are used according to subroutine instructions residing in the main program file or other subroutine files Data Files Data files contain the status information associated with external I O and all other instructions you use in your main and subroutine program files In addition these files store information concerning controller operation You can also use the files to store recipes and look up tables if needed These files are organized by the type of data they contain The data file types are Output This file stores the state of the output terminals for the controller e Input This file stores the status of the input terminals for the controller Status This file stores controller operation information It is useful for troubleshooting controller and program operation Bit This file is used for internal relay logic storage e Timer This file stores the timer accumulator and preset values and the status bits e Counter This file stores the counter accumulator and preset values and the status bits e Control This file stores the length position pointer and status bits for sp
96. Instruction HHP Display Mnemonic ee Use This Instruction When the Input HLEQr LD LEQ 59 appears first on a rung or block me anoieg ao geese ay bev teat onseg a1 B pbtedin paral th any wavs You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area The example below shows how to enter the LD LEQ instruction Use the same procedure to enter the other LEQ instructions only substitute the function code with one from the table above P000 HLEQ SRCA N11 0 P000 HLEQ SRCB 100 Greater Than GRT Ladder representation GRT GREATER THAN ER Source A N7 11 0 Source B 100 Execution Times usec when True False LDGRT 23 60 6 60 AND GRT 24 00 7 00 ORGRT 24 00 7 00 To enter the function code a Chapter 9 Using Comparison Instructions Use the GRT instruction to test whether one value source A is greater than another source B If the value at source A is greater than the value of source B the instruction is logically true If the value at source A is less than or equal to the value of source B the instruction is logically false Source A must be a word address Source B can be either a constant or word address Negative integers are stored in two s complement form Entering the Instruction HHP Display Mnemonic saa Use This Instruction When the Input HGRT LD GRT 62 appears first on a rung or block is placed
97. Instruction Type NEG 112 Negate Data Handling AND NEQ NEQ 54 NEQ LD NEQ NEQ 53 Not Equal Comparison OR NEQ NEQ H 55 NOT 111 Not Data Handling OR bit input ve 24 Or Basic OR word output 109 Or Data Handling ORB 14 Or Block Basic ORI LyH 25 Or Inverted Basic ORT ORTH 27 Or True Basic AND OSR OSR 29 T 7A T One Shot Rising Basic OUT basic instruction 40 Output Basic OUT high speed counter 40 To High Speed Counter RAC 172 le a ee ed High Speed Counter RES timer counter 7 Reset Basic RES high speed counter 7 Aa aa Counter High Speed Counter RET 134 Return from Subroutine Program Flow Control RST UU 42 Reset Basic RTO 2 Retentive Timer Basic SBR LD SBR HSBR FE 133 Subroutine Program Flow Control SCL 87 Scale Data Math SET Lj 41 Set Basic SQC 153 Sequencer Compare Application Specific SQL 154 Sequencer Load Application Specific SQO 152 Sequencer Output Application Specific SQR 86 Square Root Math STD 155 eee Application Specific STE 156 eae Application Specific STS 157 selectable Timer Application Specific Interrupt Start Multiple displays B 15 Appendix B Programming Reference Mnemonic nies y ae Name Instruction Type SUB 81 Subtract Math SUS 137 Suspend Program Flow Control TND 136 Temporary End Program Flow Control TOD 100 Convert to BCD Data Handling TOF 1 Timer Off Delay Basic TON 0 Ti
98. Instructions Comparison Instructions HHP n Function Display Mnemonic Code Name Purpose Page to LDMEQ 68 Masked Test portions of two values to see whether they are equal Compares meq AND MEQ 69 Comparison for 16 bit data of a source address to 16 bit data at a reference address 9 9 Equal through a mask co ORMEQ 70 y LIM LD LIM 71 LIM AND LIM 72 Limit Test Test whether one value is within the limit range of two other values 9 10 uve ORLIM 3 About the Comparison Comparison instructions are used to test pairs of values to condition the Instructions logical continuity of a rung As an example suppose a LES instruction is presented with two values If the first value is less than the second then the comparison instruction is true To learn more about the compare instructions we suggest that you read the Compare Instructions Overview that follows Com parison Instructions The following general information applies to comparison instructions Overview Entering the Instruction The following items apply when entering the instructions e Whenever you see asterisks on the display the HHP is waiting for data entry i e a number e You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key LY Then if you want to edit that operand press DEL or FUN DEL and enter new parameters Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one Once the ent
99. MSG instruction it is recommended that a Poll Timeout value of zero not be used Poll Timeout is disabled if set to zero Delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Pre send Time half duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs delay time to change 0 Delay from transmit to receive mode The valid range is 0 255 and can be Set in increments of 5 ms Specifies the number of times a slave device attempts to resend a Message message packet when it does not receive an ACK from the master 3 Retries device For use in noisy environments where message packets may become corrupted in transmission The valid range is 0 255 EOT Slave does not respond when polled if no message is queued Saves f modem transmission power when there is no message to transmit No Suppression Toggles between Yes and No D 5 Appendix D Understanding the Communication Protocols Rockwell Software WINtelligent LINX RS Linx 2 0 or higher SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 or PLC 5 processors configured for DF1 Half Duplex Master RS 232 DF 1 Protocol MicroLogix 1000 SLC 5 03 Processor MicroLogix 1000 icroLogix 1000 SLC 500 Programmable Modular Controller Programmable Programmable Fixed I O Controller Controller Series D Controller Series D Controller Series D with 1747 KE Interface Module Considerations When Communicating as a DF1 S
100. MicroLogix 1000 analog only To change the baud rate from the default value you must use a programming device S16L DH 485 Node Address Status This byte value contains the node address of your processor on the DH 485 link Each device on the DH 485 link must have a unique address between the decimal values 1 31 To change a processor node address you must use a programming device Address is not shown in HHP data monitor B 11 Appendix B Programming Reference Address S16H Bit DH 485 Baud Rate Classification Status Description This byte value contains the baud rate of the processor on the DH 485 link The controller baud rate options are 9600 19200 default To change the baud rate from the default value you must use a programming device 17 to 21 Reserved NA A 22 Maximum Observed Scan Time Dynamic Configuration This word indicates the maximum observed interval between consecutive program cycles This value indicates in 10 ms increments the time elapsed in the longest program cycle of the controller Refer to S 3L for more information regarding the program cycle The controller compares each last scan value to the value contained in 22 If the controller determines that the last scan value is larger than the value stored at 22 the last scan value is written to 5 22 Resolution of the maximum observed scan time value is 0
101. N7 91 CAL_SPAN N7 92 SCALE_HI N7 93 SCALE_LOW N7 94 SCALE_SPAN N7 95 SLOPE_X10K N7 97 OFFSET N7 100 ANALOG_SCALED N7 101 F 3 Appendix F Optional Analog Input S oftware Calibration F4 Rung 2 0 CAL_LO_ENABLE B3 504 Rung 2 1 CAL_HI_ENABLE B3 505 Rung 2 2 CALIBRATE B3 506 MULTIPLY OSR MOVE Source ANALOG_IN eh Dest LO_CAL_VALUE OSR MOVE Source ANALOG_IN 2il Dest HI_CAL_VALUE OSR SUBTRACT Source A HI_CAL_VALUE 0 Source B LO_CAL_VALUE 0 Dest CAL_SPAN 0 SUBTRACT Source A SCALE_HI 0 Source B SCALE_LO Ol Dest SCALE_SPAN 0 Source A SCALE_SPAN 0 Source B 10000 10000 Dest N7 96 DOUBLE DIVIDE Source CAL_SPAN Ol Dest SLOPE_X10K ol Ladder logic continued on the next page Appendix F Optional Analog Input S oftware Calibration MUL MULTIPLY Source A LO_CAL_VALUE 0l Source B SLOPE_X10K 0 Dest N7 98 0 4 DDV DOUBLE DIVIDE pa S S Source 10000 10000 Dest N7 99 0 SUB SUBTRACT Source A SCALE_LOW 0l Sour
102. OVac 5Vac OVde 5V dc 264V ac 125V dc 7 77 ZA Operating Range Chapter 2 Wiring Your Controller 1761 L16BWA Wiring Diagram Sinking Input Configuration Note Refer to page 2 2 for additional input configuration options 14 30V dc gt VDC VDC VDC Com e ps J were 4 7 O O O l 4 4 4 4 O QOO OOOO 2V DC 0 M 2 3 DC 4 5 We 7 ie I9 J com COM DC OUT p 85 264 VAC L1 L2 N E we l ovac vac wac l ovac voc 0 0 voc 0 1 voc 0 2 voc 0 3 voc 0 4 0 5 COOOOCOOOOCO OO S S amp e o VAC 2 voc 1 VDC 2 VDC 3 VAC 2 voc 1 VDC 2 COM COM COM VDC 3 COM VAC 1 VAC 1 COM 1761 L16BWA Input Voltage Range OV dc 5V de 14V dc OV dc 5V dc 14V dc 26 4V dc 55 C 131 F 30V dc 30 C 86 F ma JA On 1761 L16BWA Output Voltage Range OVac 5Vac OVde 5V dc 264V ac 125V dc Operating Range BEZ 2 9 Chapter 2 Wiring Your Controller 1761 L32BWA Wiring Diagram Sinking Input Configuration Note Refer to page 2 2 for additional input configuration options 14 30 V de
103. SET An extra output bit was set when the Extend 1 0 Configuration bit in the program configuration menu was reset For 16 point controllers m Set the Extend I O bit or change your application to prevent these bits from being turned on N Correct the program and re enter the RRUN RCSN orRSSN mode this includes bits 6 15 For 32 point controllers this includes bits 12 15 Valid for Series A C discrete only Recovering Your Work If the MicroLogix 1000 HHP is disconnected or power failure occurs the HHP retains any edits you made to the program before power was removed To recover your program with edits reconnect the HHP to the controller you were using when power was lost Important If you connect the MicroLogix 1000 HHP to a controller other than the one you were using while performing program edits you will lose your edits At the end of the power up sequence the HHP displays the screen shown below Program name EDITS EXIST This screen indicates that edits have been made to the program but have not yet been saved Important If power is removed for more than three days the retained program edits may be lost Calling Allen Bradley for Assistance If you need to contact Allen Bradley or your local distributor for assistance it is helpful to obtain the following prior to calling controller type series letter firmware FRN number see label on side of controller e
104. Screen Definition The following figure shows the menu screen and identifies its main sections gt 1 LANGUAGE 7 Menu Options Selected Menu 2 ACCEPT EDITS gt Option Section Description The list of options available in the menu functional area Menu Options These options are described in the manual at their point of use Selected Menu Option The option that the flashing arrow is pointing to a How to Complete Tasks You complete tasks by pressing the appropriate key or key sequence from the menu screen To Press go to a menu option when you know its menu corresponding number option choose the selected menu option ENT scroll up or down between the menu options gt return to the previous screen ESC 4 9 Chapter 4 Using Your Hand Held Programmer Access Mode by Mode pressing this key MODE From the mode functional area you can change the current mode of the E controller Screen Definition The following figure shows the mode screen and identifies its main sections Active Controller Mode ACTIVE MODE RPRG ln MRPRG RRUN i ye Controller Mode Options Section Description The current mode of the controller is displayed See the table below for a list of the possible display entries The controller mode options you can select RPRG RRUN RCSN and RSSN are accessed from this screen using the arrow keys Descriptions of each of these modes an
105. This method uses an SLC 5 04 processor bridge connection When using this method e PLC 5 devices can send read and write commands to MicroLogix controllers e MicroLogix 1000 controllers can respond to MSG instructions received The MicroLogix controllers cannot initiate MSG instructions to devices on the DH network PC can send read and write commands to MicroLogix controllers e PC can do remote programming of MicroLogix controllers ais o Pics DH Network SLC 5 04 i Modular 1 0 Controller MicroLogix 1000 ji Programmable _ Controller SLC 5 03 System MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Programmable Controller Controller D 17 Appendix Application Example Programs This appendix is designed to illustrate various instructions described previously in this manual Application example programs include e paper drilling machine using most of the software instructions time driven sequencer using TON and SQO instructions event driven sequencer using SQC and SQO instructions bottle line example using the HSC instruction up down counter pick and place machine example using the HSC instruction Quadrature encoder with reset and hold RPM calculation using HSC RTO timer and math instructions on off circuit using basic program flow and application specific instructions e spray booth usi
106. While viewing any instruction located on that rung press the key sequence shown here AN ALL Fun oet DELETE RUNG S XXX The confirmation screen shown above appears The number of the first rung to be deleted is shown in the lower left hand corner 3 Press the key shown below to indicate you are deleting a range of rungs ORB A dash appears on the screen 4 Type in the number of the last rung to be deleted This number can be less than or greater than the first rung The screen now looks like this DELETE RUNG S XX X X X X 5 Press ENT to delete the range of rungs The rungs indicated and all the rungs in between are deleted To abort this procedure press ESC Important If you delete a range of rungs you cannot undo the deletion Once the range of rungs is deleted the rung that immediately followed it in the program file is displayed 17 7 Chapter 17 Entering and Editing Your Program Searching for Specific Addresses 17 8 The search option allows you to quickly locate addresses in program files You can search for either an address that you enter or an address that is displayed Searching for an Address You Enter To enter an address and search for it press the key sequence shown here gt address This type of search can be invoked from any of the four functional areas e home screen e program monitor e data monitor e multi point The search begins f
107. a 10 16 32 I O point or analog micro controller you eliminate the need for hard wired relay logic This device also allows you to transfer programs to and from an optional removable memory module 4 1 Chapter 4 Using Your Hand Held Programmer The hardware features of the HHP are RS 232 communication channel 16 character x 2 line display 30 key rubber carbon keypad omi x Additional hardware features of the MicroLogix 1000 HHP are D E Memory module door Memory module Memory module socket 4 2 Installing the Optional Memory Module Chapter 4 Using Your Hand Held Programmer Two optional memory modules are available for the MicroLogix 1000 HHP e 8 Kbyte memory module 1761 HHM K08 stores 1 program possibly more than 1 depending on program size 64 Kbyte memory module 1761 HHM K64 stores a minimum of 8 programs For information on loading and storing programs to your memory module see page 19 1 ATTENTION Always remove power from the HHP before inserting or removing the memory module This guards against possible damage to the module as well as undesired controller faults ATTENTION To avoid potential damage to the memory modules handle them by the ends of the carrier or edges of the plastic housing Skin oil and dirt can corrode metallic surfaces inhibiting electrica
108. an ADD SUB MUL DIV or NEG instruction cannot be represented in the destination address due to math underflow or overflow The overflow bit SO 1 is set The overflow trap bit S5 0 is set e The destination address contains 32767 if the result is positive or 32768 if the result is negative Note that the status of bit S2 14 has no effect on the DDV instruction Also it has no effect on the math register content when using MUL and DIV instructions Example of 32 bit Addition The following example shows how a 16 bit signed integer is added to a 32 bit signed integer Remember that S2 14 must be set for 32 bit addition Note that the value of the most significant 16 bits B3 of the 32 bit number is increased by 1 if the carry bit S0 0 is set and is decreased by 1 if the number being added B1 is negative To avoid a major error from occurring at the end of the scan you must unlatch overflow trap bit S5 0 as shown Add 16 bit value B1 to 32 bit value B3 B2 Add Operation Addend B3 Addend B2 B1 Binary Hex Decimal 0000 0000 0000 0011 0001 1001 0100 0000 0003 1940 203 072 0101 0101 1010 1000 55A8 21 928 Sum B3 B2 0000 0000 0000 0011 0110 1110 1110 1000 0003 6EE8 225 000 10 6 The programming device displays 16 bit decimal values only The decimal value of a 32 bit integer is derived from the displayed binary or hex value For example 0003 1940 Hex is 164x3 163x1
109. analog input 8 pt relay output 1 pt analog output dc power supply controller 1761 L32BWB 20 pt dc input 12 pt relay output dc power supply controller 1761 L16BBB 10 pt dc input 4 pt FET and 2 pt relay outputs dc power supply controller 1761 L32BBB 20 pt dc input 10 pt FET and 2 pt relay outputs dc power supply controller 1761 L32AAA 20 pt ac input 10 pt triac and 2 pt relay outputs ac power supply controller Appendix A Hardware Reference General Specifications Description Specification 1761 L 16AWA 20AWA 5A 32AWA 10BWA 16BWA 20BWA 5A 32BWA 32AAA 16BBB 10BWB 16BWB 20BWB 5A_ 32BWB 32BBB Memory Size and 1K EEPROM approximately 737 instruction words 437 data words Type Power Supply 85 264V ac 47 63 Hz 20 4 26 4V dc Voltage Power 120Vac 15VA 20 VA 19 VA 24VA 26VA 30VA 29VA 16VA_ Not Applicable Suppl lene 240V ac 21VA 27VA 25 VA 32VA 33VA 38VA 36VA 22VA 24V dc Not Applicable 5W 10W 71W Power Supply 30A for 8 ms 30A for 4 ms 50A for 4 ms 30A for 4 ms Maximum Inrush Current 24V dc Sensor Not Applicable 200 mA Not Applicable Power V dc at mA Max Capacitive 200 uF Load User 24V dc Power Cycles 50 000 minimum Operating Temp Horizontal mounting 0 C to 55 C 32 F to 131 F for horizontal mounting Vertical mounting 0 C to 45 C 3
110. and re initializes the 1 4 in increments accumulator to how many increments were beyond 1000 FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 65 GEQ LD GEQ 1 4 in increments SRCA N10 0000H SRCB 1000 81 SUB 1 4 in increments SRCA N10 0000H SRCB 1000 DEST N20 0000H 80 ADD SRCA 1 1 4 in Thousands SRCB N11 0000H 1 4 in Thousands DEST N11 0000H 106 MOV SRC N20 0000H 1 4 in increments DEST N10 0000H Time Driven Sequencer Application Example Appendix E Application Example Programs The following application example illustrates the use of the TON and SQO instructions in a traffic signal at an intersection The timing requirements are e Red light 30 seconds e Yellow light 15 seconds Green light 60 seconds The timer when it reaches its preset steps the sequencer that in turn controls which traffic signal is illuminated For a detailed explanation of e LD LDI and TON instructions see chapter 8 SQO and SQC instructions see chapter 13 Time Driven Sequencer Ladder Program Rung 2 0 The function of this rung is called a regenerative timer Every time the timer reaches its preset the DONE bit is set for one scan this causes this rung to become FALSE for one scan and resets the timer On the following scan when this rung becomes TRUE again the timer begins timing Timer Timer Enable T4 0 TON 555 5 5555 J e e ae eres epee eee epee eee TIM
111. applications 23 recommendations 2 3 wire type 2 3 controller faults 20 1 controller modes changing remote modes 18 23 modes of operation 18 22 tasks you can perform 18 24 types of modes 18 22 remote program mode 18 22 remote run mode 18 22 remote test mode 18 22 controller operation normal 20 1 controller version changing the version the HHP supports 18 18 Convert from BCD FRD 11 3 entering the instruction 11 3 example 1 11 4 instruction list program 11 5 ladder representation 11 4 example 2 11 5 instruction list program 11 6 ladder representation 11 6 execution times 11 3 function code 11 4 instruction parameters C 5 ladder representation 11 3 updates to arithmetic status bits 11 3 valid addressing modes C 5 valid file types C 5 Convert to BCD TOD 11 2 changes to the math register 11 3 entering the instruction 11 2 execution times 11 2 function code 11 3 instruction parameters C 10 ladder representation 11 2 updates to arithmetic status bits 11 2 valid addressing modes C 10 valid file types C 10 Converting Analog Input Data 7 4 I 12 Converting Analog Output Data 7 5 COP Copy File 11 10 Copy File COP 11 10 entering parameters 11 10 entering the instruction 11 11 execution times 11 10 function code 11 11 instruction parameters C 3 ladder representation 11 10 using 11 10 valid addressing modes C 3 valid file types C 3 Count Down CTD 8
112. bit is cleared After transmission the bit is set again if there are further messages waiting It remains cleared if there are no further messages waiting 2 8 to 2 13 Reserved NA NA 2 14 Math Overflow Dynamic Set this bit when you intend to use 32 bit addition and Selection Configuration Subtraction When S 2 14 is set and the result of an ADD SUB MUL or DIV instruction cannot be represented in the destination address underflow or overflow the overflow bit S 0 1 is set the overflow trap bit S 5 0 is set and the destination address contains the unsigned truncated least significant 16 bits of the result The default condition of 2 14 is reset 0 When 2 14 is reset and the result of an ADD SUB MUL or DIV instruction cannot be represented in the destination address underflow or overflow the overflow bit S 0 1 is set the overflow trap bit S 5 0 is set and the destination address contains 32767 if the result is positive or 32768 if the result is negative Note that the status of bit S 2 14 has no effect on the DDV instruction Also it has no effect on the math register content when using MUL and DIV instructions To provide protection from inadvertent alteration of your selection program an unconditional OTL instruction at address S 2 14 to ensure the new math overflow operation Program an unconditional OTU instruction at address S 2 14 to ensure the original math overflow operation 2 15 Reserved NA N
113. bit remains set If the rung is true TT bit remains set ACC value is reset EN bitis reset If the rung is false TT bit is reset ACC value is reset 8 17 Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Timer Off Delay TOF Use the TOF instruction to delay turning on or off an output The TOF instruction begins to count timebase intervals when the rung makes a Ladder representation true to false transition As long as rung conditions remain false the timer TOF increments its accumulated value ACC each scan until it reaches the preset TIMER OFF DELAY _ EN value PRE The controller resets the accumulated value when rung came pgs conditions go true regardless of whether the timer has timed out Time Base 0 01 DN Preset 120 Accum 0 Using Status Bits Execution Times usec when And Ramalne SA Unio nd Remains Set Until One 39 42 31 65 Timer Done Bit DN bit 13 rung conditions are true rung conditions go false and the accumulated value is greater than or equal to the preset value Timer Timing Bit TT bit14 rung conditions are false and rung conditions go true or the accumulated value is less when the done bit is reset than the preset value Timer Enable Bit EN bit15 rung conditions are true rung conditions go false Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To enter the function code press AN FUN gt
114. can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key WY Then if you want to edit that operand press DEL or FUN DEL and enter new parameters Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one Once the entire instruction is entered if you want to edit the instruction s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode See page 17 4 Effects on Index Register S24 The shift operation clears the index register S24 to zero When the rung goes from false to true the controller sets the enable bit EN bit 15 and the data block is shifted to the left to a higher bit number one bit position The specified bit at the bit address is shifted into the first bit position The last bit is shifted out of the array and stored in the unload bit UL bit 10 The shift is completed immediately For wraparound operation set the bit address to the last bit of the array or to the UL bit Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area P009 BSL R 3 P009 BSL LEN ae Se A 13 3 Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions Bit Shift Right BSR Ladder representation BSR BIT SHIFT RIGHT File B3 2 Control R6 4 Bit Address I 0 6 Length 38 EN DN Execution Times usec when True False 53 34 3 98 x 19 80 position value 13 4 A Operation The operation of the BSL instruction is shown in the figure below T
115. condition all message instructions This bit only allows the message instruction to operate when the correct protocol is active The read message enabled bit N7 60 15 is used to open the rung of the write message when the read message is active This sequences the write message to proper state allowing immediate transmission when the read message completes its operation NOTE If DF1 was the protocol used by the message instruction use 2 0 11 for the preceding logic DH 485 Active Read Message Write Message Ins Enabled S2 0 N7 60 MSG ae NN leases Read Write Message EN 11 15 Read Write Write DN Target Device 500CPU ER Control Block N7 50 Control Block Length l Setup Screen 4 Rung 2 2 Write message with preceding logic t is STRONGLY recommended that bit S 2 0 11 active protocol bit be used to condition all message instructions This bit only allows the message instruction to operate when the correct protocol is active The write message enabled bit N7 50 13 is used to enable the read message as soon as the write message completes its operation NOTE If DF1 was the protocol used by the message instruction use S 2 0 11 for the preceding logic DH 485 Active Read Message Read Message Ins Enabled S220 N7 50 tS Gr mses Pastas 77s seasscsasa Read Write Message EN 11 13 Read Write Read DN Ta
116. counter rung is enabled the CU or CD bit is reset If the counter preset value is negative the RES instruction sets the accumulated value to zero This in turn causes the done bit to be set by a count down or count up instruction ATTENTION Because the RES instruction resets the accumulated value and the done timing and enabled bits do not use the RES instruction to reset a timer address used in a TOF instruction Otherwise unpredictable machine operation or injury to personnel may occur 8 27 Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Basic Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Application Example 8 28 To demonstrate the use of basic instructions this section provides ladder rungs followed by the optimized instruction list for these rungs The rungs are part of the paper drilling machine application example described in appendix D You will be updating the main program in file 2 and adding a subroutine to file 6 Updating File 2 The rungs shown on the following page are referred to as the program s start up logic They determine the conditions necessary to start the machine in motion by monitoring the start and stop push buttons When the start push button is pressed it enables the conveyor to move and start spinning the drill bit When the stop push button is pressed it disables the conveyor motion and turns off the drill motor The start up logic also checks to make sure that the drill is fully retracted
117. delete all key sequence A ALL Euf CLEAR LIST YES ENT NO ESC 18 33 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program Forcing Inputs and Outputs 18 34 3 Confirm the deletion to remove the addresses ENT Press ESC if you do not want to clear the list The Force function allows you to override the actual status of external input circuits by forcing external input data file bits On or Off You can also override the controller logic and status of output data file bits by forcing output circuits On or Off Important Forces are always enabled but must be set to be active You can set forces while the controller is in any mode ATTENTION To avoid possible personal injury and damage to equipment investigate the effects on machine operation before forcing external input data file bits or external output circuits ATTENTION Forces override any output control from either the high speed counter or from the output image Forces may also be applied to the high speed counter inputs Forced inputs are recognized by the high speed counter e g forcing a count input On and Off increments the high speed accumulator Forcing External Input Data File Bits Setting forces on input data file bits affects the input data file and also the program logic The effects on the program logic of set forces can be seen from the program monitor and the data monitor functional areas when in RRUN RCSN or RSSN The following is an e
118. do not energize output circuits The following is an example program monitor display of instruction O 1 in rung 1 The display indicates that the controller is in RRUN and no forces exist Root OY C R The procedure for forcing external output circuits is the same as forcing external input data file bits 1 Press the force On key A confirmation screen appears FON C FORCE BIT ON YES ENT a 2 Accept the confirmation to force the bit On ENT R001 F FON 0 1 0 For the display shown above the following is now true e Output O 1 is forced On however the instruction state box is not filled because the instruction is not logically true e The controller s output LED is on e The controller s Forced I O LED is on continuously 18 37 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program 18 38 Guide to Forcing External Output Circuits The following occurs in the Run mode e The program is scanned and control logic is applied e Instruction state boxes are filled for true bit instructions e Controller output LEDs go on and are maintained for all forced external output circuits The table below shows the keys and key sequences involved with setting and clearing forces A confirmation screen appears following each of these Key or Key Sequence Operation FOF R If the controller is in RRUN the bit is forced Off and the data file bit is unaffected outp
119. done bit is set when the last word of the sequencer file is transferred On the next false to true rung transition the instruction resets the position to step one If the position is equal to zero at startup when you switch the controller from the RPRG mode to the RRUN mode instruction operation depends on whether the rung is true or false on the first scan e If true the instruction transfers the value in step zero e If false the instruction waits for the first rung transition from false to true and transfers the value in step one The bits mask data when reset and pass data when set The instruction will not change the value in the destination word unless you set mask bits The mask can be fixed or variable It will be fixed if you enter a hexadecimal code It will be variable if you enter an element address or a file address for changing the mask with each step Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To enter the function code press K P014 sao FILE 4 amp Le P014 sao MASK OFOFH P014 sao DEST 00 P014 sao CTRL R5 P014 sao LEN ke kK ke ek k 4 P014 sao POS ke kK ke ke k 2 13 8 Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions Operation The operation of the SQO instruction is shown in the figure below The screens shown above the figure are the condensed screens that appear after instruction ent
120. e The output circuit that follows the MRD is not the last output circuit in the rung requiring the rung state stored by the MPS If it is the last output circuit requiring the stored rung state you must use an MPP instruction instead of an MRD instruction Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area P000 MRD The example below illustrates when you would enter the MRD instruction Instruction List a ii e NEW RUNG l C LDa 1 MPS 2 AND b OUT c g 2 MRD 3 C AND d OUT e 3 MPP AND f OUT g Using MPP Like the MRD instruction the MPP instruction reads the rung state stored by the MPS instruction and resumes operation using that rung state Unlike the MRD instruction the MPP also clears the rung state from the MPS This instruction can only be used if all of the following statements are true e An MPS instruction was used previously on the rung e The MPP is immediately preceded by an output instruction e An output circuit immediately follows the MPP e The output circuit that follows the MPP is the last output circuit in the rung requiring the rung state stored by the MPS If it is not the last output circuit requiring the stored rung state you must use an MRD instruction instead of an MPP instruction 8 11 Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions To ente
121. fault routine If the fault routine ladder logic does not understand the fault code or if the routine determines that itis not desirable to continue operation the controller exits the fault routine with bit 1 13 set The outputs are placed in a safe state and the FAULT LED is blinking Continued on next page Address 1 13 1 13 Bit Major Error Halted Major Error Halted Classification Dynamic Configuration Dynamic Configuration Appendix B Programming Reference Description1 When you clear bit S 1 13 using a programming device the controller mode changes from fault to Remote Program You can move a value to S 6 then set S 1 13 in your ladder program to generate an application specific major error All application generated faults are recoverable regardless of the value used Note Once a major fault state exists you must correct the condition causing the fault and you must also clear this bit in order for the controller to accept a mode change attempt into REM Run or REM Test Also clear S 6 to avoid the confusion of having an error code but no fault condition Note Do not re use error codes that are defined later in this appendix as application specific error codes Instead create your own unique codes This prevents you from confusing application errors with system errors We recommend using error codes FFOO to FFOF to indicate application specific major errors 114 OEM Lock Static
122. first one OR Ps eyt Hee 9 B 0 P 000 O H B 0 0 Enter a normally closed instruction in series ANT with the first two ANI ETE 5 T P 000 a 1 7 0 Enter the first output instruction OUT on the rung OUT 7 MT PT ORB ANB gt gt gt gt ENT P000 to B 0 0 Start a new rung after the first one and enter another LD instruction LD ANG MT PT ORB ANB T gt HI gt B gt gt gt ENT 7 e 0 P001 FH B 0 0 Add an output instruction to the rung As with entering the input file type the HHP automatically shows the character for the output file type OUT MODE gt gt 4 gt ENT ES 2 25 ess P 001 to 0 5 0 Chapter 5 Quick Start for New Users 9 Add the final output instruction to the rung OUT 7 MODE g t a gi 1 1 10 Return to the home screen ESC MICRO RPRG FREE FILE 02 The RPRG is flashing because edits exist Also the number of free instruction words is not known until the program is checked so three asterisks are displayed Changing to Run Mode Now that you have entered a program you can run it by changing to run mode Verify the mode by looking in the upper right hand corner of the HHP display Right now it reads RPRG remote program mode To change into remote run mode RRUN follow these steps 1 Access the mode options MODE Oo ACTIVE MODE RPRG lt JBRPRG RRUN
123. for Sinking VDC for Sinking Dt tt tee RASA DELLELLELEL EL ELE eeeeeeeeeecceeooececcece He hee Oe 1 0 1 1 1 2 ig COM 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 17 1 18 m Wiring Recommendations l l ATTENTION Before you install and wire any device disconnect power to the controller system The following are general recommendations for wiring your controller system e Fach wire terminal accepts 2 wires of the size listed below Wire Type Wire Size 2 wire maximum per terminal screw Solid 14 to 22 AWG Stranded 16 to 22 AWG Refer to page 2 23 for wiring your high speed counter Important The diameter of the terminal screw heads is 5 5 mm 0 220 in The input and output terminals of the micro controller are designed for the following spade lugs 2 3 Chapter 2 Wiring Your Controller Call out Dimension C 6 35 mm 0 250 in E 10 95 mm 0 431 in maximum L 14 63 mm 0 576 in maximum Ww 6 35 mm 0 250 in 3 56 mm 0 140 in 9 91 mm 0 390 in maximum Cy x ae gt lt We recommend using either of the following AMP spade lugs part number 53120 1 if using 22 16 AWG or part number 53123 1 if using 16 14 AWG Important If you use wires without lugs make sure the wires are securely captured by the
124. for data collection Provides communication between stations on the PLC 5 DH and SLC 500 f DH 485 networks Enables communication 1785 KA5 te a teed LC and data transfer from PLC to SLC 500 on ee eee Y DH 485 network Also enables programming E software programming or data acquisition across DH to DH 485 Provides an interface for SLC 500 using protocol cartridge 2760 SFC3 to other A B Flexible Interface 1771 PLC PLCs and devices Three configurable etRe Module Chassis channels are available to interface with Bar 2760 NDO01 Code Vision RF Dataliner and PLC systems 1784 KTX IBM XT AT f F KTXD PC DH 485 IM Computer Bus Provides DH 485 using RSLinx 1784 6 5 22 PCMCIA slot in 1784 P CMK PCMCIA IM computer and Provides DH 485 using RSLinx 1784 6 5 19 Interchange Hand Held Provides hand held programming 1747 PT1 NA monitoring configuring and troubleshooting 1747 NP002 Terminal aia capabilities for SLC 500 processors 1747 DTAM 2707 L8P 1 L8P2 L40P1 DTAM L40P2 DTAM P lus nd Provides electronic operator interface for LANDo V40P1 DTAM Micro Panel Mount SLC 500 any 2707 800 V40P2 Operator P 2707 803 V40P2N Interfaces M232P3 and M485P 3 2711 K5A2 a Pee PanelView 550 and PanelView Provides electronic operator interface for 2711 802 eee 900 Operator FanelMount SLC 500 processors 2711 816 hehe eae i T9A5 K9A1 and T9A1 NA Not Applicable D 11 Appendix D Understan
125. increments and re initializes the 1 4 in increments accumulator to how many increments were beyond 1000 1 4 in increments GEQ SUB GRTR THAN OR EQUAL SUBTRACT Source A N7 10 Source A N7 10 ol ol Source B 1000 Source B 1000 eae F Dest N7 20 0 1 4 in Thousands ADD ADD Source A 1 Source B N7 11 0 Dest N7 11 0 1 4 in increments MOV MOVE Source N7 20 0 Dest N7 10 0 4 Rung 7 7 END E 13 Appendix E Application Example Programs Paper Drilling Machine Instruction List Program File 2 Rung 0 Initializes the high speed counter each time the RRUN mode is entered The high speed counter data area N7 5 N7 9 corresponds with the starting address source address of the HSL instruction The HSC instruction is disabled each entry into the RRUN mode until the first time that it is executed as true The high preset was pegged on initialization to prevent a high preset interrupt from occurring during the initialization process FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 i a Ma LD 1 st Pass 1 15 0 06 MOV SRC 1 Output Mask only use bit 0 ie 0
126. inguk Signal A 120 240V ac A 120V ac B 24V dc B 24V dc Output Type W Relay B MOSFET A Triac The hardware features of the controller are Input terminals dc output terminals or not used 2 3 oOo Mounting hole Input LEDs z 00000000 IN Status LEDs POWER f RUN RS 232 communication channel 6 IS FAULT FORCE Output LEDs poooog OUT Power supply line power Ground screw Output terminals OHO COOCOLOO 20142 8 9 Master Control Relay Chapter 1 Installing Your Controller A hard wired master control relay MCR provides a reliable means for emergency controller shutdown Since the master control relay allows the placement of several emergency stop switches in different locations its installation is important from a safety standpoint Overtravel limit switches or mushroom head push buttons are wired in series so that when any of them opens the master control relay is de energized This removes power to input and output device circuits Refer to the figure on page 1 5 ATTENTION Never alter these circuits to defeat their function since serious injury and or machine damage could result Important If you are using an external dc output power supply interrupt the dc output side rather than the ac line side of the supply to avoid the additional delay of power supply turn off The external ac line of the dc output power supply should be fused Connect a set of master
127. input value of 4096 is in the input image the calculated value is 21 mA 32 767 4096 2 625 mA It should be noted that the actual value may vary within the accuracy limitations of the module Converting Analog Output Data Use the following equation to determine the decimal value for the current output 32 767 16 mA For example if an output value of 8 mA is desired the value to be putin the corresponding word in the output image can be calculated as follows 32 767 16 mA x Desired Current Output mA 4 mA Output Decimal Value x 8 mA 4 mA 8192 Use the following equation to determine the decimal value for the voltage output 32 767 l Iod X Desired Voltage Output V dc Output Decimal Value For example if an output value of 1V dc is desired the value to be put in the corresponding word in the output image can be calculated as follows 32 767 1 1V dc 3277 10V dc 5 a 7 5 Bit Instructions Chapter Using Basic Instructions This chapter contains general information about basic instructions and explains how they function in your application program Each of the basic instructions includes information on e what the instruction symbol looks like e typical execution time for the instruction e how to use the instruction e how to enter the instruction In addition the last section contains an application example for a paper drilling machine that shows the basic ins
128. instructions You will learn about these instructions in chapters 6 and 13 For now though we will use them to give you an idea of how to enter a simple program using the MicroLogix 1000 HHP The following diagram is the ladder representation of what you will enter in the HHP 5 4 Chapter 5 Quick Start for New Users Enter the rungs by completing the steps that follow Important If you make an error at any time you can abandon the operation by pressing the ESC key 1 From the home screen access the program monitor display for the program MICRO mon ent P START FILE 02 MAIN PROG The start of file screen appears This is where you start inserting the program rungs 2 Insert a rung in file 2 the main program file Remember the MicroLogix 1000 HHP is designed to distinguish which function you want to perform based on the context you are in at the time you press a key Therefore pressing the key shown below will automatically access a new rung and not a T NEW RUNG ae pee The P in the upper left hand corner is flashing because you are making changes to the program 3 Enter the first normally open instruction LD on the rung For the input file type the character is automatically displayed by the HHP LD HI mewu A ie gt ENT 7 l 6 P000 FH 1 6 0 5 5 Chapter 5 Quick Start for New Users 5 6 Place a normally open instruction in parallel OR with the
129. instructions or to delete typed characters when entering parameters See page 17 6 delete program rungs or to delete all typed AA characters from a line See page 17 6 FUN DEL M gt o Te add a rung to the current program file after AUNG the current rung T force On an external input data file bit or FON output circuit See page 18 35 C force Off an external input data file bit or FOF output circuit See page 18 35 R z FUN gt FF remove a set force from an external input data file bit or output circuit See page or 18 35 A ON FUN gt T search for an instruction or address See SEARCH page 17 8 N toggle the editing mode between overwrite OVR and append See page 17 3 FAULT view faults manually See page 20 11 PI clear a fault manually See page 20 11 foei Continued on following page 4 12 Access Data Monitor by pressing these keys data file e g I Chapter 4 Using Your Hand Held Programmer To Press access the data monitor functional area at the address shown in the screen tdi move up and down between a program s rungs and program files move left and right through each rung of a program When the end of a rung is reached the next rung automatically scrolls into view as you move the cursor right or left in the program return to the home screen ESC enter the character for an indexed address F N
130. is activated FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 158 INT LD INT 22 ie AND interrupt occurred due to low preset reached CO IL 0 7 RES 3 hole preset sequencer R4 7 RES 5 hole preset sequencer R5 7 RES 7 hole preset sequencer R6 File 4 Rung 10 Keeps track of the hole number that is being drilled and loads the correct high speed counter preset based on the hole count This rung is only active when the hole selector switch is in the 3 hole position The sequencer uses step 0 as a null step upon reset It uses the last step as a go forever in anticipation of the end of manual hard wired external reset FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 21 i1 LDI hole selector switch bit 0 1 9 0 22 AND hole selector switch bit 1 I 10 0 152 SQO FILE N50 MASK FFFFH High Preset Value counts to next hole DEST N7 3 hole preset sequencer CTRL R4 LEN 5 POS 0000H 42 RST force the sequencer to increment on next scan R4 EN 1 This rung accesses 1 0 only available with 32 1 0 controllers Therefore do not include this rung if you are using a 16 1 0 controller 13 23 Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions 13 24 File 4 Rung 2 Is identical to the previous rung except that it is only active when the hole selector switch is in the 5 hole position FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC N
131. light turns on When 25 500 inches have been drilled the Change Drill Soon pilot light flashes When 26 000 inches have been drilled the Change Drill Now pilot light turns on and the machine turns off The operator changes drill bits and then resets the internal drill wear counter by turning the Drill Change Reset keyswitch E 3 Appendix E Application Example Programs Paper Drilling Machine Ladder Program Rung 2 0 Initializes the high speed counter each time the RRUN mode is entered The high speed counter data area N7 5 N7 9 corresponds with the starting address source address of the HSL instruction The HSC instruction is disabled each entry into the RRUN mode until the first time that it is executed as true The high preset was pegged on initialization to prevent a high preset interrupt from occurring during the initialization process Lost Output Mask Pass only use bit 0 ie 0 0 0 S 1 MOV MOVE 15 Source Li Dest N7 5 0 4 High Output Pattern turn off 0 0 0 MOV MOVE Source 0 Dest N7 6 0 4 High Preset Value counts to next hole MOV MOVE Source 32767 Dest N7 7 0 4 Low output pattern turn on 0 0 0 each reset MOV MOVE Source 1
132. loaded into the FIFO 3 the presence or absence of a part on the part carrier is shifted into the Shift Register Shift Unload color Limit of previously Switch painted part I 0 FFU FIFO UNLOAD EU 0 FIFO N7 0 DN Dest N7 10 EM Control R6 0 Length 4 Position 4 4 Load color of new part RE LA SSS aS 5444 FIFO LOAD EU Source N7 4 DN FIFO N7 0 EM Control R6 0 Length 4 Position 4 Load the presence of the new part TBS kas e Ss BIT SHIFT LEFT EU File B3 0 DN Control R6 1 Bit Address I 0 1 Length 4 4 E 51 Appendix E Application Example Programs E 52 Rung 2 4 f there is a part on the part carrier now entering the spraying area energize the paint sprayer If there is not a part on the part carrier do not energize the sprayer BSL Spray position 4 Enable B3 O20 FERU e ma a a a a O 3 3 Rung 275 Decodes color select word If N7 0 1 then energize the blue paint gun Or if N7 0 an invalid color selection default the color of the part to blue and energize the blue paint gun Source A N7 0 0 EQUAL 4 4 Source B LIMIT TEST Low Limit 4 Test N7 0 ol High Lim Rung 2 6 Decodes col
133. lt Count Down i CTD 32 767 Overflow The CTU is an instruction that counts false to true rung transitions Rung transitions can be caused by events occurring in the program from internal logic or by external field devices such as parts traveling past a detector or actuating a limit switch When rung conditions for a CTU instruction have made a false to true transition the accumulated value is incremented by one count provided that the rung containing the CTU instruction is evaluated between these transitions The ability of the counter to detect false to true transitions depends on the speed frequency of the incoming signal Important The on and off duration of an incoming signal must not be faster than the scan time x2 assuming a 50 duty cycle The accumulated value is retained when the rung conditions again become false The accumulated count is retained until cleared by a reset RES instruction that has the same address as the counter reset Using Status Bits This Bit Count Up Overflow Bit OV bit 12 Is Set When accumulated value wraps around to 32 768 from 32 767 and continues counting up from there And Remains Set Until One of the Following a RES instruction having the same address as the CTU instruction is executed OR the count is decremented less than or equal to 32 767 with a CTD instruction Done Bit DN bit 13 accumulated value is equal to or greater than the preset v
134. monitor functional area The following items apply when entering the instruction e Whenever you see asterisks on the display the HHP is waiting for data entry i e a number e You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key Noy Then if you want to edit that operand press DEL or FUN DEL and enter new parameters Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one Once the entire instruction is entered if you want to edit the instruction s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode See page 17 4 To enter the function code press F P006 I OM ADDR AO 2 6 Le Tee P006 1 OM MASK OO3FH 12 9 Chapter 12 Using Program Flow Control Instructions Program Flow Control Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Application Example 12 10 To demonstrate the use of program flow control instructions this section provides ladder rungs followed by the optimized instruction list for these rungs The rungs are part of the paper drilling machine application example described in appendix E You will be adding to the main program in file 2 The new rungs are needed to call the other subroutines containing the logic necessary to run the machine Ladder Rungs Rung 2 5 Calls the drill sequence subroutine This subroutine manages the operation of a drilling sequence and restarts the conveyor upon completion of the drilling sequence nn on a ein a JUMP TO SUBROUTINE SBR file n
135. of the controller is shown in the upper right hand corner of the MicroLogix 1000 HHPs home screen The table below shows the possible display entries and the corresponding micro controller mode Display Entry Micro Controller Mode RPRG Remote Program RRUN Remote Run RCSN Remote Test Continuous Scan RSSN Remote Test Single Scan RSUS Remote Suspend FLT Fault The controller only enters suspend mode if you run a program that executes a suspend instruction The controller only enters fault mode if while a program is executing a fault occurs within the operating system or the program or setting S 1 13 in any mode See page 20 11 for information on identifying and Clearing faults You can place the micro controller in remote program run and test modes using the mode key Each of these modes is described below Changing modes is described on page 18 22 Remote Program Mode The remote program mode RPRG allows you to modify your program edit data and transfer programs to and from the memory module In this mode the processor does not scan or execute the ladder program and all outputs are de energized Remote Test Mode While you are in the remote test mode the controller monitors input devices scans or executes the program and updates the output data files without energizing output circuits or devices There are two remote test modes available Remote Continuous Scan RCSN This t
136. program edits for this change to take affect For information on accepting edits see page 18 21 18 7 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program Setting the Extended I O Configuration Bit When this bit is set to NO and unused outputs are written to the controller will fault Therefore this bit must be set to YES if writing to unused outputs For a 16 I O controller O 6 O 15 are unused outputs For a 32 I O controller O 12 O 15 are unused outputs Note This selection is valid for Series A C discrete only To change the bit setting 1 Put the controller in RPRG mode if it is not already in that mode 2 Access the program configuration menu 3 Arrow down to the option EXTEND IO CNFG and select it Saree Go NEG OYes HNO 4 Select the option YES and return to the home screen gt enr ese ese 5 You must accept your program edits for this change to take affect For information on accepting edits see page 18 21 18 8 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program Setting the STI Setpoint The STI setpoint is the time between successive executions of the STI subroutine The allowable range is from 10 ms to 2550 ms entered in 10 ms increments A setpoint of zero disables the setpoint function Important The setpoint value must be a longer time than the execution time of the STI subroutine file or a minor error bit is set To change the setting 1 Access the p
137. repeated use of simple functions that can be either true or false General term for digital circuits and programmed instructions to perform required decision making and computational functions Master Control Relay MCR A mandatory hardwired relay that can be de energized by any series connected emergency stop switch Whenever the MCR is de energized its contacts open to de energize all application I O devices mnemonic A simple and easy to remember term that is used to represent a complex or lengthy set of information modes Selected methods of operation Example RRUN RCSN RSSN or RPRG G 3 Glossary G 4 negative logic The use of binary logic in such a way that 0 represents the voltage level normally associated with logic 1 for example 0 5V 1 OV Positive is more conventional for example 1 5V 0 OV network A series of stations nodes connected by some type of communication medium A network may be made up of a single link or multiple links nominal input current The current at nominal input voltage normally closed Contacts on a relay or switch that are closed when the relay is de energized or the switch is de activated they are open when the relay is energized or the switch is activated In Instruction List programming a symbol that allows logic continuity flow if the referenced input is logic 0 when evaluated normally open Contacts on a relay or switch that are o
138. signifies the top of a program file It is from this screen that you add the first rung to the file 17 1 Chapter 17 Entering and Editing Your Program 17 2 File names appear in the lower left hand corner of only two of the Start of File screens Program file 2 has the default name MAIN_PROG since it is the main program file and file 3 has the default name USER_FAULT since this program file is only executed when a fault occurs The program file names can be changed using the programming software End of File Screen P000 END FILE 02 As the name implies this screen signifies the end of a program file If you do not add any rungs to a program file the End of File screen is labeled rung 0 as it is considered the only rung in the file Start of Rung Screen P000 F The Start of Rung screen shows the Start of Rung SOR symbol As the name implies this symbol indicates the start of a new rung Important Every rung must begin with an SOR symbol To add an SOR symbol to the program file press the key shown here NEW RUNG T To create the first rung in the program file you must press this key while viewing the Start of File screen First Instruction on Rung Screen POCO FRH 1 6 0 The First Instruction on Rung screen shows the SOR symbol to the left of the first instruction entered onto the rung For example the screen above shows the SOR symbol to the left of a LD instruction Editing Consider
139. sure that the edit mode is set to append P Toggle the edit mode key if necessary 2 Arrow to the location where you want to add an instruction The table below describes from where you can add an instruction You can add an instruction But you must atthe beginning of an existing rung go to the Start of Rung screen after an existing instruction on a have the existing instruction rung displayed any parameter of it 17 3 Chapter 17 Entering and Editing Your Program 17 4 Important You cannot add an instruction when the current display is the End of File screen To add an instruction to the end of a rung you must be on the rung s last instruction 3 Press the instruction key or enter the function code corresponding to the instruction you want to enter Adding a Rung Follow these steps to add a rung 1 Make sure that the edit mode is set to append P Toggle the edit mode key if necessary OVR 2 Arrow to the location you want to add a rung The table below describes from where you can add a rung You can add a rung But you must at the beginning of a program file go to the Start of File screen have the existing rung displayed any instruction on it after an existing rung Important You cannot add a rung when the current display is the End of File screen To add a rung to the end of the program file you must be on the file s last rung 3 Add the rung by pressing the N
140. the cable Use these instructions for wiring the Belden 3106A or 9842 cable If you are using standard Allen Bradley cables see the Cable Selection Guide on page 3 8 Connecting the Communication Cable to the DH 485 Connector Important A daisy chained network is recommended We do not recommend the following Belden Belden Belden 3106A or 3106A or 3106A or 9842 AS 10842 ZR 10842 Connector N Connector Connector Incorrect Single Cable Connection Orange with White Stripes om S White with Orange Strip Shrink Tubing Recommended Blue 3106A or Blue with White Stripes 9842 1 Chassis Ground Drain Wire Multiple Cable Connection to Previous Device to Successive Device Chapter 3 Connecting the System The table below shows connections for Belden 3106A For this Wire Pair Connect this Wire To this Terminal Shield Drain Non jacketed Terminal 2 Shield Blue Blue Terminal 3 Common White with Orange Stripe Terminal 4 Data B White Orange Orange with White Stripe Terminal 5 Data A The table below shows connections for Belden 9842 For this Wire Pair Connect this Wire To this Terminal Shield Drain Non jacketed Terminal 2 Shield White with Blue Stripe Cut back no connection Blue White Blue with White Stripe Terminal 3 Common White with Orange Stripe Terminal 4
141. the four BCD input signals prior to executing the BCD to Integer instruction FRD The thumbwheel is used to allow the operator to enter the thickness of the paper that is to be drilled The thickness is entered in 1 4 in increments This provides a range of 1 4 in to 2 25 in FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 10 MPS 22 AND BCD bit 0 EALL 0 40 OUT FRD bit 0 N14 0 0 Ma MRD 22 AND BCD bit 1 I 12 0 40 OUT FRD bit 1 N14 1 0 11 MRD 22 AND BCD bit 2 I 13 0 40 OUT FRD bit 2 N14 2 0 12 MPP 22 AND BCD bit 3 I 14 0 40 OUT FRD bit 3 N14 3 0 This rung accesses 1 0 only available with 32 1 0 controllers Therefore do not include this rung if you are using a 16 1 0 controller 11 32 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions File 7 Rung 3 Converts the BCD thumbwheel value from BCD to integer This is done because the controller operates upon integer values This rung also debounces the thumbwheel to ensure that the conversion only occurs on valid BCD values Note that invalid BCD values can occur while the operator is changing the BCD thumbwheel This is due to input filter propagation delay differences between the four input circuits that provide the BCD input value FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 10 MPS 23 ANI 1 st pass bit 1 15 0 51 EQU AND EQU previous scan
142. the function code press A Pi Ger Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions The OSR instruction is a retentive input instruction that triggers an event to occur one time Use the OSR instruction when an event must start based on the change of state of the rung from false to true When the rung conditions preceding the OSR instruction go from false to true the OSR instruction becomes true for one scan After one scan is complete the OSR instruction becomes false even if the rung conditions preceding it remain true The OSR instruction only becomes true again if the rung conditions preceding it transition from false to true The controller allows you to use one OSR instruction per output in a rung Entering Parameters The address assigned to the OSR instruction is not the one shot address referenced by your program nor does it indicate the state of the OSR instruction This address allows the OSR instruction to remember its previous rung state Use a bit address from either the bit or integer data file The addressed bit is set 1 as long as rung conditions preceding the OSR instruction are true even if the OSR instruction has become false the bit is reset 0 when rung conditions preceding the OSR instruction are false Important The bit address you use for this instruction must be unique Do not use it elsewhere in the program Do not use an input or output address to program the address parameter of the OSR instruction
143. the next scan R6 5 s U aaa ease ses e ease sas Rung 4 30 s identical to the two previous rungs except that it is only active when the hole selector switch is in the 7 hole position hole hole 7 hole selector selector preset switch switch sequencer bit 0 ibit I T0 E0 PEQO Reo SSeS SEQUENCER OUTPUT EN 9 10 File N7 62 DN Mask FFFF Dest N7 7 Control R6 6 Length 9 Position ol force the sequencer to increment on the next scan R6 6 aa SS Sea SSeS ees This rung accesses 1 0 only available with 32 1 0 controllers Therefore do not include this rung if you are using a 16 1 0 controller This instruction accesses 1 0 only available with 32 I O controllers Therefore do not include this instruction if you are using a 16 1 0 controller More rungs will be added to this subroutine at the end of chapter 14 13 22 Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions Instruction List File 4 Rung 0 Resets the hole count sequencers each time that the low preset is reached The low preset has been set to zero to cause an interrupt to occur each time that a reset occurs The low preset is reached anytime that a reset C5 0 or hardware reset occurs This ensures that the first preset value is loaded into the high speed counter at each entry into the RRUN mode and each time that the external reset signal
144. the next time the MSG instruction is scanned If the reply contains I have successfully performed your read request and here is your data the data is written to the appropriate data table the DN bit is set and the ST bit is cleared The MSG instruction function is complete If the MSG rung is false the EN bit is cleared the next time the MSG instruction is scanned If the reply contains I have not performed your request because of an error the ER bit is set and the ST bit is cleared The MSG instruction function is complete If the MSG rung is false the EN bit is cleared the next time the MSG instruction is scanned Chapter 15 Using Communication Protocols MSG Instruction Error Codes Any MSG instruction that is in progress during a network protocol switch is not processed and is discarded For more information on network protocol switching see page 3 12 When an error condition occurs the error code is stored in the lower byte of the first control word assigned to the MSG instruction Error Code 02H Target node is busy 03H Target node cannot respond because message is too large 04H Target node cannot respond because it does not understand the command parameters OR the control block may have been inadvertently modified 05H Local processor is offline possible duplicate node situation 06H Target node cannot respond because requested function is not available 07H Target node does not resp
145. the operator to change the drill bit Note For 32 I O controllers If the operator ignores this warning too long this ladder shuts the machine down until the operator changes the bit OPERATOR PANEL CO QAQ Stop 1 7 apt Change ToolSoon Change Tool Now 0 4 0 6 Thumbwheel for Thickness in 1 4 Tool Change Reset 5 Hole 3 Hole lt 7 Hole Keyswitch 11 1 14 ie 19 1710 9 13 Chapter 9 Using Comparison Instructions Ladder Rung Rung 720 Examines the number of 1 4 in thousands that have accumulated over the life of the current drill bit If the bit has drilled between 100 000 101 999 1 4 in increments of paper the change drill light illuminates steadily When the value is between 102 000 103 999 the change drill light flashes at a 1 28 second rate When the value reaches 105 000 the change drill light flashes and the change drill now light illuminates 1 4 in 100 000 Thousands 1 4 in increments have occurred GEQ B3 GRTR THAN OR EQUAL Source A N7 11 16 0 Source B 100 1 4 in 102 000 Thousands 1 4 in increments have occurred GEQ B3 GRTR THAN OR EQUAL Source A N7 11 17 0 Source B 102 4 1 4 in change Thousands drill bit NOW SA ae F 0 0 GRIR THAN OR EQUAL
146. the preset value Word 2 is the accumulated value Once assigned to the HSC instruction CO is not available as an address for any other counter instructions 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Word 0 CU CD DN OV UN UA HP LP IV IN IH IL PE LS IE Status Word Word 1 Preset Value Word 2 Accumulator Value CU Counter Up Enable Bit CD Counter Down Enable Bit DN High Preset Reached Bit OV Overflow Occurred Bit UN Underflow Occurred Bit UA Update High Speed Counter Accumulator Bit HP Accumulator 2 High Preset Bit LP Accumulator lt Low Preset Bit IV Overflow Caused High Speed Counter Interrupt Bit IN Underflow Caused High Speed Counter Interrupt Bit IH High Preset Reached Caused Interrupt Bit IL Low Preset Reached Caused Interrupt Bit PE High Speed Counter Interrupt Pending Bit LS High Speed Counter Interrupt Lost Bit IE High Speed Counter Interrupt Enable Bit Counter preset and accumulated values are stored as signed integers Using Status Bits The high speed counter status bits are retentive When the high speed counter is first configured bits 3 7 14 and 15 are reset and bit 1 IE is set e Counter Up Enable Bit CU bit 15 is used with all of the high speed counter types If the HSC instruction is true the CU bit is set to one If the HSC instruction is false the CU bit is set to zero Do not write to this bit e Counter Down Enable Bit CD bi
147. time This bit is used with DH 485 protocol only e Enabled and Waiting Bit EW bit 10 is set on any false to true MSG rung transition This bit is reset when an ACK or NAK no acknowledge is received or on any true to false MSG rung transition Important The operation of the EW bit has changed since Series C e Error Bit ER bit 12 is set when message transmission has failed The ER bit is reset the next time the rung goes from false to true 15 4 Chapter 15 Using Communication Protocols e Done Bit DN bit 13 is set when the message is transmitted successfully The DN bit is reset cleared the next time the rung goes from false to true e Start Bit ST bit 14 is set when the processor receives acknowledgement from the target device This identifies that the target device has started to process the MSG request The ST bit is reset when the DN ER or TO bit is set or on a false to true rung transition e Enable Bit EN bit 15 is set only if the transmit buffer is available If the transmit buffer is not available the EN flag remains false When the transmit buffer becomes available the EN flag goes true It remains set until the next false rung execution after the MSG completes DN bit set or an error occurs ER bit set Important The operation of the EN bit has changed since Series C The operation associated with a message read or write instruction is performed when you enable the instruction Replies are proce
148. toc vi Chapter 18 Changing the Program Configuration Defaults ccc eee eee aes 18 1 Accepting Your Program Edits ccc cece cece eect ee eens 18 20 Changing Controller Modes 251 cicsc0secsaseraescaeewssawateoaier 18 20 Monitoring Your Controller sci ccieaees tee lowee adds aeaiacs eu dens 18 24 Viewing Data Table Files 2 ccc cece eect eee eens 18 27 Using the Multi P oint Function ccc cece eee cette teens 18 30 Forcing Inputs and OURS s si cep ep Acs Gee phe wn ap Genk eae eg Ael 18 34 Chapter 19 Using a Memory Module cece cece eee 19 1 Clearing a Program from the Micro Controller 0 cece eee 19 6 Changing the Micro Controller s Baud Rate eee eee 19 6 Changing the Micro Controller s Communication Defaults 05 19 7 Troubleshooting Chapter 20 Understanding the Controller LED Status ccc cece eet eee ene 20 1 Identifying HHP Errors cas jaapue eee ehew see daageeexdekeayeed ears 20 3 Using the Trace Feature os isseeerseseo keer ebesheee seus exdedas 20 8 Controller Error Recovery Model ccc cece ete eee eee eens 20 10 Identifying Controller Faults ccc cece cece eee e eens 20 11 Recovering Your Work aie a wuweds ties a edw eal wea ed ta dwaandeaad cud 20 16 Calling Allen Bradley for Assistance ccc ete eee eee teens 20 16 Reference Appendix A Controller SpetiicawOns 0ccicce saves ccsaveveaeeieawendea weed A 1 Controller DIMENSIONS i
149. were loaded to the x high speed counter 0038 A RET instruction was detected in x program file 2 0040 An output verify write occurred X 0041 Extra output bit s turned on X Valid for Series A C discrete only Fault Classification User Address ak Saving to Controller or Loading from Non User Non Recoverable Hex Memory Module Errors Recoverable S6 0018 The user program is incompatible with the x operating system B 10 Address S7 Bit Suspend Code Classification Status Appendix B Programming Reference Description When a non zero value appears in S 7 it indicates that the SUS instruction identified by this value has been evaluated as true and the Suspend Idle mode is in effect This pinpoints the conditions in the application that caused the Suspend Idle mode This value is not cleared by the controller Use the SUS instruction with startup troubleshooting or as runtime diagnostics for detection of system errors S8 to 12 Reserved NA NA S13 and 14 Math Register Status Use this double register to produce 32 bit signed divide and multiply operations precision divide or double divide operations and 5 digit BCD conversions These two words are used in conjunction with the MUL DIV DDV FRD and TOD math instructions The math register value is assessed upon execution of the instruction and remains valid until the next MUL DIV DDV FRD or TOD instruction
150. when the stop button is pressed FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 f LD START Button I 6 0 22 s AND Drill Home LS ups 0 24 fat Les OR Machine RUN Latch B 0 0 23 ANI STOP Button I 7 0 40 SEIS OUT Machine RUN Latch B 0 Rungs 2 0 through 2 2 will be added in chapter 14 8 29 Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions 8 30 File 2 Rung 4 Applies the above start logic to the conveyor and drill motor FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 j LD Machine RUN Latch B 0 0 10 MPS ee AND Drill Home LS L S 0 12 MPP 40 el OUT Conveyor Enable 0 5 0 40 iat OUT Drill Motor ON O 1 0 Adding File 6 This subroutine controls the up and down motion of the drill for the paper drilling machine Drill Home Drill Retract 0 2 Drill Forward 0 3 Ladder Rungs Rung 6 0 js CS i Drill On Off 0 1 Drill Depth y4 m This section of ladder logic controls the up down motion of the drill for the book drilling machine When the conveyor positions the book under the drill the DRILL SEQUENCE START bit is set This rung uses that bit to begin the drilling operation Because the bit is set for the entire drilling operation the OSR is required to be able to turn off the forward signal so the drill can retract Drill Drill Subr Sequence OSR Start B3 B3 F AAA OSR 32 48 Drak Forward
151. your program configure control Counter Instructions and monitor the controllers hardware counter The hardware counter s accumulator increments or decrements in response to external input signals When the high speed counter is enabled data table counter CO is used by the program for monitoring the high speed counter accumulator and status The high speed counter operates independent to the controller scan Since these are output instructions they do not have LD AND and OR equivalents When using the high speed counter make sure you adjust your input filters accordingly See page 18 12 for more information on input filters Before you learn about these instructions read the overview that follows on the next page Refer to page 2 23 for information on wiring your controller for high speed counter applications 14 1 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions High Speed Counter Instructions Overview 14 2 Use the high speed counter instructions to perform specific actions after a preset count is reached These actions include the automatic and immediate execution of the high speed counter interrupt routine file 4 and the immediate update of outputs based on a source and mask pattern you set Counter Data File Elements The high speed counter instructions reference counter CO The HSC instruction is fixed at CO It is comprised of three words Word 0 is the status word containing 15 status bits Word 1 is
152. 0 bit 1 I 0 I 0 SQO SEQUENCER OUTPUT EN 10 File N7 50 DN Mask FFFF Dest N7 7 Control R6 4 Length S Position Ol 4 force the sequencer to increment on next scan R6 4 tose aoe He erm ser Sra EN Rung 4 2 s identical to the previous rung except that it is only active when the hole selector switch is in the 5 hole position hole hole 5 hole selector selector preset switch switch sequencer bit 0 bit 1 I 0 IO 500 nnenn SEQUENCER QUTPUT EN 9 10 File N7 55 DN Mask FFFF Dest N7 7 Control R6 5 Length 7 Position ol force the sequencer to increment on the next scan R6 5 a 101 etecad ee acal aeatel aeetaereeearaal This rung accesses 1 0 only available with 32 1 0 controllers Therefore do not include this rung if you are using a 16 I O controller This instruction accesses I O only available with 32 I O controllers Therefore do not include this instruction if you are using a 16 I O controller E 7 Appendix E Application Example Programs Rung 4 3 s identical to the two previous rungs except that it is only active when the hole selector switch is in the 7 hole position hole hole 7 hole selector selector preset switch switch sequencer bit 0 leit 1 10 I0 neen O a AA
153. 0 0 DEST N5 0000H 06 MOV SRC 0 High Output Pattern turn off 0 0 0 DEST N6 0000H 06 MOV SRC 32767 High Preset Value counts to next hole DEST N7 0000H 06 MOV SRC 1 Low output pattern turn on 0 0 0 each reset DEST N8 0000H 06 MOV SRC 0 Low preset value cause low preset intat reset DEST N9 0000H 71 HSL High Speed Counter CNTR CO Output Mask only use bit 0 ie 0 0 0 SRC N5 LEN 5 File 2 Rung 1 This HSC instruction is not placed in the high speed counter interrupt subroutine If this instruction were placed in the interrupt subroutine the high speed counter could never be started or initialized because an interrupt must first occur in order to scan the high speed counter interrupt subroutine FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 170 HSC TYPE Encoder Res H1d High Speed Counter CNTR CO PRE 1250 ACC 0000H E 14 Appendix E Application Example Programs File 2 Rung 2 Forces a high speed counter low preset interrupt to occur each RRUN mode entry An interrupt can only occur on the transition of the high speed counter accum to a preset value accum reset to 1 then 0 This is done to allow the high speed counter interrupt subroutine sequencers to initialize The order of high speed counter initialization is 1 load high speed counter parameters 2 execute HSL instruction 3 execute true HSC instruction 4 optional force high speed counter interrupt to occur FUN GRAPHIC P
154. 00A1 mergency Stop Fuse o Push Button Overtravel Stop ae ona ae Limit Swith m a ae i j i LF E Na MCR a Suppr MCR MCR hd 230V ac 1 0 Circuits Ci dc Power Supply Use IEC 950 EN 60950 MCR 24V de Lo Hi A lio Circuits Line Terminals Connect to 230V ac terminals of controller Power Supply Line terminals Connect to 24V dc terminals of controller Power Supply Chapter 1 Installing Your Controller Schematic Using ANSI CSA Symbols L1 L2 230V ac gt Disconnect Fuse MCR 230V ac t Output Di Circuits Isolation i Operation of either of these contacts will 3 gt Transformer remove power from the adapter external I O Aa Circuits stopping machine motion TEETE en nUen lt x ac Cat No 700 PK400A1 Se ate Overtravel Suppressor ush Bu cl i yee Limit Switch Stop Start Cat No 700 N24 a a e olo OIC O j Oo oO Sy Suppr MCR e MCR e 115V ac Output Circuits dc Power Supply Use N E C Class 2 for UL Listing MCR e RR Fis Line Terminals Connect to 115V ac Circuits terminals of controller Power Supply Line terminals Connectto 24V dc terminals of controller P ower Supply Using Surge Suppressors Chapter 1 Installing Your Controller Inductive load
155. 1 NULL modem adapter or port 2 a a eS a connection from NULL modem f adapter to port 1 or port 2 r761 cBL aroo nee r gt 1761 CBL P M02 or 1761 CBL AC00 AIC 1761 NET AIC AIC 3 1761 NET AIC 1 1747 CP3 24V dc or J user supplied 1761 CBL AC00 24V dc user supplied g 3 DH 485 Network a Ac gt gt o 1761 NET AIC p ec n 1761 CBL AM00 F o ey 1761 CBL HM02 24V dc B A Not needed in this 88 55 55 22 7 2 configuration since the ee MicroLogix 1000 provides power to the AIC via port 2 MicroLogix 1000 Series C or later discrete or all analog SLC 5 03 processor DB 9 RS 232 port 2l mini DIN 8 RS 232 port 3 DH 485 DF 1 port D 16 Appendix D Understanding the Communication Protocols MicroLogix Remote Packet Support Series D MicroLogix discrete controllers and all MicroLogix analog controllers can respond to communication packets or commands that do not originate on the local DH 485 network This is useful in installations where communication is needed between the DH 485 and DH networks The example below shows how to send messages from a PLC device or a PC on the DH network to a MicroLogix 1000 controller on the DH 485 network
156. 1 50 Suspend Program Flow Control TND 3 16 7 78 0 50 Temporary End Program Flow Control TOD 6 78 49 64 1 00 Convert to BCD Data Handling TOF 31 65 39 42 1 00 Timer Off Delay Basic TON 30 38 38 34 1 00 Timer On Delay Basic XOR 6 92 33 64 1 50 Exclusive Or Data Handling B 19 Appendix B Programming Reference B 20 User Interrupt Latency The user interrupt latency is the maximum time from when an interrupt condition occurs e g STI expires or HSC preset is reached to when the user interrupt subroutine begins executing assumes that there are no other interrupt conditions present The following table lists interrupt conditions and the corresponding time to execute the interrupt subroutine User Interrupt Condition Time to Execute HSC preset is reached 183 us STI expires 74 us Comms link layer interrupt 644 us System overhead interrupt 20 us To calculate the user interupt latency when you are communicating with the controller add 664 us to one or both of the following values e 183 us e 74 us For example if you are communicating with the controller the worst case interrupt latency is 921 us 644 us 257 us To calculate the user interupt latency when you are not communicating with the controller add 20 us to one or both of the following values e 183 us e 74 us For example if you are not communicating with the controller the worst case interrupt latency is 277 us 20 us 257 us
157. 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Word EN ST DN ER EW NR TO Error Code 0 Node Number 1 Reserved for Length in elements 2 Offset Bytes 3 Not used 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Using Status Bits Read Write READ ignore if timed out 0 TO Target Device SLC500 ML1000 to be retried 0 NR Control Block N7 0 awaiting execution 0 EW Local Destination File Address week Target Node 0 error 0 ER Target File Address wee message done 0 DN Message Length in elements wee message transmitting 0 ST message enabled 0 EN control bit address N7 0 8 ERROR CODE 0 Error Code Desc MSG Instruction Status Bits The right column in the display above lists the various MSG instruction status bits These are explained below e Time Out Bit TO bit 08 Temporarily set this bit 1 to clear an existing MSG instruction This bit has no effect unless the ST bit has first been set due to receiving an ACK acknowlege Your application must supply its own timeout value This bit is reset on any false to true rung transition e Negative Response Bit NR bit 09 is set if the target processor is responding to your message but can not process the message at the present time The NR bit is reset at the next false to true MSG rung transition that has a transmit buffer available It is used to determine when to send retries The ER bit is also set at this time Use this feedback to initiate a retry of your message at a later
158. 14 oE E E EE jasn ee ja il 0 BCD bit 1 FRD bit 1 70 N7 14 jee J s 5 2 1 BCD bit 2 FRD bit 2 20 N7 14 a ae 3 2 BCD bit 3 FRD bit 3 20 N7 14 a y o5 gt 4 3 This rung accesses 1 0 only available with 32 I O controllers Therefore do not include this rung if you are using a 16 I O controller E 11 Appendix E Application Example Programs E 12 Rung 7 3 Converts the BCD thumbwheel value from BCD to integer This is done because the controller operates upon integer values This rung also debounces the thumbwheel to ensure that the conversion only occurs on valid BCD values Note that invalid BCD values can occur while the operator is changing the BCD thumbwheel This is due to input filter propagation delay differences between the 4 input circuits that provide the BCD input value 1st previous debounced pass scan s BCD value bit BCD input value Se EQU FRD f S i ss S EQUAL FROM BCD LS Source A N7313 Source N7 14 O 0000 Source B N7 14 Dest N7 12 Ol Oo 4 4 Math Math Overflow Error Bit Bit S 0 35 Fca esas SassS UW HSS SSsSs gt gg aj 0 this scan s BCD input value MOV 4 MOVE Source N7 14 0 Dest N7 13 0 4 Rung 7 4
159. 2 F to 113 F for discrete 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 113 F for analog Storage Temp 40 C to 85 C 40 F to 185 F Operating Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Vibration Operating 5 Hz to 2k Hz 0 381 mm 0 015 in peak to peak 2 5g panel mounted 1hr per axis Non operating 5 Hz to 2k Hz 0 762 mm 0 030 in peak to peak 5g 1hr per axis Shock Operating 10g peak acceleration 7 5g DIN rail mounted 1141 ms duration 3 times each direction each axis Non operating 20g peak acceleration 1141 ms duration 3 times each direction each axis Agency Certification eC UL Class Division 2 Groups A B C D certified when product or eUL listed Class Division 2 Groups A B C D certified packaging is eCE marked for all applicable directives marked Terminal Screw 0 9 N m maximum 8 0 in Ibs Torque Electrostatic IEC801 2 8K V Discrete 1 0 Discharge 4K V Contact 8K V Air for Analog 1 0 Radiated IEC 801 3 10 V m 27 MHz 1000 MHz except for Susceptibility 3V m 87 MHz 108 MHz 174 MHz 230 MHz and 470 MHz 790 MHz Fast Transient IEC 801 4 2K V Power Supply 1 0 1K V Comms Isolation 1500V ac Refer to page 1 11 for additional information on power supply inrush DC input voltage derated linearly from 30 C 30V to 26 4V DIN rail mounted controller is 1g Refer to page 1 14 for vertical mounting specifications Relays are derated an additional 2 5g on 32 pt controllers VDC Appendix A Har
160. 2 N10 al 21 9 00 FFU DEST N11 0 FFL instruction loads data re eee rae into stack N12 at the next available position 9 in this soe e a case P000 FFU R00 L 34 P 9 ve 33 FFL FFU Instruction Pair Loading and Unloading of Stack N12 FFL Instruction When rung conditions change from false to true the controller sets the FFL enable bit EN This loads the contents of the Source N10 into the stack structure indicated by the position number 9 The position value then increments The FFL instruction loads an element at each false to true transition of the rung until the stack is filled 34 elements The controller then sets the done bit DN inhibiting further loading FFU Instruction When rung conditions change from false to true the controller sets the FFU enable bit EU This unloads the contents of the element at stack position 0 into the Destination N11 All data in the stack is shifted one element toward position zero and the highest numbered element is zeroed The position value then decrements The FFU instruction unloads an element at each false to true transition of the rung until the stack is empty The controller then sets the empty bit EM 11 27 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions LIFO Load LFL and LIFO Unload LFU Ladder representation LFL LIFO LOAD EN Source N7 10 DN LIFO N7 12 EM Control R6 0 Length 34 Position 9 LFU LIFO UNLOA
161. 25 entering the instruction 8 26 execution times 8 25 function code 8 26 instruction parameters C 3 ladder representation 8 25 using status bits 8 26 valid addressing modes C 3 valid file types C 3 Count Up CTU 8 24 entering the instruction 8 25 execution times 8 24 function code 8 25 instruction parameters C 4 ladder representation 8 24 using status bits 8 24 valid addressing modes C 4 valid file types C 4 counter file C 6 4 counter instructions Count Down CTD 8 25 Count Up CTU 8 24 in the paper drilling machine application example 9 12 overview 8 21 addressing structure 8 23 entering parameters 8 22 entering the instructions 8 22 how counters work 8 24 Reset RES 8 27 CTD Count Down 8 25 CTU Count Up 8 24 D data files addressing 6 7 organization 6 4 types 6 7 file indicator 6 10 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual data handling instructions about 11 2 Convert from BCD FRD 11 3 Convert to BCD TOD 11 2 Copy File COP 11 10 Decode 4 to 1 of 16 DCD 11 7 Encode 1 of 16 to 4 ENC 11 8 FIFO and LIFO instructions overview 11 23 Fill File FLL 11 10 in the paper drilling machine application example 11 31 move and logical instructions overview 11 13 data monitor description 4 13 entering 18 26 how to complete tasks 4 14 screen definition 4 13 data table status file displays 18 28 bit 18 29
162. 300A INVALID MPP MPS An MPP instruction is Ensure that the MPP instruction used illegally is preceded by an MPS instruction or remove the MPP if the application does not require it 300B INVALID LDT The LDT instruction is Ensure that the LDT is followed used illegally by an OR or ORB instruction on the rung or remove the LDT if the application does not require it 300C INVALID HSC An instruction is using Change the instruction s the data table address address to something other CO when an HSC than CO or remove the HSC instruction is present in instruction if the application the program does not require it 300D INVALID SBR INT The SBR or INT ove the SBR or INT instruction is used instruction so it is the first illegally instruction on the first rung of the program file or remove the instruction if the application does not require it 300E INVALID LBL The LBL instruction is ove the LBL instruction so itis used illegally the first instruction on the rung or remove the instruction if the application does not require it 300F INVALID FOR FILE An SBR INT or RET ove the instruction to the instruction exists in correct file or remove it if the program file 2 application does not require it 3010 INVALID OSR An OSR instruction is ove the instruction to a correct illegally positioned on the position on the rung or remove rung the instruction if the application does not require it 3011 INVALID COMPARE A comparison instructio
163. 32 767 inclusive can be loaded to the hardware After the first true HSC instruction execution data can only be transferred to the hardware accumulator via an RES or RAC instruction or to the hardware high and low presets via the HSL instruction The Following Condition Occurs when either the hardware accumulator transitions from the hardware high preset 1 to the hardware high preset or the hardware accumulator is loaded with a value greater than or equal to the hardware high preset or the hardware high preset is loaded with a value that is less than or equal to the hardware accumulator A high preset is reached When a high preset is reached the e HP bit is set e High speed counter interrupt file file 4 is executed if the interrupt is enabled The IH bit is set and the IL IN and IV bits are reset Unlike the Up Counters the accumulator value does not reset and the high preset value does not get loaded from the image to the hardware high preset register The Following Condition Occurs when either the hardware accumulator transitions from the hardware low preset 1 to the hardware low preset or the hardware accumulator is loaded with a value less than or equal to the hardware low preset or the hardware low preset is loaded with a value that is greater than or equal to the hardware accumulator A low preset is reached 14 13 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions 14 1
164. 4 When a low preset is reached the LP bit is set e High speed counter interrupt file file 4 is executed if the interrupt is enabled The IL bit is set and the IH IN and IV bits are reset An overflow occurs when the hardware accumulator transitions from 32 767 to 32 768 When an overflow occurs the OV bit is set e High speed counter interrupt file file 4 is executed if the interrupt is enabled The IV bit is set and the IH IL and IN bits are reset An underflow occurs when the hardware accumulator transitions from 32 768 to 32 767 When an underflow occurs the e UN bit is set e High speed counter interrupt file file 4 is executed if the interrupt is enabled The IN bit is set and the IH IL and IV bits are reset The following tables summarize what the input state must be for the corresponding high speed counter action to occur Bidirectional Counter Encoder Input State High Speed Input A 1 0 Input B 1 1 HSC Rung Counter Action Turning On Off True Count Up Turning Off Off True Count Down NA On NA Hold Count NA NA False Hold Count NA Not Applicable Bidirectional Counter with Reset and Hold Encoder Input State High Speed Input A V 0 Input B 11 Input Z 1 2 a HSC Rung uted TumingOn Off Off Off True Count Up Turning Off Off Off Off True Count Down Off or On NA Off NA NA Hold Count NA On Off NA NA Ho
165. 6 Fault Override No Yes 18 7 Extended 1 0 Configuration No Yes 18 8 STI Setpoint 0 x 10 ms No 18 9 STI Enabled Yes Yes 18 10 Watchdog Scan 10 x 10 ms No 18 11 Input Filters 8 00 msec for all groups Yes 18 12 Analog Config cer a uke Enabled Yes 18 14 Output Config Voltage Output Lock Program No Yes 18 17 Controller Version eee Yes 18 18 controllers Valid for Series A C discrete only 18 1 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program 18 2 You can change these default settings by accessing the program configuration menu eT a ENT gt NAME PROG USER PASSWRD Naming the Program You can enter a new name for your program using any combination of the letters or numbers available on the MicroLogix 1000 HHP keypad i e A F I N O R S T and 0 9 The maximum length is eight characters Follow the steps below to change the program name 1 Access the program configuration menu 2 Select the first option NAME PROG ENTER PROG NAME 3 Type in a new name for your program 4 Enter the name and return to the previous functional area er 3 Your new program name is now displayed in the upper left hand corner 5 You must accept your program edits for this change to take affect For information on accepting edits see page 18 21 Setting the User and Master Passwords Password protection prevents access to a program and prevents changes from being made to the program Ea
166. 600 700 800 0 0 Appendix E Application Example Programs Pick and Place Machine Instruction List Program File 2 Rung 0 The following three rungs take information from the other programmable controller and load it into the INDEX REGISTER This is used to select the proper bin location from the table starting at N7 10 FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 i LD Output from barcode r 5 0 40 OUT Index Reg 24 0 0 File 2 Rung 1 FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 I of LD Output from barcode 1 6 0 40 mi Oe OUT Index Reg S24 1 0 File 2 Rung 2 FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 I of LD Output from barcode I 7 40 Se S OUT Index Reg 24 2 0 File 2 Rung 3 Indexes into the table of bin locations and places the correct number of encoder counts into the high preset of the high speed counter FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 106 MOV SRC N10 100 DEST N2 100 E 37 Appendix E Application Example Programs E 38 File 2 Rung 4 Loads the high speed counter with the following parameters N7 0 0001h Output Mask high speed counter control only 0 0 0 gripper N7 1 0000h Output Pattern for High Preset turn OFF gripper release part N72 100d High Preset loaded from table in the rung above N7 3 0001h Output Pattern for Low Preset turn ON gr
167. 7 timer register SBR Subroutine Not Applicable Appendix C Valid Addressing Modes and File Types for Instruction Parameters Instruction Description Instruction Valid Addressing Valid File Types Valid Value Parameter Mode s Ranges SCL Scale Data source direct indexed direct 0 1 S B T C R Not Applicable rate immediate direct 0 1 S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct offset immediate direct 0 1 5 B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct destination direct indexed direct 0 1 5 B T C R Not Applicable SET Set or Output Latch bit address direct 0 1 S B TCR Not Applicable SQC Sequencer Compare file indexed direct 0 1 5 B N Not Applicable mask immediate direct 0 1 S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct source direct indexed direct 0 1 S B 1 C R N Not Applicable control direct R element level Not Applicable length contained in the 1 255 control register position contained in the 0 255 control register SQL Sequencer Load file indexed direct 0 1 S B N Not Applicable source direct indexed direct 0 1 S B 1 C R N 32 768 32 767 control direct R element level Not Applicable length contained in the 1 255 control register position contained in the 0 255 control register SQO Sequencer Output file indexed direct 0 1 5 B N Not Applicable mask direct indexed direct O
168. 747 CP3 connected to port 2 24V de or user supplied 1761 CBL AC00 MicroLogix DH 485 Network 1 DB 9 RS 232 port 2 mini DIN 8 RS 232 port 3 DH 485 port Recommended Tools To connect a DH 485 network you need tools to strip the shielded cable and to attach the cable and terminators to the AIC Advanced Interface Converter We recommend the following equipment or equivalent Description Part Number Manufacturer Shielded Twisted PairCable 3106A or 9842 Belden Stripping Tool 45 164 Ideal Industries 1 8 Slotted Screwdriver Not Applicable Not Applicable DH 485 Communication Cable The suggested DH 485 communication cable is either Belden 3106A or 9842 The cable is jacketed and shielded with one or two twisted wire pairs and a drain wire One pair provides a balanced signal line and one additional wire is used for a common reference line between all nodes on the network The shield reduces the effect of electrostatic noise from the industrial environment on network communication 3 3 Chapter 3 Connecting the System The communication cable consists of a number of cable segments daisy chained together The total length of the cable segments cannot exceed 1219 m 4000 ft When cutting cable segments make them long enough to route them from one AIC to the next with sufficient slack to prevent strain on the connector Allow enough extra cable to prevent chafing and kinking in
169. 761 L32BVWB 200 nm 7 87 in eB o w D 2 wo oc w L oa S Appendix A A 8 Appendix A Hardware Reference Hand Held Programmer Specifications The following tables summarize the specifications and dimensions for the MicroLogix 1000 HHP General Specifications Description Operating Power Specification 1761 HHP B30 2 0W Operating Temperature 0 C to 50 C 32 F to 122 F Storage Temperature 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F Operating Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Vibration Operating and Non operating 10 to 500 Hz 0 762 mm 0 030 in peak to peak 1 5g maximum peak acceleration 1hr in x y and z axis Shock Operating 50g peak acceleration for 11 1 ms duration 3 times in x y and z axis Non operating 50g peak acceleration for 11 1 ms duration 3 times in x y and z axis Agency Certification eC UL Class 1 Division 2 Groups A B C D when product or packaging is marked certified eUL listed Class 1 Division 2 Groups A B C D certified eCE marked for all applicable directives Display Type LCD 16 character x 2 line display Keypad rubber carbon colored coded Input Specifications Description Specification Type 24V dc Dimensions Terminal 1761 Width Height Depth mm in mm in mm in HHP 95 3 74 170 6 69 35 1 37 A 9 Controller and Hand Held Programmer
170. 8 ON Word Step 09 N30 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 m m ON 31 1010 0010 1111 0101 1 12 gt 32 2 Current Step 13 33 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 14 34 0000 0000 0000 0000 4 15 When rung conditions change from false to true the SQL enable bit EN is set The control element R4 increments to the next position in the sequencer file and loads the contents of source IO into the corresponding location in the file The SQL instruction continues to load the current data into this location each scan that the rung remains true When the rung goes false the enable bit EN is reset The instruction loads data into a new file element at each false to true transition of the rung When step 4 is completed the done bit DN is set Operation cycles to position 1 at the next false to true transition of the rung after position 4 If the source were a file address such as N40 files N40 and N30 would both have a length of 5 0 4 and would track through the steps together per the position value Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function Overview Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions The Selectable Timed Interrupt STI function allows you to interrupt the scan of the application program automatically on a periodic basis to scan a subroutine file Afterwards the controller resumes executing the application program from the point where it was interrupted Basic Programmi
171. A Not Applicable Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions Using the Bidirectional Counter and the Bidirectional Counter with Reset and Hold Bidirectional counters are used when the parameter being measured can either increment or decrement For example a package entering and leaving a storage bin is counted to regulate flow through the area The Bidirectional Counters operate identically except for the operation of inputs 1 and 0 For the Pulse and Direction type input 0 provides the pulse and input 1 provides the direction For the Up and Down type input 0 provides the Up count and input 1 provides the Down count Both types are available with and without reset and hold Refer to page 14 5 for more information regarding Bidirectional Counter types For the Bidirectional Counters both high and low presets are used The low preset value must be less than the high preset value or an error 37H occurs The hardware low preset default is 32 768 Bidirectional Counters operate in the 32 768 to 32 767 range inclusive and can be reset to zero using the Reset RES instruction Operation When the HSC instruction is first executed true the e Instruction accumulator is loaded to the hardware accumulator e Instruction high preset is loaded to the hardware high preset After the first true HSC instruction execution data can only be transferred to the hardware accumulator via the RES or RAC instruction or to the har
172. A S3L Current Scan Status The value of this byte tells you how much time elapses ina Time program cycle A program cycle includes scanning the ladder program housekeeping scanning the 1 0 servicing of the communication channel The byte value is zeroed by the controller each scan immediately preceding the execution of rung 0 of program file 2 main program file The byte is incremented every 10 ms thereafter and indicates in 10 ms increments the amount of time elapsed in each scan If this value ever equals the value in S 3H Watchdog a user watchdog major error is declared code 0022 The resolution of the scan time value is 0 to 10 ms Example The value 9 indicates that 80 90 ms has elapsed since the start of the program cycle Valid for Series C discrete only B 6 Address S3H Bit Watchdog Scan Time Classification Dynamic Configuration Appendix B Programming Reference Description This byte value contains the number of 10 ms ticks allowed to occur during a program cycle The default value is 10 100 ms but you can increase this to 255 2 55 seconds or decrease itto 1 as your application requires If the program scan S 3L value equals the watchdog value a watchdog major error is declared code 0022 S4 Timebase Status All 16 bits of this word are assessed by the controller The value of this word is zeroed upon power up in the REM Run mode or entry into the REM
173. A C0 ACC 0000H SRCB 100 41 L SET Slow Pack 0 2 0 File 2 Rung 3 If the packer was slowed down to allow the filler to catch up wait until the holding area is approximately 2 3 full before allowing the packer to run at full speed again FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 62 GRT LD GRT SRCA C0O ACC 0000H SRCB 200 22 gt AND Slow Pack 0 2 0 42 U RST Slow Pack 0 2 0 Appendix E Application Example Programs File 2 Rung 4 Filling machine running too fast for the packing machine Slow down the filling machine to allow the packer to catch up FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 62 GRT LD GRT SRCA CO ACC 0000H SRCB 250 41 L SET Slow Fill O 1 0 File 2 Rung 5 If the filler was slowed down to allow the packer to catch up wait until the holding area is approximately 1 3 full before allowing the filler to run at full speed again FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 56 LES LD LES SRCA C0O ACC 0000H SRCB 150 22 R ic AND Slow Fill 0 1 0 42 U RST Slow Fill O 1 0 File 2 Rung 6 If the high speed counter reached its high preset of 350 indicates that the holding area reached maximum capacity it would energize 0 0 0 shutting down the filling operation Before re starting the filler allow the packer to empty the holding area until it is about 1 3 full FUN GRAPHIC PARAMET
174. ADD Source A and B can either be a word address or a constant however both _ app sources cannot be a constant The destination must be a word address Source A N7 12 0 source B ee Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits Dest N7 10 0 With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry C Sets if carry is generated otherwise resets sets if overflow is detected at destination otherwise resets ian Ti f On overflow the minor error flag is also set The value Execution Times usec when S0 1 Overflow V 32 768 or 32 767 is placed in the destination If S2 14 True False math overflow selection bit is set then the unsigned 33 09 6 78 truncated overflow remains in the destination 0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign S sets if result is negative otherwise resets Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To enter the function code press REEN 10 4 Subtract SUB Ladder representation SUB SUBTRACT Source A N7 10 0 Source B 1000 Dest N7 20 o Execution Times usec when True False 33 52 6 78 To enter the function code press A rt Gefen Chapter 10 Using Math Instructions Use the SUB instruction to subtract one value Source B from another source A and place the result in the destination Source A and B can either be a word address or a constant however both sources cannot be a consta
175. AME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 l LD hole selector switch bit 0 1 9 0 23 1 I anr hole selector switch bit 1 1 10 0 152 SQO FILE N55 MASK FFFFH High Preset Value counts to next hole DEST N7 5 hole preset sequencer CTRL R5 LEN 7 POS 0000H 42 0 RST force the sequencer to increment on the next scan R5 EN I File 4 Rung 308 Is identical to the two previous rungs except that it is only active when the hole selector switch is in the 7 hole position FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 LD hole selector switch bit 0 r 9 0 22 i AND hole selector switch bit 1 I 10 0 152 SQO FILE N62 MASK FFFFH High Preset Value counts to next hole DEST N7 7 hole preset sequencer CTRL R6 LEN 9 POS 0000H 42 U RST force the sequencer to increment on the next scan R6 EN 1 This rung accesses 1 0 only available with 32 1 0 controllers Therefore do not include this rung if you are using a 16 1 0 controller This instruction accesses 1 0 only available with 32 1 0 controllers Therefore do not include this instruction if you are using a 16 1 0 controller More rungs will be added to this subroutine at the end of chapter 14 Using High Speed Counter Instructions This chapter contains general information about the high speed counter instructions and explains how they function in your application program Each of the instructions includes information on e wha
176. AND and Or OR Ladder representation Se Execution Times usec when True False LD 154 1 72 AND 1 94 2 12 OR 1 94 2 12 To access the LD instruction press LD Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions These instructions operate on a single bit of data During operation the controller may set or reset the bit based on the logical continuity of the rung You can address a bit as many times as your program requires Important Using the same address with multiple output instructions is not recommended Bit instructions are used with the following data files Output O and input I data files These represent external outputs and inputs e The status data file S These values are used to configure and provide controller status The bit data file B These are the internal coils used in your program e Timer counter and control data files T C and R These instructions use various control bits e The integer data file N Use these addresses at the bit level as your program requires LD AND and OR are all normally open instructions used in your program to determine if a bit is On If the bit addressed is on 1 when one of these instructions is executed then the instruction is evaluated as true If the bit addressed is off 0 when one of these instructions is executed then the instruction is evaluated as false Refer to chapter 16 for instruction list examples of when to use the LD AND
177. ARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 i LD Bin Location Reached CO HP 0 42 U RST Motor FORWARD O 1 0 22 J AND Dwell Done TO DN 0 41 L SET Motor REVERSE 0 2 0 File 2 Rung 8 When the pick and place head is positioned at its home position turn off the reverse motor At the same time the high speed counter tells the gripper to grab the next part and start the dwell timer After the dwell time has expired start up the forward motor to send the head out to its drop off bin FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 LD Home Position Reached C0 LP 0 42 U RST Motor REVERSE 0 2 0 22 i AND Dwell Done TO DN 0 41 L SET Motor FORWARD O 1 0 E 39 Appendix E Application Example Programs RPM Calculation Applic ation The following application example illustrates how to calculate the frequency Example and RPM of a device such as an encoder connected to a high speed counter The calculated values are only valid when counting up For a detailed explanation of e LD LDI CTU and TON instructions see chapter 8 e LES instruction see chapter 9 e CLR MUL DIV DDV ADD and SUB instructions see chapter 10 e MOV instruction see chapter 11 RPM Calculation Operation Overview This is done by manipulating the number of counts that have occurred in the high speed counter accumulator CO ACC over time To determine this you
178. ARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 I gt lt LD 1 st Pass 1 15 0 132 RAC High Speed Counter CNTR CO SRC 1 7 RES High Speed Counter co File 2 Rung 3 Starts the conveyor in motion when the start button is pressed However another condition must also be met before we start the conveyor the drill bit must be in its fully retracted position home This rung also stops the conveyor when the stop button is pressed FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 I LD START Button I 6 0 22 fs AND Drill Home LS I 5 0 24 l OR Machine RUN Latch B 0 0 23 ANI STOP Button I 7 0 23 1 I ANI change drill bit NOW 0 6 0 40 i sS OUT Machine RUN Latch B 0 0 This instruction accesses I O only available with 32 I O controllers Therefore do not include this instruction if you are using a 16 I O controller E 15 Appendix E Application Example Programs E 16 File 2 Rung 4 Applies the above start logic to the conveyor and drill motor FUN CODE 10 22 40 T2 40 File Calls GRAPHIC PARAMETER SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES ae NO Ka LD Machine RUN Latch B 0 0 MPS AND Drill Home LS I 5 0 a oP OUT Conveyor Enable 0 5 0 MPP a OUT Drill Motor ON O 1 0 dy Rung 5 the drill sequence subroutine This subroutine manages the operation of a drilling sequence and restarts the conveyor upon compl
179. Accessories and Replacement Parts Appendix A Hardware Reference This table provides a list of accessories and replacement parts and their catalog numbers Description Catalog Number 10 pt ac input 6 pt relay output ac power supply controller 1761 L16AWA 12 pt ac and 4 pt analog inputs 8 pt relay and 1 pt analog outputs ac i power supply controller re eres 20 pt ac input 12 pt relay output ac power supply controller 1761 L32AWA 6 pt dc input 4 pt relay output ac power supply controller 1761 L10BWA 10 pt dc input 6 pt relay output ac power supply controller 1761 L16BWA 12 pt dc and 4 pt analog inputs 8 pt relay and 1 pt analog outputs ac f f power supply controller SA OEN 20 pt dc input 12 pt relay output ac power supply controller 1761 L32BWA 6 pt dc input 4 pt relay output dc power supply controller 1761 L10BWB 10 pt dc input 6 pt relay output dc power supply controller 1761 L16BWB 12 pt dc and 4 pt analog inputs 8 pt relay and 1 pt analog outputs dc 7 power supply controller ela heeds 20 pt dc input 12 pt relay output dc power supply controller 1761 L32BWB 10 pt dc input 4 pt FET and 2 pt relay outputs dc power supply controller 1761 L16BBB 20 pt dc input 10 pt FET and 2 pt relay outputs dc power supply controller 1761 L32BBB 20 pt ac input 10 pt triac and 2 pt relay outputs ac power supply con
180. B and Or Block ORB wis cei piven ieee a 8 12 Timer Instructions Overview ccc cece eee treet eens 8 14 Timer On Delay TON scsi easteaieees vedas taadeaedeeaeeawd ened 8 16 Timer Of Delay TOF cis vec deeiceaayvamaeedweaadewa ewadaewns 8 18 Retentive Timer RTO ccc cece eect eee e eee nae 8 20 Counter Instructions Overview 1 ccc ccc teeter eens 8 21 Count UPICTU osr ea o E ucate gases pega ae po delgauenss ose 8 24 Count Down CTD stews aw saceeos payer ewe ak aaewe Bee Eeew eae Ys 8 25 POR RES sevrwndupteveota lea i neht g paiio ied pune ease 8 27 Basic Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Application Example 8 28 Chapter 9 About te Comparison Instructions ioc tu eid wtnwe dues epidamns 9 2 Comparison Instructions Overview ccc cece eect eee eens 9 2 Equal EQU vivctivenndesenetatersaveanens eakeesag eaaee de 9 3 NOtEQual NEQ csscstatsenteae Yes awk whew etawe tea aes abba as 9 4 LESS Than LES ciim piss Vi ctew cad oat ia 2 Sa ata a damm Scand erent 9 5 Less Than or Equal LEQ 2cssicaicvevecsadsgadeatereencaae tans 9 6 Greater Than GR issiiseed seta wsay soddedd ninaru ad yeaa de 9 7 Greater Than or Equal GEQ 2 22s2eceaedaedeasdbavewara bene 9 8 Masked Comparison for Equal MEQ 0 cece eee eee 9 9 Limit Test LIM ac aoag ed taetceepare tegedy ee aguceinan aay ein aps 9 10 Comparison Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Application Example 9 12 Chapter 10 About
181. CA NO 0000H SRCB 2 40 OUT Yellow Gun O 1 0 File 2 Rung 7 Decodes color select word If N7 0 3 then energize the red paint gun FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 50 EQU LD EQU SRCA NO 0000H SRCB 3 40 OUT Red Gun 0 2 0 E 54 Adjustable Timer Application Example Appendix E Application Example Programs The following application example illustrates the use of timers to adjust the drill dwell time at the end of the machines downstroke For a detailed explanation of e LD TON and OSR instructions see chapter 8 e LES and GRT instructions see chapter 9 e ADD and SUB instructions see chapter 10 Valid dwell times are 5 0 seconds to 120 0 seconds Adjustments are made in 2 5 second intervals Each time 1 8 or I 9 is depressed the timer preset or delay is adjusted up or down accordingly By altering the value of NO the amount of change can be increased or decreased The constants in the LES and GRT instructions and in the source and destination of the ADD and SUB instructions could be changed easily to integers for even greater flexibility Adjustable Timer Ladder Program Rung 2 0 Adds 2 5 seconds to Timer delay each time the increment push button is depressed Do not exceed 120 0 seconds delay Note that N7 0 250 Increment Timer preset I 0 SY cl B3 ADDS SSS SSSSSSS gt ess LESS THAN a OSR ADD 8 Source A T4 0 PRE 0 Source A T4 0 PRE
182. Connecting the System Automatic Protocol Switching The MicroLogix 1000 Series D or later discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers perform automatic protocol switching between DH 485 and the configured DF1 protocol The controller cannot automatically switch between DF1 full duplex and DF1 half duplex slave This feature allows you to switch from active communication on a DF1 half duplex network to the DH 485 protocol to make program changes Simply disconnect the MicroLogix controller from the DF1 half duplex network and connect it to your personal computer The controller recognizes the computer is attempting to communicate using the DH 485 protocol and automatically switches to it When your program changes are complete you can disconnect your computer reconnect the modem and the controller automatically switches back to the configured DF1 protocol For example if you are using the DH 485 protocol to make program changes and you connect an HHP you can switch to active communication on a DF1 full duplex network The following baud rate limitations affect autoswitching e Ifthe configured DH 485 baud rate is 19200 the configured DF1 baud rate must be 4800 or greater e Ifthe configured DH 485 baud rate is 9600 the configured DF1 baud rate must be 2400 or greater You can also connect a MicroLogix to a DeviceNet network using the DeviceNet Interface DNI catalog number 1761 NET DNI For additional information on conn
183. Counter High Speed Counter This only includes the amount of time needed to set up the operation requested It does not include the time it takes to service the actual communication as this time varies with each network configuration As an example 144ms is the actual communication service time for the following configuration 3 nodes on DH 485 2 MicroLogix 1000 programmable controllers and 1 PLC 500 A I Series programming software running at 19 2K baud with 2 words per transfer Add 7 3 useconds per word for MSG instructions that perform writes B 18 False Execution Time True Execution Time Appendix B Programming Reference Memory Usage Mnemonic approx useconds approx useconds user words name Instruction Type RET 3 16 31 11 0 50 Return from Subroutine Program Flow Control RST 3 16 4 97 0 75 Reset Basic RTO 27 49 38 34 1 00 Retentive Timer Basic SBR LD SBR 0 99 1 45 0 50 Subroutine Program Flow Control SCL 6 78 169 18 1 75 Scale Data Math SET 3 16 4 97 0 75 Set Basic SQC 27 40 60 52 2 00 Sequencer Compare Application Specific SQL 28 12 53 41 2 00 Sequencer Load Application Specific SQO 27 40 60 52 2 00 Sequencer Output Application Specific SQR 6 78 71 25 1 25 Square Root Math STD 3 16 6 69 0 50 e a Application Specific STE 3 16 10 13 0 50 e Application Specific STS 6 78 24 59 1 25 ee Application Specific SUB 6 78 33 52 1 50 Subtract Math SUS 7 87 10 85
184. D EU LIFO N7 12 DN Dest N7 11 EM Control R6 0 Length 34 Position 9 Execution Times usec when True False LFL 61 13 33 67 LFU 64 20 35 08 To enter the function code press A 11 28 LFL and LFU instructions are used in pairs The LFL instruction loads words into a user created file called a LIFO stack The LFU instruction unloads words from the LIFO stack in the opposite order as they were entered Entering the Instructions You enter the instructions from within the program monitor functional area While entering the LFL instruction you see these screens P000 LFL SRC P000 LFL LIFO N12 P000 LFL CTRL RO P000 LFL LEN a oa P000 LFL POS ke k k k ke k 9 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions While entering the LFU instruction you see these screens To enter the function code press A Tio a P000 LFU N11 P000 LFU RO P000 LFU LEN re a P000 LFU POS ke kK ke x 9 Operation The operation of the LFL LFU instruction pair is shown on the following page The screens shown to the left of the figure are the condensed screens that appear after instruction entry is complete 11 29 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions P000 LF Lt SRC Destination Position N10 0 N11 lt m 0 LFU instruction unloads 13 1 P000 LF LI FO data from stack N12 at N12 0 positio
185. D also turns on and remains on as shown on the right in the figure below If a force exists the force LED is on as well When powered up When placed in RRUN 20 1 Chapter 20 Troubleshooting Your System When an Error Exists If an error exists within the controller the controller LEDs operate as described in the following tables If the LEDs indicate The Following Probable Cause Recommended Action Error Exists Verify proper line voltage and connections to the No input No Line P ower controller power or power supply This problem can occur intermittently if power error Power Supply Overloaded supply is overloaded when output loading and temperature varies If the LEDs indicate The Following Probable Cause Recommended Action Error Exists WM POWER e RUN Cycle power Contact your local Allen Bradley Controller Memory Error Hardware representative if the error persists EE FAuL fault FOR Loose Wiring Verify connections to the controller If the LEDs indicate
186. Do not replace components or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off and the area is known to be non hazardous The main power disconnect switch should be located where operators and maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it In addition to disconnecting electrical power all other sources of power pneumatic and hydraulic should be de energized before working on a machine or process controlled by a controller Chapter 1 Installing Your Controller Power Considerations ATTENTION Explosion Hazard Do not connect or disconnect while circuit is live unless area is known to be non hazardous Safety Circuits Circuits installed on the machine for safety reasons like overtravel limit switches stop push buttons and interlocks should always be hard wired directly to the master control relay These devices must be wired in series so that when any one device opens the master control relay is de energized thereby removing power to the machine Never alter these circuits to defeat their function Serious injury or machine damage could result Power Distribution There are some points about power distribution that you should know e The master control relay must be able to inhibit all machine motion by removing power to the machine I O devices when the relay is de energized e Ifyou are using a dc power supply interrupt the load side rather than the ac line power This avoids the additional delay of po
187. ER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 fl LD HSC Interr due to High Prest CO IH 0 57 LES AND LES SRCA C0 ACC 0000H SRCB 150 42 U RST Fill Stop 0 0 0 42 0 RST HSC Interr due to High Prest c0 1IH 0 E 33 Appendix E Application Example Programs Pick and Place Machine Example E 34 The following application example illustrates how the controller high speed counter is configured for the up and down counter using an encoder with reset and hold For a detailed explanation of e LD LDI OUT RES SET RST and TON instructions see chapter 8 GRT and NEQ instructions see chapter 9 MOV instruction see chapter 11 HSC and HSL instructions see chapter 14 Storage Bins Conveyor Master PLC Outputs Wired to Inputs Home Position 1 0 5 q 1 0 6 Encoder 0 7 A 1 0 0 B 0 1 C 0 2 Pick and Place Machine Operation Overview A pick and place machine takes parts from a conveyor and drops them into the appropriate bins When the pick and place head is positioned over the conveyor with a gripped part the master PLC communicates to the controller controlling the gripper which bin to drop the part into This information is communicated by energizing three outputs that are wired to the controller s inputs Once the controller has this information it grabs the part and moves down the rail When the gripper reaches the appropriate bin it opens and the part falls into
188. ER ON DELAY EN DN Timer T4 0 DN Time Base 0 01 Preset 1i Accum Ol Pose Rung 2 1 Controls the RED GREEN and YELLOW lights wired to outputs 0 0 0 0 0 2 and controls how long the regenerative timer times between each step When this rung goes from false to true by the timer reaching its preset the first sequencer changes which traffic light is illuminated and the second sequencer changes the preset of the timer to determine how long this next light is illuminated RED GREEN and YELLOW lights T4 0 SQ0 SEQUENCER OUTPUT EN DN File N7 0 DN Mask 0007 Dest Orgs U Control R6 0 Length 3 Position 0 Timer Presets for each lights SQ0 SEQUENCER OUTPUT EN File N7 5 DN Mask FFFF Dest T4 0 PRE Control R6 1 Length 3 Position 0 4 Rung 2 2 AR T a a aE at a ae a an aak Gaa ak ak aaa Sa i i a S HENDA ameen a e E 25 Appendix E Application Example Programs E 26 Data Files Address 15 Data 0 N7 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 N7 1 0000 0000 0000 0100 N7 2 0000 0000 0000 0010 N7 3 0000 0000 0000 0001 Data Table Address Data Radix Decimal N7 0 0 4 2 1 0 0 6000 1500 3000 Time Driven Sequencer Instruction List Program File 2 Rung 0 The function of this rung is called a regener
189. For example if N5 is selected as the source address the additional parameters for the execution of this instruction would appear as shown on the following page 14 16 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions Parameter a as Image Up as pace Description Location ny ounters Identifies which group of four bits in the output file word 0 are controlled 000F bits 3 0 N5 Output Mask Output Mask OOF O bits 7 4 0003 bits 0 and 1 OOFF bits 7 0 6 Output Output High Up count The status of bits in this word are Source Source written through the mask to the actual outputs Up count When the accumulator reaches this value the output source is written through the Ny High Preset High Preset output mask to the actual outputs and the HSC subroutine file 4 is scanned N8 Reserved Output Low Down count The status of bits in this word are Source written through the mask to the actual outputs Down count When the accumulator reaches this value the output source is written through 3 Reserved Low Preset the output mask to the actual outputs and the HSC subroutine file 4 is scanned The bits in the output mask directly correspond to the physical outputs If a bit is set to 1 the corresponding output can be changed by the high speed counter If a bit is set to 0 the corresponding output cannot be changed by the high speed counter The bits in the high and low sources also di
190. HAN U IH Source A C5 0 ACC 0 0l Source B 150 4 HSC Interr due to High Prest C520 U TH Rung 2 7 END Data Table Addresses Data Radix Decimal N7 0 1 1 350 0 0 E 31 Appendix E Application Example Programs E 32 Bottle Line Instruction List Program File 2 Rung 0 Loads the high speed counter with the following parameters N7 0 0001h Output Mask Effect only 0 0 0 N7 1 0001h Output Pattern for High Preset Energize 0 0 0 upon high preset N7 2 350d High Preset Maximum numbers of bottles for the holding area N7 3 0000h Output Pattern for Low Preset not used N7 4 Od Low Preset not used FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 a LD First Pass Bit 81 15 0 171 HSL CNTR CO SRC NO LEN 5 File 2 Rung 1 Starts up the high speed counter with the above parameters Each time the rung is evaluated the hardware accumulator is written to C5 0 ACC FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 170 HSC TYPE Up Down CNTR CO PRE 015EH ACC 0000H File 2 Rung 2 Packing machine running too fast for the filling machine Slow down the packing machine to allow the filler to catch up FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 56 LES LD LES SRC
191. HPs will support MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers You cannot use the MicroLogix 1000 HHP to select or configure DF1 half duplex slave communications in Series D discrete or Series A analog MicroLogix 1000 controllers Message Instruction Mnemonic Function Mnemonic Function Code Name Name Purpose Page Message This instruction transfers data from one node to another via the communication 15 2 Read Write port When the instruction is enabled the message is sent to a communication buffer Replies are processed at the end of scan Types of Communication Communication is the ability of a device to send data or status to other devices This capability typically falls into one of two categories initiator master or responder slave Each of these are described below Initiator Master Communication Initiator products can begin communication processes which includes requesting information from other devices reading or sending information to other products writing In addition initiator products are usually capable of replying to other devices when they make requests to read information The Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers and the Series A or later MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers are in this class Initiator products can begin communication processes with other initiator products peer to peer communication or with responder slave products initiator to responder communication 15 1
192. HSL File 2 Rung 1 FUN GRAPHIC CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC 170 HSC File 2 Rung 2 PARAMETER NAME ADDRESS CNTR CO SRC NO LEN PARAMETER NAME ADDRESS however this is not VALUE FORCES 0 5 VALUE FORCES Encoder Res H1d 1000 0000H This rung is programmed with the knowledge of an HSL mask of 0007 Outputs 0 2 are used and initializes the HSC outputs each RRUN mode entry Outputs 0 0 and O 1 are off FUN GRAPHIC CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC 20 f LD 42 U RST 42 SU lt RST 41 L SET PARAMETER NAME ADDRESS while Output O 2 is on FORCES 14 27 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions High Speed Counter Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Application Example Drilled 14 28 To demonstrate the use of the HSC instruction this section provides ladder rungs followed by the optimized instruction list for these rungs The rungs are part of the paper drilling machine application example started in chapter 5 Refer to appendix E for the complete paper drilling machine application example Drill Home is Co Drill On Off O 1 Drill Retract 0 2 Drill Forward 0 3 Drill Depth Photo Eye Reset 1 2 1 4 1 l Counter Hold 1 3 Quadrature A B Encoder and Drive 1 0 1 1 Reflector lt D Photo Eye Conveyor Enable wired in series to the Drive 0 5 Conveyor Drive Start Stop wired in series to the Drive 0 0 20226 The main program file file 2 initializes the HSC instruction m
193. IN rail Manufactured according to Deutsche Industrie Normenausshus DIN standards a metal railing designed to ease installation and mounting of your controller DOS Disk Operating System The operating system used to operate a personal computer DTE Data Terminal Equipment Equipment that is attached to a network to send or receive data or both edit To create or modify a ladder or instruction list program EMI Electromagnetic interference encoder 1 A rotary device that transmits position information 2 A device that transmits a fixed number of pulses for each revolution false The status of an instruction that does not provide a continuous logical path on a ladder rung FIFO First In First Out The order that data is entered into and retrieved from a file file A collection of information organized into one group floppy disk A thin flexible disk coated with magnetic oxide and used to store data full duplex A bidirectional mode of communication where data may be transmitted and received simultaneously contrast with half duplex half duplex A communication link in which data transmission is limited to one direction at a time HHP Hand Held Programmer A device used to monitor and develop control logic programs for the micro controller high byte Bits 8 15 of a word input device A device such as a push button or a switch that supplies signals through input circuits to the controller
194. If you get a fault code refer to chapter 19 to clear the fault If an error message appears see chapter 19 for a definition of the program verification error code and the recommended action s you should take MICRO RRUN FREE 728 FILE 02 RRUN now appears in the upper right hand corner of the screen Also the number of free instruction words is displayed 18 22 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program Tasks You Can Perform This table shows you what tasks you are allowed to perform in each of the possible modes p Remote Controller Mode Activity Program Test Run Fault Suspend Change the language X X X X X Accept program edits X Change the following program configuration settings Program Name Run Always StartUp Protection Fault Override A Extend I O Configuration STI Enabled Input Filters Lock Program Change the following program configuration settings User Password Master Password x X 3 X X STI Setpoint Watchdog Scan Load and store programs using the X memory module Clear programs in the memory module X X X X X Clear all forces X X X X X Clear a program in the controller X X X Change the baud rate and contrast X X X X X Change to a different mode X X X X Run your program with output points X disabled View faults manually X X X X X Force inputs and outputs X X X X X Monitor and edit
195. Inverted 8 4 ORT Or True 8 6 overwriting an instruction 17 5 I 23 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual 1 24 overwriting an instruction s parameters 17 4 ownership timeout D 6 P parallel logic OR 6 12 parts replacement A 11 password master password 18 2 password override 18 3 user password 18 2 placing the controller in program mode 5 2 planning considerations for a network D 12 Power Considerations Input States on Power Down 1 11 Isolation Transformers 1 10 Loss of Power Source 1 11 other line conditions 1 11 overview 1 10 Power Distribution 1 10 power up sequence 4 6 preparing to enter a new program 5 2 clearing the current program 5 2 placing the controller in program mode 5 2 preventing excessive heat 1 12 principles of machine control 6 1 program changing the configuration defaults 18 1 clearing from a memory module 19 5 from the micro controller 5 2 19 6 organization of 6 3 data files 6 4 program files 6 4 preparing to enter a new program 5 2 retrieving from a memory module 19 2 storing and accessing normal operation 6 6 power down 6 6 power up 6 7 saving 6 5 storing to a memory module 19 3 program constants 6 10 program defaults 18 1 program development model 6 17 program faults determining 20 1 20 5 program files organization 6 4 program flow control instructions about 12 1 Im
196. J MP instruction Jumping forward to a label saves program scan time by omitting a program segment until needed Jumping backward lets the controller execute program segments repeatedly Important Be careful not to jump backwards an excessive number of times The watchdog timer could time out and fault the controller Use a counter timer or the program scan register system status register word S3 bits 0 7 to limit the amount of time you spend looping inside of JMP LBL instructions Entering Parameters Enter a decimal label number from 0 to 999 You can place up to 1 000 labels in each subroutine file Using JMP The JMP instruction causes the controller to skip rungs You can jump to the same label from one or more JMP instruction Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area Asterisks appear on the display to indicate that the HHP is waiting for data entry i e a number To enter the function code press P011 JMP LBL A ANB TROLON TAA i 12 2 Using LBL This input instruction is the target of JMP instructions having the same label number This instruction has no control bits Important You must program this instruction as the first instruction of a rung Since it must be the first instruction on the rung the LBL instruction is also known as LD LBL To enter the function code press Chapter 12 Using Program Flow Control Instruc
197. L 65 GEQ gI 80 106 6 r of 1 4 in increments surpasses 1000 past 1000 and stores in N7 20 determines how many Adds 1 to the total of increments and re initializes the 1 4 in increments how many increments were beyond 1000 PARAMETER MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES LD GEQ 1 4 in increments SRCA N10 0000H SRCB 1000 SUB 1 4 in increments SRCA N10 0000H SRCB 1000 DEST N20 0000H ADD SRCA 1 1 4 in Thousands SRCB N11 0000H 1 4 in Thousands DEST N11 0000H MOV SRC N20 0000H 1 4 in increments DEST N10 0000H 10 17 Chapter 1 1 Using Data Handling Instructions This chapter contains general information about the data handling instructions and explains how they function in your application program Each of the instructions includes information on e what the instruction symbol looks like typical execution time for the instruction e e how to use the instruction e how to enter the instruction In addition the last section contains an application example for a paper drilling machine that shows the data handling instructions in use Data Handling Instructions Function Mnemonic Code Name Purpose Page TOD 100 Convert to BCD Converts the integer source value to BCD format and stores it in the destination 11 2 FRD 101 Convert from BCD Converts the BCD source value to an integer and stores it in the destination 11 3 DCD 102 Decode 4 to
198. LC 500 N9 CIF Read icroLogix 1000 O 1 S B T C R N SLC 500 N9 The DF 1 Full Duplex protocol can be used if the target device supports it Such devices include MicroLogix 1000 controllers any series SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors and PLC 5 processors CIF command type only The DH 485 protocol can be used if the target device supports it Such devices include MicroLogix 1000 controllers except for Series A and B discrete controllers and SLC 500 SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 processors The DF 1 Half Duplex protocol can also be used with Series D or later discrete and all analog MicroLogix 1000 controllers buta master is required such as an SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 processor SLC 500 SLC 5 01 and SLC 5 02 processors do not support O or I file access from a MSG instruction SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors do support O and I file access but only when unprotected Control Block Layout The control block layouts shown below illustrate SLC500 ML1000 type messages Control Block Layout SLC500 ML1000 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Word EN ST DN ER EW NR TO Error Code 0 Node Number 1 Reserved for length in elements File Number File Type O I S B T C R N Element Number Subelement Number O oa Aa O PN 15 3 Chapter 15 Using Communication Protocols Control Block Layout CIF 15 14 13 12 11
199. NT to accept the operand and move on to the next one Once the entire instruction is entered if you want to edit the instruction s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode See page 17 4 To enter the function code press L DEOKORK m o i P009 poos sts TS I ME 140 Interrupt Subroutine INT This instruction serves as a label or identifier of a program file as an interrupt subroutine INT label versus a regular subroutine SBR label Ladder representation INT This instruction has no control bits and is always evaluated as true Use of a INTERRUPT SUBROUTINE this instruction is optional however we recommend using it Important The instruction must be programmed as the first instruction of Execution Times usec when the first rung of a subroutine Since it must be the first True False instruction on the rung the INT instruction is also known as 145 0 99 LD INT Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To enter the function code press IN OOLONG P009 HI NTe 13 19 Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions Application Specific Instructions in the Paper To demonstrate the use of application specific instructions this section provides ladder rungs followed by the optimized instruction list of these Drilling Machine Applic ation rungs The rungs are part of the paper drilling machine application example Exam
200. Port 3 6 5 VAL bid 3 Port 3 DH 485 Connector chassis ground 2 received data RxD received data RxD cable shield 3 transmitted data TxD transmitted data TxD signal ground 4 DTE ready DTR DTE ready DTR DH 485 data B 5 signal common GRD signal common GRD DH 485 data A 6 DCE ready DSR DCE ready DSR termination 7 request to send RTS request to send RTS not applicable 8 clear to send CTS clear to send CTS not applicable 9 not applicable not applicable not applicable an 8 pin mini DIN connector is used for making connections to port2 This connector is not commercially available If you are making a cable to connect to port 2 you must configure your cable to connect to the Allen Bradley cable shown above 2 On port 1 pin 4 is electronically jumpered to pin 6 Whenever the AIC is powered on pin 4 will match the state of pin 6 In the 1761 CBL PM02 cable pins 4 and 6 are jumpered together within the DB 9 connector Chapter 3 Connecting the System Powering the AlC ATTENTION If you use an external power supply it must be 24V dc Permanent damage will result if miswired with the wrong power source Set the DC Power Source selector switch to EXTERNAL before connect
201. RB The ORB instruction is used to make a parallel connection of circuit blocks with two or more contacts A parallel connection of circuit blocks with one contact requires only an OR or ORI instruction See page 16 2 Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area P000 ORB The example below illustrates when you would enter the ORB instruction a b e Instruction List j C NEW RUNG LDa AND b LDc AND d 7 ORB OUT e m Q Q 8 13 Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Timer Instructions Overview Each timer address is made of a 3 word element Word 0 is the control word word 1 stores the preset value and word 2 stores the accumulator value 15 14 13 Word 0 EN TT DN Internal Use Word 1 Preset Value Word 2 Accumulator Value EN Timer Enable Bit TT Timer Timing Bit DN Timer Done Bit Entering Parameters Accumulator Value ACC This is the time elapsed since the timer was last reset When enabled the timer updates this continually Preset Value PRE Specifies the value which the timer must reach before the controller sets the done bit When the accumulated value becomes equal to or greater than the preset value the done bit is set You can use this bit to control an output device Preset and accumulated values for timers range from 0 to 32 767 Ifa ti
202. Run or REM Test mode Itis incremented every 10 ms thereafter Application note You can write any value to S 4 It will begin incrementing from this value You can use any individual bit of this word in your user program as a 50 duty cycle clock bit Clock rates for S 4 0 to S 4 15 are 20 40 80 160 320 640 1280 2560 5120 10240 20480 40960 81920 163840 327680 and 655360 ms The application using the bit must be evaluated ata rate more than two times faster than the clock rate of the bit In the example below bit S 4 3 toggles every 80 ms producing a 160 ms Clock rate To maintain accuracy of this bitin your application the instruction using bit 4 3 0 1 0 in this case must be evaluated at least once every 79 999 ms S 4 te st LO yH 160 ms 3 0 Both S 4 3 and S 4 3 cycles in 160 ms Output 0 1 0 toggle every 80 ms 0 1 0 must be evaluated at least once every 79 999 ms 5 Minor Error Bits The bits of this word are set by the controller to indicate that a minor error has occurred in your ladder program Minor errors bits 0 to 7 revert to major error 0020H if any bit is detected as being set at the end of the scan These bits are automatically cleared on a power cycle 55 0 Overflow Trap Dynamic Configuration When this bit is set by the controller it indicates that a mathematical overflow has occurred in the ladder program See S 0 1 for more information If thi
203. SC HSD HSE HSL LFL LFU RAC RES RTO SQC SQL SQO TOF TON For output coils and timer counter and control instructions the trace begins from the current location in the program and continues to the end of the program For all other instructions the trace begins from the top of the first program file and traces down through all of the files If the address you are tracing is found you can invoke the trace feature once again to search for other instances of the same address For all instructions the trace begins from the current location in the program and continues to the end of the program When the last program file is reached the trace feature does not wrap around to the first program file If at any time the trace feature cannot find the address the message NOT FOUND is displayed You can execute trace for either an address that you enter or an address that is displayed 20 8 Chapter 20 Troubleshooting Your System Tracing an Address You Enter To enter an address and trace it press the key sequence shown here gt address fae This type of tracing method can be invoked from any of the four functional areas e home screen program monitor e data monitor multi point Tracing an Address That is Displayed You can trace the address that is currently displayed on the MicroLogix 1000 HHP by pressing the key shown here TRACE S You can invoke trace using this method from the following
204. Slovenia e South Africa Republic e Spain e Sweden e Switzerland e Taiwan e Thailand e Turkey e United Arab Emirates e United Kingdom e United States e Uruguay Venezuela Yugoslavia Allen Bradley Headquarters 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Publication 1761 6 2 May 1998 PN40072 003 01 E Supersedes Publication 1761 6 2 October 1997 Copyright 1998 Rockwell International Corporation Printed in USA
205. Surge suppressors for 1 9 remote modes program mode 18 22 run mode 18 22 test mode 18 22 remote packet support D 17 removing a program from a memory module 19 5 replacement parts and accessories A 11 RES High Speed Counter Reset 14 19 RES Reset 8 27 Reset RES high speed counter reset 14 19 entering the instruction 14 19 execution times 14 19 function code 14 19 instruction parameters C 8 ladder representation 14 19 operation 14 19 valid addressing modes C 8 valid file types C 8 timer counter reset 8 27 entering the instruction 8 27 execution times 8 27 function code 8 27 instruction parameters C 8 ladder representation 8 27 valid addressing modes C 8 valid file types C 8 Reset RST 8 8 entering the instruction 8 9 execution times 8 8 instruction parameters C 8 ladder representation 8 8 using 8 9 valid addressing modes C 8 valid file types C 8 resetting the high speed counter accumulator 14 19 response times A 6 RET Return 12 3 Retentive Timer RTO 8 20 entering the instruction 8 20 execution times 8 20 function code 8 20 instruction parameters C 8 ladder representation 8 20 using status bits 8 20 valid addressing modes C 8 valid file types C 8 retrieving programs from a memory module 1 Return RET 12 3 entering the instruction 12 5 execution times 12 3 function code 12 5 instruction parameters C 8 ladder representation 12 3 nesting su
206. T N13 0000H File 7 Rung 4 Ensures that the operator cannot select a paper thickness of 0 If this were allowed the drill bit life calculation could be defeated resulting in poor quality holes due to a dull drill bit Therefore the minimum paper thickness used to calculate drill bit wear is 1 4 in FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 50 EQU LD EQU debounced BCD value SRCA N12 0000H SRCB 0 106 MOV debounced BCD value SRC al DEST N12 0000H E 23 Appendix E Application Example Programs E 24 File 7 Rung 5 Keeps a running total of how many inches of paper have been drilled with the current drill bit Every time a hole is drilled adds the thickness in 1 4 ins to the running total kept in 1 4 ins The OSR is necessary because the ADD executes every time the rung is true and the drill body would actuate the DRILL DEPTH limit switch for more than 1 program scan Integer N7 12 is the integer converted value of the BCD thumbwheel on inputs I 0 11 1 0 14 FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 j T LD Drill Depth LS I 4 0 29 OSR AND OSR Tool Wear OSR 1 B 24 0 80 ADD SRCA N12 0000H 1 4 in increments SRCB N10 0000H 1 4 in increments DEST N10 0000H File 7 Rung 6 When the number of 1 4 in increments surpasses 1000 finds out now many increments are past 1000 and stores in N7 20 Adds 1 to the total of 1000 1 4 in increments
207. Then if you want to edit that operand press DEL or FUN DEL and enter new parameters Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one Once the entire instruction is entered if you want to edit the instruction s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode See page 17 4 To enter the function code press AN AOA e amp P000 COP LEN 25 11 11 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions 11 12 Using FLL The following figure shows how file instruction data is manipulated The instruction fills the words of a file with a source value It uses no status bits If you need an enable bit program a parallel output that uses a storage address Destination Source Word to File Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Source is a constant or element address The file indicator is not required for an element address e Destination is the starting address of the file you want to fill You must use the file indicator in the address e Length is the number of words or elements in the file to be filled then you can specify a maximum length of If the destination file type is a Discrete Analog Output Oooo nr 5 Input 2 8 Status 33 Bit 32 Timer 40 Counter 32 Control 16 Integer 105 All elements are filled from the source value typically a constant into the specified destination
208. Type in a new password using any combination of the numbers available on the MicroLogix 1000 HHP keypad i e 0 9 You can only use numeric based passwords The maximum length for a password is ten characters 4 Enter the new password Another screen appears so you can verify the new password 5 Retype the new password enter it and return to the home screen er Important To remove password protection from a program you need to enter an empty password To do this follow the steps shown above but do not type or retype a new password when prompted Instead just press ENT to bypass the prompts 18 4 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program Setting the Run Always Bit This selection determines what mode the controller will enter at power up following a power down or an unexpected reset When this bit is set to No the controller powers up in the mode it was in prior to losing power with one exception If the controller was in one of the test modes RCSN or RSSN when power was removed the controller enters RPRG when power is applied With this setting you must manually clear the faults that caused the power down When this bit is set to YES the controller automatically clears any major and minor errors that caused the power down or unexpected reset and then attempts to enter RRUN mode when power is applied ATTENTION Unexpected resets may occur due to electromagnetic noise improper grounding or an int
209. UT c MRD LD d ANB OUT e MPP LDf ANB OUT g 16 5 Chapter 16 Instruction List Programming 16 6 Output Branching with Block Connections The example below shows how you use ANB and ORB instructions in a rung s output circuit See page 8 12 for more information regarding the use of these instructions Nested Output Branches b c ey f 1 j YF d g j 3 EC qj b ijg 1 iS Optimized NEW RUNG LDa MPS LD b AND c OR d ANB OUTe MPP LD f AND g LDh ANDi ORB ANB AND j OUT k Option 1 NEW RUNG LDa MPS LD b LDc ANB LDd ORB ANB OUT e MPP LDf LDg ANB LDh LDi ANB ORB ANB AND j OUT k The example below requires multiple MPS MPP instructions in a rung See page 8 10 for more information regarding the use of these instructions Ean pa on wy y spr Optimized NEW RUNG LD a MPS AND b OUT c MRD AND d MPS AND e OUT f MPP AND g OUT h MPP AND i OUT j Option 1 NEW RUNG LDa MPS LD b ANB OUT c MRD LD d ANB MPS LD e ANB OUT f MPP LD g ANB OUT h MPP LDi ANB OUT j Chapter 16 Instruction List Programming Putting it All Together The example that f
210. _ENABLE bit Ensure that your high value lies within the conversion range of your analog input 5 Set and then reset the CALIBRATE bit This causes the MicroLogix to calculate the slope and offset values used to perform the error correction to the analog input The analog channel is now calibrated to 5 LSB at the calibration temperature The recommended calibration period is once every 6 months If an application has a wide range of operating temperatures a software calibration should be performed every 3 to 4 months Example Ladder Diagram The following ladder diagram uses three internal bits to perform the calibration procedure CAL_LO_ENABLE causes the ladder to capture the 4 mA calibration value and CAL_HI_ENABLE causes the ladder to capture the 20 mA calibration value CALIBRATE causes the ladder diagram to scale the high and low values to the nominal values which provides the slope and offset values used to calibrate the analog input channel Appendix F Optional Analog Input S oftware Calibration Once the calibration procedure is complete set the CONVERSION ENABLE bit to 1 The calibration numbers are then used to scale the raw analog data The corrected analog input data is placed in memory location ANALOG_SCALED The following symbols are used in this example CAL_LO_ENABLE B3 500 CAL_HI_ENABLE B3 501 CALIBRATE B3 502 CONVERSION ENABLE B3 503 ANALOG_IN 1 0 4 LO_CAL_VALUE N7 90 HI_CAL_VALUE
211. a P000 RES C00 Operation Execution of this instruction immediately e removes pending high speed counter interrupts resets the hardware and instruction accumulators e resets the PE LS OV UN and DN status bits e loads the instruction high preset to the hardware high preset if the high speed counter is configured as an up counter e resets the IL IH IN or IV status bits You can have more than one RES instruction in your program 14 19 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions High Speed Counter Reset Accumulator RAC Ladder representation RAC RESET TO ACCUM VALUE Counter c5 0 Source 1 Execution Times usec when True False 56 00 6 00 To enter the function code press R P008 CNTR EJ eE Lere 14 20 This instruction allows you to write a specific value to the hardware accumulator and image accumulator The Counter referenced by this instruction has the same address as the HSC instruction counter and is fixed at CO Entering Parameters Enter the following parameter when programming this instruction e Source represents the value that is loaded to the accumulator The source can be a constant or an address Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area The following items apply when entering the instruction e Whenever you see asterisks on the display the HHP is waiting for data entry i e
212. a number e You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key NY Then if you want to edit that operand press DEL or FUN DEL and enter new parameters Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one Once the entire instruction is entered if you want to edit the instruction s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode See page 17 4 Poos RAC SRC N e ke ke e 1 Once instruction entry is complete the parameters appear as shown here P008 RAC coo P 1 A 1 P008 RAC SRC 1 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions Operation Execution of the RAC e removes pending high speed counter interrupts e resets the PE LS OV UN and DN status bits e loads a new accumulator value to the hardware and instruction image e loads the instruction high preset to the hardware high preset if the high speed counter is configured as an Up Counter e resets the IL IH IN or IV status bits The source can be a constant or any integer element in files 0 7 The hardware and instruction accumulators are updated with the new accumulator value immediately upon instruction execution You can have more than one RAC instruction per program referencing the same source or different sources High Speed Counter Interrupt These instructions enable or disable a high speed counter interrupt when a Enable HSE and Disable HSD high preset low preset overflow or underflow
213. a power supply shutdown Input States on Power Down The power supply hold up time as described above is generally longer than the turn on and turn off times of the inputs Because of this the input state change from On to Off that occurs when power is removed may be recorded by the processor before the power supply shuts down the system The user program should be written to take this effect into account Other Types of Line Conditions Occasionally the power source to the system can be temporarily interrupted It is also possible that the voltage level may drop substantially below the normal line voltage range for a period of time Both of these conditions are considered to be a loss of power for the system Chapter 1 Installing Your Controller Preventing Excessive Heat Controller Spacing Mounting the Controller For most applications normal convective cooling keeps the controller within the specified operating range Ensure that the specified operating range is maintained Proper spacing of components within an enclosure is usually sufficient for heat dissipation In some applications a substantial amount of heat is produced by other equipment inside or outside the enclosure In this case place blower fans inside the enclosure to assist in air circulation and to reduce hot spots near the controller Additional cooling provisions might be necessary when high ambient temperatures are encountered Impo
214. able DDV Double Divide source immediate direct 0 1 5 B 1 C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct destination direct indexed direct 0 1 5 B T C R N Not Applicable DIV Divide source A immediate direct 0 1 5 B 1 C R N_ 32 768 32 767 indexed direct f min f max source B immediate direct 0 1 S B T C R N_ 32 768 32 767 indexed direct f min f max destination direct indexed direct 0 1 5 B T C R N Not Applicable ENC Encode 1 of 16 to 4 source direct indexed direct 0 1 S B T C R N_ Not Applicable destination direct indexed direct 0 1 5 B T C R N Not Applicable EQU Equal source A direct indexed direct 0 1l S B T C R N Not Applicable source B immediate direct O l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct f min f max FFL FIFO Load source direct indexed direct O 1l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 FIFO array indexed direct 0 1 S B N Not Applicable FIFO control direct R element level Not Applicable length contained in the 1 128 control register position contained in the 0 127 control register FFU FIFO Unload FIFO array indexed direct 0 1 5 B N Not Applicable destination direct indexed direct 0 1 S B 1 C R N Not Applicable FIFO control direct R element level Not Applicable length contained in the 1 128 control register position contained in the 0 127 control register Indexed addressing is not allowed when using T C or R addresses Appendix C Valid Addressing Modes and F
215. able in the current program On entry to the program monitor the file number to monitor defaults to this file Instruction Words Free Program File Number 4 7 Chapter 4 Using Your Hand Held Programmer rone How to Complete Tasks You complete tasks by pressing the appropriate key or key sequence from the home screen From Home you can access these areas To Press Menu Mode MENU Program Monitor access the menu options T Data Monitor Mult F ortun change the controller s mode See page MODE 18 23 O access the multi point functional area See MT PT page 18 31 B FAULT view faults See page 20 11 PRE LEN clear a fault manually See page 20 11 ozt eee ai monitor functional area fen monitor functional area See ape Access Menu by Menu pressing this key MENU From the menu functional area you can perform various program and system Ea tasks The available menu options are 1 LANGUAGE See page 4 17 2 ACCEPT EDITS See page 18 21 3 PROG CONFIG See page 18 1 4 MEM MODULE See page 19 1 5 CLEAR FORCES See pages 18 37 and 18 39 6 CLEAR PROG See page 19 6 7 comms See page 19 6 8 CONTRAST See page 4 18 O f you have configured your program for operation with Series A or B MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers this menu option iS BAUD RATE See page 19 7 4 8 Chapter 4 Using Your Hand Held Programmer
216. acking machine This proximity switch is wired to the I 1 terminal down count on the same controller Bottle Line Ladder Program Rung 2 0 Loads the high speed counter with the following parameters N7 0 0001h Output Mask Effect only 0 0 0 N7 1 0001h Output Pattern for High Preset Energize 0 0 0 upon high preset N7 2 350d High Preset Maximum numbers of bottles for the holding area N7 3 0000h Output Pattern for Low Preset not used N7 4 Od Low Preset not used First Pass Bit S 1 HSL HSC LOAD 15 Counter E530 Source N7 0 Length 5 ee E 29 Appendix E Application Example Programs Rung 2 1 Starts up the high speed counter with the above parameters Each time the rung is evaluated the hardware accumulator is written to C5 0 ACC HSC HIGH SPEED COUNTER CU Type Up Down CD Counter C5 0 DN Preset 350 Accum 0 Rung 2 2 Packing machine running too fast for the filling machine Slow down the packing machine to allow the filler to catch up Slow Pack LES 0 0 LESS THAN L Source A C5 0 ACC 2 0 Source B 100 4 Rung 2 3 f the packer was slowed down to allow the filler to catch u
217. ackward to the specified label instruction 12 2 LBL LD LBL 131 Label JSR 132 J ump to Subroutine BR LD SBR 133 Subroutine J ump to a designated subroutine and return 12 3 RET 134 Return from Subroutine MCR 135 Master Control Reset Turn off all non retentive outputs in a section of ladder program 12 6 TND 136 Temporary End Mark a temporary end that halts program execution 12 7 Identifies specific conditions for program debugging and system SUS 137 Suspend troubleshooting 12 7 IIM 138 ea Input with Program an Immediate Input with Mask 12 8 IOM 139 Immediate Output with Program an Immediate Output with Mask 12 9 Mask About the Program Flow Control Instructions Use these instructions to control the sequence in which your program is executed Since these are output instructions except LD LBL and LD SBR they do not have LD AND and OR equivalents 12 1 Chapter 12 Using Program Flow Control Instructions Jump JMP and Label LBL Ladder representation 2 E LBL Execution Times usec when True False JMP 9 04 6 78 LBL 1 45 0 99 Use these instructions in pairs to skip portions of the ladder program If the Rung Containing the Jump Instruction is Then the Program True Skips from the rung containing the J MP instruction to the rung containing the designated LBL instruction and then continues executing You can jump forward or backward False Does not execute the
218. ade a false to true transition the accumulated value is decremented by one count provided that the rung containing the rung containing the CTD instruction is evaluated between these transitions The accumulated counts are retained when the rung conditions again become false The accumulated count is retained until cleared by a reset RES instruction that has the same address as the counter reset 8 25 Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions 8 26 To enter the function code press AN FUN a ENT Using Status Bits And Remains Set Until One This Bit Is Set When of the Following a RES instruction having the same address as the CTD instruction is enabled OR the count is incremented greater than or equal to 432 767 with a CTU instruction Count Down Underflow Bit UN bit 11 accumulated value wraps around to 32 768 from 32 767 and continues counting down from there Done Bit DN bit 13 accumulated value is equal to the accumulated value or greater than the preset value becomes less than the preset Count Down Enable Bit EN rung conditions are true rung conditions go false OR bit 14 a RES instruction having the same address as the CTD instruction is enabled Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area P000 CTD ADDR Be P000 CTD PRE ee e P000 CTD Acc ke kK ke k k 0 Once instruction entry is complete the parameters
219. ain Wire Clear Wire Chapter 2 Wiring Your Controller Wiring Your Analog Channels Analog input circuits can monitor current and voltage signals and convert them to serial digital data The analog output can support either a voltage or a current function Sensor 2 Sensor 3 V Voltage I Current Sensor 1 oo Feed V Voltage I Current jumer OCOLO unused 1 10 1 11 1A AO AA AOA 2 IAB 1A inputs SHD ve ve e so 1 a e VAC l NoT OA AID OAD OA voc 0 4 0 5 0 6 O 7 USED SHD vi I OOOO OOO OOO You can configure either voltage a or current output operation meter For increased noise immunity connect a ground wire directly from the shield terminals to chassis ground Important The controller does not provide loop power for analog inputs Use a power supply that matches the transmitter specifications Transmitter 2 Wire Transmitter Controller Power O Transmitter 3 Wire Transmitter Supply Signal GND Power O 4 Wire Transmitter Transmitter Supply Signal 2 21 Chapter 2 Wiring Your Controller Analog Voltage and Current The following drawings show the analog voltage input range analog current Input and Output Ranges input range analog voltage output range and analog cu
220. aking 3 14 About Your HHP Chapter Using Your Hand Held Programmer This chapter describes your MicroLogix 1000 Hand Held Programmer HHP its memory module and its power up procedure It also walks you through the start up displays and helps you understand some of the functionality options available to you Read this chapter for information about your HHP installing memory modules the keys you use the power up sequence the HHPs functional areas the HHPs defaults Important The table below provides software compatibility information necessary for full functionality of your MicroLogix 1000 controller Software Package Version X X Functionality Level y2 10 11 or later Full a ae ae Series D and RSLogix 500 9324 RLO3000E ND v2 0 57 Full functionality for Series D controllers only RSLogix 500 Starter 9323 RLO1O0END v1 24 O Series C functionality only v1 05 Full functionality for MicroLogix 1000 Series D and A l 500 il analog controllers 9323 S 5300D 815 Series C functionality onl AL Micro v8 eries C functionality only 9323 MX300EN Series C functionality only Cannot download to veiloreanier Series D or analog controllers oo v6 04 or earlier Series A B functionality only MPS VLO 9323 PA1E The MicroLogix 1000 Hand Held Programmer HHP allows you to create edit monitor and troubleshoot Instruction List Boolean programs for your micro controller With the HHP and either
221. alog Signal and Data Word values using the nominal transfer function formula N x 32767 21 where Iin analog signal is in milliamperes mA N Vin x 32767 10 5 where Vin analog signal is in volts V N out 4 mA x 32767 16 mA where Iout analog signal is in milliamperes mA N Vout X 32767 10V where Vout analog signal is in volts V Analog Signal Data Word Input Output OV 0 0 5V 15603 16384 10V 32107 32767 4 mA 6241 0 11 mA 17164 14336 20 mA 31207 32767 Converting Analog Input Data Analog inputs convert current and voltage signals into 16 bit two s complement binary values To determine an approximate voltage that an input value represents use one of the following equations 10 5V 32767 X input value input voltage V The Input Value is the decimal value of the word in the input image for the corresponding analog input For example if an input value of 16 021 is in the input image the calculated value is 10 5V 32 767 It should be noted that the actual value may vary within the accuracy limitations of the circuit x 16 201 5 1915 V Chapter 7 Using Analog To determine an approximate current that an input value represents you can use the following equation 21mA 32767 Xx input value input current mA The Input Value is the decimal value of the word in the input image for the corresponding analog input For example if an
222. alue the accumulated value becomes less than the preset Count Up Enable Bit EN bit 15 rung conditions are true rung conditions go false OR a RES instruction having the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled To enter the function code press A FUN a ENT Count Down CTD Ladder representation CTD COUNT DOWN Counter Preset Accum cSt 120 DN Execution Times usec when True False 32 19 27 22 Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area P000 CTU co CTU PRE 1499 CTU ACC Kk ke k k 0 Once instruction entry is complete the parameters are condensed to one screen as shown here The accumulated value is retained after the CTU instruction goes false or when power is removed from and then restored to the controller Also the on or off status of counter done overflow and underflow bits is retentive The accumulated value and control bits are reset when the appropriate RES instruction is enabled The CU bits are always set prior to entering the RRUN RCSN or RSSN modes The CTD is a retentive output instruction that counts false to true rung transitions Rung transitions can be caused by events occurring in the program such as parts traveling past a detector or actuating a limit switch When rung conditions for a CTD instruction have m
223. ame Purpose Page amp cht Loads a bit of data into a bit array shifts the pattern of data to the a BSL 150 Bit Shift Left left through the array and unloads the last bit of data in the array 1533 Loads a bit of data into a bit array shifts the pattern of data to the BSR 151 Bit Shift Right right through the array and unloads the last bit of data in the 13 4 array SQo 152 Sequencer Output Control sequential machine operations by transferring 16 bit data 45 sac 153 Sequencer Compare through a mask to image addresses Capture referenced conditions by manually stepping the machine bs SoL 2 sequencer Load through its operating sequences Neale Selectable Timer STD 155 nterrupt Disable Output instructions associated with the Selectable Timed Selectable Ti Interrupt function STD and STE are used to prevent an STI from 13 17 electable fimer occurring during a portion of the program STE 156 nterrupt Enable 4 aap prag STS 157 Aas tag Initiates a Selectable Timed Interrupt 13 18 Hnr LD INT 158 nterrupt Subroutine Associated with Selectable Timed Interrupts or HSC Interrupts 13 19 About the Application These instructions simplify your program by allowing you to use a single Specific Instructions instruction or pair of instructions to perform common complex operations Since these are output instructions except LD INT they do not have LD AND and OR equivalents In this chapter you will find a general overview preceding groups of instruc
224. ameters C 5 ladder representation 14 4 types of 14 5 bidirectional counter 14 9 bidirectional counter with reset and hold 14 9 bidirectional counter with reset and hold with a quadrature encoder 14 12 up counter 14 7 up counter with reset and hold 14 7 valid addressing modes C 5 valid file types C 5 what happens when going to RRUN 14 23 high speed counter instructions about 14 1 High Speed Counter HSC 14 4 High Speed Counter Interrupt Disable HSD 14 21 High Speed Counter Interrupt Enable HSE 14 21 igh Speed Counter Load HSL 14 15 igh Speed Counter Reset RES 14 19 igh Speed Counter Reset Accumulator RAC 14 20 in the paper drilling machine application example 14 28 overview 14 2 counter data file elements 14 2 using status bits 14 2 Update High S peed Counter Image Accumulator OUT 14 23 e e High Speed Counter Interrupt Disable HSD 14 21 execution times 14 21 function code 14 22 instruction parameters C 5 ladder representation 14 21 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual using HSD 14 22 entering the instruction 14 22 operation 14 22 valid addressing modes C 5 valid file types C 5 High Speed Counter Interrupt Enable HSE 14 21 execution times 14 21 function code 14 21 instruction parameters C 5 ladder representation 14 21 using HSE 14 21 entering the instruction 14 21 operation 14 22 valid addressing modes C 5
225. an return to previously entered operands by pressing this key Noy Then if you want to edit that operand press DEL or FUN DEL and enter new parameters Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one Once the entire instruction is entered if you want to edit the instruction s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode See page 17 4 Effects on Index Register S24 The value present in S24 is overwritten with the position value when a false to true transition of the FFL FFU or LFL LFU rung occurs For the FFL LFL the position value determined at instruction entry is placed in S24 For the FFU LFU the position value determined at instruction exit is placed in S24 When the DN bit is set a false to true transition of the FFL LFL rung does not change the position value or the index register value When the EM bit is set a false to true transition of the FFU LFU rung does not change the position value or the index register value Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions FIFO Load FFL and FFL and FFU instructions are used in pairs The FFL instruction loads words FIFO Unload FFU into a user created file called a FIFO stack The FFU instruction unloads words from the FIFO stack in the same order as they were entered Ladder representation FFL FIFO LOAD EN Source N7 10 DN FIFO N7 12 EM Control R6 0 Length 34 Position 9 FFU FIFO UNLOAD EU FIFO N7 12 DN Dest N7 11
226. analog D 2 Appendix D Understanding the Communication Protocols Example DF1 Full Duplex Connections For information about required network connecting equipment see chapter 3 Connecting the System fe Optical Isolator Micro Controller j recommended r I poo000000 SEES 1761 CBL P M02 E Gsi Personal Computer Si Personal Computer Modem S Optical Isolator Micro Controller recommended am E Modem 1761 CBL PM02 We recommend using an AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC as your optical isolator See page 3 8 and 3 9 for specific AIC cabling information D 3 Appendix D Understanding the Communication Protocols DF1 Half Duplex Slave Protocol D 4 DF1 half duplex slave protocol provides a multi drop single master multiple slave network In contrast to DF1 full duplex communication takes place in one direction at a time You can use the RS 232 port on the MicroLogix as both a half duplex programming port as well as a half duplex peer to peer messaging port The master device initiates all communication by polling each slave device The slave device may only transmit message packets when it is polled by the master It is the master s responsibility to poll each slave on a regular and sequential basis to allow slaves to send message packets back to
227. and OR instructions Important The bit AND and bit OR instructions discussed here differ from the word AND and word OR output instructions described in chapter 11 Bit Address State LD AND and OR Instruction 0 False 1 True Examples of devices that turn on or off include e a push button wired to an input addressed as I 4 e an output wired to a pilot light addressed as O 2 e a timer controlling a light addressed as T3 DN Using LD Use the LD instruction for normally open contacts that appears first on a rung or block Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area P000 FH 1 6 0 8 3 Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Using AND Use the AND instruction for normally open contacts placed in series with any previous input instruction in the current rung or block Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To access the AND instruction press AND P000 AOR 7 Using OR Use the OR instruction for normally open contacts placed in parallel with any previous input instruction in the current rung or block Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To access the OR instruction press OR P000 Lh H B 0 1 Load Inverted LDI LDI ANI and ORI are all normally closed instructions used in your ladder And Inverted
228. and contact your local Allen Bradley representative 6000 NOT ALLOWED A communication error Disconnect the HHP from the has occurred between micro controller then reconnect the HHP and the micro it If the error persists record controller the error code and contact your local Allen Bradley representative F00B ACCESS DENIED The micro controller Use the HHP to change the must be in program controller s mode to RPRG and mode try the operation again FOOC NOT AVAILABLE The micro controller Use the HHP to change the must be in program controller s mode to RPRG and mode try the operation again FOIA FILE OPEN A communication error Disconnect the HHP from the occurred between the micro controller then reconnect HHP and the micro it If the error persists record controller the error code and contact your local Allen Bradley representative F01B PROGRAM OWNED A communication error Disconnect the HHP from the occurred between the micro controller then reconnect HHP and the micro it If the error persists record controller the error code and contact your local Allen Bradley representative all other CONTROLLER A communication error Disconnect the HHP from the 1xxx 5xxx ERROR occurred between the micro controller then reconnect 6xxx or HHP and the micro it If the error persists record Fxxx codes controller the error code and contact your local Allen Bradley representative Chapter 20 Troubleshooting Your Syste
229. and then stored in the destination one s complement Ladder representation NOT Truth Table NoT Source N7 4 _ Dest NOTA _ 0 A Dest Dest N7 E 0 I 1 0 E KEOU NOR MMES IUSES aN The source and destination must be word addresses True False 28 21 6 78 Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S0 0 Carry C always resets S0 1 Overflow V always resets 0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets r sets if result is negative most significant bit is set 50 3 Sign S otherwise resets Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To enter the function code press AN O22 P000 NOT N11 11 21 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions Negate NEG Ladder representation NEG NEGATE Source N7 4 0 Dest N7 11 0 Execution Times usec when True False 29 48 6 78 11 22 To enter the function code press Use the NEG instruction to change the sign of a value If you negate a negative value the result is a positive if you negate a positive value the result is a negative The destination contains the two s complement of the source The source and destination must be word addresses Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry C clears if 0 or overflow otherwise sets 0 1 Overflow V sets if
230. annot undo the deletion Once the instruction is deleted the instruction that immediately followed it on the rung appears on the display The only exceptions to that rule are described in the table below If the deleted instruction was Then the display shows the last instruction on a rung the first instruction of the next rung the only instruction on a rung an empty Start of Rung screen You cannot delete the Start of Rung screen unless all other instructions on the rung are deleted first However you can delete the entire rung Deleting a Single Rung To delete a single rung follow these steps 1 While viewing any instruction located on the rung you want to delete press the key sequence shown here A ALL Fun foei DELETE RUNG S The confirmation screen shown above appears The number of the rung to be deleted is shown in the lower left hand corner Chapter 17 Entering and Editing Your Program 2 If this is the rung you want to delete press ENT If you do not want to delete this rung press ESC Important If you delete a rung you cannot undo the deletion Once the rung is deleted the rung that immediately followed it in the program file is displayed Deleting a Range of Rungs Deleting a range of rungs uses the same key sequence required to delete a single rung Follow these steps to delete multiple rungs 1 Start at the first or last rung of the range of rungs you want to delete 2
231. arding the use of these instructions b h Optimized Option 1 Option 2 l C NEWRUNG NEW RUNG NEW RUNG 3 3 LDa LDa LDa cp d g AND b LDb LDb l LDec ANB ANB LDd LDC LDc i e E LDe LDd LDd oe AND f LDe LDe 7 ORB AND f LDf 2 ANB ORB ANB AND g ANB ORB 3 ORB AND g ANB OUTh ORB LDg OUT h ANB ORB OUT h 16 3 Chapter 16 Instruction List Programming 16 4 Output Rung Examples This section shows you examples of output rungs and their optimized instruction list representation Like the input rungs many output rungs have more than one possible instruction list representation Therefore where applicable an optional representation is shown to the right of the optimized list Single Output It is possible to have a rung made up of just an output An example of such a rung is shown below Optimized 7 NEW RUNG OUTa Output Branching You can program parallel outputs on a rung to allow a true logic path to control multiple outputs as shown in the following example Important It is possible to have a rung with output branching and no input instruction Optimized na gt NEW RUNG eo C LDa c OUT b C OUT c d OUT d Output Branching With Conditions As stated in chapter 6 additional input logic instructions or conditions can be programmed in the output branches to fu
232. ardware accumulator A high preset is reached 14 7 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions 14 8 When a high preset is reached no counts are lost e Hardware and instruction accumulators are reset e Instruction high preset is loaded to the hardware high preset e Ifthe DN bit is not set the DN bit is set The IH bit is also set and the IL IV and IN bits are reset e Ifthe DN bit is already set the OV bit is set The IV bit is also set and the IL IV and IN bits are reset e High speed counter interrupt file file 4 is executed if the interrupt is enabled The following tables summarize what the input state must be for the corresponding high speed counter action to occur Up Counter Input State High Speed Input Count Input Input Reset Input Hold HSC Run Counter Action 1 0 Direction I 1 1 2 1 3 9 Turning Off to On NA NA NA True Count Up NA NA NA NA False Hold Count NA Not Applicable Up Counter with Reset and Hold Input state High Speed Input Count Input Input Reset Input Hold Acti I O Direction 1 1 2 1 3 HSC Rung Counter Action Turning Off On or Offto On A uming Off Off True Count Up Off On or NA A uring Off On NA Hold Count Off On or NA NA uring Off NA False Hold Count Off On or Off On or Turing Off A uring Off NA NA Hold Count NA NA Turning On NA NA Reset to 0 N
233. are condensed to one screen as shown here P000 CTD C01 P 120 A 0 The accumulated value is retained after the CTD instruction goes false or when power is removed from and then restored to the controller Also the on or off status of counter done overflow and underflow bits is retentive The accumulated value and control bits are reset when the appropriate RES instruction is executed The CD bits are always set prior to entering the RRUN RCSN or RSSN modes Reset RES Ladder representation T4 0 resi Execution Times usec when True 15 19 False 4 25 To enter the function code press AN FUN ae es ENT Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Use a RES instruction to reset a timer or counter When the RES instruction is executed it resets the data having the same address as the RES instruction Using a RES instruction for a The controller resets the Timer ACC value to 0 Do not use a RES instruction with a TOF DN bit TT bit EN bit ACC value to 0 OV bit UN bit D C C Counter bit U bit D bit Control POS value to 0 EN bit EU bit DN bit EM bit ER bit UL bit N and FD go to last state Important If using this instruction to reset the high speed counter accumulator see page 14 19 Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area P000 RES T00 When resetting a counter if the RES instruction is enabled and the
234. art on the carrier a 1 is shifted into the shift register If the carrier is free as it passes the shift limit switch a 0 is shifted into the shift register The shift register tracks the part carriers approaching the spraying area The FIFO does the same type of shifting except rather than shifting one bit at a time the FIFO shifts an entire word at a time Just before the part carrier actuates the SHIFT limit switch the barcode reader reads the barcode on the part to determine what color the part should be painted The barcode reader has three outputs that it sets according to what color the part should be These outputs are e wired to the controller as inputs I 2 I 3 and 1 4 combined together to form an integer which is decoded later in the program This integer is then shifted into the FIFO when the carrier actuates the SHIFT limit switch Once the presence and color data is loaded into the shift register and FIFO they are shifted to new memory locations each time another part carrier actuates the SHIFT limit switch After three additional shifts the first part carrier is in front of the spray guns ready for its part to be painted At this point the part presence data has been shifted into B 3 and the color data has been shifted into NO The program now checks B 3 if there is a 1 in this location then there is a part hanging on the part carrier and the SPRAY ENABLE output is energized The program also checks NO to d
235. as true or false Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Type indicates the counter selected Refer to page 14 5 for making your high speed counter selection Each type is available with reset and hold functionality e High Preset is the accumulated value that triggers a user specified action such as updating outputs or generating an high speed counter interrupt e Accumulator is the number of accumulated counts Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions The table that follows uses the terminology shown here to indicate the status of counting e Up increments by 1 when the input energizes edge e Downt decrements by 1 when the input energizes edge e Reset resets the accumulator to zero when the input energizes edge e Hold disables the high speed counter from counting while the input is energized level Count increments or decrements by 1 when the input energizes edge Direction allows up counts when the input is de energized and down counts while the input is energized level A input pulse in an incremental quadrature encoder edge level B input pulse in an incremental quadrature encoder edge level Z reset pulse in an incremental quadrature encoder edge level T the signal is active on the rising edge only off to on The table below lists the types of high speed counter you can choose
236. ation word address a file address or a constant SOL SEQUENCER LOAD EN Entering Parameters File B3 8 DN PATRA re Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction EA i e File is the address of the sequencer file You must use the file indicator FOSTELOR for this address The HHP inserts the character automatically e Source can be a word address file address or a constant 32 768 to Execution Times usec when 32 767 True False If the source is a file address the file length equals the length of the 53 41 28 12 sequencer load file The two files step automatically according to the position value Length is the number of steps of the sequencer load file and also of the source if the source is a file address starting at position 1 The maximum number you can enter is 104 words Position 0 is the startup position The instruction resets wraps to position 1 at each cycle completion e Position is the word location or step in the sequencer file to which data is moved e Control is a control file address The status bits length value and position value are stored in this element Do not use the control file address for any other instruction The control element is shown below 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Word 0 EN DN ER Word 1 Length Word 2 Position Status bits of the control structure include Error Bit ER bit 11 is
237. ations Editing Modes Chapter 17 Entering and Editing Your Program Before you begin to edit an existing program you should store the program on a memory module or save it on a personal computer with programming software That way if you edit a program and then decide that you don t want to accept the edits you have made i e you want the original program back you can reload the original unedited program to the controller When the controller is in RPRG mode you can edit program files from within the MicroLogix 1000 HHPs program monitor functional area The HHP has two editing modes e append P e overwrite O A letter appears in the upper left hand corner of the program monitor display to indicate what mode is currently selected This letter starts flashing once edits are made to the program The default mode is append P Edit Mode P STARTFILE 02 MAIN_PROG In general append mode is used to add a new instruction or rung while overwrite mode is used to write over or edit the parameters of existing instructions To toggle between the edit modes press the key shown here OVR Each mode is explained in more detail below Append Mode To add an instruction or a rung to a program the MicroLogix 1000 HHP must be in append mode The instruction or rung is always added after the instruction or rung currently displayed by the HHP Adding an Instruction Follow these steps to add an instruction 1 Make
238. ative timer Every time the timer reaches its preset the DONE bit is set for one scan this causes this rung to become FALSE for one scan and resets the timer On the following scan when this rung becomes TRUE again the timer begins timing FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 21 l 1 LDI Timer Enable TO DN 0 0 TON Timer TIMR TO BASE 0 01 PRE 0001H ACC 0000H File 2 Rung 1 Controls the RED GREEN and YELLOW lights wired to outputs 0 0 0 0 0 2 and controls how long the regenerative timer times between each step When this rung goes from false to true by the timer reaching its preset the first sequencer changes which traffic light is illuminated and the second sequencer changes the preset of the timer to determine how long this next light is illuminated FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 LD Step SQO TO DN 0 152 SQO RED GREEN and YELLOW lights FILE NO MASK 0007H DEST OO CTRL RO LEN 0003H POS 0000H 152 SQO Timer presets for each light FILE N5 MASK FFFFH DEST T0 PRE CTRL R1 LEN 0003H POS 0000H Event Driven Sequencer Application Example Appendix E Application Example Programs The following application example illustrates how the FD found bit on an SQC instruction can be used to advance an SQO to the next step position This application program is used when a specific order of events is required to occur repeatedly By
239. ave of the program These methods are e using the ACCEPT EDITS option from the menu while in RPRG mode e changing from RPRG mode to any run or test mode RRUN RCSN or RSSN Using the ACCEPT EDITS Menu Option To use this method select ACCEPT EDITS from the menu as shown below Important A confirmation screen does not appear Be certain you want to accept the edits you ve made to the program before you select this menu option ee gt 2 ACCEPT EDITS CHECKING FREE WORDS 728 WRITING When the verification is completed the screen displays the number of free user words If an error message appears see chapter 19 for definitions of the program verification error codes and the recommended action s you should take Once the program edits are accepted the menu screen reappears The controller remains in RPRG mode Changing from RPRG Mode to any Run or Test Mode For information on accepting edits using this method see the section below Changing Controller Modes The following section describes the available modes of operation for the micro controller how to change between those modes using the MicroLogix 1000 HHP and the tasks you can perform in each mode Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program Modes of Operation All controller modes are considered to be remote which indicates that the modes can be changed via the communication channels The current mode
240. before it executes the FRD This prevents the FRD from converting a non BCD value during an input value change Important To convert numbers larger than 9999 BCD the source must be the Math Register S13 You must reset the Minor Error Bit S5 0 to prevent an error Ladder Rungs S 1 EQU FRD i EQUAL FROM BCD __ 15 Source A N7 1 Source T 0 0 0 0000 Source B I 0 0 Dest N7 2 0 0 MOV MOVE Source 30 0 0 Dest N7 1 0 11 4 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions Instruction List FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 21 i LDI 81 15 0 51 EQU AND EQU SRCA N1 0000H SRCB I0 0000H 101 FRD SRC I0 0000H DEST NZ 0000H FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 106 MOV SRC I0 0000H DEST N1 0000H Example 2 The BCD value 32760 in the math register is converted and stored in N10 The maximum source value is 32767 BCD 0000 0000 0000 001 0010 0111 0110 0000 15 SM 9 45 SB 0 5 digit BCD mA 3 2 7 6 o N10Decimal 0111 1111 1111 1000 You should convert BCD values to integer before you manipulate them in your program If you do not convert the values the controller manipulates them as integers and their value may be lost Important If the math register S13 and S14 is used as the source for the FRD instruction and the BCD value does no
241. being stored in a memory module When this function is set to NO access to a controller program is unrestricted This is the default When this function is set to YES access to a controller program is only permitted when a matching program exists in the memory module If a memory module is not present or a matching program does not exist you can only perform the following functions e change the language e change the display contrast e change the controller mode e view clear faults e monitor edit data e view the multi point list e force I O and or clear forces e clear the controller program e clear a memory module program e load a different program Important If you lose or delete the memory module s copy of the program you must clear the controller memory and re enter the program 18 17 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program 18 18 To change the function setting 1 Put the controller in RPRG mode if it is not already in that mode 2 Access the program configuration menu 3 Arrow up to the option LOCK PROG and select it 2 times LOCK PROG OYES MNO 4 Select the option YES and return to the home screen gt fent ese ese 5 You must accept your program edits for this change to take affect For information on accepting edits see the section that follows Important You must cycle power on the MicroLogix 1000 HHP for the lock to be enforced Changing the Version of Cont
242. below These components must be appropriately rated to suppress the switching transient characteristic of the particular inductive device See the table on page 1 9 for recommended suppressors Surge Suppression for Inductive ac Load Devices ey Se s Output Device Output Device Output Device Surge AV Suppressor Varistor RC Network If you connect a micro controller triac output to control an inductive load we recommend that you use varistors to suppress noise Choose a varistor that is appropriate for the application The suppressors we recommend for triac outputs when switching 120V ac inductive loads are a Harris MOV part number V175 LA10A or an Allen Bradley MOV catalog number 599 K04 or 599 KA04 Consult the varistor manufacturer s data sheet when selecting a varistor for your application For inductive dc load devices a diode is suitable A 1N4004 diode is acceptable for most applications A surge suppressor can also be used See the table on page 1 9 for recommended suppressors As shown in the illustration below these surge suppression circuits connect directly across the load device This reduces arcing of the output contacts High transient can cause arcing that occurs when switching off an inductive device Surge Suppression for Inductive dc Load Devices Output Device 4 Diode A surge suppressor can also be used Safety Considerations Chapter 1 Installing Your Cont
243. broutine files 12 4 using 12 5 valid addressing modes C 8 valid file types C 8 RS 232 communication interface D 1 RST Reset 8 8 RTO Retentive Timer 8 20 run always bit setting 18 5 S Safety Considerations Disconnecting Main Power 1 9 overview 1 9 Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit 1 10 Power Distribution 1 10 Safety Circuits 1 10 SBR Subroutine 12 3 Scale Data SCL 10 12 application example 10 14 entering parameters 10 12 entering the instruction 10 13 execution times 10 12 function code 10 13 instruction parameters C 9 ladder representative 10 12 10 14 updates to arithmetic status bits 10 13 valid addressing modes C 9 valid file types C 9 SCL Scale Data 10 12 screen definitions data monitor 4 13 End of File 17 2 l 25 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual l 26 First Instruction on Rung 17 2 home 4 7 menu 4 9 mode 4 10 multi point function 4 15 program monitor 4 11 Start of File 17 1 Start of Rung 17 2 searching for specific addresses 17 8 addresses that are displayed 17 8 addresses you enter 17 8 bit versus word addresses 17 9 Selectable Timed Disable STD 13 17 entering the instruction 13 17 example 13 17 execution times 13 17 function code 13 17 instruction parameters C 9 ladder representation 13 17 using 13 17 valid addressing modes C 9 valid file types C 9 Selectable Ti
244. c Configuration Use these words bytes or bits to select controller options while online with the controller e Static Configuration Use these words bytes or bits to select controller options prior to saving the user program Address Bit Classification Description S0 Arithmetic and The arithmetic flags are assessed by the controller following the Scan Status execution of certain math and data handling instructions The Flags state of these bits remain in effect until certain math or data handling instructions in the program are executed S0 0 Carry Status This bit is set by the controller if a mathematical carry or borrow is generated Otherwise the bit remains cleared This bit is assessed as if a function of unsigned math When a STI high speed counter or Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 0 is restored when execution resumes 0 1 Overflow Status This bit is set by the controller when the result of a mathematical operation does not fit in its destination Otherwise the bit remains cleared Whenever this bit is set the overflow trap bit 5 0 is also set except for the ENC bit Refer to S 5 0 When a STI high speed counter or Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 1 is restored when execution resumes 0 2 Zero Status This bit is set by the controller when the result of certain math or data handling instructions is zero Otherwi
245. ccurred B 17 0 11 MRD 66 GEQ AND GEQ 1 4 in Thousands SRCA N11 0000H SRCB 105 40 Ga U y OUT change drill bit NOW 0 6 0 12 MPP 20 k l LD 00 000 1 4 in increments have occurred B 16 0 23 j ANT 02 000 1 4 in increments have occurred B17 20 LD 00 000 1 4 in increments have occurred B 16 0 22 j Me AND 02 000 1 4 in increments have occurred B 17 0 22 l AND 28 second free running clock bit S4 7 0 14 ORB 13 ANB 40 OUT change drill bit soon 0 4 0 This branch accesses I O only available with 32 I O controllers Therefore do not include this branch if you are using a 16 1 0 controller E 21 Appendix E Application Example Programs E 22 File 7 Rung 1 Resets the number of 1 4 in increments and the 1 4 in thousands when the drill change reset keyswitch is energized This should occur following each drill bit change FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 l te LD drill change reset keyswitch 1 8 0 85 CLR 1 4 in Thousands DEST N11 0000H 85 CLR 1 4 in increments DEST N10 0000H File 7 Rung 20 Moves the single digit BCD thumbwheel value into an internal integer register This is done to properly align the four BCD input signals prior to executing the BCD to Integer instruction FRD The thumbwheel is used to allow the operator to enter the thickness of the paper that is to be drilled The thickness is entered in 1 4 in increm
246. ce B N7 99 0 Dest OFFSET 0l 4 Overflow Trap 8225 0 SSS SS SS SS Ui Rung 2 3 CONVERS ION_ENABLE SCL SCALE Source A ANALOG_IN 2 Rate 10000 SLOPE_X10K 2l Offset OFFSET 2 Dest ANALOG_SCALED 4 END F 5 Glossary Glossary The following terms are used throughout this manual Refer to the Allen Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary Publication Number AG 7 1 for a complete guide to Allen Bradley technical terms address A character string that uniquely identifies a memory location For example I1 0 is the memory address for the data located in the Input file location word 1 bit 0 application 1 A machine or process monitored and controlled by a controller 2 The use of computer or processor based routines for specific purposes backup data Data saved to the controller with the program baud rate The speed of communication between devices on a network All devices must communicate at the same baud rate bit The smallest storage location in memory that contains either a 1 ON or a 0 OFF block diagrams A schematic drawing Boolean operators Logical operators such as AND OR NEG NOT and XOR that can be used singularly or in combination to form logic stat
247. ce cece eee eee F 1 Glossary toc vii Summary of Changes Summary of Changes The information below summarizes the changes to this manual since the last printing as Publication 1761 6 2 October 1997 the manual we have included change bars as shown to the right of this To help you find new information and updated information in this release of paragraph New Information The table below lists sections that document new features and additional information about existing features and shows where to find this new information For This New Information See Power supply inrush page 1 11 Class I Division 2 certification pages 1 12 A 2 analog controllers pages 2 17 7 1 18 14 appendix A automatic protocol switching page 3 13 DeviceNet communications page 3 13 software compatibility page 4 1 SCL instruction application example page 10 14 remote network support page D 17 Updated Information Changes from the previous release of this manual that require you to reference information differently are as follows e The safety considerations for mounting your controller have been updated see chapter 1 Installing Your Controller e The section on establishing communication has been updated see chapter 3 Connecting the System e For updated information on HHP support and compatibility of the series functionality of your MicroLogix controller see chapter 15 Using Communication Protocols e The message t
248. ch as a second programming terminal that is not being used slow the data transfer rate The maximum number of nodes on the network is 32 Setting Node Addresses The best network performance occurs when node addresses are assigned in sequential order Initiators such as personal computers should be assigned the lowest numbered addresses to minimize the time required to initialize the network The valid range for the MicroLogix 1000 controllers is 1 31 controllers cannot be node 0 The default setting is 1 The node address is stored in the controller status file S 16L Setting Controller Baud Rate The best network performance occurs at the highest baud rate which is 19200 This is the default baud rate for a MicroLogix 1000 device on the DH 485 network All devices must be at the same baud rate This rate is stored in the controller status file S 16H Example DH 485 Connections The following network diagrams provide examples of how to connect Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers to the DH 485 network using the AIC For more information on the AIC see the Advanced Interface Converter and DeviceNet Interface Installation Instructions Publication 1761 5 11 Appendix D Understanding the Communication Protocols DH 485 Network with a MicroLogix 1000 Controller MicroLogix 1000 Series C or later discrete or all analog a PC PC to po
249. ch program may contain two passwords the user password and the master password The master password overrides the user password You can use passwords in the following combinations Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program You must enter the user password to gain access to the Only User Password Designated program You do not have to enter the master password to gain Only Master Password Designated access to the program A master password is used by itself to allow access if a user password has been entered User Password and Master Password You must enter either the user password or the master Designated password to gain access to the program Generally if you are using a number of controllers each controller is given a different user password and a master password is applied to all of the controllers You can use the master password to change or remove any password Important There is no password override to defeat the protection Contact your Allen Bradley representative if you are not able to locate your password To enter a user password and or master password 1 Access the program configuration menu 2 Arrow down to the option USER PASSWORD or MASTER PASSWORD and select it as 1 or 2 times NEW PASSWRD i Important If a password already exists you are prompted to enter it before you can enter a new password 18 3 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program 3
250. ches in the controller program Any emergency stop switch should turn off all machine power by turning off the master control relay Observe all applicable local codes concerning the placement and labeling of emergency stop switches Install emergency stop switches and the master control relay in your system Make certain that relay contacts have a sufficient rating for your application Emergency stop switches must be easy to reach In the following illustration input and output circuits are shown with MCR protection However in most applications only output circuits require MCR protection The following illustrations show the Master Control Relay wired in a grounded system Important The illustrations only show output circuits with MCR protection In most applications input circuits do not require MCR protection however if you need to remove power from all field devices you must include MCR contacts in series with input power wiring Chapter 1 Installing Your Controller Schematic Using IEC Symbols L1 L2 230V ac gt Disconnect Fuse MCR bg i 230V ac 7 1 0 Circuits Isolation Operation of either of these contacts will E Transformer remove power from the adapter external I O circuits stopping machine motion i X1 230V ac gt X2 Master Control Relay MCR i i i nee Cat No 700 PK4
251. control 18 29 counter 18 29 input 18 28 integer 18 30 output 18 28 Status 18 28 timer 18 29 DCD Decode 4 to 1 of 16 11 7 DDV Double Divide 10 10 Decode 4 to 1 of 16 DCD 11 7 entering parameters 11 7 entering the instruction 11 7 execution times 11 7 function code 11 8 instruction parameters C 4 ladder representative 11 7 updates to arithmetic status bits 11 7 valid addressing modes C 4 valid file types C 4 default settings HHP s 4 17 deleting a range of rungs 17 7 a single rung 17 6 an instruction 17 6 multi point addresses 18 34 determining controller faults 20 2 developing your logic program a model 6 17 DeviceNet network connecting 3 13 selecting cable 3 14 DF 1 full duplex protocol configuration parameters D 2 description D 2 example system configuration D 3 using a modem D 7 DF 1 half duplex slave protocol D 4 configuration parameters D 5 using a modem D 7 DH 485 communication protocol configuration parameters D 10 DH 485 network connecting 3 3 description D 9 devices that use the network D 10 example system configuration D 14 initialization D 10 installation 3 3 planning considerations D 12 protocol D 9 software considerations D 13 token rotation D 9 diagnostic troubleshooting keys identifying 4 4 dimensions controller A 7 HHP A 9 DIN rail 1 13 mounting dimensions 1 13 diode 1N4004 1 8 direct addressing C 2 displaying value
252. control relays in series with the dc power supplying the input and output circuits Place the main power disconnect switch where operators and maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it If you mount a disconnect switch inside the controller enclosure place the switch operating handle on the outside of the enclosure so that you can disconnect power without opening the enclosure Whenever any of the emergency stop switches are opened power to input and output devices should be removed When you use the master control relay to remove power from the external I O circuits power continues to be provided to the controller s power supply so that diagnostic indicators on the processor can still be observed The master control relay is not a substitute for a disconnect to the controller It is intended for any situation where the operator must quickly de energize T O devices only When inspecting or installing terminal connections replacing output fuses or working on equipment within the enclosure use the disconnect to shut off power to the rest of the system Important Do not control the master control relay with the controller Provide the operator with the safety of a direct connection between an emergency stop switch and the master control relay Chapter 1 Installing Your Controller Using Emergency Stop Switches When using emergency stop switches adhere to the following points Do not program emergency stop swit
253. controller LED status controller error codes found in S6 of status file e revision of programming device on power sequence display of the HHP 20 16 Controller Specifications Appendix Hardware Reference This appendix lists the MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controller and MicroLogix 1000 HHP e specifications e dimensions e accessories and replacement parts For AIC specifications see the Advanced Interface Converter User Manual Publication 1761 6 4 For DNI specifications see the DeviceNet Interface User Manual Publication 1761 6 5 Controller Types Catalog Number Description 1761 L16AWA 10 pt ac input 6 pt relay output ac power supply controller 1761 L32AWA 20 pt ac input 12 pt relay output ac power supply controller y 12 pt ac input 4 pt analog input 8 pt relay output 1 pt analog output ac 1761 L20AWA 5A power supply controller 1761 L10BWA 6 pt dc input 4 pt relay output ac power supply controller 1761 L16BWA 10 pt dc input 6 pt relay output ac power supply controller 1761 L20BWA 5A 12 pt dc input 4 pt analog input 8 pt relay output 1 pt analog output ac power supply controller 1761 L32BWA 20 pt dc input 12 pt relay output ac power supply controller 1761 L10BWB 6 pt dc input 4 pt relay output dc power supply controller 1761 L16BWB 10 pt dc input 6 pt relay output dc power supply controller 1761 L20BWB 5A 12 pt dc input 4 pt
254. controllers Therefore do not include this rung if you are using a 16 1 0 controller E 8 Appendix E Application Example Programs Rung 6 0 This section of ladder logic controls the up down motion of the drill for the book drilling machine When the conveyor positions the book under the drill the DRILL SEQUENCE START bit is set This rung uses that bit to begin the drilling operation Because the bit is set for the entire drilling operation the OSR is required to be able to turn off the forward signal so the drill can retract Drill Drill Subr Drill Sequence OSR Forward Start B3 B3 0 0 in OSR AARAA SSS SSS C2 anne 32 48 3 Rung 6 When the drill has drilled through the book the body of the drill actuates the DRILL DEPTH limit switch When this happens the DRILL FORWARD signal is turned off and the DRILL RETRACT signal is turned on The drill is also retracted automatically on power up if it is not actuating the DRILL HOME limit switch Drill Dridd Depth LS Forward 20 O20 4 U 4 3 li Se Dea La Drit Pass Home LS Retract sz1 I 0 0 0 t S If i to Sh SS 15 5 2 Rung 6 2 When the drill is retracting after drilling a hole the body of the drill actuates the DRILL HOME limit switch When this happens the DRILL RETRACT signal is turned off the DRILL SEQUENCE START bit
255. cription Recommended Action 0008 INTERNAL ERROR The controller software has 1 Cycle power on your unit detected an invalid condition within 2 Re save or re load your the hardware or software after ee any completing power up processin a after the frst aan of 7 3 Startup your system operation 4 Contact your local Allen Bradley representative if the error persists 0009 INTERNAL ERROR The controller software has 1 Cycle power on your unit detected an invalid condition within 2 Re save or re load your the hardware during power up program and re initialize any processing within the first 2 Setar acne seconds of operation 4 Contact your local Allen Bradley representative if the error persists 0010 WRONG PROC REV The program in the controller is not If you want to use a micro configured for a micro controller controller with the program reconfigure your controller using programming software or clear the program in the controller with the HHP 0016 START AFTER P F The system has powered up in the Either reset bit 1 9 if this is RRUN mode BitS1 13 is setand consistent with your application the user fault routine is run before requirements and change the beginning the first scan of the mode back to RRUN or clear program 1 13 the major fault bit 0018 INCOMPAT PROGRAM An incompatible program is in the If you want to use a micro controller Either the program does controller with the program not ha
256. ct Addressing You may specify an address as being indexed by placing the character in front of the address When an address of this form is encountered in the program the processor takes the element number of the address and adds to it the value contained in the Index Register S 24 then uses the result as the actual address For example N7 10 where S 24 15 The actual address used by the instruction is N7 25 Appendix C Valid Addressing Modes and File Types for Instruction P arameters Instruction Description Instruction Valid Addressing Valid File Types Valid Value Parameters Mode s Ranges ADD Add source A immediate direct 0 1 5 B TGR 32 768 32 767 indexed direct f min f max source B immediate direct 0 1 B 1 C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct f min f max destination direct indexed direct 0 1 S B T C R N_ Not Applicable AND And bit input source bit direct 0 1 S B 7 C R Not Applicable bit level AND And word output source A immediate direct 0 1 5 B T C R 32 768 32 767 indexed direct source B immediate direct 0 7 1 5 BT CR 32 768 32 767 indexed direct destination direct indexed direct 0 1 S B T C R N Not Applicable ANI And Inverted source bit direct 0 1l S B T C R N Not Applicable bit level BSL Bit Shift Left file indexed direct 0 1 S B N Not Applicable control direct R element le
257. cted You must connect the chassis Chapter 2 Wiring Your Controller You must also provide an acceptable grounding path for each device in your application For more information on proper grounding guidelines see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 ATTENTION Remove the protective wrap before applying power to the controller Failure to remove the wrap may cause the controller to overheat Sinking and Sourcing Circuits Any MicroLogix 1000 DC inputs can be configured as sinking or sourcing depending on how the DC COM terminal is wired Mode Definition The input energizes when high level voltage is applied to the input terminal Sinking active high Connect the power supply VDC to the MicroLogix DC COM terminal The input energizes when low level voltage is applied to the input terminal Sourcing active low Connect the power supply VDC to the MicroLogix DC COM terminal Sinking and Sourcing Wiring Examples 1761 L32BWA Wiring diagrams also apply to 1761 L20BWA 5A L16BWA L10BWA Sinking Inputs Sourcing Inputs 14 30VDC gt VDC for Sourcing VDC for Sourcing VDC for Sinking VDC Oi fo 3 f Joodoodo0da bike Coli 1 0 1 1 2 ii oc l4 5 6 7 V8 19 110 24 115 1 16 1 17 1 18 i DC OUT
258. d ADD 10 4 entering the instruction 10 4 execution times 10 4 function code 10 4 instruction parameters C 3 ladder representation 10 4 updates to arithmetic status bits 10 4 valid addressing modes C 3 valid file types C 3 ADD Add 10 4 addresses searching for 17 8 addressing compared to programming software s addressing 6 8 data files 6 7 indexed 6 9 logical addresses specifying 6 8 using mnemonics 6 8 addressing modes C 2 direct addressing C 2 immediate addressing C 2 indexed addressing C 2 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual AIC applying power to 3 11 attaching to the network 3 12 connecting 3 6 modem 3 7 network 3 7 point to point 3 7 installing 3 12 recommended user supplied components 3 10 selecting cable 3 8 Allen Bradley contacting for assistance P 6 6 analog controller types 20 discrete I O and 5 analog I O 1 2 analog controllers converting analog data 7 4 grounding your analog cable 2 20 0 configuration 7 2 I O image 7 1 input channel filtering 7 3 input software calibration F 1 minimizing electrical noise 2 20 voltage and current input and output ranges 2 22 wiring your analog channels 2 21 ANB And Block 8 12 And AND bit input instruction 8 3 entering the instruction 8 4 execution times 8 3 instruction parameters C 3 ladder representation 8 3 using 8 4 valid addressing modes C 3 valid file typ
259. d Adds source A to source B and stores the result in the destination 10 4 SUB 81 Subtract Subtracts source B from source A and stores the result in the destination 10 5 MUL 82 Multiply Multiplies source A by source B and stores the result in the destination 10 8 DIV 83 Divide Divides source A by source B and stores the result in the destination and the 10 9 math register DDV 84 Double Divide Divides the contents of the math register by the source and stores the result in 10 10 the destination and the math register CLR 85 Clear Sets all bits of a word to zero 10 11 SQR 86 Square Root Calculates the square root of the source and places the integer result in the 10 11 destination SCL 87 Scale Data Multiplies the source by a specified rate adds to an offset value and stores the 10 12 result in the destination About the Math Instructions These instructions perform the familiar four function math operations The majority of the instructions take two input values perform the specified arithmetic function and output the result to an assigned memory location For example both the ADD and SUB instructions take a pair of input values add or subtract them and place the result in the specified destination If the result of the operation exceeds the allowable value an overflow or underflow bit is set Since these are output instructions they do not have LD AND and OR equivalents To learn more about the math instruc
260. d Counter Instructions Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area The following items apply when entering the instruction Whenever you see asterisks on the display the HHP is waiting for data entry i e a number e If you see a down arrow on the display it means there are more options available To scroll through the options press this key aS e You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key lt Then if you want to edit that operand press DEL or FUN DEL and enter new parameters Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one Once the entire instruction is entered if you want to edit the instruction s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode See page 17 4 To enter the function code press P008 HSC TYPE P008 HSC CNTR coo P008 HSC PRE ek kK ke k 1 P008 HSC ACC SOE ee Oo 14 6 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions Once instruction entry is complete the parameters are condensed to two screens as shown here P008 HSC UP RES HLD P008 HSC P 1 A Using the Up Counter and the Up Counter with Reset and Hold Up counters are used when the parameter being measured is uni directional such as material being fed into a machine or as a tachometer recording the number of pulses over a given time period Both types of Up Counters operate id
261. d Inverted ANI 8 4 Load LD 8 3 Load Inverted LDI 8 4 Load True LDT 8 6 Memory Pop MPP 8 10 Memory Push MPS 8 10 Memory Read MRD 8 10 One Shot Rising OSR 8 7 Or OR 8 3 Or Block ORB 8 12 Or Inverted ORI 8 4 Or True ORT 8 6 Output OUT 8 8 overview 8 3 Reset RST 8 8 Set SET 8 8 bit shift instructions overview 13 2 effects on index register S24 13 3 entering parameters 13 2 entering the instructions 13 2 Bit Shift Left BSL 13 3 effects on index register 13 3 entering parameters 13 2 entering the instruction 13 3 execution times 13 3 function code 13 3 instruction parameters C 3 ladder representation 13 3 operation 13 4 valid file types C 3 Bit Shift Right BSR 13 4 effects on index register 13 3 entering parameters 13 2 entering the instruction 13 4 execution times 13 4 function code 13 5 instruction parameters C 3 ladder representation 13 4 operation 13 5 valid addressing modes C 3 valid file types C 3 branch instructions overview 8 9 branching input 6 13 nested 6 14 output 6 13 BSL Bit Shift Left 13 3 BSR Bit Shift Right 13 4 cables planning routes for DH 485 connections selection guide for the AIC 3 8 selection guide for the DeviceNet network Calculating the S oftware Calibration F 2 calibrating an analog input channel F 1 CE mark 1 1 changing editing modes 17 3 rad
262. d about in chapters 8 14 Because of the flexibility of instruction list programming there is often more than one instruction list representation possible for the same rung However there is always one representation that is considered to be the most optimized This is the shortest list representation possible for the rung Important For instruction list programming you must begin every rung by pressing the key shown here NEW RUNG T To help you remember to do this each instruction list example in this chapter begins with the words NEW RUNG See page 17 2 for more information Input Rung Examples Examples of input rungs and their optimized instruction list representation are provided below Since many of these rungs have more than one possible instruction list representation optional representations are shown to the right of the optimized list Series Inputs This example shows the instruction list for a simple series connection a b a Optimized Option 1 DE NEW RUNG NEW RUNG LDa LDa AND b LDb OUT c ANB OUT c 16 1 Chapter 16 Instruction List Programming Parallel Inputs When the inputs are in parallel the instruction list representation is as follows 2 Optimized C NEW RUNG LD a b OR b OUT c Parallel Input Branching Option 1 NEW RUNG LDa LD b ORB OUT c An input branch can be used to allow more than one combination of input conditions on parallel branch
263. d by an interrupt having a higher priority Status File Data Saved Data in the following words is saved on entry to the STI subroutine and re written upon exiting the STI subroutine e SO Arithmetic flags e 13 and S14 Math register e S24 Index register Selectable Timed Disable STD and Enable STE Ladder representation STD SELECTABLE TIMED DISABLE c STE SELECTABLE TIMED ENABLE _ Execution Times usec when True False STD 6 69 3 16 STE 10 13 3 16 Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions These instructions are generally used in pairs The purpose is to create zones in which STI interrupts cannot occur Using STD When true this instruction resets the STI enable bit and prevents the STI subroutine from executing When the rung goes false the STI enable bit remains reset until a true STS or STE instruction is executed The STI timer continues to operate while the enable bit is reset Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To enter the function code press A P007 STD mije Using STE This instruction sets the STI enable bit and allows execution of the STI subroutine When the rung goes false the STI enable bit remains set until a true STD instruction is executed This instruction has no effect on the operation of the STI timer or setpoint When the enable bit is set the first exec
264. d conversion of analog data Describes how to use the instructions for relay Using Basie Instructions replacement functions counting and timing 9 Using Comparison Describes how to use the instructions to compare values Programming Instructions of data in your logic program Describes how to use the instructions that perform basic 10 Using Math Instructions Gath functions Describes how to perform data handling instructions 11 ra R Handling including move and logical instructions and FIFO and STucaons LIFO instructions 12 Using Program Flow Describes the instructions that affect program flow and Control Instructions execution 13 Using Application Specific Describes the bit shift sequencer and STI related Instructions instructions 14 Using High S peed Describes the four modes of the high speed counter Counter Instructions instruction and its related instructions TE Provides a general overview of the types of 15 Using Communication communication and explains how to establish network Protocols communication using the message instruction P 2 Preface Tab Chapter Title Contents 16 Instruction List Provides examples to teach you Instruction List Programming programming and describes programming considerations 17 Entering and Editing Your Describes the various editing functions you can use with Program your program including search overwrite and delete Programming
265. d how you change between them can be found beginning on page 18 21 Active Controller Mode Controller Mode Options The table below shows the possible active controller mode display entries and the corresponding micro controller mode Display Entry Micro Controller Mode RPRG Remote Program RRUN Remote Run RCSN Remote Test Continuous Scan RSSN Remote Test Single Scan RSUS Remote Suspend FLT Fault The controller only enters suspend mode if you run a program that executes a suspend instruction The controller only enters fault mode if while a program is executing a fault occurs within the operating system or the program or if 1 13 is set at any time See page 20 11 for information on identifying and clearing faults 4 10 Chapter 4 Using Your Hand Held Programmer How to Complete Tasks You complete tasks by pressing the appropriate key or key sequence from the mode screen To Press scroll left or right between the controller mode options choose the controller option that is currently ENT highlighted return to the previous screen ESC Access Program Program Monitor Monitor by pressing these keys From the program monitor functional area you can create view edit and troubleshoot your controller programs Screen Definition The following figure shows a typical screen for a bit instruction and identifies its main sections Controller Rung Ed
266. destination must be a word address Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The controller S0 0 Carry C always resets S0 1 Overflow V always resets 0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign S sets if most significant bit is set otherwise resets Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To enter the function code press _ P000 SRCA A ANB 2 43 69 H P000 AND as No 100 P000 AND DEST N 0 100 11 18 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions Or OR The value at source A is ORed bit by bit with the value at source B and then stored in the destination This instruction differs from the OR input Ladder representation instruction discussed in chapter 8 OR BITWISE INCLUS OR Truth Table Source A 255 ee Dest AORB Source B as A B Dest Dest N7 0 0 0 0 100 I i I 0 1 1 s cii 1 1 1 Execution Times usec when True False 33 68 6 78 Source A and B can either be a word address or a constant however both sources cannot be a constant The destination must be a word address Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry C always resets 0 1 Overflow V always resets S0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets F sets if result is negative most significant bit is set 50 3 Sign S otherwi
267. devices such as motor starters and solenoids require the use of some type of surge suppression to protect the controller output contacts Switching inductive loads without surge suppression can significantly reduce the lifetime of relay contacts By adding a suppression device directly across the coil of an inductive device you will prolong the life of the switch contacts You also reduce the effects of voltage transients caused by interrupting the current to that inductive device and prevent electrical noise from radiating into system wiring The following diagram shows an output with a suppression device We recommend that you locate the suppression device as close as possible to the load device dc or Ll VACNDC j Snubber OUT 0 OUT1 L OUT 2 0 0 fw acordc OUT3 Outputs oura OUT5 OUT 6 ouT7 COM dc COM orL2 If you connect a micro controller FET output to an inductive load we recommend that you use a 1N4004 diode for surge suppression as shown in the following illustration 24V dc VACNDC OUT 0 OUT1 OUT 2 Relay or Solid State OUT3 dc Outputs t OUT 4 OUTS O A 1N4004 Diode OUT 6 OUT 24V de common CoM Chapter 1 Installing Your Controller Suitable surge suppression methods for inductive ac load devices include a varistor an RC network or an Allen Bradley surge suppressor all shown
268. ding the Communication Protocols D 12 Important DH 485 Network Planning Considerations Carefully plan your network configuration before installing any hardware Listed below are some of the factors that can affect system performance e amount of electrical noise temperature and humidity in the network environment number of devices on the network connection and grounding quality in installation amount of communication traffic on the network type of process being controlled network configuration The major hardware and software issues you need to resolve before installing a network are discussed in the following sections Hardware Considerations You need to decide the length of the communication cable where you route it and how to protect it from the environment where it will be installed When the communication cable is installed you need to know how many devices are to be connected during installation and how many devices will be added in the future The following sections help you understand and plan the network Number of Devices and Length of Communication Cable You must install an AIC Advanced Interface Converter catalog number 1761 NET AIC for each node on the network If you plan to add nodes later provide additional advanced interface converters during the initial installation to avoid recabling after the network is in operation The maximum length of the communication cable is 1219 m 4000 ft This is t
269. discrete controllers MICRO RPRG FREE 737 FILE 02 For analog controllers MICRO RPRG FREE 723 FILE 02 Important If an error occurs during the power up sequence refer to chapter 20 Troubleshooting for a list of error codes 4 6 Understanding the HHPs Functional Areas Chapter 4 Using Your Hand Held Programmer There are six main functional areas of the MicroLogix 1000 HHP each with a unique purpose They are Program Data Multi Point Monitor Monitor Function Descriptions of each of these areas and the tasks you can complete follow Home Home is the functional area you enter after the HHP powers up It provides important program and controller information You can access all other functional areas from home Screen Definition The following figure shows the home screen and identifies its main sections Program Name Force Indicator Controller Mode _ PROGNAME F RPRG Instruction i i Program File Words Free gt FREE x x x FILE xX lt Number Section Description Program Name The name of the program currently in the controller If forces exist in the controller an F appears If no forces Force Indicator exist nothing appears See page 18 35 for information on forcing 1 0 The current mode of the controller is displayed If Controller Mode program edits exist the mode flashes See page 18 21 for information on valid modes The number of instruction words still avail
270. displays the FILE DATA for both sequencers data starts at N7 0 and ends at N7 9 ow R6 0 in thi S many more SQO instructions below the all using the same Control Register Notice that we are only comparing Inputs 0 3 and are only per our Mask value The S C compare While the SQO output data starts at Please note that step 0 of the SQO is never The reset rung combined with the rung logic of sequencers guarantees that the sequencers always start at step 1 Both sequencers Roll Over to step 1 is integral to all E 27 Appendix E Application Example Programs E 28 Event Driven Sequencer Instruction List Program File 2 Rung 0 Ensures that the SQO always resets to step position 1 each RRUN mode entry This rung actually resets the control register s position and EN enable bit to 0 Due to this the following rung sees a false to true transition and asserts step position 1 on the first scan Eliminate this rung for retentive operation FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 l LD S1L 15 0 7 RES RO File 2 Rung 1 The SQC instruction and SQO instruction share the same Control Register This is acceptable due to the careful planning of the rung state condition You could cascade branch many more SQO instructions below the SQO if you desired all using the same Control Register R6 0 in this case Notice that we are
271. dware high and low presets via the HSL instruction Any instruction accumulator value between 32 768 and 32 767 inclusive can be loaded to the hardware The Following Condition Occurs when either the hardware accumulator transitions from the hardware high preset 1 to the hardware high preset or the hardware accumulator is loaded with a value greater A high preset is reached than or equal to the hardware high preset or the hardware high preset is loaded with a value that is less than or equal to the hardware accumulator 14 9 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions When a high preset is reached the e HP bit is set e High speed counter interrupt file file 4 is executed if the interrupt is enabled The IH bit is set and the IL IV and IN bits are reset Unlike the Up Counters the accumulator value is not reset and the high preset value is not loaded from the image to the hardware high preset register Occurs when either the hardware accumulator transitions from the hardware low preset 1 to the hardware low preset or The Following Condition the hardware accumulator is loaded with a value less than A low preset is reached or equal to the hardware low preset or the hardware low preset is loaded with a value that is greater than or equal to the hardware accumulator When the low preset is reached the LP bit is set e High speed counter interrupt file fil
272. dware Reference Input Specifications Descrioti Specification ar slat 100 120V ac Controllers 24V dc Controllers Voltage 79 to132V ac Range 47 to 63 Hz 14140 30V de 14V dc min 79V ac min 24V dc nominal On Voltage 132V ac max 26 4V dc max 55 C 131 F 30 0V dc max 30 C 86 F Off Voltage 20V ac 5V dc 5 0 mA min 79V ac 47 Hz 2 5 mA min 14V dc On Current 12 0 mA nominal 120V ac 60 Hz 8 0 mA nominal 24V dc 16 0 mA max 132V ac 63 Hz 12 0 mA max 30V dc Off Current 2 5 MA max 1 5 mA max Nominal 12K ohms 50 Hz Impedance 10K ohms 60 Hz 3K ohms Inrush Maximum 250 mA max Not Applicable To reduce the inrush maximum to 35 mA apply a 6 8 Kohm 5w resistor in series with the input The on state voltage increases to 92V ac as a result dc Input Derating Graph 30 254 20 154 10 4 32 20 30 68 86 Temperature C F 40 50 60 104 122 140 A 3 Appendix A Hardware Reference A 4 General Output Specifications Type Relay MOSFET Triac Voltage See Wiring Diagrams p 2 6 eae ce LOA per point 55 C 131 F 0 5A per point 55 C 131 F Current Rating Table 1 5A per point 30 C 86 F 1 0A per point 30 C 86 F Minimum Load 10 0 mA 1 mA 10 0 mA Current Current per 1440 VA Tor Be 1440 VA Controller ah Current 3A for L16BBB A REP 8 0A 6A for L32BBB Not App
273. e Lest previous debounced pass scan s BCD value bit BCD input value Sel EQU E RDS SSS SSS SSSsS35 EQUAL p aa FROM BCD 4 4 4 15 Source A N7 13 Source N7 14 O 0000 Source B N7 14 Dest N7 12 Ol Ol 4 4 Math Math Overflow Error Bit Bit S 0 8 5 ass gt SSS sas 5 Uy 1 0 this scan s BCD input value tMOY LS aS A eS See MOVE Source N7 14 0 Dest N7 13 0 4 This rung accesses 1 0 only available with 32 1 0 controllers Therefore do not include this rung if you are using a 16 I O controller 11 31 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions Rung 7 4 Ensures that the operator cannot select a paper thickness of 0 If this were allowed the drill bit life calculation could be defeated resulting in poor quality holes due to a dull drill bit Therefore the minimum paper thickness used to calculate drill bit wear is 1 4 in debounced debounced BCD BCD value value EQU MOV EQUAL 4 MOVE Source A N7 12 Source 1 Ol Source B 0 Dest N7 12 0 4 4 Instruction List File 7 Rung 2 Moves the single digit BCD thumbwheel value into an internal integer register This is done to properly align
274. e 4 is executed if the interrupt is enabled The IL bit is set and the IH IV and IN bits are reset An overflow occurs when the hardware accumulator transitions from 32 767 to 32 768 When an overflow occurs the e OV bit is set e High speed counter interrupt file file 4 is executed if the interrupt is enabled The IV bit is set and the IH IL and IN bits are reset An underflow occurs when the hardware accumulator transitions from 32 768 to 32 767 When an underflow occurs the UN bit is set e High speed counter interrupt file file 4 is executed if the interrupt is enabled The IN bit is set and the IH IL and IV bits are reset The following tables summarize what the input state must be for the corresponding high speed counter action to occur Bidirectional Counter Pulse direction 14 10 Input State High Speed aay SY Bieetion vt mi mig HSC Rung Action Seok Off NA NA True Count Up owon OF NA NA True Count Down NA NA NA NA False Hold Count NA Not Applicable Bidirectional Counter with Reset and Hold Pulse direction Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions Input State High Speed Input Count Input Input Reset Input Hold Counter V0 Direction 1 1 V2 V3 HSC Rung Action Turning Off On or Off to On off Turing Off off T
275. e HHP is waiting for data entry i e a number e You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key lt Then if you want to edit that operand press DEL or FUN DEL and enter new parameters Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one Once the entire instruction is entered if you want to edit the instruction s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode See page 17 4 Effects on Index Register S24 The value present in the index register 24 is overwritten when the sequencer instruction is true The index register value will equal the position value of the instruction These instructions transfer 16 bit data to word addresses for the control of sequential machine operations Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming these instructions e File is the address of the sequencer file You must use the file indicator for this address The HHP inserts the character automatically Sequencer file data is used as follows Instruction Sequencer File Stores SQO Data for controlling outputs SQC Reference data for monitoring inputs e Mask SQO SQC is a hexadecimal code or the address of the mask word or file through which the instruction moves data Set mask bits to pass data and clear mask bits to prevent the instruction from operating or corresponding destination bits Use a mask word or file if you want to change the mask according to application
276. e Instructions Using the File Indicator The file instructions shown below manipulate data table files These instructions are addressed with the sign They store an offset value in word S24 index register just as with indexed addressing discussed in the last section COP Copy File LFL LIFO Load FLL Fill File LFU LIFO Unload BSL Bit Shift Left SQO Sequencer Output BSR Bit Shift Right SQC Sequencer Compare FFL FIFO Load SQL Sequencer Load FFU FIFO Unload When entering any of the instructions shown above the character is automatically inserted for you ATTENTION If you are using file instructions and also indexed addressing make sure that you monitor and or load the correct offset value prior to using an indexed address Otherwise unpredictable operation could occur resulting in possible personal injury and or damage to equipment Entering Numeric Constants You can enter numeric constants directly into many of the instructions you program They are used in place of data file elements The range of values for most instructions is 32 768 through 32 767 These values may be entered and displayed in one of several radixes e Decimal e Hexadecimal e Binary The radix default that is used is determined by the operand e g presets are always displayed as decimal values and masks are always displayed as hexadecimal values Applying Logic to Your Schematics Chapter 6 Programming Overview
277. e a unique list for each program you create For more information on using the multi point function see page 18 31 Screen Definition The following figure shows a multi point screen and identifies its main sections Force Multi Point Bit Address Word Address Indication Indication N Data Values Section Description Bit Address The address of the bit the cursor is currently on Word Address The word address of the bit currently being viewed Indicates that the bit currently being viewed is being forced Force Indication x N if forced on and x F if forced off If no force exists this field is blank Multi P oint Indication Indicates that you are in the multi point functional area The data values of the bit addresses assigned to the Data Values multi point list are shown here Dashed lines indicate that an address has not been assigned to that bit location 4 15 Chapter 4 Using Your Hand Held Programmer Multi Point Function From Multi Point Function you can access these areas Menu Mode Program Monitor Data Monitor 4 16 How to Complete Tasks You complete tasks by pressing the appropriate key or key sequence from the multi point screen To Press access the menu options aad change the controller s mode See page MODE 18 23 O view faults manually See page 20 11 n clear a fault manually See page 20 11 m FAULT ALL PRE LEN execute
278. e are more than three Correct the user program to Subroutines nested in the fault meet the requirements and routine file 3 restrictions for the J SR instruction then re enter RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode 002A INDEX TOO LARGE The program is referencing Correct the user program to not through indexed addressing an index beyond file boundaries element beyond a file boundary 002B TOO MANY JSR S There are more than three Correct the user program to Subroutines nested in the meet the requirements and high speed counter routine file 4 restrictions for the SR instruction then re enter RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode 0030 SUB NEST DEPTH There are more than eight Correct the user program to Subroutines nested in the main meet the requirements and program file file 2 restrictions for the main program file then re enter RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode 0031 UNSUPPORTED INST The program contains an Modify the program so that all instruction s that is not supported instructions are supported by by the micro controller For the controller then reload the example MSG SVC or PID program and enter the RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode 0032 INVALID SQx LEN A sequencer instruction Correct the program to ensure length position parameter points that the length and position past the end of a data file parameters do not point past the data file Then re enter RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode 0033 INVALID BSx LEN The length parameter of a BSL Correct the program to ensure
279. e asterisks on the display the HHP is waiting for data entry i e a number e You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key Noy Then if you want to edit that operand press DEL or FUN DEL and enter new parameters Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one Once the entire instruction is entered if you want to edit the instruction s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode See page 17 4 11 13 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions 11 14 Using Indexed Word Addresses You have the option of using indexed word addresses for instruction parameters specifying word addresses Indexed addressing is discussed in chapter 6 Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits The arithmetic status bits are found in Word 0 bits 0 3 in the controller status file After an instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated Bit Name Description S0 0 Cary C Set if a carry is generated otherwise cleared S0 1 Overflow V Indicates that the actual result of a math instruction does not fit in the designated destination Indicates a 0 value after a math move or logic S0 2 Zero Z instruction Indicates a negative less than 0 value after a 50 3 Sign 5 math move or logic instruction Overflow Trap Bit S5 0 Minor error bit S5 0 is set upon detection of a mathematical overflow or division by zero If this bit is set upo
280. e display it means there are more options available To scroll through the options press this key CA e You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key NY Then if you want to edit that operand press DEL or FUN DEL and enter new parameters Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one Once the entire instruction is entered if you want to edit the instruction s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode See page 17 4 15 6 Chapter 15 Using Communication Protocols To enter the function code press 7 P008 FMSG Poos FMSG DE v SLC500 ML P008 FMSG CBLK Be P008 FMSG 7 P008 FMSG NODE e 5 P008 FMSG LOCAL N15 P008 FMSG Note gt N25 When entering the target file type the MicroLogix default file number is automatically inserted If you want to P008 FMSG LEN change the file number simply press tee RD the desired number Select Read or Write Select SLC500 ML1000 or CIF Enter Control Block Address Enter Control Block Length Set at 7 Identify Target Node Enter Local Address Enter Target Address Enter Data Length in Elements 15 7 Chapter 15 Using Communication Protocols Once the instruction is entered the parameters are displayed as six screens as shown here P008 FMSG TYPE SLC500 ML WRI TE P008 FMSG CBLK N 0 0000H P008 FMSG NODE 5
281. e following items apply when entering the instruction e Whenever you see asterisks on the display the HHP is waiting for data entry i e a number e You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key lt Then if you want to edit that operand press DEL or FUN DEL and enter new parameters Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one Once the entire instruction is entered if you want to edit the instruction s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode See page 17 4 14 15 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions To enter the function code press P008 HSL CNTR CC a a P008 HSL SRC N5 0 P008 HSL LEN eee Operation The HSL instruction allows you to configure the high speed counter to instantaneously and automatically update external outputs whenever a high or low preset is reached The physical outputs are automatically updated in less than 30 us The physical turn on time of the outputs is not included in this amount The output image is then automatically updated at the next poll for user interrupts or at the next IOM instruction or output scan whichever occurs first With this instruction you can change the high preset for the up counters or both the high and low presets for Bidirectional Counters during run You can also modify the output mask configuration during run The source address is either an integer or binary file element
282. e instruction is logically false Source A must be a word address Source B can be either a constant or word address Negative integers are stored in two s complement form Entering the Instruction HHP Display Mnemonic aa Use This Instruction When the Input HEQUI LD EQU 50 appears first on a rung or block cur anequ si pnaeeece oa power Leow OREQU coz evtinstucton nthe curent tung or back You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area The example that follows shows how to enter the LD EQU instruction Use the same procedure to enter the other EQU instructions only substitute the function code with one from the table above 9 3 Chapter 9 Using Comparison Instructions To enter the function code press P000 HEQU t SRCA CG Go P000 HEQUF SRCB 100 Not Eq ual N EQ Use the NEQ instruction to test whether two values are not equal If source A and source B are not equal the instruction is logically true If the two Ladder representation values are equal the instruction is logically false NEQ f NOT EQUAL Source A must be a word address Source B can be either a constant or word source eS me F address Negative integers are stored in two s complement form Source B 100 Entering the Instruction Execution Times usec when 3 True False HHP Display Mnemonic jee Use This Instruction When the Input LDNEQ 21
283. e it is stored in the memory module Programs with errors cannot be saved in the controller or stored in the memory module Various screens appear to indicate the program is being stored to the memory module Once the program is stored you are returned to the memory module sub menu Important If an OVERWRITE PROG confirmation screen or a MEM MOD FULL message appears see the appropriate section below If an OVERWRITE PROG Confirmation Screen Appears If a program already exists in the memory module with the same name as the one you are about to store a confirmation screen appears asking if you want to overwrite the existing program The memory module acts like a floppy disk If you want to write over the existing program press ENT Various screens appear to indicate the program is being stored to the memory module Once the program is stored you are returned to the memory module sub menu 19 3 Chapter 19 Common Procedures 19 4 If you do not want to write over the existing program press ESC to exit the sub menu Then if you still want to store the program that is currently loaded in the controller to a memory module do one of the following e Go to the program configuration menu and rename the current program see page 18 2 Then store the program to the memory module under its new name e Replace the memory module that is currently in the MicroLogix 1000 HHP with one that does not have a program wi
284. e node table that indicates which slaves are active slaves that responded the last time they were polled and which slaves are inactive slaves that did not respond the last time they were polled The active slaves are polled on a regular basis The inactive slaves are only polled occasionally to check if any have come back online DF1 half duplex supports up to 255 devices address 0 to 254 with address 255 reserved for master broadcasts The MicroLogix supports broadcast reception but cannot initiate a broadcast command The MicroLogix supports half duplex modems using Request To Send Clear To Send RTS CTS hardware handshaking Appendix D Understanding the Communication Protocols DF1 Half Duplex Slave Configuration Parameters When the system mode driver is DF1 half duplex slave the following parameters can be viewed and changed only when the programming software is online with the processor The DF1 half duplex slave parameters are not stored as part of the controller downloadable image with the exception of the baud rate and node address If a failed MicroLogix 1000 controller is replaced and the backed up controller image is downloaded to the replacement controller these parameters remain at default until manually changed Therefore be sure to fully document any non default settings to the DF1 half duplex slave configuration parameters Parameter Description Default Toggles between the communication rat
285. e of 300 600 1200 2400 Paaha 4800 9600 19 200 and 38 4K ici Node Address Valid range is 0 254 decimal 1 Control Line Toggles between No Handshaking and Half Duplex Modem nas Dupli Detects and eliminates duplicate responses to a message Duplicate uplicate RAREN n a packets may be sent under noisy communication conditions when the Packet panei Enabled Detection sender s retries are not set to 0 Toggles between Enabled and Disabled Error Detection Toggles between CRC and BCC CRC Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent RTS Off Delay to the modem and when RTS is deactivated Gives modem extra time 0 to transmit the last character of a packet The valid range is 0 255 and can be setin increments of 5 ms Specifies the time delay between setting RTS request to send until checking for the CTS clear to send response For use with modems Reema that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of i RTS The valid range is 0 255 and can be setin increments of 5 ms Poll Timeout only applies when a slave device initiates a MSG instruction Itis the amount of time that the slave device waits for a poll from the master device If the slave device does not receive a poll within the Poll Timeout a MSG instruction error is generated and the Pol nimeni ladder program needs to requeue the MSG instruction The valid range 0000S is 0 65535 and can be set in increments of 20 ms If you are using a
286. e the HHP to display prompts and messages in one of six languages English Spanish German French Italian and Japanese There are two methods you can use to select a new default setting Using the Menu Option Follow the steps below to change the language using the menu 1 Access the menu and choose the option 1 LANGUAGE MENU l gt ENGLISH ESPANOL 2 Arrow down to the desired language select it and return to the previous screen oe n times 4 17 Chapter 4 Using Your Hand Held Programmer Using Short Cut Keys The following table shows the short cut keys you can press from the home screen to change the language To change the language to English 1 Spanish 2 Press the following keys simultaneously and hold for 1 5 seconds German 3 French o 4 Italian 5 Japanese Changing the LCD Display Contrast Follow the steps below to change the contrast setting for the LCD display 1 Access the menu and choose the option 8 CONTRAST CHANGE CONTRAST BReBBOoOoOo 2 Arrow left or right to select the desired contrast 3 Enter the selected contrast and return to the previous screen eo 4 18 What to Do First Quick Start for New Users This chapter can help you get started using the MicroLogix 1000 HHP with your micro controller It provides task oriented procedures to guide you through a hands on practice exercise Before you begin you should
287. e types C 5 Immediate Output with Mask IOM 12 9 entering parameters 12 9 entering the instruction 12 9 execution times 12 9 function code 12 9 instruction parameters C 6 ladder representation 12 9 valid addressing modes C 6 valid file types C 6 indexed addressing 6 9 C 2 entering the character 6 9 example of 6 9 specifying 6 9 input branching 6 13 Input Channel Filtering 7 3 Input Channel Filters and Update Times 7 2 input file I 6 4 input filter response time setting 18 12 18 14 18 15 18 16 input specifications controller A 3 HHP A 9 Input States on Power Down 1 11 input voltage ranges 1761 L10BWA 2 8 1761 L10BWB 2 11 1761 L16AWA 2 6 1761 L16BBB 2 15 1761 L16BWA 2 9 1761 L16BWB 2 12 1761 L20AWA 5A 2 17 l 17 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual l 18 1761 L20BWA 5A 2 18 1761 L20BWB 5A 2 19 1761 L32AAA 2 14 1761 L32AWA 2 7 1761 L32BBB 2 16 1761 L32BWA 2 10 1761 L32BWB 2 13 analog controllers 2 22 installing the memory module 4 3 the micro controller 1 1 instruction execution times listing B 16 worksheet B 21 instruction function codes listing B 13 instruction keys identifying 4 4 instruction list programming applying to schematics 6 16 description 6 15 examples 16 1 inputrungs 16 1 output rungs 16 4 optimized instruction list 16 1 programming considerations 16 8 instruction memory usage l
288. eached c5 0 TON mn ea oS a a a a a a a TIMER ON DELAY EN HP Timer T4 0 DN Time Base 0 01 Preset 100 Accum 100 foe esses ss Home Position Reached e520 LP Rung 2 7 When the pick and place head is positioned over the proper bin turn off the forward motor At the same time the high speed counter tells the gripper to release the part and start the dwell timer After the dwell time has expired start up the reverse motor to send the head back to its home position to pick up another part Bin Motor Location FORWARD Reached C5 0 0 0 Sean a E Tore F HP 1 Dwell Motor Done REVERSE T4 0 0 0 Hassall PeoooooSs i SSSS gt DN 2 Rung 2 8 When the pick and place head is positioned at its home position turn off the reverse motor At the same time the high speed counter tells the gripper to grab the next part and start the dwell timer After the dwell time has expired start up the forward motor to send the head out to its drop off bin Home Motor Position REVERSE Reached C520 020 sees ee ree ater se aerate erste porre Uj gt LP 2 Dwell Motor Done FORWARD T4 0 0 0 Fess Ses eSSs ij SSS DN 1 Rung 2 9 END Data Table Addresses Data Radix Decimal N7 0 1 0 100 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N7 10 100 200 300 400 500
289. ecific instructions such as bit shifts and sequencers e Integer This file is used to store numeric values or bit information 6 4 Understanding How Programs are Stored and Accessed Chapter 6 Programming Overview The micro controller uses two devices for storing programs RAM and EEPROM The RAM provides short term storage i e its data is lost on a power down while the EEPROM provides long term storage i e its data is not lost on a power down The diagram below shows how the memory is allocated in the micro controller s processor EEPROM RAM Backup Data CPU Workspace Retentive Data Retentive Data Program Files Program Files The memory device that is used depends on the operation being performed This section describes how memory is stored and accessed during the following operations e saving a program normal operation e power down e power up Saving a Program A program is saved whenever you accept edits or change from RPRG mode to RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode when program edits exist When the program is saved it is first stored in the volatile RAM It is then transferred to the non volatile EEPROM where it is stored as both backup data and retentive data Important If no edits exist and you select the ACCEPT EDITS menu option no backup data is written to the controller It remains unchanged EEPROM RAM Backup Data CPU Workspace Retentive Data
290. ecting the DNI see the Advanced Interface Converter AIC and DeviceNet Interface DNI Installation Instructions Publication 1761 5 11 For information on how to configure and commission a DNI see the DeviceNet Interface User Manual Publication 1761 6 5 The figure that follows identifies the ports of the DNI DNI DeviceNet Interface 1761 NET DNI DeviceNet Port 1 Replacement connector part no 1761 RPL 0000 Use this write on area to mark the DeviceNet node Address RS 232 ie Port 2 3 13 Chapter 3 Connecting the System Cable Selection Guide cl 1761 CBL AM00 Cable Length 1761 CBL AM00 45 cm 17 7 in 1761 CBL HM02 2m 6 5 f 1761 CBL HM02 o Connections from to DNI MicroLogix 1000 all series port 2 MicroLogix 1000 all series port 2 Cable 1761 CBL APM00 1761 CBL PM02 L 1761 CBL AP 00 oO 45 cm 17 7 in 2m 6 5 ft 1761 CBL PM02 Connections from SLC 5 03 or SLC 5 04 processors channel 0 PC COM port port 2 Series B cables or higher are required for hardware handsh
291. ection after power loss 1 9 is set The user must check for a 0016 retentive data lost condition X if the user fault routine was executed with startup protection Going to Run errors occur when the controller is going from any mode to REM Run mode or from any non Run mode PRG SUS to Test mode Appendix B Programming Reference Fault Classification User Error Non Address Code Run Errors Non User Recoverable Recoverable Hex S6 0004 A runtime memory integrity error occurred X 0020 A minor error at the end of the scan x Refer to S 5 0022 The watchdog timer expired Refer to x S 3H 0024 Invalid STI interrupt setpoint R efer to x 5 30 0025 There are excessive J SRs in the STI x subroutine file 5 0027 There are excessive J SRs in the fault x subroutine file 3 002A The indexed address is too large for the x file 002B There are excessive J SRs in the high x speed counter subroutine file 4 0030 The subroutine nesting exceeds a limit of x 8 file 2 0031 An unsupported instruction was detected X 0032 An SQO SQC instruction crossed data file x boundaries 0033 The LFU LFL FFU FFL BSL or BSR X instruction crossed data file boundaries 0034 A negative value for a timer accumulator x or preset value was detected 0035 An illegal instruction TND occurred in the x interrupt file 0037 Invalid presets
292. ed Your Program Changing Multi Point Addresses You can change an entry in the multi point list by writing over the current address Follow the steps below 1 Access the multi point functional area 7 MT PT B 1 3 10 M P ey eee es 001000100 2 Arrow to the address you want to write over 3 Bring up a prompt to enter the address N ot ut fE 1 3 10 MP ADDR 4 Enter the address of the new bit you want to monitor B O is shown here as an example z MTPT ORB an ey B l 0 B 0 BO M P See 001000100 The new address is added to the multi point list at the location you selected in step 2 18 32 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program Removing Multi Point Addresses You can remove individual addresses from the multi point list or you can delete the entire list Deleting Individual Addresses Follow these steps to delete a single bit address from the multi point list 1 Access the multi point functional area 7 MT PT B 10 MP 001000100 2 Arrow to the address you want to delete 3 Remove the address from the list A dashed line replaces the bit data indicating that this is now an open point on the list Deleting All Addresses Follow these steps to remove all of the addresses currently entered in the multi point list 1 Access the multi point functional area 7 MT PT B 1 0 M P 001000100 2 From any location in the list press the
293. ed to the running total kept in 1 4 ins The OSR is necessary because the ADD executes every time the rung is true and the drill body would actuate the DRILL DEPTH limit switch for more than 1 program scan Integer N7 12 is the integer converted value of the BCD thumbwheel on inputs I 0 11 I 0 14 Dpreill Drill Wear 1 4 in Depth LS OSR 1 increments I 0 B3 ADD OSR ADD 4 24 Source A N7 12 0l Source B N7 10 Ol Dest N7 10 0 4 Rungs 7 2 through 7 4 are added at the end of Chapter 11 10 15 Chapter 10 Using Math Instructions 10 16 Rung 7 6 When the number of 1 4 in increments surpasses 1000 determines how many increments are past 1000 and stores in N7 20 Adds 1 to the total of 1000 4 in increments and re initializes the 1 4 in increments accumulator to how many increments were beyond 1000 1 4 in increments GEQ SUB JORIK THAN OR EQUAL AAA SUBTRACT p e Ce Source A N7 10 Source A N7 10 ol 0 Source B 1000 Source B 1000 sao me F Dest N7 20 0 4 1 4 in Thousands ADD S353 455555 gt ADD Source A 1 Source B N7 11 ol Dest N7 11 0 1 4 in increments MOV MOVE Source N7 20 0 Dest N7 10 0 4 Rung
294. ed up quickly If the power source cannot supply high inrush current the only effect is that the MicroLogix input capacitor charges up more slowly The following considerations determine whether the power source needs to supply a high inrush current power up sequence of devices in system power source sag if it cannot source inrush current e the effect of the voltage sag on other equipment If the power source cannot provide high inrush current when the entire system in an application is powered the MicroLogix powers up more slowly If part of an application s system is already powered and operating when the MicroLogix is powered the source voltage may sag while the MicroLogix input capacitor is charging A power source voltage sag can affect other equipment connected to the same power source For example a voltage sag may reset a computer connected to the same power source Loss of Power Source The power supply is designed to withstand brief power losses without affecting the operation of the system The time the system is operational during power loss is called program scan hold up time after loss of power The duration of the power supply hold up time depends on the type and state of the I O but is typically between 20 milliseconds and 3 seconds When the duration of power loss reaches this limit the power supply signals the processor that it can no longer provide adequate de power to the system This is referred to as
295. ements or circuits Can have an output response be true or false branch A parallel logic path within a rung of a ladder program comment Text included with a program to explain what the program is doing Comments do not affect the operation of the program in any way communication scan A part of the controller s operating cycle Communication with other devices such as programming software on a personal computer takes place controller A device such as a programmable controller used to monitor input devices and control output devices controller overhead An internal portion of the operating cycle used for housekeeping and setup purposes control profile The means by which a controller determines which outputs turn on under what conditions Glossary G 2 counter 1 An electro mechanical relay type device that counts the occurrence of some event May be pulses developed from operations such as switch closures interruptions of light beams or other discrete events 2 In controllers a software counter eliminates the need for hardware counters The software counter can be given a preset count value to count up or down whenever the counted event occurs CPU Central Processing Unit The decision making and data storage section of a programmable controller data table The part of the controller memory that contains I O values and files where data is monitored manipulated and changed for control purposes D
296. encer Output SQO 13 6 Sequencer Load SQL 13 12 entering parameters 13 12 entering the instruction 13 13 execution times 13 12 function code 13 13 instruction parameters C 9 ladder representation 13 12 operation 13 14 valid addressing modes C 9 valid file types C 9 Sequencer Output SQO 13 6 entering parameters 13 6 entering the instruction 13 8 execution times 13 6 function code 13 8 instruction parameters C 9 ladder representation 13 6 operation 13 9 using 13 7 valid addressing modes C 9 valid file types C 9 series logic AND 6 12 Set SET 8 8 entering the instruction 8 9 execution times 8 8 instruction parameters C 9 ladder representation 8 8 using 8 9 valid addressing modes C 9 valid file types C 9 SET Set 8 8 short cut keys for monitoring data table files 18 27 for monitoring program files 18 26 for selecting the language 4 18 single scan SSN mode 18 22 sinking and sourcing circuits overview 2 2 Slave receiver communication 15 2 spacing the controller 1 12 Specifications general A 2 controller A 2 HHP A 9 input controller A 3 HHP A 9 output controller A 4 response times A 6 SQC Sequencer Compare 13 6 SQL Sequencer Load 13 12 SQO Sequencer Output 13 6 SQR Square Root 10 11 Square Root SQR 10 11 entering the instruction 10 12 execution times 10 11 function code 10 12 instruction parameters C 9 ladder representative 10 11 updates to a
297. ency in Hertz SRCA N4 0000H SRCB 60 Temporary reg math reg is real destination DEST N6 0000H SRC N2 1000 RPM based on counts per turn register N7 2 DEST N5 0000H Math overflow error bit 55 0 0 PARAMETER NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES TYPE Up Res H1d CNTR CO PRE 1000 ACC 0000H On Off Circuit Application Example Appendix E Application Example Programs The following application example illustrates how to use an input to toggle an output either on or off For a detailed explanation of e LD LDI OUT SET RST and OSR instructions see chapter 8 e JMP and LBL instructions see chapter 12 If the output is off when the input is energized the output is turned on If the output is on when the input is energized the output is turned off On Off Circuit Ladder Program Rung 2 0 Does a one shot from the input push button to an internal bit the internal bit is true for only one scan This prevents toggling of the physical output in case the push button is held ON for more than one scan always the case push button OSR 1 push button Input false to true Ig B3 B3 easel E NO a a ee Ce 0 1 0 Rung 2 1 If the push button input has gone from false to true and the output is presently OFF turn the output ON and jump over the following rung to the rest of the programs If the JMP instruction was missing the following rung would be true and would turn the output back OFF push butt
298. ength value When the ER bit is set the minor error bit S2 is also set Both bits must be cleared Done Bit DN bit 13 is set by the SQO or SQC instruction after it has operated on the last word in the sequencer file It is reset on the next false to true rung transition after the rung goes false Enable EN bit 15 is set by a false to true rung transition and indicates the SQO or SQC instruction is enabled Length is the number of steps of the sequencer file starting at position 1 The maximum number you can enter is 104 words Position 0 is the startup position The instruction resets wraps to position 1 at each cycle completion e Position is the word location or step in the sequencer file from to which the instruction moves data You may use the RES instruction to reset a sequencer All control bits except FD are reset to zero The position is also set to zero Program the address of your control register in the RES e g RO Using SQO This output instruction steps through the sequencer file whose bits have been set to control various output devices When the rung goes from false to true the instruction increments to the next step word in the sequencer file Data stored there is transferred through a mask to the destination address specified in the instruction Data is written to the destination word every time the instruction is executed 13 7 Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions The
299. entically except that the Up Counter with reset and hold uses external inputs 2 and 3 For the Up Counter each Off to On state change of input I0 0 adds 1 to the accumulator until the high preset is reached The accumulator is then automatically reset to zero The Up Counter operates in the 0 to 32 767 range inclusive and can be reset to zero using the Reset RES instruction When the HSC instruction is first executed true the e Accumulator CO ACC is loaded to the hardware accumulator e High preset CO PRE is loaded to the hardware high preset Operation If you move data to the high preset without using the RAC instruction with a MOV after the high speed counter is configured the data is loaded to the instruction image but is not loaded to the hardware The modified high preset value is not loaded to the hardware until the existing hardware high preset is reached or an RAC or RES instruction is executed The high preset value loaded to the hardware must be between 1 and 32 767 inclusive or an error 37H occurs Any value between 32 768 and 32 767 inclusive can be loaded to the hardware accumulator The Following Condition Occurs when either the hardware accumulator transitions from the hardware high preset 1 to the hardware high preset or the hardware accumulator is loaded with a value greater than or equal to the hardware high preset or the hardware high preset is loaded with a value thatis less than or equal to the h
300. ents This provides a range of 1 4 in to 2 25 in FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 1000 MPS eS a 22 AND BCD bit 0 T ii 0 40 OUT FRD bit 0 N14 0 0 11 MRD 22 AND BCD bit 1 I 12 0 40 OUT FRD bit 1 N14 1 0 11 MRD 22 AND BCD bit 2 1 13 0 40 OUT FRD bit 2 N14 2 0 12 MPP 22 AND BCD bit 3 1 14 0 40 OUT FRD bit 3 N14 3 0 This rung accesses 1 0 only available with 32 I O controllers Therefore do not include this rung if you are using a 16 1 0 controller Appendix E Application Example Programs File 7 Rung 3 Converts the BCD thumbwheel value from BCD to integer This is done because the controller operates upon integer values This rung also debounces the thumbwheel to ensure that the conversion only occurs on valid BCD values Note that invalid BCD values can occur while the operator is changing the BCD thumbwheel This is due to input filter propagation delay differences between the 4 input circuits that provide the BCD input value FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 10 MPS 23 ANI 1 st pass bit 1 15 0 51 EQU AND EQU previous scan s BCD input value SRCA N13 0000H SRCB N14 0000H 101 FRD debounced BCD value SRC N14 0000H DEST N12 0000H 22 AND Math Overflow Bit s0 1 0 42 0 RST Math Error Bit S5 0 0 12 MPP 106 MOV this scan s BCD input value SRC N14 0000H DES
301. ents have occurred B 16 0 LA MRD 66 GEQ AND GEQ 1 4 in Thousands SRCA N1 0000H SRCB 102 40 SS OUT 102 000 1 4 in increments have occurred B 17 0 11 MRD 66 GEQ AND GEQ 1 4 in Thousands SRCA N1 0000H SRCB 105 40 gt e OUT change drill bit NOW 0 6 0 12 MPP 20 LD 00 000 1 4 in increments have occurred B 16 0 23 ANI 02 000 1 4 in increments have occurred B 17 0 20 LD 00 000 1 4 in increments have occurred B 22 AND 02 000 1 4 in increments have occurred B 17 0 22 AND 28 second free running clock bit S4 7 0 14 ORB 13 ANB 40 j OUT change drill bit soon 0 4 More rungs are added to this subroutine at the end of chapters 10 and 11 This branch accesses 1 0 only available with 32 1 0 controllers Therefore do not include this branch if you are using a 16 I O controller 9 15 Math Instructions Chapter Using Math Instructions This chapter contains general information about math instructions and explains how they function in your logic program Each of the math instructions includes information on e what the instruction symbol looks like e typical execution time for the instruction e how to use the instruction e how to enter the instruction In addition the last section contains an application example for a paper drilling machine that shows the math instructions in use n Function Mnemonic Code Name Purpose Page ADD 80 Ad
302. ering a message instruction the following parameters need to be entered e Read Write read indicates that the local processor processor in which the instruction is located is receiving data write indicates that the processor is sending data e Target Device identifies the type of command used to establish communication The target device can be a MicroLogix 1000 controller or SLC family processor using SLC commands or a common interface file by selecting the CIF Common Interface File format Valid options are SLC500 ML1000 Allows communication between a MicroLogix 1000 controller and any other MicroLogix 1000 controller or SLC 500 family processor CIF Common Interface File Allows communication between a MicroLogix 1000 controller and a non MicroLogix 1000 SLC 500 device The CIF data is automatically delivered to integer file 9 in SLC 500 processors or integer file 7 in MicroLogix 1000 controllers The CIF protocol is also used for PLC 2 type messages e Control Block Address an integer file address that you select It consists of seven integer words containing the status bits target file address and other data associated with the MSG instruction e Control Block Length fixed at seven elements This field cannot be altered e Target Node the node address of the target device Valid entries are 0 254 for DF1 0 31 for DH 485 e Local Address the address of the local device Target Address
303. ernal oT Tin Cable straight 9 25 pin D al J user supplied cable External Power Selection Switch Power Supply Setting Required modem or other communication device portl yes external extemal power supply required unless the AIC is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the selection switch should be set to cable Series B cables or higher are required for hardware handshaking Connecting the System Recommended User Supplied Components These components can be purchased from your local electronics supplier Component external power supply and chassis ground power supply rated for 20 4 28 8V dc Recommended Model NULL modem adapter standard AT straight 9 25 pin RS 232 cable see table below for port information if making own cables DB 9 RS 232 Port1 6 O 1 MDMA 2 me o 3 9 8 eN g a oong Port 1 Item DB 9 RS 232 T received line signal detector DCD 1761 CBL AP 00 or 1761 CBL PM02 ce z cable straight D connector 8 pin mini DIN 6 O 1 7 GA 2 le 6 3 L 8 e 7 9 O 5 Port 20 1761 CBL PM02 cable same state as port 1 s DCD signal DH 485 connector
304. ernal PanelView 550 through NULL modem adapter port 1 yes external Port 1 on another AIC port 1 yes external g I AN aa 3 1761 CBL AS09 1761 CBL AS03 External F Cable Length Connections from to AIC Power Supply Power peria Switch Required erung 1761 CBL AS03 3m 9 8 ft SLC 500 Fixed port 3 yes external 1761 CBL AS09 9 5m 31 17 ft SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 and SLC 5 03 processors PanelView 550 RJ 45 port port 3 yes external j al i i 1761 CBL HM02 1761 CBL AM00 External i Cable Length Connections from to AlC Power Supply Power Selection Switch Required g 1761 CBL AM00 45 cm 17 7 in MicroLogix 1000 port2 no cable 1761 CBL HM02 2m 6 5 ft to port 2 on another AIC port2 yes external 3 8 External power supply required unless the AIC is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the selection switch should be set to cable 2 Series B cables or higher are required for hardware handshaking gt ll Cable 1761 CBL AP00 1761 CBL PM02 1761 CBL AP 00 Length 2m 6 5 ft ol Tin 45 cm 17 7 in Chapter 3 Connecting the System B es 1761 CBL PM02 Connections from to AIC Bower Supa Power ponies Switch Required SLC 5 03 or SLC 5 04 processors channel 0 port 2 yes external MicroLogix 1000 portl yes external PanelView 550 through NULL modem adapter port 2 yes external PC COM port port 2 yes ext
305. ernal controller hardware failure If an unexpected reset occurs and the Run Always bit is set the controller will enter the RRUN mode therefore make sure your application is designed to safely handle this situation To change the bit setting 1 Put the controller in RPRG mode if it is not already in that mode 2 Access the program configuration menu 3 Arrow down to the option RUN ALWAYS and select it fox les 3 times RUN ALWAYS OYES ENO B 4 Select the option YES and return to the home screen gt enr esc ese 5 You must accept your program edits for this change to take affect For information on accepting edits see page 18 21 18 5 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program Setting the Start Up Protection Bit This selection allows you to check for and attempt to recover from major errors before starting the first scan of your program When this bit is set to No the controller will fault if a major error occurs while in RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode When this bit is set to YES and power is cycled when the controller starts in RRUN mode the controller executes the user fault routine prior to the execution of the first program scan You can then clear the Major Error Halted bit S1 13 to resume operation in the RRUN mode If user fault routine does not reset bit S1 13 the fault mode results Therefore program the user fault routine logic accordingly When executing the startup p
306. errupt to occur Trst High Speed Counter Pass S 1 TRAC SSS SSeS SS aaa anas M lees a RESET TO ACCUM VALUE 15 Counter C520 Source 1 Psi SSS sSsS 555 5555555555 High Speed Counter c5 0 RES Rung 2 3 Starts the conveyor in motion when the start button is pressed However another condition must also be met before we start the conveyor the drill bit must be in its fully retracted position home This rung also stops the conveyor when the stop button is pressed START Drill STOP change Machine Button Home LS Button drill bit RUN NOW Latch IO T 0 T 0 0 0 B3 Shoal yeas a iiss a Mi aS OD 6 5 7 6 0 Machine RUN Latch B3 Posen Jesse see 0 Rung 2 4 Applies the above start logic to the conveyor and drill motor Machine Drill Conveyor RUN Home LS Enable Latch B3 PSO 0 0 o ISS SS aS ee ee tones SSS S5 pJete Dia 0 5 5 Drill Motor ON 0 0 1 This instruction accesses 1 0 only available with 32 1 0 controllers Therefore do not include this instruction if you are using a 16 I O controller Appendix E Application Example Programs Rung 2 5 Calls the drill sequence subroutine This subroutine manages the operation of a drilling sequence and restarts the conveyor upon completion of the drilling sequence a JUMP TO SUBROUTINE SBR file n
307. ers the program mode you are returned to the home screen Clearing the Current Program Clear the current program from the controller by following these steps 1 Access the menu screen MENU l 1 LANGUAGE 2 ACCEPT EDITS Chapter 5 Quick Start for New Users 2 Arrow down to menu option 6 or press the number 6 5 times gt 6 CLEAR PROG 7 BAUD RATE 3 Select menu option 6 ENT CLEAR PROGRAM YES ENT NO ESC 4 Clear the program in the controller ENT CLEAR PROGRAM CLEARING 5 are aek 5 Return to the home screen ESC Once the program is cleared the home screen shows the default program name MICRO 5 3 Chapter 5 Quick Start for New Users Reviewing What You ve Done So Far You have completed preparing to enter a new program with your HHP vi Preparing to enter a new program Placing the controller in program mode Clearing the current program E Entering and running the program _ Entering the new program _ Changing to run mode E Monitoring operation _ Monitoring the program Monitoring the data Continue on to the next section to enter and run a program Entering and Running the You are now ready to create a program in file 2 Once the program is y prog prog Program entered you will place the controller in run mode so you can monitor the program Entering the New Program The following rungs consist of LD OR ANI and OUT
308. es An example of this type of rung is shown below Optimized Option 1 a b d T C NEW RUNG NEW RUNG LD a LD a c AND b LD b ORc ANB OUT d ORc OUT d Series Block Connection Option 2 NEW RUNG LDa LD b ANB LDc ORB OUT d When two blocks of instructions are connected in series an ANB instruction is used as shown here a 7 Optimized Option 1 i NEW RUNG NEW RUNG LDa LDa b d OR b OR b LDc LDc OR d LDd 1 ANB ORB OUT e ANB OUT e Option 2 NEW RUNG LDa LDb ORB LDc LDd ORB ANB OUTe See page 8 12 for more information regarding the use of the ANB instruction 16 2 Chapter 16 Instruction List Programming Parallel Block Connection If two blocks of instructions are connected in parallel an ORB instruction is used An example of this type of block connection is provided below a b Optimized Option 1 Option 2 NEW RUNG NEW RUNG NEW RUNG LD a LD a LD a c d 1 AND b LDb LDb LDc ANB ANB AND d LDc LDc i ORB AND d LDd OUT e ORB ANB OUT e ORB OUT e See page 8 12 for more information regarding the use of the ORB instruction Nested Input Branching You can nest input branches to avoid using redundant instructions This example shows how ANB and ORB instructions are used together in these type of rungs See page 8 12 for more information reg
309. es C 10 valid file types C 10 system configuration DH 485 connection examples D 14 system connection 3 1 system considerations 16 8 T Temporary End TND 12 7 entering the instruction 12 7 execution times 12 7 function code 12 7 instruction parameters C 10 ladder representation 12 7 l 27 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual 1 28 valid addressing modes C 10 valid file types C 10 test modes 18 22 continuous scan CSN 18 22 single scan SSN 18 22 timer file T 6 4 timer instructions overview addressing structure 8 15 entering parameters 8 14 entering the instructions 8 15 Retentive Timer RTO 8 20 Timer Off Delay TOF 8 18 Timer On Delay TON 8 16 Timer Off Delay TOF 8 18 entering the instruction 8 18 execution times 8 18 function code 8 18 instruction parameters C 10 ladder representation 8 18 using status bits 8 18 valid addressing modes C 10 valid file types C 10 Timer On Delay TON 8 16 entering the instruction 8 16 execution times 8 16 function code 8 16 instruction parameters C 10 ladder representation 8 16 using status bits 8 16 valid addressing modes C 10 valid file types C 10 timing diagram message instruction 15 9 TND Temporary End 12 7 TOD Convert to BCD 11 2 TOF Timer Off Delay 8 18 TON Timer On Delay 8 16 trace feature using 20 8 tracing specific addresses addresses that are di
310. es C 3 valid addressing modes C 3 word output instruction 11 18 entering the instruction 11 18 execution times 11 18 function code 11 18 instruction parameters C 3 ladder representation 11 18 updates to arithmetic status bits 11 18 valid addressing modes C 3 valid file types C 3 And Block ANB 8 12 entering the instruction 8 12 execution times 8 12 function code 8 12 8 13 ladder representation 8 12 using 8 12 And Inverted ANI 8 4 entering the instruction 8 5 execution times 8 4 instruction parameters C 3 ladder representation 8 4 using 8 5 valid addressing modes C 3 valid file types C 3 AND And bit input instruction 8 3 word output instruction 11 18 ANI And Inverted 8 4 append mode 17 3 inserting a rung 17 4 inserting an instruction 17 3 application example programs adjustable timer E 55 instruction list program E 56 adder program E 55 operation overview E 55 bottle line E 29 instruction list program E 32 adder program E 29 operation overview E 29 conveyor line E 34 instruction list program E 37 adder program E 35 operation overview E 34 event driven sequencer E 27 instruction list program E 28 adder program E 27 operation overview E 27 on off circuit E 47 instruction list program E 48 adder program E 47 operation overview E 47 aper drilling machine E 2 instruction list program E 14 adder program E 4 operation overview E 2 RPM calculation E 40
311. ess gt WY D scroll through the bits of individual data files scroll through the data file table Using Short Cut Keys The following table shows the short cut keys you can press to go directly to the particular data file type word address and bit address you want to monitor To go to Press the following key sequence a designated data file type word and bit MON data file word gt ORB bit gt ENT e g N5 3 type address address a designated data file type and word MON gt data file word _ ENT e g N20 type address word 0 bit 0 of a designated data file data file 2 se type e g N0 0 type word 0 ofa designated data file _ data file _ type e g NO type Viewing Data Table Files Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program This section shows you how to access each type of data table file It also describes how to change the radix display for output input bit and integer data files Accessing Data Table Files An example of how to access each type of data table file is shown below The sample screen is provided to show you how each data table file looks Output Data Files To access the output data file for O 5 press the key sequence shown below For the output file type the character is automatically displayed by the MicroLogix 1000 HHP or S Se 5 0 5 00 0000000000000010 Input Data Files Access the in
312. est mode is the same as the remote run mode described below except output circuits are not energized This allows you to troubleshoot or test your program without energizing external output devices on a continuous basis e Remote Single Scan RSSN In this test mode the controller executes a single operating cycle that reads the inputs executes the program and updates all data without energizing output circuits Remote Run Mode While you are in the remote run mode RRUN the controller monitors input devices scans or executes the program energizes output devices and acts on enabled I O forces 18 21 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program Changing Remote Modes The following steps show how to change from RPRG mode to RRUN mode Important When changing from RPRG mode to any other mode of operation RRUN RCSN or RSSN any edits that exist in the current program are accepted automatically Edits exist whenever the mode is flashing on the HHP display 1 Enter the mode options MODE 0 ACTIVE MODE RPRG PPRPRG RRUN gt The current mode RPRG is shown on the top line The bottom line shows the mode options The arrows to the left and right indicate that more options are available 2 Arrow over to RRUN ACTIVE MODE RPRG RPRG ERRUN gt 3 Select RRUN If edits exist in the current program the program is checked and if accepted the home screen appears
313. est value is when Test value is 5 8 5 through 8 32 768 through 4 and 9 through 32 767 If the Low Limit has a value greater than the High Limit the instruction is false when the Test value is between the limits If the Test value is equal to either limit or outside the limits the instruction is true as shown below True False True 32 768 EOR 5 32 767 High Limit Low Limit Example low limit greater than high limit Instruction is False when Test value is 6 and7 9 11 Chapter 9 Using Comparison Instructions Com parison Instructions in To demonstrate the use of comparison instructions this section provides the Paper Drilling Machine ladder rungs followed by the optimized instruction list for these rungs The Application Example rungs are part of the paper drilling machine application example described in appendix D You will be adding an instruction to file 2 and beginning a subroutine in file 7 Adding to File 2 To begin you will once again need to return to the rungs first entered in chapter 5 in the program GETSTART One more instruction needs to be added to the first rung to keep track of the drill life This rung is indicated below by the shading Notice that text has also been added to the rung comment Important Do not add this instruction if you are using a 16 I O controller Address O0 6 is only valid for 32 I O controllers Ladder Rung Rung 2 3 Starts the conveyor in motion
314. etentive outputs Non retentive outputs are reset when their rung goes false If the MCR Rung that Starts the Zone is Then the Controller True Executes the rungs in the MCR zone based on each rung s individual input condition as if the zone did not exist False Resets all non retentive output instructions in the MCR zone regardless of each rung s individual input conditions MCR zones let you enable or inhibit segments of your program such as for recipe applications Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To enter the function code press _ 7 P009 Ti ea MCR When you program MCR instructions note that e You must end the zone with an unconditional MCR instruction e You cannot nest one MCR zone within another e Do not jump into an MCR zone If the zone is false jumping into it activates the zone Important The MCR instruction is not a substitute for a hard wired master control relay that provides emergency stop capability You still must install a hard wired master control relay to provide emergency I O power shutdown ATTENTION If you start instructions such as timers or counters in an MCR zone instruction operation ceases when the zone is disabled Re program critical operations outside the zone if necessary Temporary End TND Ladder representation TND Execution Times usec when True False 7 18 3 16
315. etermine which color to paint the part As the program is checking the shift register for the presence of a part at the spray guns it is also decoding the color information at NO and energizing the appropriate spray guns Since we are only using three colors the only valid color codes are 1 2 and 3 If any other number is in NO when a part is ready to be painted the color defaults to BLUE Since our program accesses the data while it is still in the two data structures after the part has been painted the presence and color information for that part is shifted out of the data structures and lost Appendix E Application Example Programs Spray Booth Ladder Program Rung 2 0 These three rungs read the color information coming from the barcode decoder outputs and load this into integer N7 4 This color is loaded into the FIFO when the part carrier actuates the SHIFT LIMIT SWITCH Low Bit Color from Bar Select Code Word Decoder 0 N7 4 Seal las ee SSS 2 0 Rung 2 1 Middle Bit Color from Bar Select Code Word Decoder Ld N7 4 SSS SS CVSS SSS 5 3 1 Rung 2 2 High Bit Color from Bar Select Code Word Decoder Ld N7 4 Sal We a pics 4 2 Rung 2 3 When the part carrier actuates the SHIFT LIMIT SWITCH three things happen in this rung 1 the color of the previously painted part is unloaded from the FIFO to make room for the color of the new part 2 the color of the new part is
316. etion of the drilling sequence FUN File Calls bit FUN CODE 132 GRAPHIC PARAMETER SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES JSR SBR 6 2 Rung 6 the subroutine that tracks the amount of wear on the current drill GRAPHIC PARAMETER SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES JSR SBR ap Appendix E Application Example Programs File 4 Rung 0 Resets the hole count sequencers each time that the low preset is reached The low preset has been set to zero to cause an interrupt to occur each time that a reset occurs The low preset is reached anytime that a reset C5 0 or hardware reset occurs This ensures that the first preset value is loaded into the high speed counter at each entry into the RRUN mode and each time that the external reset signal is activated FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 158 INT LD INT 22 f AND interrupt occurred due to low preset reached CO IL 0 7 RES 3 hole preset sequencer R4 7 RES 5 hole preset sequencer R5 7 RES 7 hole preset sequencer R6 File 4 Rung 10 Keeps track of the hole number that is being drilled and loads the correct high speed counter preset based on the hole count This rung is only active when the hole selector switch is in the 3 hole position The sequencer uses step 0 as a null step upon reset It uses the last step as a go forever in anticipation of the end of manual hard wired external rese
317. ew Rung key NEW RUNG T 4 Add the instructions you want on the new rung Overwrite Mode With the MicroLogix 1000 HHP in overwrite mode you can either write over the current parameters of an instruction or you can write over an entire instruction to replace it with a new one Overwriting an Instruction s Parameters The steps below describe how to write over the parameters of an existing instruction 1 Change the edit mode to overwrite if you haven t already OVR 2 Arrow to the instruction with the parameters you want to change Chapter 17 Entering and Editing Your Program 3 Press the key sequence shown below A FUN gt ENT gt ENT 4 You are now able to change any or all of the current parameters for this instruction The table below describes your options If you want to Then you should accept the current parameters press ENT use DEL as a destructive backspace or FUN DEL to delete change the current parameters the entire displayed address Then key in the desired address and press ENT Once the instruction is accepted the instruction immediately after the instruction you wrote over is displayed Overwriting an Instruction The steps below describe how to write over an existing instruction 1 Change the edit mode to overwrite if you haven t already OVR 2 Arrow to the instruction you want to replace Important You cannot write over the Start of File Start
318. exed direct 0 1 S B N Not Applicable LIFO control direct R element level Not Applicable length contained in the 1 128 control register position contained in the 0 127 control register LFU LIFO Unload LIFO array indexed direct 0 1 S B N Not Applicable destination direct indexed direct 0 1 S B T C R N Not Applicable LIFO control direct R element level Not Applicable length contained in the 1 128 control register position contained in the 0 127 control register C 6 Indexed addressing is not allowed when using T C or R addresses Appendix C Valid Addressing Modes and File Types for Instruction Parameters Instruction Description Instruction Valid Addressing Valid File Types Valid Value Parameter Mode s Ranges LIM Limit Test low limit immediate direct 0 1l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct f min f max test immediate direct 0 1 5 B 1 C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct f min f max high limit immediate direct 0 1 S B 1 C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct f min f max MCR Master Control Reset Not Applicable MEQ Mask Comparison for source direct indexed direct 0 1 B 7 C R ot Applicable Equal source mask immediate direct 0 1 5 B T C R 32 768 32 767 indexed direct compare immediate direct 0 1 5 B T C R 32 768 32 767 indexed direct MOV Move source immediate direc
319. f you look at the labels on each key you will notice that most of the keys perform more than one function The MicroLogix 1000 HHP is designed to distinguish which function you want to perform based on the context you are in at the time you press the key Chapter 4 Using Your Hand Held Programmer Accessing Additional Characters Several characters are available that are not displayed on the keypad These are outlined in the table below To Access This Press This Key Character Sequence A i Fun s 0 A BOE T A 69 6 9 JX em 4 N JEA 5 TAN These characters are useful for entering indexed addresses hexadecimal values and program names 4 5 Chapter 4 Using Your Hand Held Programmer Identifying the Power Up When the MicroLogix 1000 HHP is first connected to the controller the Sequence following sequence occurs 1 The HHP performs diagnostic self tests While doing this it displays the following Copyright screens MICRO PROGRAMMER VERSION X XX ALLEN BRADLEY CO COPYRIGHT 1994 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED These screens will always appear in English even if you later select an alternate language for the HHP 2 The HHP begins connecting to the controller and displays e The HHP automatically finds the controller s baud rate and connects to it at that rate 3 After a successful connection the HHP displays the home screen For
320. file each scan the rung is true Elements are filled in ascending order Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area The following items apply when entering the instruction e Whenever you see asterisks on the display the HHP is waiting for data entry i e a number e You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key CY Then if you want to edit that operand press DEL or FUN DEL and enter new parameters Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one Once the entire instruction is entered if you want to edit the A AOA Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions instruction s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode See page 17 4 To enter the function code press P000 FLL LEN Move and Logical Instructions The following general information applies to move and logical instructions Overview Entering Parameters e Source is the address of the value on which the logical or move operation is to be performed It can be a word address or a constant If the instruction has two source operands it will not accept constants in both operands e Destination is the address where the resulting data is stored It must be a word address Entering the Instructions You enter the instructions from within the program monitor functional area The following items apply when entering the instructions e Whenever you se
321. forms a true logic path rung logic is not enabled and the output instruction logic will not be true The output is not energized a b d roa C In the above example either A and B or C provides a true logical path Output Branching You can program parallel outputs on a rung to allow a true logic path to control multiple outputs When there is a true logic path all parallel outputs become true a c F b d 4 e In the above example either A or B provides a true logical path to all three output instructions Additional input logic instructions conditions can be programmed in the output branches to further control the outputs When there is a true logic path including extra input conditions on an output branch that branch becomes true For instruction list programming MPS MRD and MPP instructions are sometimes needed for this connection See page 8 10 Example Parallel Output Branching with Conditions In the above example either A and D or B and D provide a true logic path to E 6 13 Chapter 6 Programming Overview 6 14 Connecting Blocks Blocks of input and output instructions can be connected in series and parallel as well Example Series Block Connection In the above example two blocks of information are connected in series Either A or B and C or D provides a true logical path For instruction list pr
322. from within the program monitor functional area Using RST When you assign an address to the RST instruction that corresponds to the address of a physical output the output device wired to this screw terminal is de energized when the bit is cleared turned off or unlatched The RST instruction tells the controller to turn off the addressed bit Thereafter the bit remains off regardless of the rung condition until it is turned on typically by a SET instruction in another rung Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area Branch instructions are connecting instructions unique to instruction list programming There are two types of branch instructions e multiple output circuit connectors MPS MRD and MPP e block connectors ANB and ORB Since these instructions are used solely for connecting purposes there are no parameters to enter 8 9 Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Memory Push MPS Memory Read MRD and Memory Pop MPP Ladder representation E NPs e H MRD e H A MPP Execution Times usec MPS 0 40 MRD 0 40 MPP 0 40 To enter the function code press A DECREED 8 10 MPS MRD and MPP are multiple output circuit connecting instructions These instructions work together to store read and clear the state of a rung prior to the execution of an output circuit Every MPS instruction used in a program
323. functional areas e program monitor e data monitor e multi point Tracing Bit Addresses Versus Word Addresses The following table outlines whether the trace feature finds a bit address or a word address when invoked from any of the functional areas If the address entered or displayed is a n Then the trace finds only bit instructions referencing that bit To invoke the trace feature the current radix must be binary any bit instructions or parameters of word instructions referencing that Timer Counter or Control element output bit integer or status file address timer counter or control address 20 9 Chapter 20 Troubleshooting Your System Controller Error Recovery Use the following error recovery model to help you diagnose software and Model hardware problems in the micro controller The model provides common questions you might ask to help troubleshoot your system Refer to the recommended pages within the model and to S6 of the status file on page B 8 for further help Start Identify the error code and description Refer to appendix B for Is the error hardware related Tighten wire probable cause and connections recommended action Does the controller have power supplied Is the Power No Clear fault using either LED On I Check power function key F9 or F10 Refer to page 20
324. g Analog This chapter describes the operation of the MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers Topics include e T O Image e 1 O Configuration e Input Filter and Update Times e Converting Analog Data The input and output image files of the MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers have the following format Address Input Image Output Image Address 0 0 Discrete Input Word 0 Discrete Output Word 0 0 0 0 0 1 Discrete Input Word 1 Reserved 0 0 1 0 2 Reserved Reserved 0 0 2 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 0 4 Analog Input 0 Voltage ae Voltage or 0 0 4 0 5 Analog Input 1 Voltage 0 6 Analog Input 2 Current 0 7 Analog Input 3 Current Input words 0 and 1 contain discrete input data Unused inputs in the discrete inputs image space are reset during each input scan Input words 2 and 3 are reserved and are not updated by the controller These inputs have no direct effect on controller operation but can be modified like other data bits Input words 4 7 contain the status of the four analog input channels respectively Analog input image words are cleared at Going To Run GTR For enabled channels the analog input image is updated on a cyclical basis Output word 0 contains discrete output data Output words 1 3 are reserved output image space Unused outputs in both the discrete output image space and the reserved output image space have no direct effect on controller operation But these outputs can be mod
325. g the names of the programs contained on the memory module If there are no programs dashed lines appear in place of program names In such a case since there are no programs to clear you must press ESC to exit the sub menu 3 Arrow down to the program you want to clear and select it a n times CLEAR PROGRAM PROGRAM3 002K A confirmation screen appears that shows the name of the program and its size If you do not want to clear this program press ESC to exit the sub menu 4 Clear the program in the memory module ENT CLEAR PROGRAM3 CLEARING Once the program is cleared from the module you are returned to the memory module sub menu 19 5 Chapter 19 Common Procedures Clearing a Program from the If you want to create a new program you need to first clear the current Micro Controller program from the controller Follow the steps below 1 Enter the menu and choose the option CLEAR PROG MENU caw CLEAR PROGRAM YES TENT NO ESC 2 Clear the program from the controller ENT CLEAR PROGRAM Once the program is cleared the menu options are displayed You can return to the previous functional areas by pressing ESC Important All program configuration settings are returned to their defaults See page 18 1 for information of changing the default settings Changing the Micro Follow the steps below to change the controller s baud rate The default is Controller s Ba
326. h any previous input instruction in the current rung or block Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area P000 O H B 0 1 8 5 Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Load True LDT and Or True ORT Ladder representation pe LDT LT Lo ORT Execution Times usec when True False LDT 1 54 n a ORT 1 94 na To enter the function code press AN BEREE To enter the function code press AN el 8 6 The LDT and ORT instructions are used to short circuit a block of logic They are useful for debugging a rung when you need a condition that is always true There are no parameters to enter for these instructions Using LDT Use the LDT instruction to place a short in the first position of a rung or block This instruction can only be used if it is immediately used with an OR or ORB instruction Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area P000 HLDT Using ORT Use the ORT instruction to place a short in parallel with any previous input instruction in the current rung or block Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area P000 4 ORTH One Shot Rising OSR Ladder representation B3 OSR _ 0 Execution Times usec when True False LDOSR 13 02 11 48 AND OSR 13 42 11 88 To enter
327. h Preset Value counts to next hole DEST N7 7 hole preset sequencer CTRL R6 LEN 9 POS 0000H 42 0 RST force the sequencer to increment on the next scan R6 EN 1 This instruction accesses 1 0 only available with 32 1 0 controllers Therefore do not include this instruction if you are using a 16 I O controller This rung accesses I O only available with 32 I O controllers Therefore do not include this rung if you are using a 16 I O controller Appendix E Application Example Programs File 4 Rung 4 Ensures that the high speed counter preset value N7 7 is immediately applied to the HSC instruction FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES sly il HSL High Speed Counter CNTR CO Output Mask only use bit 0 ie 0 0 0 SRC N5 LEN 5 File 4 Rung 5 Interrupt occurred due to low preset reached FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 l LD interrupt occurred due to low preset reached CO IL 0 134 RET File 4 Rung 6 Signals the main program file 2 to initiate a drilling sequence The high speed counter has already stopped the conveyor at the correct position using its high preset output pattern data clear 0 0 0 This occurred within microseconds of the high preset being reached just prior to entering this high speed counter interrupt subroutine The drill sequence subroutine resets the drill sequence start bit and sets the conveyo
328. have completed the following tasks Vj Your controller should be installed and wired See chapters 1 and 2 Vj Your HHP should be connected and powered up See chapters 3 and 5 Here s what you ll be doing to get started with the MicroLogix 1000 HHP E Preparing to enter a new program J Placing the controller in program mode J Clearing the current program E Entering and running the program Entering the new program L Changing to run mode E Monitoring operation _ Monitoring the program Monitoring the data Once you ve finished these steps you will have a good idea of what it takes to program your micro controller with a MicroLogix 1000 HHP You will also know how to execute and monitor program activity If You d Like More Examples Be sure you read the last section in this chapter It directs you to more examples throughout the manual Chapter 5 Quick Start for New Users Preparing to Enter a New Program 5 2 Before you can enter a new program you must complete the two preliminary procedures described in this section Placing the Controller in Program Mode If the controller is not currently in program mode you need to change to that mode Follow the steps below 1 From the home screen access the mode options MODE 0 ACTIVE MODE RRUN JBRPRG RRUN gt 2 Select RPRG mode The RPRG mode box is already highlighted ENT Once the controller ent
329. he screens shown above the figure are the condensed screens that appear after instruction entry is complete P009 BSL FELE 81 0000H Poos BSL Ro 3 L 5 8 P 0 P009 BSL BI T 1 0 Source Bit 10 5 i Data block is shifted one bit ata time from bit B 16 to bit B 73 l 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 58 Bit Array 1 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 RESERVED 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 Unload Bit R3 10 If you wish to shift more than one bit per scan you must create a loop in your application using the JMP LBL and CTU instructions When the rung goes from false to true the controller sets the enable bit EN bit 15 and the data block is shifted to the right to a lower bit number one bit position The specified bit at the bit address is shifted into the last bit position The first bit is shifted out of the array and stored in the unload bit UL bit 10 The shift is completed immediately For wraparound operation set the bit address to the first bit of the array or to the UL bit Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions To enter the function code press A DoT Por BSR CTRL P011 BSR LEN
330. he Quadrature Encoder is used for determining direction of rotation and position for rotating such as a lathe The Bidirectional Counter counts the rotation of the Quadrature Encoder Bidirectional Counters operate in the 32 768 to 32 767 range inclusive and can be reset to zero using the reset RES instruction The figure below shows a quadrature encoder connected to inputs 0 1 and 2 The count direction is determined by the phase angle between A and B If A leads B the counter increments If B leads A the counter decrements The counter can be reset using the Z input The Z outputs from the encoders typically provide one pulse per revolution rO Input 0 A 1 O Input 1 l B 1 Quadrature Encoder 7 O Input 2 Reset input A ae ee Forward Rotation Reverse Rotation f r 3 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions Operation For the Bidirectional Counters both high and low presets are used The low preset value must be less than the high preset value or an error 37H occurs When the HSC instruction is first executed true the e Instruction accumulator is loaded to the hardware accumulator e Instruction high preset is loaded to the hardware high preset Any instruction accumulator value between 32 768 and
331. he high speed counter interrupt subroutine FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 170 HSC TYPE Encoder Res Hld High Speed Counter 1250 CNTR CO 0000H PRE ACC 14 31 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions File 2 Rung 2 Forces a high speed counter low preset interrupt to occur each RRUN mode entry An interrupt can only occur on the transition of the high speed counter accum to a preset value accum reset to 1 then 0 This is done to allow the high speed counter interrupt subroutine sequencers to initialize The order of high speed counter initialization is 1 load high speed counter parameters 2 execute HSL instruction 3 execute true HSC instruction 4 optional force high speed counter interrupt to occur FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 LD 1 st Pass 51 15 0 132 RAC High Speed Counter CNTR CO SRC I 7 RES High Speed Counter co Rungs 2 0 and 2 2 are required to write several parameters to the high speed counter data file area These two rungs are conditioned by the first pass bit during one scan when the controller is going from RPRG to RRUN mode The high speed counter is used to control the conveyer position It counts pulses supplied by the conveyer s encoder via hardware inputs I 0 and 1 1 Hardware inputs I 2 reset and I 3 hold are connected to a photo switch ensuring the HSC instruction only counts encoder
332. he instruction is true The instruction becomes false as soon as it detects a mismatch Bits in the mask word mask data when reset they pass data when set Entering the Instruction HHP Display Mnemonic eas Use This Instruction When the Input HMEQH LD MEQ 68 appears first on a rung or block is placed in series with any previous input MEQ AND MEQ 63 instruction in the current rung or block feel is placed in parallel with any previous in MEQ OR MEQ A put instruction in the current rung or block You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area The example below shows how to enter the LD MEQ instruction Use the same procedure to enter the other MEQ instructions only substitute the function code with one from the table above P000 HMEQr SRC N11 0 P000 HMEQr MASK 0000H P000 HMEQrt COMP 100 9 9 Chapter 9 Using Comparison Instructions Limit Test LIM Ladder representation LIM LIMIT TEST Low Lim gt Test N7 HOO High Lim Execution Times usec when True False LDLIM 36 93 7 69 AND LIM 37 33 8 09 OR LIM 37 33 8 09 To enter the function code press Joo 9 10 Use the LIM instruction to test for values within or outside a specified range depending on how you set the limits Entering Parameters The Low Limit Test and High Limit values can be word addresses or constants restricted to the following combinatio
333. he total cable distance from the first node to the last node on the network Appendix D Understanding the Communication Protocols Planning Cable Routes Follow these guidelines to help protect the communication cable from electrical interference Keep the communication cable at least 1 52 m 5 ft from any electric motors transformers rectifiers generators arc welders induction furnaces or sources of microwave radiation e If you must run the cable across power feed lines run the cable at right angles to the lines e Ifyou do not run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit keep the communication cable at least 0 15 m 6 in from ac power lines of less than 20A 0 30 m 1 ft from lines greater than 20A but only up to 100k VA and 0 60 m 2 ft from lines of 100k VA or more e Ifyou run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit keep the communication cable at least 0 08 m 3 in from ac power lines of less than 20A 0 15 m 6 in from lines greater than 20A but only up to 100k VA and 0 30 m 1 ft from lines of 100k VA or more Running the communication cable through conduit provides extra protection from physical damage and electrical interference If you route the cable through conduit follow these additional recommendations Use ferromagnetic conduit near critical sources of electrical interference You can use aluminum conduit in non critical areas Use plastic connec
334. hen the instruction is true 8 16 TOF 1 Timer Off Delay Counts timebase intervals when the instruction is false 8 18 RTO 2 Retentive Timer Counts timebase intervals when the instruction is true and retains the 8 20 accumulated value when the instruction goes false or when power cycle occurs CTU 5 Count Up Increments the accumulated value at each false to true transition and retains the 8 24 accumulated value when the instruction goes false or when power cycle occurs CTD 6 Count Down Decrements the accumulated value at each false to true transition and retains 8 25 the accumulated value when the instruction goes false or when power cycle occurs RES 7 Reset Resets the accumulated value and status bits of a timer or counter Do not use 8 27 with TOF timers About Basic Instructions Basic instructions are used most commonly for relay replacement functions counting and timing operations These instructions when used in Instruction List Boolean programs represent hardwired logic circuits used for the control of a machine or equipment The basic instructions are separated into four groups bit branch timer and counter Before you learn about the instructions in each of these groups we suggest that you read the overview that precedes the group e Bit Instructions Overview e Branch Instructions Overview e Timer Instructions Overview e Counter Instructions Overview Bit Instructions Overview Load LD And
335. his bit If this bit is set or reset editing the status file online the STI is not affected If this bit is set the bit allows execution of the STI If this bit is reset editing the status file offline the bit disallows execution of the STI S2 2 STI Executing Status When set this bit indicates that the STI timer has timed out and the STI subroutine is currently being executed This bit is cleared upon completion of the STI routine ladder program or REM Run or Test mode S2 3 to S2 4 Reserved NA NA 52 59 Incoming Command Pending Bit Valid for Series C discrete only Status This bit is set when the processor determines that another node on the network has requested information or supplied a command to it This bit can be set at any time This bitis cleared when the processor services the request or command Continued on next page Appendix B Programming Reference 2 6 Message Reply Status This bit is set when another node on the network has supplied Pending Bit the information you requested in the MSG instruction of your processor This bit is cleared when the processor stores the information and updates your MSG instruction 2 7 Outgoing Status This bit is set when one or more messages in your program Message are enabled and waiting but no message is being transmitted Command at the time As soon as transmission of a message begins the Pending Bit
336. his register to match the number of counts generated each Z reset FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 I T LD Rate Period Expiration Bit TO DN 0 10 MPS 81 SUB SRCA C0 ACC 0000H last timeout value storage register SRCB NO 0000H JA MRD Counts last rate measurement period DEST N1 0000H 22 AND If Negative Math Flag S0 3 0 57 LES AND LES Counts last rate measurement period SRCA N1 0000H SRCB 10 80 ADD SRCA N2 1000 Counts last rate measurement period SRCB N1 0000H Counts last rate measurement period DEST N1 0000H LA MRD 106 MOV SRC CO ACC 0000H last timeout value storage register DEST NO 0000H 11 MRD 83 DIV SRCA 100 SRCB TO PRE 10 Determine 1 second count ie of rate periods DEST C1 PRE 10 11 MRD 5 CTU Frequency determination counter CNTR Cl PRE 10 ACC 0000H 1A MRD 80 ADD Counts last rate measurement period SRCA N1 0000H Frequency calculation register SRCB N3 0000H Frequency calculation register DEST N3 0000H 12 MPP 22 f AND 1 second has now elapsed C1 DN E 45 Appendix E Application Example Programs E 46 85 82 84 42 GRAPHIC SYMBOL 2 Rung GRAPHIC SYMBOL MNEMONIC CLR RES MUL DDV RST MNEMONIC PARAMETER NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES Frequency calculation register SRC N3 0000H Frequency in Hertz DEST N4 0000H Frequency calculation register DEST N3 0000H Frequency determination counter cl Frequ
337. ified like other data bits Output word 4 holds the value of the analog output channel Chapter 7 Using Analog I O Configuration The analog input channels are single ended unipolar circuits and can be individually enabled or disabled The default is all input channels enabled The two voltage inputs accept 10 5V dc and the two current inputs accept 21 mA The analog output channel is also a single ended circuit You can configure either voltage OV dc to 10V dc or current 4 to 20 mA output operation The default is voltage output The output must be configured for either voltage or current not both This is determined by the output configuration When in the Run mode and the output is configured for voltage the voltage output terminal is active and the current output terminal is inactive Similarly when in the Run mode and the output is configured for current the current output terminal is active and the voltage output terminal is inactive When the system is not in Run mode both the voltage and current outputs are inactive Refer to page 18 14 for more information on how to configure the analog inputs and outputs with the MicroLogix 1000 HHP Input Filter and Update Times The MicroLogix analog input filter is programmable The slower the filter setting the more immune the analog inputs are to electrical noise The more immune the analog inputs are to electrical noise the slower the inputs are to update Similarly
338. ignal source so energy coupled to the shield is not delivered to the signal source s electronics 2 23 Connecting the HHP Connecting the System This chapter describes how to wire your controller system The method you use and cabling required to connect your controller depends on what type of system you are employing Specifically this chapter contains information on e connecting the HHP e DH 485 connections e establishing communication Important In order to access the functionality of the Series C or later discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers you must configure your program to operate with these controllers See page 18 18 for more information Use a serial cable to connect the MicroLogix 1000 HHPs RS 232 communication channel to the MicroLogix 1000 programmable controller as shown below ATTENTION Chassis ground user 24V ground and RS 232 ground are internally connected You must connect the chassis ground terminal screw to chassis ground prior to connecting any devices It is important that you understand your programming device s grounding system before connecting to the controller MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controller 1761 CBL HM02 aaa Hand Held P rogrammer Chapter 3 Connecting the System The 1761 CBL HMO2 Series B or higher cable with pinouts is shown below Use this cable to connect the MicroLogix 1000 HHP to the MicroLogix 1000 Pr
339. ile 2 Rung 0 Ensures that the measurement value is initialized each RRUN mode entry FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 I LD 1 st pass S1 15 0 106 MOV SRC C0 ACC 0000H last timeout value storage register DEST NO 0000H 7 RES co 85 CLR Counts last rate measurement period DEST N1 0000H 85 CLR Frequency in Hertz DEST N4 0000H 85 CLR RPM based on counts per turn register N7 2 DEST N5 0000H File 2 Rung 1 Sets the rate measurement period In this case we are calculating a new rate value once every 100ms Value N7 1 is updated once every 100ms with the number of counts that have occurred in the last 100ms period Note that the preset value must divide evenly into 100 in order to accurately determine frequency and RPM determined later in this program FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 21 l LDI Rate Period Expiration Bit TO DN 0 0 TON Counts last rate measurement period Rate Period Expiration Bit TIMR TO BASE 0 01 PRE 10 ACC 0000H Appendix E Application Example Programs File 2 Rung 2 Calculates and stores the number of counts that have occurred since the last time that it was executed as true in N7 1 last time last rate measurement timer T4 0 expiration The LES instruction allows for 10 counts of backlash to occur you can adjust as needed The add instruction is configured for a 1000 count encoder using N7 2 Change t
340. ile Types for Instruction P arameters Instruction Description Instruction Valid Addressing Valid File Types Valid Value Parameters Mode s Ranges FLL Fill File source direct 0 1 B T C R N 32 768 32 767 f min f max destination indexed direct 0 1 5 B T C R N Not Applicable element level length immediate 1 128 1 42 when destination is T C R FRD Convert from BCD source direct indexed direct 0 1 B 7 GR ot Applicable destination direct indexed direct 0 1 S B 7 C R ot Applicable GEQ Greater Than or Equal source A direct indexed direct 0 1 S B TCR ot Applicable source B immediate direct O I S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct f min f max GRT Greater Than source A direct indexed direct 0 1 5 B T C R N Not Applicable source B immediate direct 0 1 B TCR 32 768 32 767 indexed direct f min f max HSC High Speed Counter type immediate 0 7 where 0 up 1 up amp reset hold 2 pulse direction 3 pule direction amp reset hold 4 up down 5 up down amp reset hold 6 encoder 7 encoder amp reset hold counter direct 5 0 C5 1 Not Applicable element level preset contained in the 32 768 32 767 counter register accum contained in the 32 768 32 767 counter register HSD HSC Interrupt Disable counter direct ot Applicable HSE HSC Interrupt Enable counter direct ot Applicable HSL HSC Load counter direct
341. iming diagram has been updated see chapter 15 Using Communication Protocols e The MicroLogix 1000 programmable controllers VA ratings and power supply inrush specifications have been updated see appendix A Hardware Reference e The agency certification specifications have been updated see appendix A Hardware Reference e The analog output overall accuracy specification has been updated see appendix A Hardware Reference e The user interrupt latency information has been updated see appendix B Programming Reference e The DF1 Full Duplex and DH 485 configuration parameters have been updated see appendix D Understanding Communication Protocols soc i Compliance to European Union Directives Installing Your Controller This chapter shows you how to install your MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controller The only tools you require are a Flat head or Phillips head screwdriver and drill Topics include compliance to European Union Directives hardware overview master control relay surge suppressors safety considerations power considerations preventing excessive heat controller spacing mounting the controller If this product has the CE mark it is approved for installation within the European Union and EEA regions It has been designed and tested to meet the following directives EMC Directive This product is tested to meet Council Directive 89 336 EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC and the followi
342. in series with any previous input ae ene 63 instruction in the current rung or block ER is placed in parallel with any previous in CRI ot 4i put instruction in the current rung or block You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area The example below shows how to enter the LD GRT instruction Use the same procedure to enter the other GRT instructions only substitute the function code with one from the table above P000 HGRT SRCA N11 0 P000 HGRT SRCB 100 9 7 Chapter 9 Using Comparison Instructions Greater Than or Equal GEQ Ladder representation GEQ GRTR THAN OR EQUAL _ Source A N7 11 0 Source B 100 Execution Times usec when True False LDGEQ 23 60 6 60 AND GEQ 24 00 7 00 ORGEQ 24 00 7 00 To enter the function code press A GS Goole cy Use the GEQ instruction to test whether one value source A is greater than or equal to another source B If the value at source A is greater than or equal to the value of source B the instruction is logically true If the value at source A is less than the value of source B the instruction is logically false Source A must be a word address Source B can be either a constant or word address Negative integers are stored in two s complement form Entering the Instruction HHP Display Mnemonic ee Use This Instruction When the Input HGEQr LD GEQ 65 appears first on a rung or block i
343. ine The occurrence of recoverable or non recoverable user faults causes file 3 to be executed If the fault is recoverable the subroutine can be used to correct the problem and clear the fault bit 1 13 The controller then continues in the RRUN mode The subroutine does not execute for non user faults The user fault routine is discussed in chapter 7 Fault Code Chapter 20 Troubleshooting Your System Controller Fault Messages This section contains controller fault messages that the MicroLogix 1000 HHP may display during operation Refer to page B 9 for a listing of recoverable and non recoverable faults Hex Advisory Message Description Recommended Action 0001 DEFAULT LOADED The default program is loaded to 1 Re save or re load the the controller memory This program and enter the occurs ee on power up if the power down mode nceunted ithe middle ofa 2 Contact your local l program save or a memory Allen Bradley representative module load if the error persists e if the user program is corrupt at power up 0002 UNEXPECTED RESET The controller was unexpectedly 1 Refer to proper grounding reset due to a noisy environment guidelines in chapter 2 or internal hardware failure Ifthe 2 Contact your local user program previously saved in Allen Bradley representative the controller or loaded from the ifthe error persists memory module is valid the data previously saved in the controller or loaded fr
344. ing 1 DF1 Half Duplex Slave 0 13 to S0 15 Reserved NA NA S1 0 to 1 42 Controller Mode Status Control Status Bits 0 4 function as follows 0 0000 0 Remote Download in progress 0 0001 1 Remote Program mode 0 0011 3 Suspend Idle operation halted by SUS instruction execution 0 0110 6 Remote Run mode 0 0111 7 Remote Test continuous mode 0 1000 8 Remote Test single scan mode S15 Forces Enabled Status This bit is set by the controller 1 to indicate that forces are always enabled 51 6 Forces Installed Status This bit is set by the controller to indicate that forces have been set by the user S17 Comms Active Status This bit is set when the controller receives valid data from the communication port For DF1 protocols the bit is reset if the controller does not receive valid data from the programming port for 10 seconds Note In DF1 half duplex mode simple polls by the DF1 master or replies to received messages will not reset the timer A poll with a command is required to reset the timer For DH 485 the bitis resetas soon as the DH 485 link layer determines that no other devices are active on the link Application Note For DF1 half duplex you can use this bit to enable a timer via an XIO instruction to sense whether the DF1 master is actively communicating to the slave The preset of the timer is determined by the total network
345. ing the power supply to the AIC Bottom View 24VDC x DC NEUT CO ete CO GND ATTENTION Always connect the CHS GND chassis ground terminal to the nearest earth ground This connection must be made whether or not an external 24V dc supply is used In normal operation with the MicroLogix 1000 programmable controller connected to port 2 of the AIC the controller powers the AIC Any AIC not connected to a controller requires a 24V dc power supply The AIC requires 85 mA at 24V dc If both the controller and external power are connected to the AIC the power selection switch determines what device powers the AIC Power Options Below are two options for powering the AIC e Use the 24V dc user power supply 200 mA maximum built into the MicroLogix controller The AIC is powered through a hard wired connection using a communication cable 1761 CBL HM02 or equivalent connected to port 2 e Use an external DC power supply with the following specifications operating voltage 24V de 20 15 output current 120 mA minimum rated NEC Make a hard wired connection from the external supply to the screw terminals on the bottom of the AIC 3 11 Chapter 3 Connecting the System Establishing Communication 3 12 ATTENTION If you use an external power supply it must be 24V dc Permanent damage will result if miswired with the wrong powe
346. instruction indicates a negative less than 0 value after a math move 50 3 Sign S or logic instruction Overflow Trap Bit S5 0 Minor error bit S5 0 is set upon detection of a mathematical overflow or division by zero If this bit is set upon execution of an END statement or a Temporary End TND instruction the recoverable major error code 0020 is declared Chapter 10 Using Math Instructions In applications where a math overflow or divide by zero occurs you can avoid a controller fault by using an reset RST instruction with address S5 0 in your program The rung must be between the overflow point and the END or TND statement Changes to the Math Register S13 and S14 Status word 13 contains the east significant word of the 32 bit values of the MUL and DDV instructions It contains the remainder for DIV and DDV instructions It also contains the first four BCD digits for the Convert from BCD FRD and Convert to BCD TOD instructions Status word 14 contains the most significant word of the 32 bit values of the MUL and DDV instructions It contains the unrounded quotient for DIV and DDV instructions It also contains the most significant digit digit 5 for TOD and FRD instructions 10 3 Chapter 10 Using Math Instructions Add ADD Use the ADD instruction to add one value source A to another value source B and place the result in the destination Ladder representation
347. instructions 1 program so that each HSC instruction is in a Separate program 3018 UNMATCHED MCR S The program is missing Ensure that the program has a either a starting or starting and an ending MCR ending MCR instruction instruction or remove the MCR instruction if the application does not require it 3019 INVALID MCR The program s ending Rearrange the logic so the MCR is illegally placed MCR instruction is the only ona rung that contains instruction on a rung other instructions 301A INVALID FILE The file number specified Specify a program file between by aJ SR instruction is 3 and 15 outside the allowable range of program files 3 15 301B INVALID RES ARES instruction resets Change the RES or TOF a timer address address or remove one if the previously used by a application does not require it TOF instructions 301C INVALID TOF A TOF instruction Change the TOF or RES specifies a timer address address or remove one if the previously reset by a application does not require it RES instruction 301D INVALID LBL The same labelnumber Give the LBL instruction a is specified by more than one LBL instruction unique label number or remove the instruction if the application does not require it 20 7 Chapter 20 Troubleshooting Your System Using the Trace Feature Error Code Advisory Message Description Recommended Action Hex 301E INVALID J MP A J MP instruction Ensure tha
348. ions and CD ROM versions we now offer on line manuals with the most up to date information you can get We recommend that you read the related publications listed on the next page before starting up your control system P 3 Preface Related Publications For A description on how to install and use your MicroLogix 1000 Read this Document MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Document Number Programmable Controllers This manual also contains status file 1761 6 3 data and instruction set information Controllers User Manual A reference manual that contains the status file data and the aa instruction set information for the SLC 500 processors and SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1000 1747 6 15 MicroLogix 1000 controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual MicroLogix 1000 Programmable 1761 5 1 2 Information on mounting and wiring the MicroLogix 1000 Controllers Installation Instructions controllers including a mounting template for easy installation MicroLogix 1000 Analog Programmable 1761 513 Controllers Installation Instructions k Advanced Interface Converter AIC and T procedures necessary to install and connect the AIC and DeviceNet Interface DNI Installation 1761 511 Instructions A description on how to install and connect an AIC This Advanced Interface Converter AIC User 1761 6 4 manual also contains information on network wiring Manual Information on how to install configure and co
349. ipper grab part N7 4 Od Low Preset home position when encoder triggers Z reset FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 LD Home Position Reached CO LP 0 24 leak Lt OR First Pass Bit 1 15 0 171 HSL CNTR CO SRC NO LEN 5 File 2 Rung 5 Starts up the high speed counter with the above parameters Each time this rung is evaluated the hardware accumulator is written to C5 0 ACC FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 170 HSC TYPE Encoder Res H1d CNTR CO PRE 100 ACC 2 File 2 Rung 6 When the pick and place head reaches either its home position to pick up a part or its destination bin to drop off a part start up a dwell timer The purpose of this is to keep the head stationary long enough for the gripper to either grab or release the part FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 gt LD Bin Location Reached CO HP 24 l T OR Home Position Reached CO LP 0 0 TON Dwell Timr TIMR TO BASE 0 01 PRE 100 ACC 100 Appendix E Application Example Programs File 2 Rung 7 When the pick and place head is positioned over the proper bin turn off the forward motor At the same time the high speed counter tells the gripper to release the part and start the dwell timer After the dwell time has expired start up the reverse motor to send the head back to its home position to pick up another part FUN GRAPHIC P
350. iption The DH 485 protocol defines the communication between multiple devices that co exist on a single pair of wires This protocol uses RS 485 half duplex as its physical interface RS 485 is a definition of electrical characteristics it is not a protocol RS 485 uses devices that are capable of co existing on a common data circuit thus allowing data to be easily shared between devices The DH 485 network offers interconnection of 32 devices multi master capability token passing access control the ability to add or remove nodes without disrupting the network maximum network length of 1219 m 4000 ft The DH 485 protocol supports two classes of devices initiators and responders All initiators on the network get a chance to initiate message transfers To determine which initiator has the right to transmit a token passing algorithm is used The following section describes the protocol used to control message transfers on the DH 485 network DH 485 Token Rotation A node holding the token can send any valid packet onto the network Each node is allowed only one transmission plus two retries each time it receives the token After a node sends one message packet it attempts to give the token to its successor by sending a token pass packet to its successor If no network activity occurs the initiator sends the token pass packet again After two retries a total of three tries the initiator attempts to find a new succes
351. ire instruction is entered if you want to edit the instruction s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode See page 17 4 Equal EQU Ladder representation EQU EQUAL _ Source A N7 11 0 Source B 100 Execution Times usec when True False LDEQU 21 52 6 60 AND EQU 21 92 7 00 OREQU 21 92 7 00 Chapter 9 Using Comparison Instructions Function Codes Each comparison instruction has three function codes associated with it The code that you use correlates to the way the instruction is used on the rung as described in the table below then use the code for LD lt instruction gt AND lt instruction gt OR lt instruction gt If the instruction is the first instruction on the rung or block in series with another instruction in parallel with another instruction Since there are three codes for each instruction you do not press a separate key to enter the action the instruction should take i e You do not press the LD instruction key and then enter a function code for EQU to get LD EQU Using Indexed Word Addresses When using comparison instructions you have the option of using indexed word addresses for instruction parameters specifying word addresses Indexed addressing is discussed in chapter 6 Use the EQU instruction to test whether two values are equal If source A and source B are equal the instruction is logically true If these values are not equal th
352. is active NOTE If DF1 was the protocol used by the message instruction use S2 0 11 for the preceding logic DH 485 Active Write Message Ins 5230 a a e a 3 Read Write Message EN 11 Read Write Write DN Target Device 500CPU ER Control Block N7 50 Control Block Length T Setup Screen 4 Rung 2 3 This rung monitors the message instruction for Done conditions When the message is done the enable bit is cleared allowing communication to run again The error retry bit is also used to reset the message if an error or lockup condition is encountered Write Message Write Message Done Enabled N7 50 N7 50 SS RSS SsessSss4s45 Se U 13 15 Message Error Retry Timer T4 9 ee ee DN Rung 2 4 SS Sa Sa Se Se Se a Se Se a ee END 15 13 Chapter 15 Using Communication Protocols 15 14 Example 2 Continuously Reading Data from a MicroLogix Controller In this example a communication link is created between two Series C or higher MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers where one controller is reading data from another The communication link is set up for continuous operation with automatic recovery Performance in logic is as fast as possible with the primary restriction being the communication link protocol DH 485 or DF1 full duplex and the baud rate Although the DH 485 protoco
353. is executed in the user program An explanation of how the math register operates is included with the instruction definitions If you store 32 bit signed data values you must manage this data type without the aid of an assigned 32 bit data type For example combine B3 0 and B3 1 to create a 32 bit signed data value We recommend that you start all 32 bit values on an even or odd word boundary for ease of application and viewing Also we recommend that you design document and view the contents of 32 bit signed data in either the hexadecimal or binary radix When an STI high speed counter or Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of the math register is restored when execution resumes S15L DF1 Node Address Status This byte value contains the node address of your processor on the DF1 link It is used when executing Message MSG instructions over the DF 1 link The default node address of a processor is 1 Valid node addresses are 0 254 To change a processor node address you must use a programming device S15H DF1 Baud Rate Status This byte value contains a code used to select the baud rate of the processor on the DF1 link The controller baud rate options are e 300 e 600 e 1200 e 2400 4800 MicroLogix 1000 Series D or later discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog only 9600 default 19200 38400 MicroLogix 1000 Series D or later discrete and all
354. is reached Use the HSD and HSE in pairs to provide accurate execution for your application Ladder representation Hsk The Counter referenced by these instructions has the same address as the ase INTERRUPT ENABLE HSC instruction counter and is fixed at CO COUNTER c5 0 HSD HSC INTERRUPT DISABLE COUNTER c5 0 Execution Times usec when True False HSE 10 00 7 00 Using HSE HSD 8 00 7 00 Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To enter the function code poos HSE cNTR NTR 14 21 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions To enter the function code press P008 HSD CNTR e e ee Leos 14 22 Operation When the high speed counter interrupt is enabled user subroutine file 4 is executed when e A high or low preset is reached e An overflow or underflow occurs When in RSSN mode and in an idle condition the high speed counter interrupt is held off until the next scan trigger is received from the programming device The high speed counter accumulator counts while idle If the HSE is subsequently executed after the pending bit is set the interrupt is executed immediately The default state of the high speed counter interrupt is enabled the IE bit is set to 1 If the high speed counter interrupt routine is executing and another high speed counter interrupt occurs the second high
355. is turned off to indicate the drilling process is complete and the conveyor is restarted Deil Drill prill Home LS Retract Retract Ieg 0 0 0 0 oe Wea UE aac a And a Ue t 5 2 2 Drill Sequence Start Conveyor Start Stop Appendix E Application Example Programs Rung 7 0 Examines the number of 1 4 in thousands that have accumulated over the life of the current drill bit If the bit has drilled between 100 000 101 999 1 4 in increments of paper the change drill light illuminates steadily When the value is between 102 000 103 999 the change drill light flashes at a 1 28 second rate When the value reaches 105 000 the change drill light flashes and the change drill now light illuminates 1 4 in 00 000 Thousands 4 in increments have occurred GEQ B3 GRIER THAN OR HOQUALAS S S S 5 S535 35 3334 33 555 S s Source A N7 211 16 0 Source B 100 4 1 4 in 102 000 Thousands 1 4 in increments have occurred GEQ B3 GRTR THAN OR EMALT A S Cj Source A N7 11 17 0 Source B 102 4 TJA ain change Thousands arid bit NOW O GEQ 0 0 GRTR THAN OR EQUAL Source A N7 11 6 0 Source B 105 4 100 000 102 000 change 1 4 in 1 4 in dri
356. ister S13 The destination must be a word address Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S0 0 Carry C always resets sets if non BCD value is contained atthe source or the S0 1 Overflow V value to be converted is greater than 32 767 otherwise reset On overflow the minor error flag is also set S0 2 Zero Z sets if destination value is zero 0 3 Sign S always resets Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area As you enter the instruction you can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key lt Then if you want to edit that operand press DEL or FUN DEL and enter new parameters Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one Once the entire instruction is entered if you want to edit the instruction s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode See page 17 4 11 3 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions To enter the function code press AN P000 FRD DEST N12 o P000 FRD Important Always provide filtering of all BCD input devices prior to performing the FRD instruction The slightest difference in point to point input filter delay can cause the FRD instruction to overflow due to the conversion of a non BCD digit Example 1 In the following example the two rungs cause the controller to verify that the value IO remains the same for two consecutive scans
357. isting B 16 worksheet B 21 INT Interrupt Subroutine 13 19 integer file N 6 4 interrupt latency B 20 STI 13 15 user B 20 interrupt priorities 13 16 Interrupt Subroutine INT 13 19 entering the instruction 13 19 execution times 13 19 function code 13 19 instruction parameters C 6 ladder representation 13 19 valid addressing modes C 6 valid file types C 6 IOM Immediate Output with Mask 12 9 isolated link coupler installing 3 3 J J MP Jump 12 2 JSR ump to Subroutine 12 3 Jump J MP 12 2 entering parameters 12 2 entering the instruction 12 2 execution times 12 2 function code 12 2 instruction parameters C 6 ladder representation 12 2 using 12 2 valid addressing modes C 6 valid file types C 6 Jump to Subroutine J SR 12 3 entering the instruction 12 4 execution times 12 3 function code 12 4 instruction parameters C 6 ladder representation 12 3 nesting subroutine files 12 4 using 12 4 valid addressing modes C 6 valid file types C 6 K keys accessing additional characters 4 5 context sensitivity 4 4 diagnostic troubleshooting keys 4 4 general editing keys 4 4 instruction keys 4 4 navigation keys 4 4 short cut keys for monitoring data table files 18 27 for monitoring program files 18 26 for selecting the language 4 18 keys you use HHP 4 4 L Label LBL 12 2 entering parameters 12 2 entering the instruction 12 3 execution time
358. it Mode Number Instruction Force Indication Address Data Value Section Description The current mode of the controller is displayed in abbreviated form where P RPRG R RRUN T RCSN orRSSN S RSUS and F FLT Ifthe controller is in RPRG you can utilize the editing modes as well where P append and O overwrite The mode will flash when Controller E dit Mode edits exist Rung Number The rung number currently being viewed is displayed Instruction The instruction currently being viewed is displayed Address The address currently being viewed Indicates that the bit currently being viewed is being forced Force Indication X N if forced on and x F if forced off If no force exists this field is blank Data Value The data value of the address is shown here 4 11 Chapter 4 Using Your Hand Held Programmer ej How to Complete Tasks Monitor You complete tasks by pressing the appropriate key or key sequence from the program monitor screen From Program Monitor you can p access these areas To Press Menu Mode access the menu options MENU Data Monitor l Multi P oint Function change the controller s mode See page MODE 18 23 O access the multi point functional area See MT PT page 18 31 B add a bit address to the next available r 7 location in the multi point list See page FUN fez 18 32 B execute the trace feature See page 20 8 D gt D m delete program
359. ix 18 30 remote controller modes 18 21 18 23 the baud rate 19 6 19 7 the HHP s defaults 4 17 the language 4 17 the LCD display contrast 4 18 the program defaults 18 1 controller version 18 18 extended I O configuration bit 18 8 fault override bit 18 7 input filters 18 12 18 14 18 15 18 16 lock program function 18 17 program name 18 2 run always bit 18 5 start up protection bit 18 6 STI enabled bit 18 10 STI setpoint 18 9 user and master passwords 18 2 watchdog scan 18 11 channel configuration DF 1 full duplex D 2 DF 1 half duplex slave D 5 Clear CLR 10 11 entering the instruction 10 11 execution times 10 11 function code 10 11 instruction parameters C 3 ladder representative 10 11 updates to arithmetic status bits 10 11 valid addressing modes C 3 valid file types C 3 clearing a program from a memory module 1 from the controller 5 2 1 clearing faults 20 12 CLR Clear 10 11 common procedures 19 1 communication DeviceNet 3 13 establishing with controller 3 12 3 13 19 7 types of 15 1 communication protocols DF 1 full duplex D 2 DF 1 half duplex slave D 4 DH 485 D 9 comparison instructions 9 1 about 9 2 Equal EQU 9 3 9 5 9 6 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual Greater Than GRT 9 7 Greater Than or Equal GEQ 9 8 Less Than LES 9 5 Less Than or Equal LEQ 9 6 Limit Test LIM 9 10 Masked Compariso
360. join it with the input logic on the rung with an previous input logic on ANB or ORB the rung 3004 INVALID RUNG An MPP is missing from Add an MPP at the proper the rung location 3005 INVALID ORB An ORB instruction is Move the ORB to the correct illegally positioned on the location on the rung or remove rung it if the application does not require it 3006 INVALID ANB An ANB instruction is Move the ANB to the correct illegally positioned on the location on the rung or remove rung it if the application does not require it 3007 INVALID ORB OR The position of an OR or Review and rewrite the ORB instruction after an instruction list logic Two rungs MPS MRD or MPP may be required to implement instruction has created the desired functionality an illegal rung 20 5 Chapter 20 Troubleshooting Your System 20 6 referencing an address outside of the data table space Error Code Advisory Message Description Recommended Action Hex 3008 INVALID MRD MPP MRD and or MPP Ensure that each MRD and instructions are not MPP instruction is preceded by preceded by an output an output instruction or remove instruction them if the application does not require them 3009 INVALID MRD MPS An MRD instruction is Ensure that the MRD instruction used illegally is preceded by an MPS instruction or remove the MRD if the application does not require it
361. l contact Also do not expose memory modules to surfaces or areas that may typically hold an electrostatic charge Electrostatic charges can alter or destroy memory To insert a memory module use the following procedure 1 If the MicroLogix 1000 HHP is connected to the controller remove the cable from the HHP or turn off power to the controller 2 Remove the memory module door 3 Locate the socket on the processor board Place the memory module onto the socket and press firmly in place 4 Replace the memory module door 5 If the MicroLogix 1000 HHP was connected to the controller reconnect the cable to the HHP or restore power to the controller 4 3 Chapter 4 Using Your Hand Held Programmer The Keys You Use 4 4 When using the MicroLogix 1000 HHP you will be pressing individual keys and key sequences for the purposes identified in the illustration below Details about individual key functions and key sequences are provided in this manual at their point of use an Diagnostic troubleshooting keys Allow you to get your system running and keep it running Instruction keys Allow you to enter all of your program s instructions General editing keys Allow you to make changes in a snap OBBE Navigation keys Allow you to move through the entire program quickly and easily Understanding the Keys Context Sensitivity I
362. l is demonstrated here this example can be used with either DH 485 or DF1 protocols To run this on DF1 you would only need to change the active protocol bit rung 2 2 the default primary protocol bit S2 0 10 in the status file and the message instruction variables For maximum possible communication performance throughput select DF1 full duplex running at 38 4k baud Rung 2 0 This rung monitors the read message instruction for errors or lockup conditions and restarts communication whenever the link becomes valid Lockup conditions are situations that may arise if the communication path is somehow corrupted Some examples would be power lost at destination device or a cut cable Error conditions are typically caused from noise on the communication link faulty device s on the network etc Read Message Message Error Message Retry Timer No Response Retry Timer N7 60 T4 9 TON Shoo I aSaoa S ao5 a lf TIMER ON DELAY EN 9 DN Timer T4 9 DN Read Message Time Base 0 011 Error Preset 100 lt N7 60 Accum 0 lt 4 12 Read Message Start N7 60 aaa 14 Rung 2 1 The Time Out bit TO associated with each message instruction is used to clear the controllers communication buffer and message instruction Setting these bits basically places the controllers communication section in the same condition as when the controller
363. laimed the token tries to pass the token to the successor node If the attempt to pass the token fails or if the initiator has no established successor for example when it powers up it begins a linear search for a successor starting with the node above it in the addressing When the initiator finds another active initiator it passes the token to that node which repeats the process until the token is passed all the way around the network to the first node At this point the network is in a state of normal operation Devices that use the DH 485 Network In addition to the Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers the devices shown in the following table also support the DH 485 network Important You cannot connect the Hand Held Programmer 1761 HHP B30 to the AIC Appendix D Understanding the Communication Protocols Catalo von instalation g Description Function Publication Number Requirement 1747 L511 L514 L524 L531 L532 SLC 500 SLE Chassis These processors support a variety of I O 1747 62 L541 Processors requirements and functionality L542 L543 L551 L552 L553 Provides an interface for SLC 500 devices to foreign devices Program in BASIC to 1746 6 1 1746 BAS BASIC Module SLC Chassis interface the 3 channels 2 RS232 and 1 1746 6 2 DH 485 to printers modems or the DH 485 1746 6 3 network
364. lave on a Multi drop Link When communication is between either your programming software and a MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controller or between two MicroLogix Programmable Controllers via a slave to slave connection on a larger multi drop link the devices depend on a DF1 Master to give each of them polling permission to transmit in a timely manner As the number of slaves increases on the link up to 254 the time between when your programming software or the MicroLogix Controller is polled also increases This increase in time may become larger if you are using low baud rates As these time periods grow the following values may need to be changed to avoid loss of communication e programming software increase poll timeout and reply timeout values e MicroLogix Programmable Controller increase poll timeout Ownership Timeout When a program download sequence is started by a software package to download a ladder logic program to a MicroLogix controller the software takes file ownership of the processor File ownership prevents other devices from reading from or writing to the processor while the download is in process If the controller were to respond to a device s read commands during the download the processor could respond with incorrect information Similarly if the controller were to accept information from other devices the information could be lost because the program download sequence could immediately overwrite the i
365. ld Count NA NA Off NA False Hold Count NA NA Off On NA Hold Count Off Off On NA NA Reset to 0 NA Not Applicable The optional hardware high speed counter reset is the logical coincidence of A x B x Z High Speed Counter Load HSL Ladder representation HSL HSC LOAD g Counter c5 0 CU Source N7 5 Length 5 DN Execution Times usec when True False 66 00 7 00 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions This instruction allows you to set the low and high presets low and high output source and the output mask When either a high or low preset is reached you can instantly update selected outputs If you are using the HSL instruction with the Up Counter the high preset must be 1 and lt 32 767 or an error 37H occurs For the bidirectional counters the high preset must be greater than the low preset or an error 37H occurs The Counter referenced by this instruction has the same address as the HSC instruction counter and is fixed at CO Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Source is an address that identifies the first of five data words used by the HSL The source can be either an integer or binary file element e Length is the number of elements starting from the source This number is always 5 Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area Th
366. le The controller s operating cycle consists of a series of operations performed sequentially and repeatedly unless altered by your program logic overhead service comms program scan Operating Cycle 1 input scan the time required for the controller to scan and read all input data typically accomplished within Useconds 2 program scan the time required for the controller to execute the instructions in the program The program scan time varies depending on the instructions used and each instruction s status during the scan time Important Subroutine and interrupt instructions within your logic program may cause deviations in the way the operating cycle is sequenced 3 output scan the time required for the controller to scan and write all output data typically accomplished within seconds 4 service communications the part of the operating cycle in which communication takes place with other devices such as a MicroLogix 1000 HHP or a personal computer 5 housekeeping and overhead time spent on memory management and updating timers and internal registers Understanding File Organization Chapter 6 Programming Overview The micro controller provides control through the use of a program Most of the operations you perform with the MicroLogix 1000 HHP involve the pr
367. le of Contents MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual Preface Who Should Use this Manual 0 ccc cece cee eee eens P 1 Purpose ofthis Manual sc 5 lt 0 au wwawee we dew eee a ews shaw ea wee eae es P 1 Common Techniques Used in this Manual ccc eee eee tenes P 5 Allen Bradley Support sin lt dusavet1 b geen ech tadew end eeGen eds es P 6 Hardware Chapter 1 Compliance to European Union Directives ccc cece eee eee 1 1 Hardware QUGINICW ecirrrseicerse vird tak eeahcuawebas Seaweed 1 2 Master Contol Relay aenda thay beunta e wp dha Gal aie dite 1 3 Using Surge SUD DESSOIS 1 5s dee Soeks veesageu deen eee bewaw agen 1 7 Safety COnsiderati ns cri dundwins ubdwer dian ements duniued seuss 1 9 Power Considerations v250c0s cia bakes CUdwaea Gia eeeRs Cid beeaw a 1 10 Preventing Excessive Heat ec cee tee teeta 1 11 Controller Spacing ss idciceeeddaadeeintaee aa bdatreeeaadaad saan 1 12 Mounting the Controller cece cece ete ee teen eens 1 12 Chapter 2 Grounding Guidelines cece eects 2 1 Sinking and Sourcing Circuits 0 cece eee eee eee 2 2 Wiring Recommendations 0c cece eect eee eee e eens 2 3 Wiring Diagrams Discrete Input and Output Voltage Ranges 2 6 Minimizing Electrical Noise on Analog Controllers 005 2 20 Grounding Your Analog Cables acs ane dees eaee sabes eee tewss aber as 2 20 Wiring Your Analog Channels cos0deasad0s
368. led or disabled and select it gt 6 Enter to store the selected setting and advance to the next channel screen ENT 7 Scroll up down to move to the previous next channel screen without storing the setting 8 Escape to return to the to the ANALOG CONFIG submenu without storing the current setting ESC 18 15 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program 18 16 Configuring the Analog Output The analog controller s output channel can be configured to support either current or voltage operation To configure the analog output 1 Put the controller in RPRG mode if it is not already in that mode 2 Access the program configuration menu enr 3 Arrow up to the option ANALOG CONFIG and select it enr Note The function is only available when the Micro Term is attached to an analog controller 6 times 2 times FILTER SETTI NG gt OUTPUT CONFIG 4 Arrow up to the option OUTPUT CONFIG and select it enr 5 Arrow up down to move between the two settings 0 10V or 4 20 mA 1 time G DA 6 Enter to store the selected setting and return to the ANALOG CONFIG submenu ENT 7 Escape to return to the to ANALOG CONFIG submenu without storing the current setting ESC Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program Setting the Lock Program Function This option allows you to prevent proprietary algorithms from being viewed on the display or from
369. leshooting Entering Parameters Enter a suspend ID number from 32 768 to 32 767 when you program the instruction Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area Asterisks appear on the display to indicate that the HHP is waiting for data entry i e a number 12 7 Chapter 12 Using Program Flow Control Instructions Immediate Input with Mask Ladder representation IIM IMMEDIATE INPUT w MASK Slot I 0 0 Mask 000B Execution Times usec when True False 35 72 6 78 This instruction allows you to update data prior to the normal input scan Data from a specified input is transferred through a mask to the input data file making the data available to instructions following the IIM instruction in the ladder program For the mask a in an input s bit position passes data from the source to the destination A 0 inhibits data from passing from the source to the destination Entering Parameters For all micro controllers specify I0 For 16 I O controllers 10 0 9 are valid and 10 10 15 are considered unused inputs they do not physically exist For 32 I O controllers 10 0O 15 and I1 0 3 are valid Specify I1 if you want to immediately update the last four input bits Mask Specify a Hex constant or register address Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area The follo
370. licable Maximum Off State 2 mA 132V ac Leakage 0 mA LmA 4 5 mA 264V ac Current Off to On 8 8 ms 60 Hz Response 10 ms max 0 1 ms 10 6 ms 50 Hz On to Off Response 10 ms max 1 ms 11 0 ms Surge Current Not Applicable 4A for 10 ms 10A for 25 ms per Point Repeatability is once every 2 seconds at 55 C 131 F Relay Contact Rating Table applies to all Bulletin 1761 controllers Amperes Voltamperes Maximum Volts Amperes Continuous Make Break Make Break 240V ac 7 5A 0 75A 2 5A 1800 VA 180 VA 120V ac 15A 1 5A 125V dc 0 22A 1 0A 28 VA 24V dc 1 2A 2 0A 28 VA For dc voltage applications the make break ampere rating for relay contacts can be determined by dividing 28 VA by the applied dc voltage For example 28 VA 48V dc 0 58A For dc voltage applications less than 48V the make break ratings for relay contacts cannot exceed 2A For dc voltage applications greater than 48V the make break ratings for relay contacts cannot exceed 1A Appendix A Hardware Reference Analog Input Specifications Description Voltage Input Range Specification 10 5 to 10 5V dc 1LSB Current Input Range 21 to 21 mA 1LSB Type of Data 16 bit signed integer Input Coding 21 to 21 mA 1LSB 10 5 to 10 5V dc 1LSB 32 768 to 32 767 Voltage Input Impedance 210K Q Current Input Impedance 1600 Input Resolution 16 bit N
371. lid addressing modes C 10 valid file types C 10 executing the ladder program changing to Run mode 5 7 execution times listing B 16 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual worksheet B 21 extended I O configuration bit setting 18 8 F fault messages 20 13 fault override bit setting 18 7 fault recovery procedure 20 11 20 12 fault routine 20 12 FFL FIFO Load 11 25 FFU FIFO Unload 11 25 FIFO and LIFO instructions FIFO Load FFL 11 25 FIFO Unload FFU 11 25 LIFO Load LFL 11 28 LIFO Unload LFU 11 28 overview 11 23 effects on index register S24 11 24 entering parameters 11 23 entering the instructions 11 24 FIFO Load FFL 11 25 entering the instruction 11 25 execution times 11 25 function code 11 25 instruction parameters C 4 ladder representation 11 25 11 28 operation 11 26 valid addressing modes C 4 valid file types C 4 FIFO Unload FFU 11 25 entering the instruction 11 26 execution times 11 25 function code 11 26 instruction parameters C 4 ladder representation 11 25 11 28 operation 11 26 valid addressing modes C 4 valid file types C 4 file indicator 6 10 file organization compared to the programming software s file organization 6 3 data files 6 4 program 6 3 program files 6 4 file types C 1 F 1 Fill File FLL 11 10 entering parameters 11 12 entering the instruction 11 12 execution times 11
372. limiters include the slash and period 6 7 Chapter 6 Programming Overview Specifying Logical Addresses You assign logical addresses to instructions from the highest level element to the lowest level bit Addressing examples are shown in the table below To specify the address of a Use these parameters o Word within an integer file N 2 File Type Word Number T T ACC File Type Structure Number Delimiter Word within a structure file Word Bit within an integer file N 2 5 File Type Word Number Bit Delimiter Bit Number Bit within a bit file B 31 File Type Bit Delimiter Bit Number Bit files are bit stream continuous files there fore you can address them in two ways by bit alone B 31 or by word and bit B1 5 Bit within a structure file R 7 DN File Type tl Structure Number Delimiter Mnemonic The addressing parameters required when using the MicroLogix 1000 HHP differ slightly from those required when using programming software You must address at the bit level using mnemonics for timer counter or control data types The available mnemonics depend on the type of data See chapters 8 through 14 for more information Chapter 6 Programming Overview Specifying Indexed Addresses The indexed address symbol is the character which is placed immediately before the file type identifier in a logical address You can use mo
373. ling instructions this section provides the Paper Drilling Machine ladder rungs followed by the optimized instruction list for these rungs The Application Exam ple rungs are part of the paper drilling machine application example described in appendix E You will be adding to the subroutine in file 7 that was started in chapter 9 Ladder Rungs Rung 7 20 Moves the single digit BCD thumbwheel value into an internal integer register This is done to properly align the four BCD input signals prior to executing the BCD to Integer instruction FRD The thumbwheel is used to allow the operator to enter the thickness of the paper that is to be drilled The thickness is entered in 1 4 in increments This provides a range of 1 4 in to 2 25 in BCD bit 0 FRD bit 0 0 N7 14 tt er eres a rere ae 1 0 BCD bit 1 FRD bit 1 20 N7 14 2 1 BCD bit 2 FRD bit 2 20 N7 14 Ss j a eee 3 2 BCD bit 3 FRD bit 3 20 N7 14 foes 4 3 Rung 7 3 Converts the BCD thumbwheel value from BCD to integer This is done because the controller operates upon integer values This rung also debounces the thumbwheel to ensure that the conversion only occurs on valid BCD values Note that invalid BCD values can occur while the operator is changing the BCD thumbwheel This is due to input filter propagation delay differences between the four input circuits that provide the BCD input valu
374. ll increments increments bit have Ihave soon occurred occurred B3 B3 0 0 eS J SSS SSSS gt Z aaae a F 16 17 4 100 000 102 000 1 28 1 4 in 1 4 in second increments increments free have Ihave I running occurred occurred clock bit B3 B3 S 4 aS SS SSS SS eS SSsSs5 TON ss F 16 17 F This branch accesses 1 0 only available with 32 1 0 controllers Therefore do not include this branch if you are using a 16 1 0 controller E 10 Appendix E Application Example Programs Rung 7 1 Resets the number of 1 4 in increments and the 1 4 in thousands when the drill change reset keyswitch is energized This should occur following each drill bit change drill change 1 4 in reset keyswitch Thousands I0 POUR es 35 54 55555 eten Arae a CLEAR pae 8 Dest Neti Oo tose seaesoseseross 1 4 in increments i HELRaS Sa SaaS Sa aes 5 CLEAR O an i Dest N7 10 ol 4 Rung 732 Moves the single digit BCD thumbwheel value into an internal integer register This is done to properly align the four BCD input signals prior to executing the BCD to Integer instruction FRD The thumbwheel is used to allow the operator to enter the thickness of the paper that is to be drilled The thickness is entered in 1 4 in increments This provides a range of 1 4 in to 2 25 in BCD bit 0 FRD bit 0 0 N7
375. low preset reached FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 I LD interrupt occurred due to low preset reached CO IL 134 RET File 4 Rung 6 Signals the main program file 2 to initiate a drilling sequence The high speed counter has already stopped the conveyor at the correct position using its high preset output pattern data clear 0 0 0 This occurred within microseconds of the high preset being reached just prior to entering this high speed counter interrupt subroutine The drill sequence subroutine resets the drill sequence start bit and sets the conveyor drive bit 0 0 0 upon completion of the drilling sequence FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 ear ie LD interrupt occurred due to hi preset reached CO TH 0 41 L SET Drill Sequence Start B 32 0 Using Communication Protocols This chapter contains information about communication and the message MSG instruction Specifically this chapter contains information on e types of communication what the MSG instruction symbol looks like typical execution time for the MSG instruction how to use the MSG instruction application examples and timing diagrams Important Only Series B or later MicroLogix 1000 HHPs and Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 controllers support the MSG instruction Only Series C MicroLogix 1000 HHPs fully support Series D functionality Only Series C MicroLogix 1000 H
376. m Miscellaneous Error Messages Error Code Advisory Message Description Recommended Action Hex 2000 NO RESPONSE A communication error Disconnect the HHP from the occurred between the micro controller then reconnect HHP and the micro it If the error persists record controller the error code and contact your local Allen Bradley representative 2001 INVALID DEVICE The device that the HHP Make sure your HHP is is attached to is telling connected to a micro controller the HHP that itis nota If the error persists record the micro controller error code and contact your local Allen Bradley representative Program Verification Error Messages Error Code Advisory Message Description Recommended Action Hex 3000 MISSING SOR The rung does not begin Add a start of rung instruction to with a start of rung the beginning of the rung using instruction the NEW RUNG key 3001 INVALID INPUT The first input instruction Change the input instruction on the rung is nota load immediately after the Start of instruction e g LD LDI Rung instruction to a load LD EQU instruction 3002 MISSING OUTPUT The rung does not end Add the appropriate output with an output instruction to the end of the instruction rung 3003 INVALID RUNG An instruction or Check that all instructions or instruction block needs instruction blocks have been an ANB or ORB to properly joined to the previous properly
377. m the data monitor functional area If the address entered or displayed is a n Then the search finds either word or bit instructions depending output input bit or integer address onthe current radix integers and hexadecimal radixes find word addresses while binary radixes find bit addresses timer counter or control address any bit instructions or parameters of word instructions referencing that Timer Counter or Control element Status file address either word or bit instructions depending on the level currently displayed 17 9 Changing the Program Configuration Defaults After You ve Entered Your Program This chapter shows you the procedures for changing the program configuration defaults accepting your program edits changing processor modes monitoring your controller viewing data table files using the multi point function forcing inputs and outputs Every default MICRO program is configured with the settings shown in the table below The table shows the default program configuration settings and indicates whether you need to save your program for the configuration changes to take affect Must Save Program Program Configuration Default Setting for Change to Take See Page Affect Program Name ICRO Yes 18 2 User Password No password No 18 2 Master Password No password No 18 2 Run Always No Yes 18 5 Start Up Protection No Yes 18
378. med Enable STE 13 17 entering the instruction 13 17 example 13 17 execution times 13 17 function code 13 17 instruction parameters C 9 ladder representation 13 17 using 13 17 valid addressing modes C 9 valid file types C 9 Selectable Timed Interrupt STI function basic programming procedure 13 15 Interrupt Subroutine INT 13 19 operation 13 15 interrupt latency and interrupt occurrences 13 16 interrupt priorities 13 16 status file data saved 13 16 Subroutine content 13 15 overview 13 15 Selectable Timed Disable STD 13 17 Selectable Timed Enable STE 13 17 Selectable Timed Start STS 13 18 STD STE zone example 13 17 Selectable Timed Start STS 13 18 entering the instruction 13 19 execution times 13 18 function code 13 19 instruction parameters C 10 ladder representative 13 18 valid addressing modes C 10 valid file types C 10 Selecting Surge Suppressors 1 7 selecting the language using short cut keys 4 18 using the menu option 4 17 Sequencer Compare SQC 13 6 entering parameters 13 6 entering the instruction 13 10 execution times 13 6 function code 13 10 instruction parameters C 9 ladder representation 13 6 operation 13 11 using 13 10 valid addressing modes C 9 valid file types C 9 Sequencer instructions overview 13 6 effects on index register S 24 13 6 entering the instructions 13 6 Sequencer Compare SQC 13 6 Sequencer Load SQL 13 12 Sequ
379. mediate Input with Mask IIM 12 8 Immediate Output with Mask IOM 12 9 in the paper drilling machine application example 12 10 Jump J MP 12 2 Jump to Subroutine J SR 12 3 Label LBL 12 2 Master Control Reset MCR 12 6 Return RET 12 3 Subroutine SBR 12 3 Suspend SUS 12 7 Temporary End TND 12 7 program logic applying to your schematics 6 11 instruction list programming 6 16 ladder logic 6 16 developing your logic program 6 17 instruction list 6 15 ladder logic basics connecting blocks of logic 6 14 input branching 6 13 nested branching 6 14 output branching 6 13 parallel connections 6 12 series connections 6 12 program mode changing to 5 2 program monitor description 4 11 entering 17 1 how to complete tasks 4 12 screen definitions 17 1 End of File screen 17 2 First Instruction on Rung screen 17 2 Start of File screen 17 1 Start of Rung screen 17 2 typical bit instruction screen 4 11 program name entering 18 2 programming considerations 16 8 programming device features 4 2 programming overview 6 1 protection methods for contacts 1 7 publications related P 5 Q quadrature encoder input 14 12 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual R RAC High Speed Counter Reset Accumulator 14 20 radix changing 18 30 RC network example 1 8 recovering your work 20 16 related publications P 5 relay contact rating table A 4 relays
380. mer preset or accumulated value is a negative number a runtime error occurs Timebase The timebase determines the duration of each timebase interval The timebase is selectable as 0 01 10 ms second or 1 0 second Timer Accuracy Timer accuracy refers to the length of time between the moment a timer instruction is enabled and the moment the timed interval is complete Timing accuracy is 0 01 to 0 seconds with a program scan of up to 2 5 seconds The 1 second timer maintains accuracy with a program scan of up to 1 5 seconds If your programs can exceed 1 5 or 2 5 seconds repeat the timer instruction rung so that the rung is scanned within these limits Important Timing could be inaccurate if Jump JMP Label LBL Jump to Subroutine JSR or Subroutine SBR instructions skip over the rung containing a timer instruction while the timer is timing If the skip duration is within 2 5 seconds no time will be lost if the skip duration exceeds 2 5 seconds an undetectable timing error occurs When using subroutines a timer must be executed at least every 2 5 seconds to prevent a timing error 8 14 Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Entering the Instructions The following items apply when entering the instructions Whenever you see asterisks on the display the HHP is waiting for data entry i e a number If you see a down arrow on the display it means there are more options available To scroll through the opti
381. mer On Delay Basic XOR 110 Exclusive Or Data Handling Multiple displays Instruction Execution Times The table below lists the execution times and memory usage for the y usag and Memory Usage controller instructions Any instruction that takes longer than 15 us true or false execution time to execute performs a poll for user interrupts Wnenone Tase amen Nenen iege Name msrueton Tye ADD 6 78 33 09 1 50 Add Math ANB 0 40 0 25 And Block Basic AND bit input 2 12 1 94 1 00 And Basic AND word output 6 78 34 00 1 50 And Data Handling ANI 2 12 1 94 1 00 And Inverted Basic BSL 19 80 aie 5 24 x position 9 99 Bit Shift Left Application Specific BSR 19 80 eee hy Bit Shift Right Application Specific CLR 4 25 20 80 1 00 Clear Math COP 6 60 27 31 5 06 word 1 50 File Copy Data Handling CTD 27 22 32 19 1 00 Count Down Basic CTU 26 67 29 84 1 00 Count Up Basic DCD 6 78 27 67 1 50 Decode 4 to 1 of 16 Data Handling DDV 6 78 157 06 1 00 Double Divide Math DIV 6 78 147 87 1 50 Divide Math ENC 6 78 54 80 1 50 Encode 1 of 16 to 4 Data Handling AND EQU 7 00 21 92 1 75 EQU LD EQU 6 60 21 52 1 50 Equal Comparison OR EQU 7 00 21 92 1 75 False Execution Time True Execution Time Appendix B Programming Reference Memory Usage SENG approx
382. mmission a DNI DeviceNet Interface User Manual 1761 6 5 In depth information on grounding and wiring Allen Bradley Allen Bradley P rogrammable Controller 1770 4 1 programmable controllers Grounding and Wiring Guidelines How to Get More Information For Fastaccess to related publications Obtain Information By eVisiting the MicroLogix internet site http www abmicrologix com Electronic versions of our manuals are available for you to search and down load eCalling local Allen Bradley distributor Publications in printed or CD ROM format Ordering a manual or CD ROM using one of the following methods eF ill out and return the User Manual Request Card that was shipped with the unit eVisiting the Automation Bookstore at http www theautomationbookstore com Multiple copies of a manual eVisiting the Automation Bookstore at http www theautomationbookstore com Manuals in other languages eFrench FR eltalian IT eSpanish ES Adding a 2 letter suffix to the end of the publication number when ordering eGerman DE ePortuguese PT DNI only Common Techniques Used in this Manual Preface Related Documentation The following documents contain additional information concerning Allen Bradley products To obtain a copy contact your local Allen Bradley office or distributor For A description of important differences between solid state programmable controller products a
383. mode and have the HSC ACC and Interrupt Subroutine resume their previous state while externally initializing the HSC outputs apply the following Ladder Rungs Rung 2 0 Unlatch or latch the output bits under HSC control during the first scan after the HSC instruction is executed for the first time Note you could place this rung before the HSC instruction however this is not recommended S 1 HSL HSC LOAD Ls Counter C520 Source N7 0 Length 5 4 Rung 2 1 HSC HIGH SPEED COUNTER CU Type Encoder Res Hld CD Counter C5 0 DN High Preset 1000 Accum 0 4 Rung 2 2 This rung is programmed with the knowledge of an HSL mask of 0007 Outputs 0 2 are used and initializes the HSC outputs each RRUN mode entry Outputs 0 0 and O 1 are off while Output 0 2 is on S 1 0 0 SS SS SS U 15 0 0 0 U 1 0 0 L 2 Instruction List File 2 Rung 0 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions Unlatch or latch the output bits under HSC control during the first scan after the HSC instruction is executed for the first time Note you could place this rung before the HSC instruction recommended FUN GRAPHIC CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC 20 j LD LL
384. must be paired with an MPP instruction An MRD instruction is not always required Using MPS The MPS instruction stores the rung state immediately preceding the MPS instruction This instruction is required only if both of the following statements are true e An output circuit that contains at least one input instruction immediately follows the MPS e There is at least one other output circuit after the output circuit that immediately follows the MPS Every MPS instruction must be paired with an MPP instruction Each rung can use a maximum of four nested MPS instructions Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area P000 MPS The example below illustrates when you would enter the MPS instruction Instruction List l NEW RUNG LDa an i J 1 MPS AND b OUT c 2 MPP OUT d c d To enter the function code press A OO amp Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Using MRD The MRD instruction reads the rung state stored by the MPS instruction and resumes operation using that rung state Each branch structure can have a maximum of 73 MRD instructions This instruction can only be used if all of the following statements are true e An MPS instruction was used previously on the rung e The MRD is immediately preceded by an output instruction e An output circuit immediately follows the MRD
385. n Change the first operand of the has a constant value as instruction so itis not a constant the first operand value or remove the instruction if the application does not require it 3012 INVALID ADDRESS An instruction is Ensure that the operands for each instruction are within the micro controller s data file space Chapter 20 Troubleshooting Your System Error Code Advisory Message Description Recommended Action Hex 3013 INVALID ADDRESS An instruction is Ensure that the status file referencing a status file operands for each instruction address outside of the are within the micro controller s data table space data file space 3014 BRANCH NEST ERR The program s structure Ensure thatthe program exceeds the allowable contains no more than 4 nested number of nested MPS instructions at a time as branches 4 each MPS counts toward a nested branch 3015 BRANCH LEVEL The program s structure Ensure that for each MPS MPP ERR exceeds the allowable pair there are no more than 73 number of levels per RDs within them nested branch 75 3016 TOO MANY INST A rung contains more Redesign the program file so than the allowable there are no more than 128 number of instructions instructions on each rung 128 3017 TOO MANY HSC S The program contains Remove the extra HSC more than the allowable instructions so only one exists number of HSC in the program or divide the
386. n 8 14 2 ee 15 3 P000 LFL R00 n 4 L 34 P 9 a O T 5 6 34 words are 18 allocated for LIFO stack starting at P000 LFU LI FO 19 7 N12 ending at N45 N1 2 0 an Source 0 8 N10 A 9 P000 LFU DEST N11 0 LFL instruction loads data a into stack N12 at the next P000 LFU R00 L 34 P 9 N45 33 LFL LFU Instruction Pair 11 30 available position 9 in this Loading and Unloading of Stack N12 LFL Instruction When rung conditions change from false to true the controller sets the LFL enable bit EN This loads the contents of the Source N10 into the stack element indicated by the position number 9 The position value then increments The LFL instruction loads an element at each false to true transition of the rung until the stack is filled 34 elements The controller sets the done bit DN inhibiting further loading LFU Instruction When rung conditions change from false to true the controller sets the LFU enable bit EU This unloads data from the last element loaded into the stack at the position value minus 1 placing it in the Destination N11 The position value then decrements The LFU instruction unloads one element at each false to true transition of the rung until the stack is empty The controller then sets the empty bit EM Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions Data Handling Instructions in To demonstrate the use of data hand
387. n execution of an END statement or a Temporary End TND instruction the recoverable major error code 0020 is declared In applications where a math overflow or divide by zero occurs you can avoid a controller fault by using a reset RST instruction with address S5 0 in your program The rung must be between the overflow point and the END or TND statement Changes to the Math Register S13 and S14 Move and logical instructions do not affect the math register Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions Move MOV This output instruction moves the source data to the destination location As long as the rung remains true the instruction moves the data each scan Ladder representation MOV MOVE Source 23 i Entering Parameters Dest 0 0 0 0 a Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Source is the address or constant of the data you want to move Execution Times usec when e Destination is the address where the instruction moves the data True False 25 05 6 78 gt If you wish to move one word of data without affecting the math flags use a copy COP instruction with a length of 1 word instead of the MOV instruction Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry C always resets 0 1 Overflow V always resets 0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets sets if result is negative most significant bit is
388. n for Equal MEQ 9 9 Not Equal NEQ 9 4 overview 9 2 entering the instruction 9 2 function codes 9 3 using indexed word addresses 9 3 configuring your program 18 1 controller version 18 18 extended I O configuration 18 8 fault override bit 18 7 input filter settings 18 12 18 14 18 15 18 16 lock program function 18 17 program name 18 2 run always bit 18 5 start up protection 18 6 STI enabled bit 18 10 STI setpoint 18 9 user and master passwords 18 2 watchdog scan 18 11 connecting blocks of logic using ANB 6 14 8 12 using ORB 6 14 8 12 connecting the system AIC 3 6 DeviceNet network 3 13 DH 485 network 3 3 HHP 3 1 contact protection methods 1 7 contacting Allen Bradley for assistance P 6 contactors bulletin 100 surge suppressors for 1 9 contents of manual P 2 continuous scan CSN mode 18 22 control file R 6 4 controller accessories and replacement parts A 11 changing modes 18 21 changing the baud rate 19 6 19 7 determining faults 20 1 dimensions A 7 fault messages 20 13 features 1 2 grounding 2 1 installation 1 1 mounting 1 12 16 2 16 3 I 11 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual mounting template A 7 operating cycle 6 2 spacing 1 12 specifications A 1 status file B 1 troubleshooting 20 1 types 1 2 A 1 16 1 0 1 2 20 discrete I O and 5 analog I O 1 2 32 1 0 1 2 wiring for high speed counter
389. n set indicates the bit array shifted one position Enable Bit EN bit 15 is set on a false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled When the register shifts and input conditions go false the enable done and error bits are reset e Bit Address is the address of the source bit The status of this bit is inserted in either the first lowest bit position BSL or last highest bit position BSR e Length size of bit array is the number of bits in the bit array up to 1680 bits A length value of 0 causes the input bit to be transferred to the UL bit A length value that points past the end of the programmed file causes a major error to occur If you alter a length value with your program make certain that the altered value is valid The instruction invalidates all bits beyond the last bit in the array as defined by the length up to the next word boundary Entering the Instructions The following items apply when entering the instructions e Whenever you see asterisks on the display the HHP is waiting for data entry i e a number 13 2 Bit Shift Left BSL Ladder representation BSL BIT SHIFT LEFT EN File B3 1 DN Control R6 3 Bit Address I 0 5 Length 58 Execution Times usec when True False 53 71 5 24x 19 80 position value To enter the function code press A Tao ee 7 Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions e You
390. n time may decrease Entering the Program Monitor Entering and Editing Your Program Read this chapter to enter and edit program files using your MicroLogix 1000 HHP This chapter describes e entering the program monitor editing considerations editing in append and overwrite modes deleting instructions and rungs searching for specific addresses Once you understand the structure of instruction lists you can begin entering the instructions into the program files You do this in the program monitor functional area This section shows you how to access the program monitor and describes the main screens within it Accessing the Program Monitor To access the program monitor display for the program begin at the home screen and press the key sequence shown here mon ent If this is the first time you are entering the program monitor you will see the Start of File screen explained below If you entered the program monitor before you return to the last location you were at within the program Program Monitor Screen Definitions There are four key screens used within the program monitor The Start of File and the End of File screens are created automatically as part of every program file The Start of Rung and First Instruction on Rung screens are created by you as you add rungs to the program files Each of these screens is explained below Start of File Screen P START FILE 02 MAI N_PROG The Start of File screen
391. nal area See MT PT page 18 31 B add a bit address to the next available location in the multi point list See page 18 32 execute the trace feature See page 20 8 delete typed characters on which the cursor is located delete all typed characters when entering parameters force On an external input data file bit or FON output circuit See page 18 35 C force Off an external input data file bit or FOF output circuit See page 18 35 R 7 FUN gt SOF remove a set force from an external input data file bit or output circuit See page or 18 35 K FN FUN gt E search for an instruction or address See SEARCH page 17 8 N view faults manually See page 20 11 FAULT PRE LEN clear a fault manually See page 20 11 Faa foei PRE LEN access the program monitor functional area MON gt ENT See page 17 1 Continued on following page Chapter 4 Using Your Hand Held Programmer To Press scroll through the data file table scroll through the bits of individual data files gt return to the home screen ESC A change the radix See page 18 30 0 enter data you ve typed ENT Access Multi Multi Point Function Point Function by pressing this key The multi point function allows you to simultaneously monitor the data of up MT PT to 16 non contiguous bit addresses Since the multi point list is stored with B the program you can creat
392. nc is prohibited Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attention statements help you to e identify a hazard e avoid the hazard recognize the consequences Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product SLC 500 and MicroLogix are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Who Should Use this Manual Purpose of this Manual Preface Preface Read this preface to familiarize yourself with the rest of the manual This preface covers the following topics e who should use this manual the purpose of this manual how to use this manual conventions used in this manual Allen Bradley support Use this manual if you are responsible for designing installing programming or troubleshooting control systems that use Allen Bradley micro controllers You should have a basic understanding of electrical circuitry and familiarity with relay logic If you do not obtain the proper training before using this product This manual is a reference guide for the MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controller with a MicroLogix 1000 Hand Held Programmer HHP It describes the procedures you use to install wire and program your micro controller This manual e gives you an overview of the micr
393. nd hard wired electromechanical devices Read This Document Document Number Application Considerations for SGl 1 1 Solid State Controls i An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment Published by the National Fire Protection National Electrical Code Association of Boston MA A complete listing of current documentation including ordering instructions Also indicates whether the Allen Bradley Publication Index SD499 documents are available on CD ROM or in multi languages A glossary of industrial automation terms Allen Bradley Industrial Automation AG 7 1 and abbreviations Glossary The following conventions are used throughout this manual Bulleted lists such as this one provide information not procedural steps Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical information Italic type is used for emphasis Text in this font indicates words that appear on the HHP display ANG Keypad icons like the one at the left match the key you T should press For operations that require you to press a sequence of keys the keypad icons are displayed horizontally on the page with the resulting screen shown beneath For example LD Ch Ge T 6 P000 FR 6 If a character is flashing on the HHP display it is shown unbolded such as the P in the screen above For operations that require you to press two keys simultaneously the keypad icons are displa
394. nd the rounded quotient is placed in the destination If the remainder is 0 5 Ladder representation or greater the destination is rounded up DDV E DOUBLE DIVIDE The source can either be a word address or a constant The destination must Sourks lies be a word address 1000 Dest N7 5 oe 7 g 0 This instruction typically follows a MUL instruction that creates a 32 bit result Execution Times usec when True False Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits 157 06 6 78 With this Bit The Controller S0 0 Carry C always resets sets if division by zero or if result is greater than 32 767 or less than 32 768 otherwise resets On overflow the minor error flag is also set The value 32 767 is placed in the destination 0 1 Overflow V 0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets sets if result is negative otherwise resets undefined if 50 3 sign S overflow is set Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To enter the function code Fut 45 F4 Hit ew DDV DDV Changes to the Math Register Upon instruction execution the unrounded quotient is placed in the most significant word of the math register The remainder is placed in the least significant word of the math register 10 10 Clear CLR Ladder representation CLR __ CLEAR Dest N7 11 Execution Times usec when Tr
395. ne this bit at the start of the high speed counter interrupt routine file 4 to determine why the interrupt occurred Underflow caused User Interrupt Bit IN bit 6 is set to identify an underflow as the cause for the execution of the high speed counter interrupt routine The IV IH and IL bits are reset by the controller when the IN bit is set Examine this bit at the start of the high speed counter interrupt routine file 4 to determine why the interrupt occurred 14 3 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions High Speed Counter HSC Ladder representation HSC HIGH SPEED COUNTER Type Up Res H1d Counter c5 0 High Preset 1 Accum 1 m CU CD DN Execution Times usec when True False 21 00 21 00 14 4 e High Preset Reached Caused User Interrupt Bit IH bit 5 is set to identify a high preset reached as the cause for the execution of the high speed counter interrupt routine The IV IN and IL bits are reset by the controller when the IH bit is set Examine this bit at the start of the high speed counter interrupt routine file 4 to determine why the interrupt occurred Low Preset Reached Caused High Speed Counter Interrupt Bit IL bit 4 is set to identify a low preset reached as the cause for the execution of the high speed counter interrupt routine The IV IN and IH bits are reset by the controller when the IL bit is set Examine this bit at the start of the high
396. nformation Once the download is completed the programming software returns the file ownership to the controller so other devices can communicate with it again D 6 Appendix D Understanding the Communication Protocols With the addition of DF1 half duplex slave protocol the controller clears the file ownership if no supported commands are received from the owner within the timeout period If the file ownership were not cleared after a download sequence interruption the processor would not accept commands from any other devices because it would assume another device still had file ownership If a download sequence is interrupted due to noise caused by electromagnetic interference discontinue communications to the controller for the ownership timeout period and restart the program download The ownership timeout period is set to 60 seconds as a default for all protocols However if you are using DF1 half duplex and the poll timeout value is set to greater than 60 seconds the poll timeout value is used instead of the ownership timeout After the timeout you can re establish communications with the processor and try the program download again The only other way to clear file ownership is to cycle power on the processor Using Modems with MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers The types of modems that you can use with MicroLogix 1000 controllers include dial up phone modems leased line modems radio modems and line drivers For
397. ng Once the program is loaded to the controller the MicroLogix 1000 HHP returns you to the home screen If the program is password protected you are first prompted to enter the password Important If a program already exists in the controller with the same name as the one you are about to load a confirmation screen appears asking if you want to overwrite the existing program If you do not want to write over the existing program press ESC to exit the sub menu If you want to overwrite the existing program press ENT Various screens appear to indicate the program is loading Once the program is loaded to the controller the MicroLogix 1000 HHP returns you to the home screen If the program is password protected you are first prompted to enter the password 19 2 Chapter 19 Common Procedures Storing a Program to a Memory Module You can store the program you currently have loaded in the controller to a memory module Follow the steps below 1 Put the controller in RPRG mode if it is not already in that mode 2 Go to the menu and choose the option MEM MODULE 3 Select STORE PROGRAM STORE gt PROGRAMI MEMMOD FREE 008K The name of the program and the amount of memory remaining in the module is shown 4 Begin the storing process ENT STORE gt PROGRAMI CHECKING Important If edits exist in the program the program is verified for errors saved in the controller befor
398. ng Procedure for the STI Function To use the STI function in your application file 1 Enter the desired rungs in File 5 File 5 is designated for the STI subroutine 2 Enter the setpoint the time between successive interrupts using the program configuration option of the HHP s menu See page 18 9 The range is 10 2550 ms entered in 10 ms increments A setpoint of zero disables the STI function Important The setpoint value must be a longer time than the execution time of the STI subroutine file or a minor error bit is set Operation After you restore your program and enter the RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode the STI begins operation as follows 1 The STI timer begins timing 2 When the STI interval expires the program scan is interrupted and the STI subroutine file is scanned the STI timer is reset 3 If while executing the STI file 5 another STI interrupt occurs the STI pending bit S2 0 is set 4 If while an STI is pending the STI timer expires the STI lost bit S5 10 is set 5 When the STI subroutine scan is completed scanning of the program resumes at the point where it left off unless an STI is pending In this case the subroutine is immediately scanned again 6 The cycle repeats For identification of your STI subroutine include an INT instruction as the first instruction on the first rung of the file STI Subroutine Content The STI subroutine contains the rungs of your application logic Y
399. ng bit shift and FIFO instructions adjustable time delay example using timer instructions Because of the variety of uses for this information the user of and those responsible for applying this information must satisfy themselves as to the acceptability of each application and use of the program In no event will Allen Bradley Company be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use of application of this information The illustrations charts and examples shown in this appendix are intended solely to illustrate the principles of the controller and some of the methods used to apply them Particularly because of the many requirements associated with any particular installation Allen Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based upon the illustrative uses and applications Appendix E Application Example Programs Paper Drilling Machine Application Example E 2 Drilled Holes For a detailed explanation of LD LDI OUT RES SET RST and OSR instructions see chapter 8 EQU and GEQ instructions see chapter 9 CLR ADD and SUB instructions see chapter 10 MOV and FRD instructions see chapter 11 JSR and RET instructions see chapter 12 INT and SQO instructions see chapter 13 HSC HSL and RAC instructions see chapter 14 This machine can drill three different hole patterns into bound manuals The program tracks drill wear and signals the operator
400. ng standards in whole or in part documented in a technical construction file e EN 50081 2 EMC Generic Emission Standard Part 2 Industrial Environment e EN 50082 2 EMC Generic Immunity Standard Part 2 Industrial Environment This product is intended for use in an industrial environment Low Voltage Directive This product is tested to meet Council Directive 73 23 EEC Low Voltage by applying the safety requirements of EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Part 2 Equipment Requirements and Tests For specific information required by EN 61131 2 see the appropriate sections in this publication as well as the following Allen Bradley publications e Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines For Noise Immunity publication 1770 4 1 e Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5 4 e Automation Systems Catalog publication B111 Chapter 1 Installing Your Controller Hardware Overview The MicroLogix 1000 programmable controller is a packaged controller containing a power supply input circuits output circuits and a processor The controller is available in 10 I O 16 I O and 32 I O configurations as well as an analog version with 20 discrete I O and 5 analog I O The catalog number for the controller is composed of the following 1761 L20AWA 5A Ld LL LL Bulletin Number J Analog 1 0 Base Unit Analog Circuits Inputs 4 Unit 1 0 Count 20 Outputs 1 aa Power Supply
401. ng the System RS 232 Communication RS 232 is an Electronics Industries Association EIA standard that specifies Interface the electrical mechanical and functional characteristics for serial binary communication It provides you with a variety of system configuration possibilities RS 232 is a definition of electrical characteristics it is not a protocol One of the biggest benefits of the RS 232 interface is that it lets you integrate telephone and radio modems into your control system using the appropriate DF1 protocol only not DH 485 protocol The distance over which you are able to communicate with certain system devices is virtually limitless Appendix D Understanding the Communication Protocols DF1 Full Duplex Protocol DF1 Full Duplex communication protocol combines data transparency ANSI American National Standards Institute specification subcategory D1 and two way simultaneous transmission with embedded responses subcategory F1 The MicroLogix 1000 controllers support the DF1 Full Duplex protocol via RS 232 connection to external devices such as computers the Hand Held Programmer catalog number 1761 HHP B30 or other MicroLogix 1000 controllers For information on connecting to the Hand Held Programmer see chapter 3 Connecting the System DF1 Full Duplex Operation DF1 Full Duplex protocol also referred to as DF1 point to point protocol is useful where RS 232 point to point communication is requi
402. nges NEQ Not Equal source A direct indexed direct 0 1l S B T C R N Not Applicable source B immediate direct 0 1 S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct f min f max NOT Logical NOT source direct indexed direct 0 1 S B T C R N_ Not Applicable destination direct indexed direct 0 1 S B T C R N_ Not Applicable OR Or bit input source bit direct 0 1 S B T C R N_ Not Applicable bit level OR Or word output source A direct indexed direct 0 1 5 B 1 C R N_ 32 768 32 767 source B direct indexed direct O l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 destination direct indexed direct 0 1 S B T C R N Not Applicable ORI Or Inverted source bit direct 0 1l S B T C R N Not Applicable bit level OSR One Shot Rising bit address direct 0 1l S B T C R N Not Applicable OUT Output or Output bit address direct 0 1l S B T C R N Not Applicable Energize RAC HSC Reset counter direct C Not Applicable Accumulator source immediate direct O l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 f min f max RES Reset timer counter structure direct T C R Not Applicable element level RES Reset high speed structure direct TER Not Applicable counter element level RET Return Not Applicable RST Reset or Output bit address direct 0 1 S B T C R N Not Applicable Unlatch RTO Retentive Timer timer direct T element level Not Applicable time base immediate 0 01 or 1 00 preset contained in the 0 32 767 timer register accum contained in the 0 32 76
403. nk hehe Sh the hee Seda koe a dead dae eka 11 15 Masked Move MVM J vp icin beup Sead tieki etna rensei heinen 11 16 And AND isu cede inure eee a a a a A 11 18 OTOR ott cents aaiae e a a aa a se oe A 11 19 Exclusive Or XOR 16ascueeSessn een aaaea e e e 11 20 NOt NOT ivcsancshoctheaeadaakee teenaged A EEA 11 21 Negate NEG criciigirrsrariivnndari iinta adune kR RUTA 11 22 FIFO and LIFO Instructions Overview cee ete eee eens 11 23 FIFO Load FFL and FIFO Unload FFU oaaao 11 25 LIFO Load LFL and LIFO Unload LFU noana 11 28 Data Handling Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machin Application Example n on ununu 11 31 Chapter 12 About the Program Flow Control Instructions cc ccc eee eee ees 12 1 Jump J MP and Label LBL ccccc eras ce cewsvewetensesneees ewe 12 2 J ump to Subroutine J SR Subroutine SBR and Return RET 12 3 Master Control Reset MCR cc c cece eect eee ete e eens 12 6 Tempora End TND scrid 00k tds tava edi seek irii aa Gewese ea daw 12 7 Suspend SUS se oie 6 lt a 4 4 amaaa aa iak aih aan Cased deal n 12 7 Immediate Input with Mask IIM oo ccc eect eee eee eens 12 8 Immediate Output with Mask IOM oo cece cece cette ee eens 12 9 Program Flow Control Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Applicaton EXaMPIE a ess cra ieee deta de Baha aaia ees drake Sia ace va 12 10 Chapter 13 About the Application Specific Instructions ccc cece ees 13 1 Bit Shift Instructio
404. ns e Ifthe Test parameter is a constant both the Low Limit and High Limit parameters must be word addresses e Ifthe Test parameter is a word address the Low Limit and High Limit parameters can be either a constant or a word address Entering the Instruction HHP Display Mnemonic eee Use This Instruction When the Input H LIM LD LIM 71 appears first on a rung or block is placed in series with any previous input nM AND EIM k instruction in the current rung or block Bonu is placed in parallel with any previous in ai OR LIM 13 put instruction in the current rung or block You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area The example below shows how to enter the LD LIM instruction Use the same procedure to enter the other LIM instructions only substitute the function code with one from the table above P000 HLI M LOW Po 4 P000 HLI Me TEST No o P000 HLI Met HIGH 1 Chapter 9 Using Comparison Instructions True False Status of the Instruction If the Low Limit has a value equal to or less than the High Limit the instruction is true when the Test value is between the limits or is equal to either limit If the Test value is outside the limits the instruction is false as shown below False True False 32 768 E es 32 767 Low Limit High Limit Example low limit less than high limit High Instruction is True Instruction is False Limit when T
405. ns Overview vi univevedunivegesua decks dapaweded 13 2 BitShitLet BSL jc sit ccawenn svete seaweed aeae 13 3 BitS Hit RIJAE BSR sc cyrciumied woniewe eh a a oe enone 13 4 Sequencer Instructions Overview cece eee eee ees 13 6 Sequencer Output SQO and Sequencer Compare SQC eevee 13 6 Sequencer Load SQL csscccievacewsns cee nesee tue nesda eae nea 13 12 Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function Overview ccc cence ane 13 15 Using High Speed Counter Instructions Using Communication Protocols Instruction List Programming Concepts Entering and Editing Your Program Table of Contents MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual Selectable Timed Disable STD and Enable STE 13 17 Selectable Timed Start STS swe it we toegdduntivdw ad eredagiauedad 13 18 Interrupt Subroutine NT ee wii acho i ap kek easy eg Esne kode wR p ee 13 19 Application Specific Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Application Example i cdc ew ado oa Seda dod e we Re boa VeNedy ba 13 20 Chapter 14 About the High Speed Counter Instructions cece cece ees 14 1 High Speed Counter Instructions Overview 1 cece eee eee ees 14 2 High Speed Counter HSC 0c cee eee eee ees 14 4 High Speed Counter Load HSL 2 0 0 eee e eee eee 14 15 High Speed Counter Reset RES 2 0 cece eee ee eee eee 14 19 High Speed Counter Reset Accumulator RAC
406. nstruction to update the instruction image accumulator value with the hardware accumulator value The HSC instruction also performs this operation each time the rung with the HSC instruction is evaluated as true Accumulator gt High Preset Bit HP bit 9 is a reserved bit for all Up Counters modes 1 and 2 For the Bidirectional Counters modes 3 8 if the hardware accumulator becomes greater than or equal to the high preset the HP bit is set If the hardware accumulator becomes less than the high preset the HP bit is reset by the controller Do not write to this bit Exception you can set or reset this bit during the initial configuration of the HSC instruction See page 14 23 for more information Accumulator lt Low Preset Bit LP bit 8 is a reserved bit for all Up Counters For the Bidirectional Counters if the hardware accumulator becomes less than or equal to the low preset the LP bit is set by the controller If the hardware accumulator becomes greater than the low preset the LP bit is reset by the controller Do not write to this bit Exception you can set or reset this bit during the initial configuration of the HSC instruction See page 14 23 for more information Overflow Caused High Speed Counter Interrupt Bit IV bit 7 is set to identify an overflow as the cause for the execution of the high speed counter interrupt routine The IN IH and IL bits are reset by the controller when the IV bit is set Exami
407. nstructions When executed this instruction sets one bit of the destination word The particular bit that is turned On depends on the value of the first four bits of the source word See the table below Use this instruction to multiplex data in applications such as rotary switches keypads and bank switching Source Destination 15 04 03 02 01 00 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 PRPRPRPHPPRPRHPOOOCOCOC0O0 O FRPP RODOOFRPRRROOOO FPROORPRRFPOORROORHOO FOPOFOFRFOrFOROFROFRO eo Mo Moo Mo MoM o o MoM o o oo Momo orooo0oo0oo0oo0oo00000000 ooroo0oo0oo0oo0o00000000 oooroo0oo0ooO0O0O0000000 ooooroO0OO0O0O0O000000 oooo0oo0orOCOO0OO0OO0OO0OO0O0O0O0O0 oooo0oo0oo0orO0OO0OO0OO0O0O0O00O0 oooo0oo0oo0o0rO0OO0OO0O0O0O0O0O0 oooo0oo0oo0o0o0rO0OO0OO0O0O0O0O0O oooo0oo0oo0000rO0OO0O0O0O0O0O oooo0oo0oo0o0000rO0OO0OO0O0O0O oooo0oo0oo0oo00000PrRO0OO0OO0O oooo0oo0oo0o000000PrRO0OO0O oooo0oo0oo0oo0000000PrROO oooo0oo0oo0oo00000000RPO oooo0oo0oo0oo000000000hh x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Entering Parameters e Source is the address that contains the information to be decoded Only the first four bits 0 3 are used by the DCD instruction The remaining bits may be used for other application specific needs e Destination is the address of the word where the decoded data is to be stored Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits Unaffected Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the prog
408. nt The destination must be a word address Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit S0 0 Carry C The Controller sets if borrow is generated otherwise resets 0 1 Overflow V sets if underflow otherwise reset On underflow the minor error flag is also set The value 32 768 or 32 767 is placed in the destination If S2 14 math overflow selection bit is set then the unsigned truncated overflow remains in the destination 0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign S sets if result is negative otherwise resets Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area 10 5 Chapter 10 Using Math Instructions 32 Bit Addition and Subtraction You have the option of performing 16 bit or 32 bit signed integer addition and subtraction This is facilitated by status file bit S2 14 math overflow selection bit Math Overflow Selection Bit 2 14 Set this bit when you intend to use 32 bit addition and subtraction When 2 14 is set and the result of an ADD SUB MUL DIV or NEG instruction cannot be represented in the destination address due to math underflow or overflow The overflow bit SO 1 is set The overflow trap bit S5 0 is set e The destination address contains the unsigned truncated least significant 16 bits of the result When 82 14 is reset default condition and the result of
409. nto a LIFO stack on successive false to true transitions The LFU unloads a word from the stack on successive false to true 11 28 LFU 116 LIFO Unload transitions The last word loaded is the first to be unloaded Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions About the Data Handling Use these instructions to convert information manipulate data in the Instructions controller and perform logic operations Since these are output instructions they do not have LD AND and OR equivalents In this chapter you will find a general overview preceding groups of instructions Before you learn about the instructions in each of these groups we suggest that you read the overview This chapter contains the following overviews e Move and Logical Instructions Overview e FIFO and LIFO Instructions Overview Convert to BCD TOD Use this instruction to convert 16 bit integers into BCD values Ladder representation The source must be a word address The destination parameter can be a TOD word address in a data file or it can be the math register S13 and S14 To BCD Source N7 F If the integer value you enter is negative the sign is ignored and the Dest 8 13 conversion occurs as if the number was positive 00000000 Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits Execution Times usec when With this Bit The Controller True False S0 0 Carry C always resets 49 64 6 78 i S0 1 Overflow V sets if the BCD
410. ntroller if the protective wrap is removed Use only the following communication cables in Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations Environment Classification Communication Cable Class Division 2 Hazardous 1761 CBL P M02 Series C Environment 1761 CBL HM02 Series C 1761 CBL AM00 Series C 1761 CBL AP00 Series C 2707 NC8 Series B 2707 NC9 Series B 2707 NC 10 Series B 2707 NC 11 Series B Using a DIN Rail Use 35 mm 1 38 in DIN rails such as item number 199 DR1 or 1492 DR5 from Bulletin 1492 To install your controller on the DIN rail 1 Mount your DIN rail Make sure that the Side View placement of the controller on the DIN rail a Protective Wrap meets the recommended spacing requirements Refer to controller Mounting dimensions in appendix A DIN Template 2 Hook the top slot over the DIN rail Rail 8 3 While pressing the controlleragainstthe A 2 rail snap the controller into position 4 Leave the protective wrap attached until you are finished wiring the controller Ft 20146 Call out_ Dimension A 84 mm 3 3 in B 33 mm 1 3 in C 16 mm 63 in Chapter 1 Installing Your Controller To remove your controller from the DIN rail 1 Place a screwdriver in the DIN rail latch at Side View the bottom of the controller 2 Holding the controller pry downward on the latch until the controller is released
411. nu to specify which protocol the controller should attempt to establish communication with first Although the MicroLogix 1000 controller will automatically find which protocol is active DF1 full duplex or DH 485 and establish communication accordingly you can shorten the connection time by choosing the appropriate main protocol 19 7 Chapter 19 Common Procedures 19 8 The default setting for the main protocol is DF1 To accept the default setting DF1 press ENT To change the default setting arrow right to select DH 485 and then press ENT The arrow points to the controller s current DF1 baud rate gt 9600 DF 1 2400 DF 1 Arrow down to the desired DF1 baud rate and select it a et n times The DFI node address sub menu appears next DF1 NODE 0 254 ADDR 1 To accept the default setting 1 press ENT To change the default setting delete the 1 by pressing DEL type in the new number and then press ENT The arrow points to the controller s current DH 485 baud rate gt 19200 DH485 9600 DH485 Arrow down to the desired DH 485 baud rate and select it ase n times Chapter 19 Common Procedures 6 The DH 485 node address sub menu appears next DH485 NODE 1 31 ADDR 1 To accept the default setting 1 press ENT To change the default setting delete the 1 by pressing DEL type in the new number and then pres
412. o controller system provides a quick start chapter for beginners describes how to use the Hand Held Programmer guides you through how to interpret the instruction set contains application examples to show the instruction set in use If you are using programming software with your MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controller see page P 4 for related publications Preface Contents of this Manual Tab Chapter Title Contents Describes the purpose background and scope of this Preface manual Also specifies the audience for whom this manual is intended Provides controller installation procedures and system 1 Installing Your Controller safety considerations Installing 2 Wiring Your Controller Provides wiring guidelines and diagrams Gives information on wiring your controller system for the 3 Connecting the system DF1 protocol or DH 485 network Describes how to power up and use your MicroLogix 1000 4 ah e Hand Held Programmer HHP Also explains how to g install the HHPs memory module Provides step by step instructions on how to enter a 2 Quick Start for New Users program edit it and then monitor it Provides an overview of principles of machine control a 6 Programming Overview section on file organization and addressing and a program development model Provides information on I O image file format 1 0 7 Using Analog configuration input filter and update times an
413. o0o0000000000hF mmm mM me OOM OM Om Oe OO Oe PRPRPRPRRFRRPRPOODOCOCCCCO PRPRFPRFRFOOCOOFFRFFRFHFOOOO FPRPOOFRFFOOFFOOFRFOO FOFOFOFOFOFOFOFO x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 1 Entering Parameters e Source is the address of the word to be encoded Only one bit of this word should be on at any one time If more than one bit in the source is set the destination bits are set based on the least significant bit that is set If a source of zero is used all of the destination bits are reset and the zero bit is set e Destination is the address that contains the bit encode information Bits 4 15 of the destination are reset by the ENC instruction 11 8 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits The arithmetic status bits are found in Word 0 bits 0 3 in the controller status file After an instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry C always resets sets if more than one bit in the source is set otherwise S0 l Overfiow V reset The math overflow bit S5 0 is not set 0 2 Zero Z sets if destination value is zero 0 3 Sign S always resets Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area As you enter the instruction you can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key Noy Then if you want to edi
414. ode if it is not already in that mode 2 Access the program configuration menu enr 3 Arrow up to the option ANALOG CONFIG and select it 2 times 7 Note The function is only available when the Micro Term is attached to an analog controller 6 times CHANNEL ENABLE gt FILTER SETTI NG 4 Arrow up to the option FILTER SETTING and select it 2 times E s Select a filter setting from the following list e 10Hz e 50Hz e 60Hz e 250 Hz 5 Scroll to the setting you want and select it 6 Enter to store the filter setting and return to the ANALOG CONFIG submenu ENT 7 Escape to return to the submenu without changing the filter setting ESC 18 14 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program Selecting Channel Enable for the Analog Input Channels This option allows you to enable disable input channels 0 3 of the analog controller To enable disable the analog input channels 1 Put the controller in RPRG mode if it is not already in that mode 2 Access the program configuration menu fen 3 Arrow up to the option ANALOG CONFIG and select it fen Note The function is only available when the Micro Term is attached to an analog controller 6 times S7 2 times WY gt CHANNEL ENABLE FILTER SETTING 4 Enter to select the option CHANNEL ENABLE ENT 5 Arrow left or right to the setting you want for the displayed channel enab
415. of Rung or End of File screens 3 Press the instruction key or enter the function code corresponding to the instruction you want to enter A If this instruction is of the same instruction class as the instruction it is overwriting e g LD and LDI the current parameters are loaded for the new instruction The table below describes your options If you want to Then you should accept the current parameters press ENT use DEL as a destructive backspace or FUN DEL to delete change the current parameters the entire displayed address Then Key in the desired address and press ENT B If this instruction is of a different instruction class no parameters are loaded Key in the desired address and press ENT Once the instruction is accepted the instruction immediately after the instruction you wrote over is displayed 17 5 Chapter 17 Entering and Editing Your Program Deleting Instructions and Rungs 17 6 While in either append or overwrite edit mode you can delete individual instructions and rungs You can also delete a range of rungs within a single program file Important If you delete an instruction or rung s you cannot undo the deletion Deleting an Instruction You can delete a single instruction while viewing any parameter of that instruction by pressing the key shown below Important A confirmation screen will not appear the instruction is simply deleted If you delete an instruction you c
416. ogram Rate Period Counts last Expiration rate measurement Bit period T4 0 TON TIMER ON DELAY EN DN Timer T4 0 DN Time Base 0 01 Preset 10 Accum 0 4 E 41 Appendix E Application Example Programs Rung 2 2 Calculates and stores the number of counts that have occurred since the last time that it was executed as true in N7 1 last time last rate measurement timer T4 0 expiration The LES instruction allows for 10 counts of backlash to occur you can adjust as needed The add instruction is configured for a 1000 count encoder using N7 2 Change this register to match the number of counts generated each Z reset Rate Period Counts last rate Expiration Bit measurement period T4 0 SUB SUBTRACT DN Source A C5 0 ACC 0 Source B N7 0 0 Dest N7 1 0 4 TE Counts last rate Counts last rate negative measurement period measurement period math flag S 0 LES ADD oo o gt LESS THAN ADD scented 3 Source A N7 1 Source A N7 2 Dl 1000 Source B 10 Source B N7 1 0 tee oe ee ee Dest N7 1 0 4 Last timeout value storage register MOV MOVE Sou
417. ogram and the two components created with it program files and data files Program Program Files Data Files 14 Maximum 8 Maximum Notes on terminology The term program used in HHP displays is equivalent to the term processor file that may be used in some programming software packages Program A program consists of the collective program files and data files It contains all the instructions data and configuration information pertaining to that program The program is located in the micro controller It can be transferred to from a memory module optional located in the HHP or to from a personal computer with programming software Program 01 Program 01 Program 01 HHP Memory Module Micro Controller Personal Computer with Programming Software 6 3 Chapter 6 Programming Overview Program Files Program files contain controller information the main program interrupt subroutines and any subroutine programs These files are e System Program file 0 This file contains various system related information and user programmed information such as program name and password e Reserved file 1 This file is reserved Main Program file 2 This file contains user programmed instructions defining how the controller is to operate e User Error Fault Routine file 3 This file is executed when a fault occurs It is only used for this purpose e
418. ogrammable Controller Connects to the HHP q 8 pin Locking Mini DIN Programming Device 8 Pin 1 Connects to the Controller Hi LI 8 pin Mini DIN 20188 NIOJ a AJOJN Controller 8 Pin 24V e 24V 1 24V a 24V 2 3 RXD TXD 7 5 6 TXD RXD 4 GND GND 8 3 2 Chapter 3 Connecting the System Connecting to a DH 485 Important Only Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers and Network all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers support DH 485 network connections In order to access the DH 485 functionality of the Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete and MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers you must configure your program to operate with these controllers See page 18 18 for more information MicroLogix 1000 Series C or later C a PC discrete or MicroLogix 1000 analog lee _ PC to port 1 connection from w or port 2 1761 CBL AM00 to MicroLogix or 1761 CBL HM02 AIC 1761 NET AIC 2 t t L rA 1761 CBL AP 00 1761 CBL AP 00 or ap 1761 CBL PM02 1761 CBL PM02 SIF A C gt adc 1761 NET AIC A user supply is not needed if a MicroLogix 1000 controller is 1
419. ogramming the ANB instruction represents this connection See page 8 12 Example Parallel Block Connection a b e 9 In the above example two blocks of information are connected in parallel Either A and B or C and D provides a true logical path For instruction list programming the ORB instruction represents this connection See page 8 12 Nested Branching Input and output branches can be nested to avoid redundant instructions to speed up controller evaluation and to provide more efficient programming A nested branch is a branch that starts or ends within another branch You can nest branches up to four levels deep L A Chapter 6 Programming Overview Nested branching can be converted into non nested branches by repeating instructions to make parallel equivalents Example Non Nested Equivalent a b c f to d c e Non nested equivalent parallel branch Understanding Instruction List Programs Instruction list Boolean programming uses mnemonics to represent all the functions and connections available in a ladder logic instruction set Mnemonics are instructions written in abbreviated form using two or three letters that imply the operation of the instruction such as LD AND and OUT LD 1 0 AND 1 1 OUT 0 1 output instructi
420. ograms If the JMP instruction was missing the following rung would be true and would turn the output back OFF FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 I LD Pushbutton false to true B 0 0 23 T ANI Toggling Output 0 0 41 L SET Toggling Output 0 0 0 130 JMP Go to rest of program LBL File 2 Rung 2 If the push button input has gone from false to true and the output is presently ON turns the output OFF FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 l LD Pushbutton false to true B 0 0 22 f AND Toggling Output 0 0 0 42 U RST Toggling Output 0 0 0 Spray Booth Application Example Bar Code Reader 0 2 3 4 N7 3 Appendix E Application Example Programs File 2 Rung 3 Contains the label corresponding to the jump instruction in rung 1 The remainder of your actual program is placed below this rung FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 131 LBL LD LBL Go to rest of program LBL 40 p OUT Dummy Bit B 2 0 The following application example illustrates the use of bit shift and FIFO instructions in an automated paint spraying operation For a detailed explanation of e LD and OUT instructions see chapter 8 e EQU and LIM instructions see chapter 9 e FFU and FFL instructions see chapter 11 e BSL instruction see chapter 12 Paint Spray Booth Position 2
421. ollows combines all of the input and output concepts that have been presented to you The optimized instruction list is shown beneath the rung Optimized NEW RUNG LDa LD b AND c LD d AND e ORB ANB AND f LD g AND h OR i ANB AND j MPS AND k OUT MRD AND m OUT n MRD AND o MPS AND p OUT q MPP AND r OUT s MPP ANDt OUT u 16 7 Chapter 16 Instruction List Programming Programming Considerations 16 8 Since more than one instruction list representation may be possible for a single rung you should be aware of the following programming issues if you are using programming software with your MicroLogix 1000 HHP e Any rung created in the HHP and saved to the controller uploaded to programming software and edited downloaded to the controller and then monitored by the HHP will have the optimized instruction list representation Thus the program size and scan time may decrease if you originally created a program with a non optimized list representation e Any rung created using programming software downloaded to the controller and then monitored by the HHP will have the optimized instruction list representation e Any rung created using programming software downloaded to the controller edited by the HHP and saved to the controller and then uploaded to the programming software will have all unnecessary branches removed Thus the program size and sca
422. om the memory module with the program is used The Retentive Data Lost Bit S 5 8 is set If the user program is invalid the default program is loaded 0003 PROG CORRUPTED While power cycling to your 1 Try cycling power again controller a noise problem may Your program may be valid have occurred The user program but retentive data is lost is corrupt and the default program 2 Re save or re load your is loaded 3 Conca Contact your local Allen Bradley representative if the error persists 0004 PROGRAM CHANGED While the controller was in the 1 Cycle power on your unit RUN mode or any test mode the 2 Re save or re load your ROM or RAM became corrupt If program and re initialize any the user program is valid the necessary data program and initial data previously P an ue in the controller or loaded Allen Bradley representative rom the memory module is used if the error persists and the Retentive Data Lost Bit 55 8 is set If the user program is invalid error 0003 occurs 0005 RETENT DATA LOST The data files input output timer 1 Cycle power on your unit counter integer binary control 2 Re save or re load your and status are corrupt program and re initialize any necessary data 3 Startup your system 4 Contact your local Allen Bradley representative if the error persists 20 13 Chapter 20 Troubleshooting Your System 20 14 er Advisory Message Des
423. omatically Use the same FIFO address for the associated FFL and FFU instructions use the same LIFO address for the associated LFL and LFU instructions Control is the address of the control structure The control structure stores the status bits the stack length and the position value Do not use the control file address for any other instruction Status bits of the control structure are addressed by mnemonic These include Empty Bit EM bit 12 is set by the controller to indicate the stack is empty Done Bit DN bit 13 is set by the controller to indicate the stack is full This inhibits loading the stack FFU LFU Enable Bit EU bit 14 is set on a false to true transition of the FFU LFU rung and is reset on a true to false transition FFL LFL Enable Bit EN bit 15 is set on a false to true transition of the FFL LFL rung and is reset on a true to false transition Length specifies the maximum number of words in the stack Address the length value by mnemonic LEN Position is the next available location where the instruction loads data into the stack This value changes after each load or unload operation Address the position value by mnemonic POS 11 23 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions 11 24 Entering the Instructions The following items apply when entering the instructions e Whenever you see asterisks on the display the HHP is waiting for data entry i e a number e You c
424. omplete example and its description Also overviews are provided at the beginning of chapters 8 through 14 to introduce you to the concepts yov ll learn in each chapter 5 12 Principles of Machine Control Programming Overview This chapter explains how to use the MicroLogix 1000 HHP to program the micro controller Read this chapter for basic information about principles of machine control understanding file organization understanding how programs are stored and accessed addressing data files applying logic to your schematics a model for developing your program The controller consists of a built in power supply central processing unit CPU inputs which you wire to input devices such as push buttons proximity sensors limit switches and outputs which you wire to output devices such as motor starters solid state relays and indicator lights Hand Held Programmer HHP User Input Devices User Output Devices As N J als O Memory 77N a Programs and Data C CPU ae Y 5 NJ Processor Li Li Micro Controller You enter a logic program into the controller using the HHP The logic program is based on your electrical relay print diagrams It contains instructions that direct control of your application Chapter 6 Programming Overview With the logic program entered into the controller placing the controller in the Run mode initiates an operating cyc
425. omprised of a set of rungs A rung contains input and output instructions During Run mode the inputs on a rung are evaluated to be true or false If a path of true logic exists the outputs are made true If all paths are false the outputs are made false scan time The time required for the controller to execute the instructions in the program The scan time may vary depending on the instructions and each instruction s status during the scan sinking A term used to describe current flow between an I O device and controller I O circuit typically a sinking device or circuit provides a path to ground low or negative side of power supply software Executable programming package used to develop ladder diagrams sourcing A term used to describe current flow between an I O device and controller I O circuit typically a sourcing device or circuit provides a path to the source high or positive side of power supply status The condition of a circuit or system represented as logic 0 OFF or 1 ON G 5 Glossary G 6 terminal A point on an I O module that external I O devices such as a push button or pilot light are wired to throughput The time between when an input turns on and the corresponding output turns on true The status of an instruction that provides a continuous logical path on a ladder rung upload Data is transferred to a programming or storage device from another device user interrupt
426. on input instructions The MicroLogix 1000 HHP allows you to enter an instruction list program when programming the micro controller 6 15 Chapter 6 Programming Overview Applying Ladder Logic and Instruction List In the following illustration the electromechanical circuit shows PB1 and PB2 two push buttons wired in series with an alarm horn PB1 is a normally open push button and PB2 is normally closed This same circuit is shown in ladder logic by two contacts wired in series with an output Contact I 0 and I 1 are examine if closed instructions For more information on this instruction refer to page 8 3 Electromechanical Circuit Ladder Logic Program Instruction List Program PBL PB2 an i 7 a LD 1 0 77 alle 0 1 1 AND I4 NS OUT on Contact 11 would be an examine if open instruction VI if PB2 was a normally open electromechanical circuit The table below shows how these circuits operate The table shows all possible conditions for the electromechanical circuit the equivalent state of the instructions and the resulting output state If PB1 is 1 0 state is And PB2 is 1 1 state is Then the Alarm Horn 0 1 is not pushed 0 not pushed 1 silent not pushed 0 pushed 0 silent pushed 1 not pushed 1 alarm pushed 1 pushed 0 silent 6 16 Developing Your Logic Program A Model Chapter 6 Programming Overview The following diagram can help y
427. on Toggling Toggling false to Output Output true B3 0 0 0 0 gt i 52s cc co cl Sl i L 0 0 0 Go to rest of program 1 JMP Rung 2 2 f the push button input has gone from false to true and the output is presently ON turns the output OFF push button Toggling Toggling false to Output Output true B3 0 0 0 0 te aa lke ee eee Wea 0 0 0 Rung 2 3 Contains the label corresponding to the jump instruction in rung 1 The remainder of your actual program is placed below this rung Go to rest Dummy Bit of program I B3 lt EBL 7e ee g jen 2 Rung 2 4 END E 47 Appendix E Application Example Programs E 48 On Off Circuit Instruction List Program File 2 Rung 0 Does a one shot from the input push button to an internal bit the internal bit is true for only one scan This prevent toggling of the physical output in case the push button is held ON for more than one scan always the case FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 i LD Pushbutton Input 1 0 0 29 0SR AND OSR OSR 1 B 1 0 40 y OUT Pushbutton false to true B 0 File 2 Rung 1 If the push button input has gone from false to true and the output is presently OFF turn the output ON and jump over the following rung to the rest of the pr
428. on linearity lt 0 002 Overall Accuracy 0 C to 55 C 0 7 of full scale Overall Accuracy Drift 0 C to 55 C max 0 176 Overall Error at 25 C 77 F max 0 525 Voltage Input O vervoltage P rotection 24V dc Current Input Overcurrent P rotection 50 mA Input to Output Isolation Field Wiring to Logic Isolation 30V rated working 500V test 60 Hz 1s The analog input resolution is a function of the input filter selection Analog Output Specifications Description Specification Voltage Output Range 0 to 10V dc 1LSB Current Output Range 4 to 20 mA 1LSB Type of Data 16 bit signed integer Non linearity 0 02 Step Response 2 5 ms at 95 Load Range Voltage Output 1K Q to wx Load Range Current Output 0 to 500 Q Output Coding 4 to 20 mA 1 LSB 0 to 10Vdc 1LSB 0 to 32 767 Voltage Output Miswiring can withstand short circuit Current Output Miswiring can withstand short circuit Output Resolution 15 bit Analog Output Settling Time 3 msec maximum Overall Accuracy 0 C to 55 C 1 0 of full scale Overall Accuracy Drift 0 C to 55 C max 0 28 Overall Error at 25 C 77 F max 0 2 Field Wiring to Logic Isolation 30V rated working 500V isolation Appendix A Hardware Reference A 6 Input Filter Response Times Discrete The input filter response time is the time from when the external input
429. on to operate when the correct protocol is active NOTE If DFl was the protocol used by the message instruction use 2 0 11 for the preceding logic DH 485 Active Write Message Ins S2 0 NEQ MSG eam Hees Not Equal Read Write Message EN 11 Source A T 0 0 Read Write Write DN 96 lt Target Device 500CPU ER Source B N7 25 Control Block N7 50 0 lt Control Block Length 7 tS Setup Screen 4 Rung 2 3 This rung monitors the message instruction for Done conditions When the message is done the enable bit is cleared allowing communication to run again The error retry bit is also used to reset the message if an error or lockup condition is encountered Write Message Write Message Done Enabled N7 50 N7 50 iain eaten NL E Faem Uj s lt lt 13 15 Message Error Retry Timer T4 9 a Ae DN Rung 2 4 This MOV instruction is used to set N7 25 to I 0 0 after the message is successfully transmitted This stops the message instruction in rung 2 2 from executing If I 0 0 changes the NEQ instruction in rung 2 2 triggers the message instruction to write data to the target device N7 25 is used in the comparison in rung 2 2 to enable or disable the message instruction from being processed Write Message Done COS Buffer Register N7 50 MOV
430. ond Example 2 1 channel enabled with 250 Hz filter selected Maximum Update Time ladder scan time 4 ms Input Channel Filtering The analog input channels incorporate on board signal conditioning The purpose of this conditioning is to reject the AC power line noise that can couple into an analog input signal while passing the normal variations of the input signal Frequency components of the input signal at the filter frequency are rejected Frequency components below the filter bandwidth 3 dB frequency are passed with under 3 dB of attenuation This pass band allows the normal variation of sensor inputs such as temperature pressure and flow transducers to be input data to the processor Noise signals coupled in at frequencies above the pass band are sharply rejected An area of particular concern is the 50 60 Hz region where pick up from power lines can occur 7 3 Chapter 7 Using Analog Converting Analog Data 7 4 The analog input circuits are able to monitor current and voltage signals and convert them to digital data There are six terminals assigned to the input channels that provide two voltage inputs two current inputs and two return signals commons The analog outputs can support either a current or voltage function There are three terminals assigned to the output channels that provide one voltage output one current output and a common shared terminal The following table shows sample An
431. ond 08H Target node cannot respond 09H Local modem connection has been lost OAH Buffer unavailable to receive SRD reply OBH Target node does not accept this type of MSG instruction OCH Received a master link reset Target node cannot respond because of incorrect command parameters or unsupported 10h command 15H Local channel configuration parameter error exists 18H Broadcast Node Address 255 is not supported 1AH Target node cannot respond because another node is file owner has sole file access 1BH Target node cannot respond because another node is program owner has sole access to all files 37H Message timed out in local processor 39H Message was discarded due to a communication protocol switch 3AH Reply from target is invalid 50H Target node is out of memory 60H Target node cannot respond because file is protected E7H Target node cannot respond because length requested is too large EBH Target node cannot respond because target node denies access ECH Target node cannot respond because requested function is currently unavailable FAH Targetnode cannot respond because another node is file owner has sole file access rgy Target node cannot respond because another node is program owner has sole access to all files Description of Error Condition Err
432. onitors the machine start and stop buttons and calls other subroutines necessary to run the machine Refer to the comments preceding each rung for additional information Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions Adding to File 2 Ladder Rungs Rung 2 0 Initializes the high speed counter each time that the RRUN mode is entered The high speed counter data area N7 5 N7 9 was chosen to correspond with the starting address source address of our HSL instruction Note that the HSC instruction is disabled each entry into the RRUN mode until the first time that it is executed as true The high preset was pegged on initialization to prevent a high preset interrupt from occurring during the initialization process 1 st Output Mask Pass only use bit 0 ie 0 0 0 Sri Gao li a A a SRS SaaS aaa SS Sa SS SS SS MOVE 15 Source 1 Dest N7 5 0 4 High Output Pattern turn off 0 0 0 MOV MOVE Source 0 Dest N7 6 0l 4 High Preset Value counts to next hole MOV MOVE Source 32767 Dest N7 7 0 4 Low output pattern turn on 0 0 0 each reset MOV MOVE names Source 1 Dest N7 8 0 4 Low preset value cause low preset int at reset MOV MOVE Source 0
433. only comparing Inputs 0 3 and are only asserting Outputs 0 3 per our Mask value FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 LDI RO FD 0 153 soc FILE NO MASK OOOFH SRC 10 CTRL RO LEN 9 POS 0000H 23 f ANI RO FD 0 152 SQO FILE N10 MASK OOOFH DEST O0 CTRL RO LEN 9 POS 0000H Appendix E Application Example Programs Bottle Line Example The following application example illustrates how the controller high speed counter is configured for an up down counter For a detailed explanation of e LD SET RST and OUT instructions see chapter 8 e GRT LES and GEQ instruction see chapter 9 e HSC and HSL instructions see chapter 14 Sensor IN 1 0 0 mame _Conveyor___ Conveyor Machine Conveyor Sensor OUT 1 0 1 Packing Machine Holding Area Stop FillO 0 0 Slow Pack 0 0 2 Slow FillO 0 1_ Bottle Line Operation Overview The controller on the conveyor within the specified area above regulates the speeds of the bottle fill and packing machines Each machine is connected to a separate controller that communicates with the conveyor controller The following ladder program is for the conveyor controller A conveyor feeds filled bottles past a proximity sensor IN to a holding area The proximity sensor is wired to the I O terminal up count of the conveyor controller The bottles are then sent on another conveyor past a proximity switch OUT to the p
434. ons press this key NS You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key Then if you want to edit that operand press DEL or FUN DEL and enter new parameters Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one If you want to edit the instruction s parameters once the entire instruction is entered you must go into the overwrite mode See page 17 4 Addressing Structure Address bits and words using the format shown below Format Explanation T Timer file e Element Ranges from 0 39 These are 3 word elements number See figure on previous page Te s b Subelement delimiter s Subelement PRE or ACC Bit delimiter b Bitnumber Addressing Examples TO EN Enable bit TO TT Timer timing bit TO DN Done bit TO PRE Preset value of the timer TO ACC Accumulator value of the timer TO PRE 0 Bit 0 of the preset value TO ACC 0 Bit 0 of the accumulator value 8 15 Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Timer On Delay TON Ladder representation TON TIMER ON DELAY EN Timer T4 0 Time Base 0 01 DN Preset 100 Accum 66 Execution Times usec when True False 38 34 30 38 To enter the function code press A Poh fee fen 8 16 Use the TON instruction to delay the turning on or off of an output The TON instruction begins to count timebase intervals when rung conditions become true As long as rung conditions remain t
435. or absence of a part on the part carrier is shifted into the Shift Register FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES Shift Limit Switch 1 0 0 114 FFU Unload color of previously painted part FIFO NO DEST N10 CTRL RO LEN 4 POS 4 113 FFL Load color of new part SRC N4 FIFO NO CTRL RO LEN POS 4 DA E 53 Appendix E Application Example Programs FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 150 BSL Load the presence of the new part FILE B0 CTRL R1 BIT E I LEN 4 File 2 Rung 4 If there is a part on the part carrier now entering the spraying area energize the paint sprayer If there is not a part on the part carrier do not energize the sprayer FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 f LD BSL Position 4 B 3 0 40 ad OUT Spray Enable 0 3 0 File 2 Rung 5 Decodes color select word If N7 0 1 then energize the blue paint gun Or if N7 0 an invalid color selection default the color of the part to blue and energize the blue paint gun FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 50 EQU LD EQU SRCA NO 0000H SRCB 1 73 _LIM_ OR LIM LOW 4 TEST NO 0000H HIGH 1 40 eT a OUT Blue Gun 0 0 0 File 2 Rung 6 Decodes color select word If N7 0 2 then energize the yellow paint gun FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 50 EQU LD EQU SR
436. or codes 1A and 1B valid for Series C discrete only Note For 1770 6 5 16 DF1 Protocol and Command Set users The MSG error code reflects the STS field of the reply to your MSG instruction Codes EO EF represent EXT STS codes 0 F Codes FO FC represent EXT STS codes 10 1C 15 11 Chapter 15 Using Communication Protocols Application Examples that Use the MSG Instruction 15 12 Example 1 Continuously Writing Data from a MicroLogix Controller In this example a communication link is created between two Series C or higher MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers where one controller is writing data to another The communication link is set up for continuous operation with automatic recovery Performance in logic is as fast as possible with the primary restriction being the communication link protocol DH 485 or DF1 full duplex and the baud rate Although the DH 485 protocol is demonstrated here this example can be used with either DH 485 or DF1 protocols To run this on DF1 you would only need to change the active protocol bit rung 2 2 the default primary protocol bit S2 0 10 in the status file and the message instruction variables For maximum possible communication performance throughput select DF1 full duplex running at 38 4k baud Rung 2 0 This rung monitors the write message instruction for errors or lockup conditions and restarts communication whenever the link becomes valid Lockup conditions a
437. or select word If N7 0 2 then energize the yellow paint gun Yellow Gun 200 s SS sSSs O30 EQUAL pocece ima aiaaaiaema aimeim aaa eiaaaeam aed J Source A N7 0 fiai 0 Source B 2 Rung 2 7 Decodes color select word If N7 0 3 then energize the red paint gun Source A N7 0 0 Source B 3 Appendix E Application Example Programs Spray Booth Instruction List Program File 2 Rung 0 These three rungs read the color information coming from the barcode decoder outputs and load this into integer N7 4 This color is loaded into the FIFO when the part carrier actuates the SHIFT LIMIT SWITCH FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 i LD Low Bit from Bar Code Decoder I 2 0 40 OUT Color Select Word N4 0 0 File 2 Rung 1 FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 LD Middle Bit from Bar Code Decoder 1 3 0 40 f is OUT Color Select Word N4 1 0 File 2 Rung 2 FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 LD Low Bit from Bar Code Decoder I 4 40 z Di OUT Color Select Word N4 2 0 File 2 Rung 3 When the part carrier actuates the SHIFT LIMIT SWITCH three things happen in this rung 1 the color of the previously painted part is unloaded from the FIFO to make room for the color of the new part 2 the color of the new part is loaded into the FIFO 3 the presence
438. ou can program any instruction inside the STI subroutine except a TND instruction IIM or IOM instructions are needed in an STI subroutine if your application requires immediate update of input or output points End the STI subroutine with an RET instruction 13 15 Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions 13 16 JSR stack depth is limited to three You may call other subroutines to a level three deep from an STI subroutine Interrupt Latency and Interrupt Occurrences Interrupt latency is the interval between the STI timeout and the start of the interrupt subroutine STI interrupts can occur at any point in your program but not necessarily at the same point on successive interrupts The table below shows the interaction between an interrupt and the controller operating cycle l STI Input Scan TA Program Scan gt Between instruction updates Output Scan gt Communication gt Between communication packets Controller Overhead j At start and end Events in the controller operating cycle Note that STI execution time adds directly to the overall scan time During the latency period the controller is performing operations that cannot be disturbed by the STI interrupt function Interrupt Priorities Interrupt priorities are as follows 1 User Fault Routine 2 High Speed Counter 3 Selectable Timed Interrupt An executing interrupt can only be interrupte
439. ou develop your application program Each process block represents one phase of program development Use the checklist at the right of the process block to help you identify the tasks involved with each process Program Development Process Design Functional Specification Perform Detailed Analysis Determine if Special Programming Features are Needed Create Logic Program Confirm 1 0 Addresses Enter E dit Program Check for Completeness Monitor Troubleshoot Program Start program in RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode Ooo O C L u Program Development Checklist Prepare a general description of how you want your automated process to operate Identify the hardware requirements Match inputs and outputs with actions of the process Add these actions to the functional specifications Do you need Special interrupt routines High speed counting features Sequencing Operations FIFO or LIFO stack operations Use worksheets if necessary to create program Make sure I O addresses match correct input and output devices Enter program using the MicroLogix 1000 HHP Review your functional specification and detailed analysis for missing or incomplete information The resulting program should match your functional specification Monitor and if necessary troubleshoot the program that you entered 6 17 I O Image Usin
440. ount encoder in N2 the RPM calculation for N5 would be 120 This equates to 2 encoder revolutions per second Refer to the calculation below RPM pulses 1 revolution 60 SEE 1 second pulses 1 minute 120RPM 2000 pulses 1 revolution i 60 Seconds 1 second 1000 pulses 1 minute E 40 Appendix E Application Example Programs To maintain validity you must ensure that you cannot accumulate more pulses per rate period than counts per revolution For example if you have selected a 1000 pulse encoder you cannot have more than 999 counts occur in any rate measurement period If you determine that you exceed this rule simply lower your Rate Measurement Period TO PRE RPM Calculation Ladder Program Rung 2 0 Ensures that the measurement value is initialized each RRUN mode entry Shift Last timeout Limit value storage Switch register 5 1 FOV eeaeee Sse sSS sass ssaa MOVE 15 Source C5 0 ACC Frequency determination counter C50 Counts last rate measurement period Frequency in Hertz period RPM based on counts per turn register N7 2 Rung 2 1 Sets the rate measurement period In this case we are calculating a new rate value once every 100ms Value N7 1 is updated once every 100ms with the number of counts that have occurred in the last 100ms period Note that the preset value must divide evenly into 100 in order to accurately determine frequency and RPM determined later in this pr
441. overflow otherwise reset Overflow occurs only if 32 768 is the source On overflow the minor error flag is also set The value 32 767 is placed in the destination If S14 is set then the unsigned truncated overflow remains in the destination 0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign S sets if result is negative otherwise resets Entering the Instruction P000 N11 You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area 7 P000 NEG SRC a2 2 8 6 i DEST FIFO and LIFO Instructions Overview Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions FIFO instructions load words into a file and unload them in the same order as they were loaded The first word in is the first word out LIFO instructions load words into a file and unload them in the opposite order as they were loaded The last word in is the first word out Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming these instructions Source is a word address or constant 32 768 to 32 767 that becomes the next value in the stack Destination Dest is a word address that stores the value that exits from the stack This Instruction Unloads the Value from FIFO s FFU First word LIFO s LFU The last word entered FIFO LIFO is the address of the stack It must be an indexed word address in the bit input output or integer file The HHP inserts the character aut
442. ow Format Explanation C Counter file i Element Ranges from 0 39 These are 3 word elements number See figure on page 8 21 Ce s b Subelement delimiter s Subelement PRE or ACC Bit delimiter b Bit number Important If assigned to a high speed counter instruction CO is not available as an address for any other counter instructions For more information on high speed counter instructions see chapter 14 Addressing Examples C0 CU Count up enable bit C0 CD Count down enable bit C0 DN Done bit CO0 OV Overflow bit CO0 UN Underflow bit e CO0 UA Update accumulator bit e CO PRE Preset value of the counter e C0 ACC Accumulator value of the counter e C0 PRE 0 Bit 0 of the preset value C0 ACC 0 Bit 0 of the accumulated value 8 23 Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Count Up CTU Ladder representation CTU COUNT UP Counter c5 0 Preset 120 Accum 0 CU DN Execution Times usec when True False 29 84 26 67 8 24 How Counters Work The figure below demonstrates how a counter works The count value must remain in the range of 32 768 to 32 767 If the count value goes above 32 767 or below 32 768 a counter status overflow OV or underflow UN bit is set A counter can be reset to zero using the reset RES instruction See page 8 27 Underflow ctu Count Up gt Counter Accumulator Value
443. own as LD SBR Use a subroutine to store recurring sections of program logic that must be executed from several points within your application program A subroutine saves memory because you program it only once Update critical I O within subroutines using immediate input and or output instructions IIM IOM especially if your application calls for nested or relatively long subroutines Otherwise the controller does not update I O until it reaches the end of the main program after executing all subroutines ATTENTION Outputs controlled within a subroutine remain in their last state until the subroutine is executed again 12 3 Chapter 12 Using Program Flow Control Instructions Nesting Subroutine Files Nesting subroutines allows you to direct program flow from the main program to a subroutine and then on to another subroutine You can nest up to eight levels of subroutines If you are using an STI subroutine HSC interrupt subroutine or user fault routine you can nest subroutines up to three levels from each subroutine The following figure illustrates how subroutines may be nested Main Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Program Subroutine File 6 Subroutine File 7 Subroutine File 8 6 SBR SBR SBR JSR 7 8 JSR JSR RET RET RET
444. p 0 0 0 8 32 Comparison Instructions Chapter Using Comparison Instructions This chapter contains general information about comparison instructions and explains how they function in your application program Each of the comparison instructions includes information on e what the instruction symbol looks like e typical execution time for the instruction e how to use the instruction how to enter the instruction In addition the last section contains an application example for a paper drilling machine that shows the comparison instructions in use al y Mnemonic pea Name Purpose Page eou LDEQU 50 Qu AND EQU 51 Equal Test whether two values are equal 9 3 EQUH OR EQU 52 EQ LD NEQ 53 EQ AND NEQ 54 Not Equal Test whether one value is not equal to a second value 9 4 NEQ H OR NEQ 55 LES LD LES 56 LES AND LES 57 Less Than Test whether one value is less than a second value 9 5 Les H OR LES 58 LEQ LD LEQ 59 eQ AND LEQ 60 ii or Test whether one value is less than or equal to a second value 9 6 woH ORLEQ 61 GRT LD GRT 62 GRT AND GRT 63 Greater Than Test whether one value is greater than another 9 7 cet ORGRT 64 GEQ LD GEQ 65 ceq AND GEQ 66 a Or Test whether one value is greater than or equal to a second value 9 8 ceo ORGEQ 67 Continued on following page Chapter 9 Using Comparison
445. p wait until the holding area is approximately 2 3 full before allowing the packer to run at full speed again Slow Pack Slow Pack GRT 0 0 0 0 GREATER THAN U Source A C5 0 ACC 2 2 ol Source B 200 4 Rung 2 4 Filling machine running too fast for the packing machine Slow down the filling machine to allow the packer to catch up Slow Fill TORD SS SS SSS 0 0 GREATER THAN L Source A C5 0 ACC 1 0 Source B 250 Rung 2 5 f the filler was slowed down to allow the packer to catch up wait until the holding area is approximately 1 3 full before allowing the filler to run at full speed again Slow Fill Slow Fill LEG s 5 5 555 0 0 erat LESS THAN U Source A C5 0 ACC 1 1 ol Source B 150 4 E 30 Appendix E Application Example Programs Rung 2 6 f the high speed counter reached its high preset of 350 indicates that the holding area reached maximum capacity it would energize 0 0 0 shutting down the filling operation Before re starting the filler allow the packer to empty the holding area until it is about 1 3 full HSC Interr Fill Stop due to High Preset C5 0 tho HSS SSeS 0 0 LESS T
446. p between the input value and the resulting scaled value The values in this graph are from the example program Figure A 1 20 mA 31207 scale Hi Scaled Value 4mA 6241 scale low 6292 31352 Low Value from card Hi Value from card Input Value Scaled Value vs Input Value Appendix F Optional Analog Input S oftware Calibration F 2 Calculating the Software Calibration Use the following equation to perform the software calibration Scaled Value input value x slope offset Slope scaled max scaled min input max input min Offset Scaled min input min x slope Calibration Procedure 1 Heat up cool down your MicroLogix 1000 system to the temperature in which it will normally be operating 2 Determine the scaled high and low values you wish to use in your application In this example scaled high value which corresponds to 20 mA is 31207 and scaled low value which corresponds to 4 mA is 6241 3 Using an analog calibration source connected to the analog input channel or your system s input device placed at the 4 mA position capture the low value by setting and then resetting the CAL_LO_ENABLE bit Ensure that your low value lies within the conversion range of your analog input 4 Using an analog calibration source connected to the analog input channel or your system s input device placed at the 20 mA position capture the high value by setting and then resetting the CAL_HI
447. pen when the relay is de energized or the switch is de activated They are closed when the relay is energized or the switch is activated In Instruction List programming a symbol that allows logic continuity flow if the referenced input is logic 1 when evaluated one shot A programming technique that sets a bit for only one program scan online Describes devices under direct communication For example when programming software is monitoring the program file in a controller operating voltage For inputs the voltage range needed for the input to be in the On state For outputs the allowable range of user supplied voltage output device A device such as a pilot light or a motor starter coil that receives data from the controller processor A Central Processing Unit See CPU program The set of program and data files used by the controller to control output devices Only one program may be stored in the controller at a time program data Provides data locations for output input status bit timer counter control and integer files program file The area within a program that contains controller information the main program interrupt subroutines and any subroutine programs program listing A report containing a range of program files or a range of rungs program mode When the controller is not executing the program and all outputs are de energized program scan A part of the controller s ope
448. ple 13 20 described in appendix E You will begin a subroutine in file 4 This portion of the subroutine tells the conveyor where to stop to allow a hole to be drilled The stop positions are different for each hole pattern 3 hole 5 hole 7 hole so separate sequencers are used to store and access each of the three hole patterns Important If you use a 16 I O controller only the 5 hole drill pattern can be used OPERATOR PANEL CO AA Stop 1 7 Change Drill Soon etange i Now Hole Selector 0 4 Switch Thumbwheel for Thickness in 1 4 Drill Reset 5 Hole el 3 Hole G 7 Hole 11 1 14 a 19 110 Drilled Holes cn Ee l a Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions Ladder Rungs Rung 4 0 Resets the hole count sequencers each time the low preset is reached The low preset has been set to zero to cause an interrupt to occur each time that a reset occurs The low preset is reached anytime that a reset C5 0 or hardware reset occurs This ensures that the first preset value is loaded into the HSC at each entry into the RRUN mode and each time that the external reset signal is activated interrupt 3 hole occurred preset due to sequencer low preset reached INT CSx R6 4 INTERRUPT SUBROUTINE Poa lease Se p RES 4 IL 5 hole preset sequencer R6 5 RES 7 hole preset sequencer R6 6 pamm RES Rung 4 1
449. ply is not needed if a MicroLogix 1000 controller is connected to port 2 i 1761 CBL AP 00 or 1761 CBL P M02 3 1761 NET AIC MicroLogix DH 485 Network DB 9 RS 232 port mini DIN 8 RS 232 port DH 485 port DF1 Isolated Modem Connection 1761 CBL AM00 or 1761 CBL HM02 Na MicroLogix 1000 Alc gt 2 3 AlC gt 1761 NET AIC 1 1 1747 CP3 24V de A or user supplied 1761 CBL AC00 Modem Selection Switch Up 24V dc Not needed in this configuration since the MicroLogix 1000 provides power to the AIC via port 2 User supplied cable 3 7 Chapter 3 Connecting the System Cable Selection Guide 3 C ial IDo 1747 CP3 U 1761 CBL AC00 JZ External A Cable Length Connections from to AlC Power Supply Power pei Suileh Required etting 1747 CP3 3m 9 8 ft SLC 5 03 or SLC 5 04 processor channel 0 portl yes external 1761 CBL ACOO 45 cm 17 7 in PC COM port port1 yes ext
450. point to point full duplex modem connections that do not require any modem handshaking signals to operate use DF1 full duplex protocol For point to multipoint modem connections or for point to point modem connections that require Request to Send Clear To Send RTS CTS handshaking use DF1 half duplex slave protocol In this case one and only one of the other devices must be configured for DF1 half duplex master protocol Do not attempt to use DH 485 protocol through modems under any circumstance Important Only Series D or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers support RTS CTS modem handshaking and only when configured for DF1 half duplex slave protocol with the control line parameter set to Half Duplex Modem No other modem handshaking lines i e Data Set Ready Carrier Detect and Data Terminal Ready are supported by any MicroLogix 1000 controllers Dial Up Phone Modems Dial up phone line modems support point to point full duplex communications Normally a MicroLogix 1000 controller on the receiving end of the dial up connection is configured for DF1 full duplex protocol The modem connected to the MicroLogix 1000 controller must support auto answer and must not require any modem handshaking signals from the MicroLogix 1000 i e DTR or RTS in order to operate The MicroLogix 1000 has no means to cause its modem to initiate or disconnect a phone call so this must be done from the
451. poll While executing the user program the controller firmware checks for user interrupts that need servicing watchdog timer A timer that monitors a cyclical process and is cleared at the conclusion of each cycle If the watchdog runs past its programmed time period it will cause a fault workspace The main storage available for programs and data and allocated for working storage write To copy data to a storage device For example the controller WRITEs the information from the output data file to the output devices Numbers 1761 HHP B30 features 4 2 1761 L10BWA features 1 2 grounding 2 1 input voltage range 2 8 mounting 1 12 output voltage range 2 8 preventing excessive heat 1 12 Spacing 1 12 troubleshooting 20 1 type 1 2 wiring 2 3 wiring diagram 2 8 1761 L10BWB features 1 2 grounding 2 1 input voltage range 2 11 mounting 1 12 output voltage range 2 11 preventing excessive heat 1 12 Spacing 1 12 troubleshooting 20 1 type 1 2 wiring 2 3 wiring diagram 2 11 1761 L16AWA features 1 2 grounding 2 1 input voltage range 2 6 mounting 1 12 output voltage range 2 6 preventing excessive heat 1 12 Spacing 1 12 troubleshooting 20 1 type 1 2 wiring 2 3 wiring diagram 2 6 1761 L16BBB features 1 2 grounding 2 1 input voltage range 2 15 mounting 1 12 output voltage range 2 15 preventing excessive heat 1 12 Spacing 1 12 troubleshooting
452. power up These bits allow control program to reset or recover from unexpected events e g errors power problems media problems Message Error Read Message Retry Timer Time Out T4 9 N7 60 ESS RA OO err DN 8 Chapter 15 Using Communication Protocols Rung 2 2 Read message with preceding logic It is STRONGLY recommended that bit S 2 0 11 active protocol bit be used to condition all message instructions This bit only allows the message instruction to operate when the correct protocol is active NOTE If DF1 was the protocol used by the message instruction use S2 0 11 for the preceding logic DH 485 Active Read Message Ins 2 0 MSG Read Write Message EN EL Read Write Read DN Target Device 500CPU ER Control Block N7 60 Control Block Length Tl Setup Screen 4 Rung 2 3 This rung monitors the message instruction for Done conditions When the message is done the enable bit is cleared allowing communication to run again The error retry bit is also used to reset the message if an error or lockup condition is encountered Read Message Read Message Done Enabled N7 60 N7 50 SaaS PaaS SaaS aaa hea a a a aa Ui s 13 15 Message Error Retry Timer T4 9 DN Rung 2 4 END
453. pressure plate This is particularly important at the four end terminal positions where the pressure plate does not touch the outside wall 20148i ATTENTION Be careful when stripping wires Wire fragments that fall into the controller could cause damage Do not strip wires above a mounted controller if the protective wrap is removed Protective Wrap remove after wiring ATTENTION Remove the protective wrap before applying power to the controller Failure to remove the wrap may cause the controller to overheat 2 4 Chapter 2 Wiring Your Controller ATTENTION Calculate the maximum possible current in each power and common wire Observe all electrical codes dictating the maximum current allowable for each wire size Current above the maximum ratings may cause wiring to overheat which can cause damage ATTENTION United States Only If the controller is installed within a potentially hazardous environment all wiring must comply with the requirements stated in the National Electrical Code 501 4 b Allow for at least 50 mm 2 in between I O wiring ducts or terminal strips and the controller Route incoming power to the controller by a path separate from the device wiring Where paths must cross their intersection should be perpendicular Important Do not run signal or communications wiring and power wiring in the same conduit Wires with different signal characteristics should be routed by separate paths
454. program scan time A Count the number of program rungs in your logic program and multiply by 6 B Add up your program execution times when all instructions are true Include interrupt routines in this calculation us 3 Estimate your controller scan time A Without communications add sections 1 and 2 us B With communications add sections 1 and 2 and multiply by 1 05 us 4 To determine your maximum scan time in ms divide your controller scan time by 1000 sa MS Ifa subroutine executes more than once per scan include each subroutine execution scan time B 21 Available File Types Appendix Valid Addressing Modes and File Types for Instruction Parameters This appendix lists all of the available programming instructions along with their parameters valid addressing modes and file types The following file types are available e Output Input Status Binary Aanwvsnreo Timer Counter Control e N Integer All file types are word addresses unless otherwise specified Appendix C Valid Addresssing Modes and File Types for Instruction P arameters Available Addressing Modes C 2 The following addressing modes are available e immediate e direct e indexed direct Immediate Addressing Indicates that a constant is a valid file type Direct Addressing The data stored in the specified address is used in the instruction For example N7 0 T4 8 ACC ST20 5 Indexed Dire
455. pter 14 8 21 Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions 8 22 Entering Parameters Accumulator Value ACC This is the number of false to true transitions that have occurred since the counter was last reset Preset Value PRE Specifies the value which the counter must reach before the controller sets the done bit When the accumulator value becomes equal to or greater than the preset value the done status bit is set You can use this bit to control an output device Preset and accumulated values for counters range from 32 768 to 32 767 and are stored as signed integers Negative values are stored in two s complement form Entering the Instructions The following items apply when entering the instructions e Whenever you see asterisks on the display the HHP is waiting for data entry i e a number e Ifyou see a down arrow on the display it means there are more options available To scroll through the options press this key NS e You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key lt Then if you want to edit that operand press DEL or FUN DEL and enter new parameters Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one Once the entire instruction is entered if you want to edit the instruction s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode See page 17 4 Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Addressing Structure Address bits and words using the format shown bel
456. ptions Refer to pages 2 20 through 2 22 for additional information on analog wiring 14 30V de VDC VDC mo ASE S ASSESS SSF Pe OP RR EPRE gt lt VDC Analog gt Channels ooooodddodddoudo OH OO OOOOOOOO 24V DC 1 0 1 1 2 3 DC ST COM DC OUT i L J COM 1 8 1 9 1 10 11 y 14 0 Al AACA D v v o IA 3 IA T 85 264 VAC 7 ay vac vac A VA WN A voc 0 0 voc VAC c NOT 0 1 voc 0 2 0 3 voc O 4 0 55 0 6 0 7 USED OA OA 0 OA 0 OA SHD V 1 OOOO COOOOOOOOO CO OO ele CR ols lso TR e e 2 VDC 2 VDC 2 COM COM COM VAC 1 VAC 1 COM VAC 2 VDC VAC 1761 L20BWA 5A Discrete Input Voltage Range Analog lt Channel a SHD IH IH b OV dc 5V dc 14V dc 26 4V dc 55 C 131 F OV dc 5V dc a dc 30V dc 30 C 86 F EZZ on 1761 L20BWA 5A Relay Output Voltage Range OVac 5Vac 264V ac OVde 5V de 125V dc ZZ Operating Range Chapter 2 Wiring Your Controller 1761 L20BWB 5A Wiring Diagram Sinking Input Configuration
457. pulses when a manual is in front of the drill and that the high speed counter is reset at the leading edge of each manual The high speed counter clears the conveyer drive output bit 0 0 each time a high preset is reached As a result the drive decelerates and stops the conveyer motor The high speed counter clears the output within microseconds ensuring accuracy and repeatability The high speed counter sets the conveyer drive output bit 0 0 each time a low preset is reached As a result the drive accelerates and maintains the conveyer motor When the manual has travelled the specified distance set by the high speed counter high preset value the high speed counter interrupt subroutine signals the main program to perform the drilling sequence For more information regarding the interrupt subroutine used in this program refer to the application example in chapter 13 This example uses the Quadrature Encoder with reset and hold instruction The high speed counter accumulator increments and decrements based on the quadrature relationship of the encoder s A and B inputs 1 0 and I 1 The accumulator is cleared to zero when the reset is activated or when the RES instruction is executed 14 32 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions All presets are entered as a relative offset to the leading edge of a manual The presets for the hole patterns are stored in the SQO instructions Refer to chapter 13 for the SQO instruc
458. put data file for I 6 as shown below For the input file type the character is automatically displayed by the MicroLogix 1000 HHP vojt fer 1 6 1 0 0000000000000000 Status Data File To access the math register TRACE 3 2 amp S 13 MATH REGL 0000H 18 27 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program Bit Data File Access the bit data file for B 8 as follows won 2 EHe 8 B 8 BO 0000000000000010 Timer Data File To view the Timer Enable Bit EN for TO NEW MON N a ANB al ORB gt gt ENT J L a S 1 time E 00 ENM TT1 gt P 10000 A 8946 Counter Data File To access the Accumulator Value ACC for C5 FON FAULT E e E Control Data File Access the Enable Bit EN for R12 as follows MON FOF gt gt ORB a ENT TES iS 6 times 18 28 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program Integer Data File To access integer data file N3 o e Changing the Radix Radix refers to the way numeric based information is displayed You can change the radix for output input bit and integer data files Since the displays for timer counter control and status data files are pre formatted the option of changing the radix is not available for those data files The radix choices are e binary default radix for output input and bit files e hexadecimal e decimal default radix for integer file Important When you exi
459. r e it received a MSG packet with a bad checksum No response indicates e either the Target Node is not there or e it does not respond because the MSG packet was corrupted in transmission When a NAK occurs the EW bit is cleared Note that the NR bit will only be set for DH 485 and NAK conditions An crror code 02H Target Node is busy is received which causes the NR bit to be set The ER bit is also set which indicates that the MSG instruction failed Monitor the NR bit If it is set indicating that the Target Node is busy you may want to initiate some other process e g an alarm or a retry later The NR bit is cleared when the rung logic preceding the MSG changes from false to true When an ACK occurs the Target Node sends one of three responses shown in Step 6 Following the successful receipt of the packet the Target Node sends a reply packet The reply packet will contain one of the following responses e Ihave successfully performed your write request e Ihave successfully performed your read request and here is your data e Ihave not performed your request because of an error At the next end of scan following the Target Node s reply the MicroLogix 1000 controller examines the MSG packet from the target device If the reply contains I have successfully performed your write request the DN bit is set and the ST bit is cleared The MSG instruction is complete If the MSG rung is false the EN bit is cleared
460. r Off Delay timer direct T element level Not Applicable time base immediate 0 01 or 1 00 preset contained in the 0 32 767 timer register accum contained in the 0 32 767 timer register TON Timer On Delay timer direct T element level Not Applicable time base immediate 0 01 or 1 00 preset contained in the 0 32 767 timer register accum contained in the 0 32 767 timer register XOR Exclusive OR address A immediate direct 0 1l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct address B immediate direct 0 1 5 B 1 C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct destination direct indexed direct 0 1 5 B T C R N Not Applicable Appendix Understanding the Communication Protocols Use the information in this appendix to understand the differences in communication protocols The following protocols are supported from the RS 232 communication channel e DFI Full Duplex and DF1 Half Duplex Slave All MicroLogix 1000 controllers support the DF1 full duplex protocol Series D or later discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers also support DF1 half duplex slave protocol Note that the MicroLogix 1000 HHP cannot be used to select or configure the DF1 half duplex slave protocol e DH 485 Series C or later discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers can communicate on DH 485 networks using an AIC Advanced Interface Converter For information about required network connecting equipment see chapter 3 Connecti
461. r drive bit 0 0 0 upon completion of the drilling sequence FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 oe LD interrupt occurred due to hi preset reached CO IH 0 41 SET Drill Sequence Start B 32 0 File 6 Rung 0 This section of ladder logic controls the up down motion of the drill for the book drilling machine When the conveyor positions the book under the drill the DRILL SEQUENCE START bit is set This rung uses that bit to begin the drilling operation Because the bit is set for the entire drilling operation the OSR is required to be able to turn off the forward signal so the drill can retract FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 I LD Drill Sequence Start B 32 0 29 OSR AND OSR Drill Subr OSR B 48 0 41 L SET Drill Forward 0 3 0 E 19 Appendix E Application Example Programs File 6 Rung 1 When the drill has drilled through the book the body of the drill actuates the DRILL DEPTH limit switch When this happens the DRILL FORWARD signal is turned off and the DRILL RETRACT signal is turned on The drill is also retracted automatically on power up if it is not actuating the DRILL HOME limit switch FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 I LD Drill Depth LS r 4 0 20 LD 1 st Pass 81 15 0 23 t ANI Drill Home LS 1 5 0 14 ORB 42 U RST Drill Forward 0 3 0 41
462. r input filter response time for these controllers will not change the response time of the inputs However your response times given by your software will not show the actual times Also the Input Filter Modified Bit S5 13 will be set when the controller is in run or test mode The minimum and maximum response times associated with each input filter setting can be found on page A 6 To change the input filter settings 1 Put the controller in RPRG mode if it is not already in that mode 2 Access the program configuration menu 3 Arrow up to the option INPUT FILTERS and select it fen E INPUTS 0 AND 1 INPUTS 2 AND 3 3 times WY Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program Scroll up or down to the input group you want to change and select it The following display appears gt 8 00 MSEC 16 00 MSEC Scroll to the response time you want and select it Repeat steps 3 and 4 as needed then return to the home screen eso ese esc You must accept your program edits for this change to take affect For information on accepting edits see page 18 21 18 13 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program Selecting the Filter Setting for Analog Input Channels This option allows you to select the filter setting for the analog input channels The same setting is used for all four channels To change the filter setting for analog input channels 1 Put the controller in RPRG m
463. r source Installing and Attaching the AIC 1 Take care when installing the AIC in an enclosure so that the cable connecting the MicroLogix 1000 controller to the AIC does not interfere with the enclosure door 2 Carefully plug the terminal block into the DH 485 port on the AIC you are putting on the network Allow enough cable slack to prevent stress on the plug 3 Provide strain relief for the Belden cable after it is wired to the terminal block This guards against breakage of the Belden cable wires When you connect a MicroLogix 1000 controller it automatically determines which protocol is active DF1 or DH 485 and establishes communication accordingly Therefore no special configuration is required to connect to either network However to shorten the connection time you can specify which protocol the controller should attempt to establish communication with first This is done using the Primary Protocol bit S 0 10 The default setting for this bit is DF1 0 If the primary protocol bit is set to DF1 the MicroLogix 1000 controller will attempt to connect using the configured DF1 protocol either full duplex or half duplex slave To have the controller first attempt DH 485 communication set this bit to 1 For DH 485 networks that will only contain MicroLogix controllers at least one controller must have its primary protocol bit set to 1 so that the network can be initialized DeviceNet Communications Chapter 3
464. r the function code press A Dg a And Block ANB and Or Block ORB Ladder representation ANB 1 E 1 gl DoH a woo A ORB Execution Times usec ANB 0 40 ORB 0 40 To access the ANB instruction press ANB 8 12 Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area P000 MPP The example below illustrates when you would enter the MPP instruction Instruction List NEW RUNG LDa OUT b 1 7 MPS ANDc OUT d 2 2 MPP OUTe ANB and ORB are block connecting instructions These instructions connect two blocks of instructions in series or in parallel and produce an result that is used in the remaining execution of the rung Using ANB The ANB instruction is used to make a series connection of circuit blocks with two or more contacts A series connection of circuit blocks with one contact requires only an AND or ANI instruction See page 16 1 Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area P000 ANB To access the ORB instruction press ORB Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions The example below illustrates when you would enter the ANB instruction Instruction List NEW RUNG LDa d OR b LD c OR d 1 ANB OUTe Using O
465. ram monitor functional area As you enter the instruction you can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key Q7 Then if you want to edit that operand press DEL or FUN DEL and enter new parameters Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one Once the entire instruction is entered if you want to edit the instruction s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode See page 17 4 11 7 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions To enter the function code press P000 DCD A ANB w adil P000 DCD DEST N12 0000H Encode 1 of 16 to 4 ENC When the rung is true this output instruction searches the source from the lowest to the highest bit and looks for the first set bit The corresponding bit Ladder representation position is written to the destination as an integer as shown in the table ENC below ENCODE 1 of 16 to 4 Source N7 11 0000000000000000 Dest N7 23 0000 Source Destination Execution Times usec when i 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 15 04 03 02 01 00 True False 54 80 6 78 OrFPKKXKXKKMM KRM MH KH MM OH COFRFKXKXKKMM KM MH KH MM OH COOFKKKMAMK MM KRM M KH SPOCDORPKKKKKKXK MM KK SPODDOORFKKKKKXKXK KKK SPODDOOFKKKKXKXK KKK SAODDCOCOOF XK KKK KK KK SPODDDDCDOOHKFKKXKKKKKK SPODDDDODOOOF XK KKK KK SPODDDDDOOCOOF XK KK KK SPODDDDDCDCOOOF Kk K XK K SPODDDDDDDOCOOOF kK XK K ooo0oo0o0o00000000PKKX ooo0oo0oo0o000000000PX ooo0oo0o
466. range 2 14 mounting 1 12 output voltage range 2 14 preventing excessive heat 1 12 spacing 1 12 troubleshooting 20 1 type 1 2 wiring 2 3 wiring diagram 2 14 1761 L32AWA features 1 2 grounding 2 1 input voltage range 2 7 mounting 1 12 output voltage range 2 7 preventing excessive heat 1 12 Spacing 1 12 troubleshooting 20 1 type 1 2 wiring 2 3 wiring diagram 2 7 1761 L32BBB features 1 2 grounding 2 1 input voltage range 2 16 mounting 1 12 output voltage range 2 16 preventing excessive heat 1 12 Spacing 1 12 troubleshooting 20 1 type 1 2 wiring 2 3 wiring diagram 2 16 1761 L32BWA features 1 2 grounding 2 1 input voltage range 2 10 mounting 1 12 output voltage range 2 10 preventing excessive heat 1 12 Spacing 1 12 troubleshooting 20 1 type 1 2 wiring 2 3 wiring diagram 2 10 1761 L32BWB features 1 2 grounding 2 1 input voltage range 2 13 mounting 1 12 output voltage range 2 13 preventing excessive heat 1 12 Spacing 1 12 troubleshooting 20 1 type 1 2 wiring 2 3 wiring diagram 2 13 32 bit addition and subtraction 10 6 example 10 6 instruction list program 10 7 ladder representation 10 7 math overflow selection bit 2 14 10 6 A accepting your program edits 18 21 accessing additional characters HHP keypad 4 5 accessing the program normal operation 6 6 power up 6 7 accessories and replacement parts A 11 Ad
467. rating cycle During the scan the ladder program is executed and the Output data file is updated based on the program and the Input data file Glossary protocol The packaging of information that is transmitted across a network read To acquire data from a storage place For example the controller READSs information from the input data file to solve the program relay An electrically operated device that mechanically switches electrical circuits relay logic A representation of the program or other logic in a form normally used for relays restore To download transfer a program from a personal computer to a controller reserved bit A status file location that the user should not read or write to retentive data Information associated with data files timers counters inputs and outputs in a program that is preserved through power cycles Program files 2 15 are not effected by retentive data RRUN mode remote mode during which the controller scans or executes the logic program monitors input devices energizes output devices and acts on enabled I O forces RS 232 An EIA standard that specifies electrical mechanical and functional characteristics for serial binary communication circuits A single ended serial communication interface run mode When the program in the controller is being executed inputs are read the program is scanned and outputs are energized and de energized rung Ladder logic is c
468. rce C5 0 ACC 0 Dest N7 0 0 4 Determine 1 second count ie of rate periods DIV DIVIDE Source A 100 Source B T4 0 PRE 10 Dest C5 1 PRE 10 4 Frequency determination counter TOUS S SSS SSS See a ea Se Sa SSeS Sa COUNT UP CU F Counter C5 1 DN Preset 10 Accum 0 4 Frequency calculation register ADD ADD Source A N7 1 0 Source B N7 3 0 Dest N7 3 0 4 E 42 Appendix E Application Example Programs 1 second Frequency has now in Hertz elapsed C5 1 MOV MOVE 4 4 DN Source N7 Frequency calculation register Frequency determination counter Temporary reg math reg is real destination MULTIPLY Source A N7 4 0 Source B 60 RPM based on counts per turn register N7 2 DOUBLE DIVIDE Source N7 2 Math overflow error bit HIGH SPEED COUNTER CU Type Up Res Hld CD Counter C5 0 DN High Preset 1000 Accum ol E 43 Appendix E Application Example Programs E 44 RPM Calculation Instruction List Program F
469. rd in the file to be copied You must use the file indicator in the address The HHP inserts the character automatically e Destination is the address of the first word in the file where the data is to be stored You must use the file indicator in the address The HHP inserts the character automatically Length is the number of words or elements in the file to be copied See the table below If the destination file type is a n then you 2an specify a maximum length of Discrete Analog Output 1 5 Input 2 8 Status 33 Bit 32 Timer 40 Counter 32 Control 16 Integer 105 Important The maximum lengths apply when the source is of the same file type 11 10 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions All elements are copied from the source file into the destination file each time the instruction is executed Elements are copied in ascending order If your destination file type is a timer counter or control file be sure that the destination words corresponding to the status elements of your source file contain zeros Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area The following items apply when entering the instruction e Whenever you see asterisks on the display the HHP is waiting for data entry i e a number e You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key Noy
470. re situations that may arise if the communication path is somehow corrupted Some examples would be power lost at destination device or a cut cable Error conditions are typically caused from noise on the communication link faulty device s on the network etc Write Message Message Error Message Retry Timer No Response Retry Timer N7 50 T4 9 TON stool SSsScSoc pecten TIMER ON DELAY EN 9 DN Timer T4 9 DN Write Message Time Base 0 01 Error Preset 100 lt N7 50 Accum 0 lt 4 12 Write Message Start N7 50 t a 14 Rung 2 1 The Time Out bit TO associated with each message instruction is used to clear the controllers communication buffer and message instruction Setting these bits basically places the controllers communication section in the same condition as when the controller power up These bits allow control program to reset or recover from unexpected events e g errors power problems media problems Message Error Write Message Retry Timer Time Out T4 9 N7 50 t ee ee DN 8 Chapter 15 Using Communication Protocols Rung 2 2 Write message with preceding logic It is STRONGLY recommended that bit S2 0 11 active protocol bit be used to condition all message instructions This bit only allows the message instruction to operate when the correct protocol
471. re than one indexed address in your ladder program When you specify indexed addresses follow these guidelines e Make sure the index value positive or negative does not cause the indexed address to exceed the file type boundary e When an instruction uses more than two indexed addresses the controller uses the same index value for each indexed address e Set the index word to the offset value you want immediately before enabling an instruction that uses an indexed address The controller starts operation at the base address plus the offset ATTENTION Instructions with a sign in an address manipulate the offset value stored at S24 Make sure you monitor or load the offset value you want prior to using an indexed address Otherwise unpredictable machine operation could occur with possible damage to equipment and or injury to personnel Entering the Character When entering addresses you can access the indexed address symbol by pressing the key sequence shown below A DEH Example of Indexed Addressing As an example a Masked Move MVM instruction uses an indexed address in the source and destination addresses If the offset value is 10 stored in S24 the controller manipulates the data stored at the base address plus the offset See the table below Value Base Address H in Offset Address Source N10 10 N20 Destination N50 10 N60 6 9 Chapter 6 Programming Overview 6 10 Addressing Fil
472. rectly correspond to the physical outputs The high source is applied when the high preset is reached The low source is applied when the low preset is reached The final output states are determined by applying the output source over the mask and updating only the unmasked outputs those with a 1 in the mask bit pattern You can always change the state of the outputs via the user program or programming device regardless of the output mask The high speed counter only modifies selected outputs and output image bits based on source and mask bit patterns when the presets are reached The last device that changes the output image i e user program or high speed counter determines the actual output pattern ATTENTION Forces override any output control from either the high speed counter or from the output image Forces may also be applied to the high speed counter inputs Forced inputs are recognized by the high speed counter e g a forced count input off and on increments the high speed accumulator The high speed counter hardware is updated immediately when the HSL instruction is executed regardless of high speed counter type Up Counter or Bidirectional Counter For the Up Counters the last two registers are ignored since the low preset does not apply 14 17 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions 14 18 If a fault occurs due to the HSL instruction the HSL parameters are not loaded to the high speed counter hardware
473. red This type of protocol supports simultaneous transmissions between two devices in both directions DF1 protocol controls message flow detects and signals errors and retries if errors are detected DF1 Full Duplex Configuration Parameters When the system mode driver is DF1 Full Duplex the following parameters can be changed Parameter Options Default Toggles between the communication rate of 300 600 1200 2400 paua Ra 4800 9600 19200 and 38400 2600 Valid range is 0 254 decimal for MicroLogix 1000 Series C and later Node Address discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog Not configurable for 1 icroLogix 1000 Series A and B discrete Parity None No Parity Stop Bits None 1 Error Detection None CRC DLE NAK _ received None N retries DLE ENQ Pe received one N retries ACK Timeout None ls Duplicate Packet Detection None Enabled Control Line None No Handshaking Embedded Responses None Enabled Applicable only to MicroLogix 1000 Series D or later discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers If retentive communication data is lost default is 1200 for MicroLogix 1000 Series A B or C discrete only For MicroLogix 1000 Series D or later discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog if retentive communication data is lost baud rate defaults to 9600 N 255 for MicroLogix 1000 Series A and B discrete N 6 for MicroLogix 1000 Series C and later discrete and all MicroLogix 1000
474. requirements If the mask is a file its length will be equal to the length of the sequencer file The two files track automatically e Source is the address of the input word or file for a SQC from which the instruction obtains data for comparison to its sequencer file Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions e Destination is the address of the output word or file for a SQO to which the instruction moves data from its sequencer file Important You can address the mask source or destination of a sequencer instruction as a word or file If you address it as a file using file indicator the instruction automatically steps through the source mask or destination file e Control SQO SQC is the control structure that stores the status byte of the instruction the length of the sequencer file and the current position in the file You should not use the control address for any other instruction 15 13 11 08 00 Word 0 EN DN ER FD Word 1 Length of sequencer file Word 2 Position Status bits of the control structure include Found Bit FD bit 08 SQC only When the status of all non masked bits in the source address match those of the corresponding reference word the FD bit is set This bit is assessed each time the SQC instruction is evaluated while the rung is true Error Bit ER bit 11 is set when the controller detects a negative position value or a negative or zero l
475. result is larger than 9999 On overflow the minor error flag is also set 0 2 Zero Z sets if destination value is zero 0 3 Sign S sets if the source word is negative otherwise resets Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area As you enter the instruction you can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key LY Then if you want to edit that operand press DEL or FUN DEL and enter new parameters Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one Once the entire instruction is entered if you want to edit the instruction s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode See page 17 4 11 2 To enter the function code press A a S 5 Convert from BCD FRD Ladder representation FRD _ FROM BCD Source N7 14 0000 Dest N7 12 0 Execution Times usec when True False 56 88 5 52 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions P000 TOD DEST 13 00000000H Changes to the Math Register Contains the 5 digit BCD result of the conversion This result is valid at overflow Important To convert numbers larger than 9999 decimal the destination must be the Math Register S13 You must reset the Minor Error Bit S5 0 to prevent an error Use this instruction to convert BCD values to integer values The source parameter can be a word address in a data file or it can be the math reg
476. rget Device 500CPU ER Control Block N7 60 Control Block Length 7 Setup Screen 4 15 19 Chapter 15 Using Communication Protocols Rung 2 3 This rung monitors the message instruction for Done conditions When both messages are done both messages are reset allowing the sequence to be restarted in the next scan The error retry bit is also used to reset both messages if an error or lockup condition is encountered Read Message Write Message Write Message Done Done Enabled N7 60 N7 50 N7 50 asss sam I SS a j f 13 13 15 Message Error Read Message Retry Timer Enabled T4 9 N7 60 tees See foo UO aS DN 15 Rung 2 5 a END 15 20 Programming Examples Chapter Instruction List Programming This chapter uses programming examples to teach you instruction list programming The chapter also lists programming considerations In the section Applying Logic to Your Schematics page 6 11 you learned the concepts behind ladder logic You were also shown the instruction list Boolean equivalent of a simple rung of logic This section builds on that by showing you some more rung examples and their equivalent instruction list s Important Although the rung examples shown here use only bit instructions you can apply the methodology that is shown to any of the instructions you learne
477. riptions and classifications are listed on the following pages Categories are power up errors going to run errors run errors download errors Appendix B Programming Reference Each fault is classified as one of the following e Non User A fault caused by various conditions that cease logic program execution The user fault routine is not run when this fault occurs e Non Recoverable A fault caused by the user that cannot be recovered from The user fault routine is run when this fault occurs However the fault cannot be cleared e Recoverable A fault caused by the user that can be recovered from in the user fault routine by resetting major error halted bit S1 13 The user fault routine is run when this fault occurs Refer to chapter 20 for more information regarding MicroLogix 1000 HHP advisory messages Fault Classification User Error Non Address ra Power up Errors Non User Recoverable Recoverable s6 0001 The default program was x loaded 0002 Unexpected reset occurred X EEPROM memory is 1003 corrupt x A fatal internal programming 0008 device error occurred A A fatal internal hardware 9009 error occurred A Fault Classification User Error Going to Run GTR l Non Address Code Errors Non User Recoverable Recoverable Hex S6 0005 Retentive data is lost X The downloaded program is Doae nota controller program Startup prot
478. rithmetic status bits 10 11 valid addressing modes C 9 valid file types C 9 Start of File screen 17 1 Start of Rung SOR symbol 17 2 Start of Rung screen 17 2 start up protection setting 18 6 status file descriptions B 2 overview B 1 Status file S 6 4 STD Selectable Timed Disable 13 17 STE Selectable Timed Enable 13 17 STI enabled bit setting 18 10 STI setpoint setting 18 9 storing programs power down 6 6 power up 6 7 saving 6 5 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual to a memory module 19 3 STS Selectable Timed Start 13 18 SUB Subtract 10 5 Subroutine SBR 12 3 entering the instruction 12 5 execution times 12 3 function code 12 5 instruction parameters C 8 ladder representation 12 3 nesting subroutine files 12 4 using 12 5 valid addressing modes C 8 valid file types C 8 Subtract SUB 10 5 entering the instruction 10 5 execution times 10 5 function code 10 5 instruction parameters C 10 ladder representation 10 5 updates to arithmetic status bits 10 5 valid addressing modes C 10 valid file types C 10 surge suppressors 1 7 example 1 8 for contactor 1 9 for motor starters 1 9 for relays 1 9 recommended 1 9 SUS Suspend 12 7 Suspend SUS 12 7 entering parameters 12 7 entering the instruction 12 7 execution times 12 7 function code 12 7 instruction parameters C 10 ladder representation 12 7 valid addressing mod
479. rogram configuration menu 2 Arrow up to the option STI SETPOINT and select it fen STI SETPOINT x10 ms 0 6 times 3 Type in a new setpoint 4 Enter the setpoint and return to the home screen JEE 18 9 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program Setting the STI Enabled Bit This selection determines if execution of the STI is allowed When this bit is set to NO execution of the STI is not allowed When this bit is set to YES execution of the STI is allowed provided the STI setpoint is non zero If reset when an interrupt occurs the STI subroutine does not execute and the STI Pending bit is set The STI Timer continues to run when this bit is disabled The STE instruction sets this bit The STD instruction clears this bit To change the bit setting 1 Put the controller in RPRG mode if it is not already in that mode 2 Access the program configuration menu 3 Arrow up to the option STI ENABLED and select it 5 times STI ENABLED OYES ENO 4 Select the option YES and return to the home screen gt OE 5 You must accept your program edits for this change to take affect For information on accepting edits see page 18 21 18 10 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program Selecting the Watchdog Scan This byte value contains the number of 10 ms ticks allowed during a program cycle The default value is 10 100 ms but you can increase this to 255
480. roller Recommended Surge Suppressors We recommend the Allen Bradley surge suppressors shown in the following table for use with Allen Bradley relays contactors and starters Suppressor Catalog Device Coil Voltage Number Bulletin 509 Motor Starter 120V ac 599 K04 Bulletin 509 Motor Starter 240V ac 599 KA04 Bulletin 100 Contactor 120V ac 199 FSMA1 Bulletin 100 Contactor 240V ac 199 FSMA2 Bulletin 709 Motor Starter 120V ac 1401 N10 Bulletin 700 Type R RM Relays ac coil None Required Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 12V dc 700 N22 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 12V dc 700 N28 Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 24V de 700 N10 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 24V de 700 N13 Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 48V dc 700 N16 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 48V dc 700 N17 Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 115 125V dc 700 N11 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 115 125V dc 700 N14 Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 230 250V dc 700 N12 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 230 250V dc 700 N15 Bulletin 700 Type N P or PK Relay 150V max ac or DC 700 N24 Miscellaneous electromagnetic devices limited to 35 sealed VA ISOM max acor DC ae Safety considerations are an important element of proper system installation Actively thinking about the safety of yourself and others as well as the condition of your equipment is of primary importance We recommend reviewing the following safety considerations Disconnecting Main Power ATTENTION Explosion Hazard
481. rollers that the Program Supports The CONTROL VERSION option allows your program to access the communication functions of Series C D MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers Important The control version function is only available when the Micro Term is attached to a series C D discrete controller containing a series A B program It is not available when the Micro Term is attached to an analog controller To change the default setting ML A B 1 Put the controller in RPRG mode if it is not already in that mode 2 Access the program configuration menu Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program 3 Arrow up to the option CONTROL VERSION and select it 1 time SET TYPE ML C D YES ENT NO ESC 4 Press ENT to select support of Series C D discrete controllers Press ESC to continue support of Series A and B discrete controllers Important You cannot revert a program back to Series A or B discrete controller support once you ve configured it for Series C D discrete controller support 5 Return to the home screen eso eso 6 You must accept your program edits for this change to take affect For information on accepting edits see page 18 21 18 19 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program Accepting Your Program Edits There are two ways you can accept the edits made to your program Both of Changing Controller Modes 18 20 these methods initiate the verification and s
482. rom the top of the first program file and searches down through all of the files If the search option cannot find the address you enter the message NOT FOUND is displayed Searching for an Address That is Displayed You can search for the address that is currently displayed on the MicroLogix 1000 HHP by pressing the key shown here SEARCH N The table below shows the functional areas from which the search can be invoked and from where in the program the search begins From this Functional Area The Search Begins From the current display and searches down to the last program file Search does not Program Monitor wrap around from the last file to the first file Data Monitor top of the first program file and searches Multi P oint down through all of the files If the search option cannot find the displayed address the message NOT FOUND appears Chapter 17 Entering and Editing Your Program Searching for Bit Addresses Versus Word Addresses The following table outlines whether a search finds a bit address or a word address when searching from the home screen program monitor or multi point functional areas If the address entered or displayed is a bit address Then the search finds only bit instructions referencing that bit word address only word instructions referencing that word The table below shows whether a search finds a bit address or a word address when searching fro
483. ror Code Advisory Message Description Recommended Action Hex 0001 HARDWARE The HHP encountered a Disconnect the HHP from the FAILURE ROM RAM or keypad micro controller then reconnect 0002 failure it If the error persists record the error code and contact your 0003 local Allen Bradley representative 0004 NO CONTROLLER The HHP cannot Disconnect the HHP from the establish a micro controller then reconnect communication link to it If the error persists record the micro controller the error code and contact your local Allen Bradley representative 0006 MEM MOD MISSING The HHP cannot Disconnect the HHP from the establish a connection to micro controller Then either the memory module reconnect it or replace the memory module in the HHP with a new one 20 3 Chapter 20 Troubleshooting Your System 20 4 Communication Error Messages E a Advisory Message Description Recommended Action 1000 ILLEGAL COMMAND A communication error Disconnect the HHP from the has occurred between micro controller then reconnect the HHP and the micro it If the error persists record controller the error code and contact your local Allen Bradley representative 5000 ILLEGAL ADDRESS During download the Disconnect the HHP from the HHP has written data micro controller then reconnect beyond a file boundary in it Ifthe error persists record the micro controller the error code
484. ror Message Retry Timer No Response Retry Timer N7 50 T4 9 TON 3 Ss555 St eas S 5 pS TIMER ON DELAY EN F 9 DN Timer T4 9 DN Write Message Time Base 0 01 Error Preset L N7 50 Accum 0 4 4 12 Write Message Start N7 50 14 Rung 271 The Time Out bit TO associated with each message instruction is used to clear the controllers communication buffer and message instruction Setting these bits basically places the controllers communication section in the same condition as when the controller power up These bits allow control program to reset or recover from unexpected events e g errors power problems media problems Message Error Write Message Retry Timer Time Out T4 9 N7 50 F a J p DN 8 Rung 2 2 Write message with report by exception RE COS is used to only transmit data information when some type of change has occurred time data etc logic Chapter 15 Using Communication Protocols or change of state COS This type of communications is extremely beneficial on networks because any time you can limit unnecessary traffic on a network delays is improved protocol bit be used to condition all message instructions your ability to send information without It is STRONGLY recommended that bit S2 0 11 active This bit only allows the message instructi
485. rotection fault routine the Major Error Fault S6 will contain the value 0016H To change the bit setting 1 Put the controller in RPRG mode if it is not already in that mode 2 Access the program configuration menu 3 Arrow down to the option START PROTECT and select it a le 4 times START PROTECT OYES ENO 4 Select the option YES and return to the home screen gt enr ese esc 5 You must accept your program edits for this change to take affect For information on accepting edits see page 18 21 18 6 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program Setting the Fault Override Bit If the controller is faulted while in RRUN mode this selection determines whether or not the controller attempts to clear the errors at power up When this bit is set to No after power is cycled in the controller you must manually clear the faults that occurred while in RRUN mode When this bit is set to YES the controller automatically clears any major and minor errors on power up and then attempts to enter RRUN mode when power is applied To change the bit setting 1 Put the controller in RPRG mode if it is not already in that mode 2 Access the program configuration menu 3 Arrow down to the option FLT OVERRIDE and select it a le 5 times FLT OVERRIDE OYES ENO 4 Select the option YES and return to the home screen CWS enr eso esc 5 You must accept your
486. rrent output range Analog Voltage Input Range 24V dc 10 i dc 10 5V dc 24V dc AAA Vrae ne 7777 Operating Range IA 7 E A der Analog Current Input Range 50 mA 21 mA 21 mA 50 mA TALIA TS Z777 A _Underran e YL Operating Range Wz SEMEL Note The analog voltage inputs are protected to withstand the application of 24V dc without damage to the controller The analog current inputs are protected to withstand the application of 50 mA without damage Analog Voltage Output Range OV de 10V dc Operating Range Analog Current Output Range 4 mA 20 mA Operating Range Note The analog outputs are protected to withstand the short circuiting of the voltage or current outputs without damage to the controller For information on analog signal and data word values using the nominal transfer function formula see page 7 4 2 22 Wiring Your Controller for High Speed Counter Applications Chapter 2 Wiring Your Controller To wire the controller for high speed counter applications use input terminals I O I 1 I 2 and I 3 Refer to chapter 14 for information on using the high speed counter Shielded cable is required for high speed input signals 0 3 when the filter setting is set to either 0 10 ms or 0 075 ms We recommend Belden 9503 for lengths up to 305 m 1000 ft Shields should be grounded only at the signal source end of the cable Ground the shield to the case of the s
487. rs If this bit is not set the controller powers up in the previous mode it was in before losing power unless the controller was in REM test mode If the controller was in REM test mode when power was removed the controller enters REM program mode when power is applied This bit overrides any faults existing at power down ATTENTION Setting the Run Always bit causes the controller to enter the REM RUN mode if an unexpected reset occurs regardless of the mode that the controller was in before the reset occurred Unexpected resets may occur due to electromagnetic noise improper grounding or an internal controller hardware failure Make sure your application is designed to safely handle this situation 1 13 Major Error Halted Dynamic Configuration Address is not shown in HHP data monitor This bit is set by the controller any time a major error is encountered The controller enters a fault condition Word S 6 the Fault Code contains a code that can be used to diagnose the fault condition Any time bit 1 13 is set the controller either places all outputs in a safe state outputs are off and energizes the fault LED blinking orenters the user fault routine with outputs active if in REM Run mode allowing the fault routine ladder logic to attempt recovery from the fault condition If the user fault routine determines that recovery is required clear 1 13 using ladder logic prior to exiting the
488. rs following each of these Key or Key Sequence Operation If the controller is in RRUN RCSN or RSSN the bit is forced a Off and the data file bit remains forced until the force is removed FON If the controller is in RRUN RCSN or RSSN the bit is forced e On and the data file bit remains forced until the force is removed A A or A fte Affects the cursored external input address It removes the set force from the data file if applicable Other forces are unaffected ee Affects all forced external input bit addresses and external output circuits It removes set forces from all external input bit addresses and output circuits The displays below show an example of setting a force while in Run or Test mode R000 FR 1 6 Initial conditions Bit is Off 0 No forces exist Bit is On i No forces exist FON Bitis On 1 Force is On Rooo FH FOF aitisor Force is Off Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program Forcing an External Output Circuit A forced external output circuit is independent of the internal logic of the program and the output data file Setting forces on output circuits affects only the output circuit Set forces do not affect the output data file or the program logic The effects of set forces can be seen from the program monitor and the data monitor functional areas only while in RRUN RCSN and RSSN
489. rt 1 connection from or port 2 port 1 or port 2 1761 CBL AM00 to MicroLogix or 1761 CBL HM02 AIC 1761 NET AIC 7 2 1761 CBL AP 00 1761 CBL AP 00 or 1761 CBL PM02 or 1761 CBL PM02 3 ACH J 1761 NET AIC 7 24V dc user supply needed if not connected ij to a MicroLogix 1000 controller 2aV de aa user supplied CRI MicroLogix DH 485 Network 161C BLAGO Typical 3 Node Network PanelView 550 MicroLogix 1000 Series C or later discrete or all analog j lt e OF EENEN 1761 CBL HM02 RJ 45 port AIC 1761 NET AIC Pc 1761 CBL AS09 3 r 2 1761 CBL AS03 E Selection Switch Up 3 Node Network J not expandable 24V de Z Not needed in this configuration since the 1747 CP3 or 1761 CBL AC00 MicroLogix 1000 provides power to the AIC via port 2 DB 9 RS 232 port mini DIN 8 RS 232 port DH 485 DF 1 port D 15 Appendix D Understanding the Communication Protocols Networked Operator Interface Device and MicroLogix Controller PanelView 550 gy m m ma PC m Eee goooe ET RS 232 port PC to port
490. rtant Do not bring in unfiltered outside air Place the controller in an enclosure to protect it from a corrosive atmosphere Harmful contaminants or dirt could cause improper operation or damage to components In extreme cases you may need to use air conditioning to protect against heat build up within the enclosure The following figure shows the recommended minimum spacing for the controller Refer to appendix A for controller dimensions Top B A Greater than or equal to 50 8 mm 2 in Side E ii Side B Greater than or equal to 50 8 mm 2 in 8 000000 A me A Bottom B 20142 This equipment is suitable for Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D or non hazardous locations only when product or packaging is marked ATTENTION Explosion Hazard eSubstitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2 eThis product must be installed in an enclosure All cables connected to the product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other means The controller should be mounted horizontally within an enclosure using a DIN rail or mounting screws Copy the template from page A 8 to help you space and mount the controller properly Chapter 1 Installing Your Controller ATTENTION Be careful of metal chips when drilling mounting holes for your controller Drilled fragments that fall into the controller could cause damage Do not drill holes above a mounted co
491. rther control the outputs Four different examples of output branching with conditions are provided for you Study each example to get a better understanding of when you need to use multiple output circuit connecting instructions MPS MRD and MPP in your output branches See page 8 10 for more information regarding the use of these instructions Chapter 16 Instruction List Programming Example 1 Multiple output circuit that does not require connecting instructions Optimized NEW RUNG LDa OUT b AND c OUT d Option 1 NEW RUNG LDa OUT b LDc ANB OUT d Example 2 This example requires MPS and MPP connecting instructions f Optimized NEW RUNG LD a MPS AND b OUT c MPP OUT d Option 1 NEW RUNG LDa MPS LD b ANB OUT c MPP OUT d Example 3 This example also requires MPS and MPP instructions Optimized NEW RUNG LD a OUT b 7 MPS AND c OUT d 2 MPP OUT e Option 1 NEW RUNG LDa MPS OUT b MRD AND c OUT d MPP OUT e Example 4 This example requires all three output circuit connectors MPS MRD and MPP Optimized NEW RUNG LDa 7 MPS AND b OUT c 2 MRD AND d OUTe 3 MPP AND f OUT g Option 1 NEW RUNG LDa MPS LDb ANB O
492. ruction to multiply one value source A by another source B and place the result in the destination Source A and B can either be a word address or a constant however both sources cannot be a constant The destination must be a word address If the result is larger than 32 767 or smaller than 32 767 16 bits the 32 bit result is placed in the math register Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S0 0 Carry C always resets sets if overflow is detected at destination otherwise resets On overflow the minor error flag is also set The value S0 1 Overflow V 32 768 or 32 767 is placed in the destination If S 2 14 math overflow selection bit is set then the unsigned truncated overflow remains in the destination S0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign S sets if result is negative otherwise resets Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area Po00 MUL SRCA N4 0 Po00 MUL SRCB s0 P000 MUL DEST N6 0 Changes to the Math Register The math register contains the 32 bit signed integer result of the multiply operation This result is valid at overflow Divide DIV Ladder representation DIV DIVIDE Source A 100 Source B T4 0 PRE 100 Dest C5 1 PRE 120 Execution Times usec when True False 147 87 6 78 To enter the function code press
493. rue the timer increments its accumulated value ACC each scan until it reaches the preset value PRE The accumulated value is reset when rung conditions go false regardless of whether the timer has timed out Using Status Bits PeR And Remains Set Until One This Bit Is Set When of the Following i accumulated value is equal to i Timer Done Bit DN bit 13 or greater than the preset value rung conditions go false Timer Enable Bit EN bit14 rung conditions are true rung conditions go false rung conditions are true and i Timer Timing Bit TT bit15 the accumulated value is less t en ae or than the preset value when the done bitis set Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area P000 TON ADDR T 0 P000 TON PRE 1 0 0 P000 TON ACC 066 P000 TON BASE 0 01 SEC Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Once instruction entry is complete the parameters are condensed to two screens as shown here P000 TON P 100 A P000 TON 0 01 SEC When the controller changes from the RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode to the RPRG mode or user power is lost while the instruction is timing but has not reached its preset value the following occurs e Timer Enable EN bit remains set e Timer Timing TT bit remains set e Accumulated value ACC remains the same On returning to the RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode the following can happen Condition Result EN
494. rue Count Up Turning Off On or Off to On On Turning Off Off True Count Down NA NA Off On a NA False Hold Count uring O NA A Of On of on NA Hold Count urning O Off On or Off On or Turning Off NA Turing Off NA NA Hold Count NA A Turning On NA NA Reset to 0 NA Not Applicable Bidirectional Counter Up down count Input Stat TPU Siale High Speed Input Up Input Down HSC Rung Counter Action Count 1 0 Count 1 1 Turning Off On or Off to On Turning Off um Count Up Off On or Turning Turning Off Off to On Trug Count Dawn NA NA False Hold Count NA Not Applicable Bidirectional Counter with Reset and Hold Up down count Input State High Speed Input Up Input Down Input Reset Input Hold Counter Count V0 Count 11 2 1 3 HSC Rung Action Turning Off On or Off On or Off to On Turning Off Turning Off o Tryg Count Up Off On or Turning Off On or Turning Off Off to On Turning Off o True Ount DOWD NA NA off On or NA False Hold Count urning O NA NA Of Onor on NA Hold Count urning O Off On or Off On or Off On or Turning Off Turning Off Turning Off NA NA Hold Count NA NA Turning On NA NA Reset to 0 NA Not Applicable 14 11 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions 14 12 When up and down input pulses occur simultaneously the high speed counter counts up then down Using the Bidirectional Counter with Reset and Hold with a Quadrature Encoder T
495. ry is complete P01 4 sao B1 P014 sao MASK OFOFH P014 sao DEST 00 0022H P014 sao L Destination 00 External Outputs 15 8 7 0 Associated with 00 0000 0101 0000 1010 00 01 ON Mask Value OFOF 02 15 8 7 0 03 ON 0000 1111 0000 1111 06 07 Sequencer Output File B1 08 ON Word Step 09 B1 0000 0000 0000 oo00 0 10 ON 2 1010 0010 1111 0101 1 E 3 2 Current Step 13 4 0101 0101 0101 0101 3 14 5 0000 1111 0000 1111 4 15 13 9 Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions Using SQC When the status of all non masked bits in the source word match those of the corresponding reference word the instruction sets the found bit FD in the control word Otherwise the found bit FD is cleared The bits mask data when reset and pass data when set The mask can be fixed or variable If you enter a hexadecimal code it is fixed If you enter an element address or a file address for changing the mask with each step it is variable When the rung goes from false to true the instruction increments to the next step word in the sequencer file Data stored there is transferred through a mask and compared against the source for equality While the rung remains true the source is compared against the reference data for every scan If equal the FD bit is
496. s 12 2 function code 12 3 instruction parameters C 6 ladder representation 12 2 using 12 2 valid addressing modes C 6 valid file types C 6 LBL Label 12 2 LCD display changing the contrast 4 18 LD Load 8 3 LDI Load Inverted 8 4 LDT Load True 8 6 LEDs 20 1 error with controller 20 2 normal controller operation 20 1 LEQ Less Than or Equal 9 6 LES Less Than 9 5 Less Than LES 9 5 AND LES entering the instruction 9 5 execution times 9 5 function code 9 5 instruction parameters C 6 ladder representation 9 5 valid addressing modes C 6 valid file types C 6 LD LES entering the instruction 9 5 execution times 9 5 function code 9 5 instruction parameters C 6 ladder representation 9 5 valid addressing modes C 6 valid file types C 6 OR LES entering the instruction 9 5 execution times 9 5 function code 9 5 instruction parameters C 6 ladder representation 9 5 valid addressing modes C 6 valid file types C 6 Less Than or Equal LEQ 9 6 AND LEQ entering the instruction 9 6 execution times 9 6 function code 9 6 instruction parameters C 6 ladder representation 9 6 valid addressing modes C 6 valid file types C 6 LD LEQ entering the instruction 9 6 execution times 9 6 function code 9 6 instruction parameters C 6 ladder representation 9 6 valid addressing modes C 6 valid file types C 6 OR LEQ entering the instruction 9 6 execution times 9 6 function code
497. s 6 10 DIV Divide 10 9 Divide DIV 10 9 changes to the math register 10 9 entering the instruction 10 9 execution times 10 9 function code 10 9 instruction parameters C 4 ladder representation 10 9 updates to arithmetic status bits 10 9 valid addressing modes C 4 valid file types C 4 Double Divide DDV 10 10 changes to the math register 10 10 entering the instruction 10 10 execution times 10 10 function code 10 10 instruction parameters C 4 ladder representative 10 10 updates to arithmetic status bits 10 10 I 13 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual l 14 valid addressing modes C 4 valid file types C 4 editing accepting edits 18 21 modes 17 3 append 17 3 overwrite 17 4 searching for specific addresses 17 8 your program 17 1 editing considerations 17 3 Electronics Industries Association EIA D 1 EMC Directive 1 1 emergency stop switches 1 4 ENC Encode 1 of 16 to 4 11 8 Encode 1 of 16 to 4 ENC 11 8 entering parameters 11 8 entering the instruction 11 9 execution times 11 8 function code 11 9 instruction parameters C 4 ladder representation 11 8 updates to arithmetic status bits 11 9 valid addressing modes C 4 valid file types C 4 End of File screen 17 2 entering and running a program 5 4 changing to run mode 5 7 entering the new program 5 4 data monitor 18 26 numeric constants 6 10 program monitor 17 1
498. s ENT APPLY COMMS YESTENT NO TESC 7 Accept the communication settings ENT APPLYING COMMS RESETTING UNIT The MicroLogix 1000 HHP resets itself to the new communication settings and runs through the power up sequence DF1 half duplex slave protocol for Series D discrete or Series A Note You cannot use the MicroLogix 1000 HHP to select or configure the analog MicroLogix 1000 controllers 19 9 Understanding the Controller LED Status Refer to the following key to determine the status of the LED indicators L Indicates the LED is OFF HM Indicates the LED is ON L Indicates the LED is FLASHING Status of LED does not matter Troubleshooting Your System This chapter describes how to troubleshoot your controller Topics include understanding the controller LED status identifying HHP errors using the trace feature controller error recovery model identifying controller faults recovering your work calling Allen Bradley for assistance Between the time you apply power to the controller and the time it has to establish communication with a connected programming device the only form of communication between you and the controller is through the LEDs When Operating Normally When power is applied only the power LED turns on and remains on as shown on the left in the figure below This is part of the normal power up sequence When the controller is placed in RRUN mode the run LE
499. s bit is ever set upon execution of the END or TND instruction major error 0020 is declared To avoid this type of major error from occurring examine the state of this bit following a math instruction ADD SUB MUL DIV DDV NEG SCL TOD or FRD take appropriate action and then clear bit 5 0 using an OTU instruction with 5 0 S5 1 Reserved NA NA 5 2 Control Register Error Dynamic Configuration Address is not shown in HHP data monitor The LFU LFL FFU FFL BSL BSR SQO SQC and SQL instructions are capable of generating this error When bit 5 2 is set it indicates that the error bit of a control word used by the instruction has been set Appendix B Programming Reference Address Bit Classification Description 5 2 Control Register Dynamic If this bit is ever set upon execution of the END or TND Error Configuration instruction major error 0020 is declared To avoid this type of major error from occurring examine the state of this bit following a control register instruction take appropriate action and then clear bit S 5 2 using an OTU instruction with 5 2 5 3 Major Error Dynamic When set the major error code S 6 represents the major Detected While Configuration error that occurred while processing the fault routine due to Executing another major error user fault routine S5 4 to S5 7 Reserved NA NA 5 8 Retentive Data Status This bit is se
500. s placed in series with any previous input CEQ AND GES 66 instruction in the current rung or block TERNE is placed in parallel with any previous in GEQ OR CEQ 4 put instruction in the current rung or block You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area The example below shows how to enter the LD GEQ instruction Use the same procedure to enter the other GEQ instructions only substitute the function code with one from the table above P000 HGEQr SRCA N11 0 P000 HGEQr SRCB 100 Masked Comparison for Equal MEQ Ladder representation MEQ MASKED EQUAL Source N7 11 Mask 0000H Compare 100 Execution Times usec when True False LD MEQ 28 39 7 69 AND MEQ 28 79 8 09 OR MEQ 28 79 8 09 To enter the function code press N Fut i Gi ens Chapter 9 Using Comparison Instructions Use the MEQ instruction to compare data of a source address with data of a reference address Use of this instruction allows portions of the data to be masked by a separate word Entering Parameters e Source is the address of the value you want to compare e Mask is the address of the mask through which the instruction moves data The mask can be a hexadecimal value constant e Compare is an integer value or the address of the reference If the 16 bits of data at the source address are equal to the 16 bits of data at the compare address less masked bits t
501. sage gt Saale Message Follow these steps to manually clear a fault 1 From any of the functional areas access the fault display FAULT PRE LEN FLT 0020H MINOR ERR AT END If you press this key and a fault does not exist the message NO MAJOR FAULT is displayed Press any key to return to the previous screen 20 11 Chapter 20 Troubleshooting Your System 20 12 2 Clear the fault FLT 0020H CLEARING After the fault is cleared the HHP returns to the screen that was displayed prior to accessing the fault display Automatically Clearing Faults You can automatically clear a fault when cycling power to the controller by setting either one or both of the following status bits in the status file e Fault Override at Powerup bit S1 8 e Run Always bit S1 12 ATTENTION Clearing a fault using the Run Always bit S1 12 causes the controller to immediately enter the RRUN mode Make sure you fully understand the use of this bit before incorporating it into your program Refer to page B 4 for more information Also refer to chapter 5 for information pertaining to retentive data Refer to appendix B for more information on status bits Important You can declare your own application specific major fault by writing your own unique value to S6 and then setting bit S1 13 to prevent reusing system defined codes The recommended values for user defined faults is FFOO to FFOF Using the Fault Rout
502. se resets Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To enter the function code press P000 OR SRCA A ANB 4 4 2 amp ii 11 19 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions Exclusive Or XOR The value at source A is Exclusive ORed bit by bit with the value at source B and then stored in the destination Ladder representation Truth Table XOR BITWISE EXCLUS OR Dest A XOR B Source A 255 A B Dest Source B N7 0 160 0 0 0 Dest N7 0 1 0 1 100 0 1 1 1 1 0 Execution Times usec when True False Source A and B can either be a word address or a constant however both sources cannot be a constant The destination must be a word address 33 64 6 92 Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit S0 0 Carry C The Controller always resets S0 1 Overflow V always resets S0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign S sets if result is negative most significant bit is set otherwise resets Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To enter the function code press P000 XOR SRCA A ANB P000 N 0 P000 N 0 11 20 XOR SRCB 100 XOR DEST 100 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions Not NOT The source value is NOTed bit by bit
503. se the bit remains cleared When a STI high speed counter or Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of 0 2 is restored when execution resumes 0 3 Sign Status This bit is set by the controller when the result of certain math or data handling instructions is negative Otherwise the bit remains cleared When a STI high speed counter or Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 3 is restored when execution resumes S0 4 to S0 7 Reserved NA NA Address S0 8 Bit Extend 1 0 Configuration Classification Static Configuration Appendix B Programming Reference Description This bit must be set by the user when unused outputs are written to If reset and unused outputs are turned on the controller will fault 41H 50 9 Reserved NA NA 50 10 Primary Protocol Static Configuration This bit defines the protocol that the controller initially uses when attempting to establish communication where 0 DF1 default setting 1 DH 485 S0 11 Active Protocol Status This bit is updated by the controller during a protocol switch It indicates which protocol is currently being used for communication where 0 DF1 1 DH 485 50 12 Selected DF1 Protocol Status This bit allows the user to determine which DF 1 protocol is configured where 0 DF1 Full Duplex default sett
504. seconds approx seconds user words beams Instruction Type FFL 33 67 61 13 1 50 FIFO Load Data Handling FFU 34 90 i position 1 59 FIFO Unload Data Handling FLL 6 60 26 86 3 62 word 1 50 Fill File Data Handling FRD 5 52 56 88 1 00 Convert from BCD Data Handling AND GEQ 7 00 24 00 145 GEQ LD GEQ 6 60 23 60 1 50 Greater Than orEqual Comparison OR GEQ 7 00 24 00 1 75 AND GRT 7 00 24 00 1 75 GRT LD GRT 6 60 23 60 1 50 Greater Than Comparison OR GRT 7 00 24 00 1 75 HSC 21 00 21 00 1 00 High Speed Counter High Speed Counter High Speed Counter HSD 7 00 8 00 1 25 nterrupt Disable High Speed Counter High Speed Counter i HSE 7 00 10 00 1 25 nterrupt Enable High Speed Counter HSL 7 00 66 00 1 50 oi apan Counter High Speed Counter IIM 6 78 35 72 1 50 i d Input with Program Flow Control INT LD INT 0 99 1 45 0 50 nterrupt Subroutine Application Specific IOM 6 78 41 59 1 50 A Output with Program Flow Control JMP 6 78 9 04 1 00 ump to Label Program Flow Control JSR 4 25 22 24 1 00 ump to Subroutine Program Flow Control LBL LD LBL 0 99 1 45 0 50 Label Program Flow Control LD 1 72 1 54 0 75 Load Basic LDI 1 72 1 54 0 75 Load Inverted Basic LDT n a 1 54 0 75 Load True Basic AND LEQ 7 00 24 00 1 75 LEQ LD LEQ 6 60 23 60 1 50 Less Than or Equal Comparison OR LEQ 7 00 24 00 1 75 AND LES 7 00 24 00 1 75 LES LD LES 6 60 23 60 1 50 Less Than Comparison OR LES 7 00 24 00 1 75 LFL 33 67 61 13 1 50 LIFO Load Data Handling LFU 35 08 64 20 1 50 LIFO Unload Data
505. serai trnesiai ennea eana nae teen DE VUNA 5 12 Chapter 6 Principles of Machine Control aaan 6 1 Understanding File Organization ccc cece eee eee eens 6 3 Understanding How Programs are Stored and Accessed 6 5 Addressing Data Files 0 ccc eee eee ees 6 7 Applying Logic to Your Schematics 0 0 ccc eee ee eee 6 11 Developing Your Logic Program A Model cece cece eee eens 6 17 Chapter 7 VO MMGIS caiu ceeeetnudene ea a geen cones ee wae worse DRN 7 1 VO Configuration sr ican n a aduntinkys ceideer ddan A 7 2 Input Filter and Update Times n nunu 7 2 CONVETING Analig Dat ssis cei duh tended snte s bien tiak bd cece 7 4 Chapter 8 About Basic Instructions naasa 8 2 Bit Instructions Overview 11 cece eee tee tee teens 8 3 Load LD And AND and Or OR acc 8 3 Load Inverted LDI And Inverted ANI and Or Inverted ORI 8 4 Load True LDT and Or True ORT 00 cece etc eee eee eens 8 6 One Shot Rising OSR cas ease yeneaeseWeeieus ee yekeae ee esas 8 7 Using Comparison Instructions Using Math Instructions WF o Mo MOL NCA MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual UU OUT cates aa beauties cha Gawek eae a hd 8 8 SOUISE TONG Reset RST egiari eek ik wh ened eee weed 8 8 Branch Instructions Overview jis 44045 ud cev een debve teddas Seen ees 8 9 Memory Push MPS Memory Read MRD and Memory Pop MPP 8 10 And Block AN
506. set 30 3 Sign S otherwise resets Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To enter the function code press P000 MOV SRC A ANB Esje e E 1 0 6 P000 MOV DEST 00 0000H 11 15 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions Masked Move MVM Ladder representation MVM __ MASKED MOVE Source B3 0 Mask FOFO Dest B3 2 Execution Times usec when True False 33 28 6 78 The MVM instruction is a word instruction that moves data from a source location to a destination and allows portions of the destination data to be masked by a separate word As long as the rung remains true the instruction moves the data each scan Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Source is the address of the data you want to move e Mask is the address of the mask through which the instruction moves data the mask can be a hex value constant e Destination is the address where the instruction moves the data Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry C always resets S0 1 Overflow V always resets 0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign S sets if result is negative otherwise resets Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To enter the function code pre
507. set in the SQCs control counter Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To enter the function code press 7 P014 FILE A e ls P014 sac oa eee wee FFFOH P014 sac DEST 0 P014 sac CTRL R3 P014 sac LEN ek kK ek ke E 4 P014 sac POS t kK ke ke e 2 13 10 Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions Operation The operation of the SQC instruction is shown in the figure below The screens shown above the figure are the condensed screens that appear after instruction entry is complete P014 sac B8 P014 sac MASK FFFOH P014 sac SRC 0 0000H P014 sac L 4 Input Word 10 0010 0100 1001 1101 y Mask Value FFFO LLUN ILAT LLIT 0000 y Sequencer Ref File B8 Word Step B8 0 9 1 10 2 11 3 12 4 The SQC FD bit is set when the instruction detects that an input word matches thru mask its corresponding reference word The FD bit R3 FD is set in this example since the input word matches the sequencer reference value using the mask value 13 11 Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions Sequencer Load SQL The SQL instruction stores 16 bit data into a sequencer load file at each step of sequencer operation The source of this data can be an I O or internal Ladder represent
508. set when the controller detects a negative position value or a negative or zero length value When the ER bit is set the minor error bit S2 is also set Both bits must be cleared Done Bit DN bit 13 is set after the instruction has operated on the last word in the sequencer load file It is reset on the next false to true rung transition after the rung goes false Enable Bit EN bit 15 is set on a false to true transition of the SQL rung and reset on a true to false transition 13 12 Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To enter the function code press P014 SQL AN TRORA RONO ILL P014 SQL R4 P01 4 SQL LEN tee RR Y P014 SQL POS ek kK ek k 2 13 13 Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions 13 14 Operation The operation of the SQL instruction is shown in the figure below The screens shown above the figure are the condensed screens that appear after instruction entry is complete Input word IO is the source Data in this word is loaded into integer file N30 by the sequencer load instruction P014 SQL FILE N30 0 P014 SQL SRC 1 0 0000H P014 SQL R04 L 4 P 2 External Inputs Associated with 10 00 01 ON Source 10 02 15 8 7 0 lt ON 0000 0101 0000 1010 05 06 07 Sequencer Load File N30 0
509. site of the remote modem D 7 Appendix D Understanding the Communication Protocols D 8 Leased Line Modems Leased line modems are used with dedicated phone lines that are typically leased from the local phone company The dedicated lines may be in a point to point topology supporting full duplex communications between two modems or in a point to multipoint topology supporting half duplex communications between three or more modems In the point to point topology configure the MicroLogix 1000 controllers for DF1 full duplex protocol as long as the modems used do not require DTR or RTS to be high in order to operate In the point to multipoint topology configure the MicroLogix 1000 controllers for DF1 half duplex slave protocol with the control line parameter set to Half Duplex Modem Radio Modems Radio modems may be implemented in a point to point topology supporting either half duplex or full duplex communications or in a point to multipoint topology supporting half duplex communications between three or more modems In the point to point topology using full duplex radio modems configure the MicroLogix 1000 controllers for DF1 full duplex protocol as long as the modems used do not require DTR or RTS to be high in order to operate In the point to point topology using half duplex radio modems or point to multipoint topology using half duplex radio modems configure the MicroLogix 1000 controllers for DF1 half duplex sla
510. sor The allowable range of the node address of an initiator is 0 to 31 The allowable address range for all responders is 1 to 31 There must be at least one initiator on the network D 9 Appendix D Understanding the Communication Protocols D 10 DH 485 Configuration Parameters When the system mode driver is DH 485 Master the following parameters can be changed Parameter Description Default Baud Rate Toggles between the communication rate of 9600 and 19200 19200 This is the node address of the processor on the DH 485 network The Node Address 1 valid range is 1 31 This is the maximum node address of an active processor fixed at 31 Max Node Set the node addresses of the devices on the network to low sequential 31 Address numbers for best network performance Then set the maximum node address to the value of the last node Token Hold Determines the number of transactions allowed to make each DH 485 y 1 Factor token rotation fixed at 1 DH 485 Network Initialization Network initialization begins when a period of inactivity exceeding the time of a link dead timeout is detected by an initiator on the network When the time for a link dead timeout is exceeded usually the initiator with the lowest address claims the token When an initiator has the token it begins to build the network The network requires at least one initiator to initialize it Building a network begins when the initiator that c
511. spari ena a h AEA A 7 Hand Held Programmer Specifications oaa A 9 Controller and Hand Held Programmer Accessories and Replacement Parts A 11 Programming Reference Valid Addressing Modes and File Types for Instruction Parameters Understanding the Communication Protocols Application Example Programs Optional Analog Input Software Calibration Table of Contents MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual Appendix B Controller Status File ccc dcvese checetedversieiesdes eectisye nets B 1 FUNCION COTES sre wii ae ao hie Saga owe sre a ete a we inate Gene woe a B 13 Instruction Execution Times and Memory Usage 0 000 ee B 16 Appendix C Available File Types 0 ccc cece cece t eee teen eees C 1 Available Addressing Modes 0 0 cece eee tees C 2 Appendix D RS 232 Communication Interface 1 2 cee eee D 1 DFE Full Duplex Protocol ux cvivsiws poses eee ka teaduaaeet ened eres D 2 DF1Half Duplex Slave Protocol oo cece cece eee eee eens D 4 DH 485 Communication Protocol o2cuciacscdsciecas chaedes aa wae D 9 Appendix E Paper Drilling Machine Application Example 0 cece eee eee E 2 Time Driven Sequencer Application Example 0 ccc cece eee ees E 25 Event Driven Sequencer Application Example 0c cece eee eens E 27 BOWS Line EXAMDIC wc cuwads oe cue adead wwe wee dame wee oa ee dae Se E 29 Appendix F Calibrating an Analog Input Channel 0c ce
512. speed counter interrupt is saved but is considered pending The PE bit is set The second interrupt is executed immediately after the first one is finished executing If a high speed counter interrupt occurs while a high speed counter interrupt is pending the most recent high speed counter interrupt is lost and the LS bit is set Using HSD Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area Operation The HSD instruction disables the high speed counter interrupt preventing the interrupt subroutine from being executed If the HSE is subsequently executed after the pending bit is set the interrupt is executed immediately This HSD instruction does not cancel an interrupt but results in the pending bit CO PE being set when e A high or low preset is reached e An overflow or underflow occurs Update High Speed Counter Image Accumulator OUT Ladder representation c5 0 q H UA Execution Times usec when True False 12 00 7 00 To enter the OUT instruction press OUT 1 What Happens to the HSC When Going to RRUN Mode Chapter 14 Using High Speed Counter Instructions When an OUT bit instruction is addressed for the high speed counter C0 UA bit the value in the hardware accumulator is written to the value in the image accumulator CO ACC This provides you with real time access to the hardware accumulator value This is in addition to the au
513. speed counter interrupt routine file 4 to determine why the interrupt occurred e High Speed Counter Interrupt Pending Bit PE bit 3 is set to indicate that a high speed counter interrupt is waiting for execution This bit is cleared by the controller when the high speed counter interrupt routine begins executing This bit is reset if an RAC or RES instruction is executed Do not write to this bit e High Speed Counter Interrupt Lost Bit LS bit 2 is set if an high speed counter interrupt occurs while the PE bit is set You can reset this bit with an OTU instruction or by executing an RAC or RES instruction e High Speed Counter Interrupt Enable Bit IE bit 1 is set when the high speed counter interrupt is enabled to run when an high speed counter interrupt condition occurs It is reset when the interrupt is disabled This bit is also set when the high speed counter is first configured Do not write to this bit Use this instruction to configure the high speed counter Only one HSC instruction can be used in a program The high speed counter is not operational until the first true execution of the HSC instruction When the HSC rung is false the high speed counter is disabled from counting but all other HSC features are operational The Counter address of the HSC instruction is fixed at CO After the HSC is configured the image accumulator is updated with the current hardware accumulator value every time the HSC instruction is evaluated
514. splayed 20 9 addresses that you enter 20 9 bit versus word addresses 20 9 troubleshooting automatically clearing faults 20 12 contacting Allen Bradley for assistance P 6 20 16 controller error recovery model 20 10 determining controller faults 20 1 identifying controller faults 20 11 keys you use 4 4 manually clearing faults 20 11 power failure 20 16 recovering your work 20 16 understanding the controller LED status 20 1 using the fault routine 20 12 U understanding addressing 6 7 file organization 6 3 how programs are stored and accessed ladder logic programs 6 11 the HHP keys context sensitivity 4 4 up counter operation 14 7 overview 14 5 up counter with reset and hold operation 14 7 overview 14 5 Update High S peed Counter Image Accumulator OUT 14 23 entering the instruction 14 23 execution times 14 23 ladder representation 14 23 operation 14 23 updating the high speed counter accumulator 14 23 user interrupt latency B 20 user password 18 2 using the trace feature 20 8 V valid addressing modes C 2 varistors example 1 8 recommended 1 8 viewing data table files 18 28 W watchdog scan setting 18 11 what to do first 5 1 wire types 2 3 wiring analog controllers 2 17 your controller for high speed counter applications 2 23 wiring analog channels 2 21 wiring diagrams 1761 L10BWA 2 8 1761 L10BWB 2 11 1761 L16AWA 2 6 1761 L16BBB
515. ss P000 MVM SRC A ANB meae e Lee oot 11 16 Po00 MVM DEST 82 0000H Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions Operation When the rung containing this instruction is true data at the source address passes through the mask to the destination address See the following HHP displays and figure Poo MVM SRC Bo 5555H Pood MVM Mask FOF OH P000 MVM DEST B 2 FFFFH B2 before move a S e S S S A E S E O S O S S source BO 0101010101010101 Mask FOFO 1111000011110000 B2 after move 0101111101011111 Mask data by setting bits in the mask to zero pass data by setting bits in the mask to one The mask can be a constant value or you can vary the mask by assigning a direct address Bits in the destination that correspond to zeros in the mask are not altered 11 17 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions And AN D The value at source A is ANDed bit by bit with the value at source B and then stored in the destination This instruction differs from the AND input Ladder representation instruction discussed in chapter 8 AND _ BITWISE AND Truth Table Source A 255 Dest A ANDB Source B N7 0 100 A B Dest Dest N7 0 0 0 0 100 I 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 Execution Times usec when True False 34 001 6 78 Source A and B can either be a word address or a constant however both sources cannot be a constant The
516. ss into the multi point list 1 Access the multi point functional area r MT PT B The dashed lines represent open points on the list where addresses can be entered If some addresses have already been entered to your program s list the display will have Os or Is in place of some or all of the dashed lines 18 30 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program 2 Arrow to the position you want to enter an address This can be any open point on the list 3 Bring up a prompt to enter the address A p ko k k k k MP ADDR 4 Enter the address of the bit you want to monitor I 3 is shown here as an example Cea eer The address is added to the multi point list at the location you selected in step 2 Automatically Entering Addresses You can use short cut keys to add a bit address to the multi point list Follow the steps below 1 While in either the program monitor or the data monitor arrow to the bit address you want to add to the multi point list 2 Add the address to the list A me Fut fE The address is added to the next available open point in the multi point functional area Important If the list is full the message LIST FULL is displayed The address is not added to the multi point list 3 If you want to verify that the address was added enter the multi point functional area 7 MT PT B Press ESC to return to the last screen 18 31 Chapter 18 After You ve Enter
517. ssed at the end of the scan 15 5 Chapter 15 Using Communication Protocols Controller Communication Status Bit When using the MSG instruction you should also use the following controller communication status bit Active Protocol Bit S 0 11 This is a read only bit that indicates which communication protocol is currently enabled or functioning where 0 DF1 default and 1 DH 485 Use this bit in your program to restrict message operation to a specific protocol Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area The following items apply when entering the instruction Important Only Series B or later MicroLogix 1000 HHPs and Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 controllers support the MSG instruction Only Series C MicroLogix 1000 HHPs fully support Series D functionality Only Series C MicroLogix 1000 HHPs will support MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers In order to enter the instruction your program must be configured to operate with Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 controllers See page 18 18 for more information e Whenever you see asterisks on the display the HHP is waiting for data entry i e a number When entering the target address an element or subelement is entered by first pressing the right arrow key For example to enter the address 11 8 9 you would press the following key sequence 20 gt 9 OG 0 OL Ifyou see a down arrow on th
518. st be the first instruction on the rung the SBR instruction is also known as LD SBR Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To enter the function code press n P000 H SBR OROROORO Using RET This output instruction marks the end of subroutine execution or the end of the subroutine file It causes the controller to resume execution at the instruction following the JSR instruction The rung containing the RET instruction may be conditional if this rung precedes the end of the subroutine In this way the controller omits the balance of a subroutine only if its rung condition is true Without an RET instruction the END instruction always present in the subroutine automatically returns program execution to the instruction following the JSR instruction in your calling ladder file Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To enter the function code press x P014 RET Pui e le 12 5 Chapter 12 Using Program Flow Control Instructions Master Control Reset MCR Ladder representation MCR Execution Times usec when 12 6 True 3 98 False 4 07 Use MCR instructions in pairs to create program zones that turn off all the non retentive outputs in the zone Rungs within the MCR zone are still scanned but scan time is reduced due to the false state of non r
519. t FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 2 l i T LDI hole selector switch bit 0 9 0 22 re AND hole selector switch bit 1 10 0 152 SQO FILE N50 MASK FFFFH High Preset Value counts to next hole DEST N7 3 hole preset sequencer CTRL R4 LEN 5 POS 0000H 42 U RST force the sequencer to increment on next scan R4 EN al This rung accesses 1 0 only available with 32 1 0 controllers Therefore do not include this rung if you are using a 16 I O controller E 17 Appendix E Application Example Programs E 18 File 4 Rung 2 Is identical to the previous rung except that it is only active when the hole selector switch is in the 5 hole position FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 j LD hole selector switch bit 0 179 0 23 1 I anr hole selector switch bit 1 I 10 0 152 SOO FILE N55 MASK FFFFH High Preset Value counts to next hole DEST N7 5 hole preset sequencer CTRL R5 LEN 7 POS 0000H 42 U RST force the sequencer to increment on the next scan R5 EN 1 File 4 Rung 32 Is identical to the two previous rungs except that it is only active when the hole selector switch is in the 7 hole position FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 Feed io LD hole selector switch bit 0 r 9 0 22 iL AND hole selector switch bit 1 I 10 0 152 SOQO FILE N62 MASK FFFFH Hig
520. t 0 1 5 B T C R 32 768 32 767 indexed direct f min f max destination direct indexed direct O 1l S B T C R N Not Applicable MSG Message read write immediate 0 read 1 write target device immediate 2 500CPU 4 485ClF control block direct N Not Applicable control block immediate 7 length local address direct 0 1 S B T C R N_ Not Applicable target node contained in the 0 254 for DF 1 control register 1 31 for DH 485 target address direct 0 1 S B T C R N 0 255 message length T C R 1 13 0 5 B N 1 41 MUL Multiply source A immediate direct O I S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct f min f max source B immediate direct 0 1 5 B 1 C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct f min f max destination direct indexed direct 01 S B TCR Not Applicable MVM Masked Move source direct indexed direct 0 1 S B T C R Not Applicable source mask immediate direct O l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct destination direct indexed direct 0 1l S B T C R N Not Applicable NEG Negate source direct indexed direct 0 1 S B T C R N_ Not Applicable destination direct indexed direct 0 1 5 B T C R Not Applicable Cc 7 Appendix C Valid Addresssing Modes and File Types for Instruction Parameters C 8 Instruction Description Instruction Valid Addressing Valid File Types Valid Value Parameter Mode s Ra
521. t 14 is used with the Bidirectional Counters modes 3 8 If the HSC instruction is true the CD bit is set to one If the HSC instruction is false the CD bit is set to zero Do not write to this bit e High Preset Reached Bit DN bit 13 For the Up Counters modes 1 and 2 this bit is an edge triggered latch bit This bit is set when the high preset is reached You can reset this bit with an OTU instruction or by executing an RAC or RES instruction The DN bit is a reserved bit for all other Counter options modes 3 8 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions Overflow Occurred Bit OV bit 12 For the Up Counters modes 1 and 2 this bit is set by the controller when the high preset is reached if the DN bit is set For the Bidirectional Counters modes 3 8 the OV bit is set by the controller after the hardware accumulator transitions from 32 767 to 32 768 You can reset this bit with an OTU instruction or by executing an RAC or RES instruction for both the up and bidirectional counters Underflow Occurred Bit UN bit 11 is a reserved bit for the Up Counters modes 1 and 2 Do not write to this bit For the Bidirectional Counters modes 3 8 the UN bit is set by the controller when the hardware accumulator transitions from 32 768 to 32 767 You can reset this bit with an OTU instruction or by executing an RAC or RES instruction Update High Speed Counter Accumulator Bit UA bit 10 is used with an OTE i
522. t a valid LBL specifies a label number instruction and label number for which no exist in the program or remove corresponding LBL the instruction if the application instruction exists does not require it 301F INVALID ADDRESS A file instruction exceeds Ensure that the address of the the allowable data file file plus the length does not go size beyond the data file for the address specified or remove the instruction if the application does not require it 3023 INVALID W O HSC The program does not Either change the address of contain an HSC the OUT instruction add an instruction yet has an HSC instruction or remove the OUT instruction with the OUT instruction if the address of CO UA application does not require it 3024 INVALID ADDRESS A bitspecific to the HSC Make sure that the bits specific instruction is used to the HSC operation are from illegally in the program data file address CO Also if any other instructions have bit references from data file address C0 change those references to a different data file 3F Xx INTERNAL ERROR An error has occurred Record the error code and within the HHP contact your local Allen Bradley representative The trace feature helps you locate faulty inputs that prevent outputs from turning on or off as they should The trace feature will find the following e output coils OUT RST and SET e timer counter and control instructions BSL BSR CTD CTU FFL FFU H
523. t exceed 4 digits be sure to clear word S14 before executing the FRD instruction If S14 is not cleared and a value is contained in this word from another math instruction located elsewhere in the program an incorrect decimal value will be placed in the destination word Clearing S14 before executing the FRD instruction is shown below When the input condition I 1 is set 1 a BCD value transferred from a 4 digit thumbwheel switch for example is moved from word N2 into the math register Status word S14 is then cleared to make certain that unwanted data is not present when the FRD instruction is executed 11 5 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions 11 6 Ladder Rung I 0 MOV E MOVE 1 Source N7 2 gt 0001 0010 0011 0100 4660 Dest 8 13 4660 CLR CLEAR Dest S 14 0 FRD FROM BCD Source 13 1 The programming L Ti a 000012344 software displays 13 Dest N70 and 14 in BCD 12344 0000 0100 1101 0010 Instruction List FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 i i t0 I l 0 106 MOV SRC N2 4660 DEST S13 4660 85 CLR DEST S14 0000H 101 FRD SRC S13 00001234H DEST NO 1234 Decode 4 to 1 of 16 DCD Ladder representation DCD DECODE 4 to 1 of 16 Source N7 11 0000 Dest N7 12 0000000000000000 Execution Times usec when True False 27 67 6 78 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling I
524. t location you were at within the program The instructions will either be on or off depending on the input and output states in your program 2 Arrow back to bit I 6 on rung 0 of the program As you do this look at the instruction state boxes and see which ones if any are filled 7 times q gt R000 FH 176 0 Currently I 6 is off If I 6 is turned on the instruction state box will be filled This will result in a path of logical continuity in the rung causing the output instruction state box to be filled as well 5 9 Chapter 5 Quick Start for New Users Monitoring the Data Next you will monitor the input and output data files These files contain bits corresponding to the I O screw terminals of the controller 1 From the program monitor go to rung 1 You can access this rung by entering the rung number as shown here oE 1 2 Access the data monitor for the first instruction on the rung B 0 f er e o B 0 00000000000000 010 3 Set the cursored bit to 1 lt gt 1 B 0 B0 0000000000000001 Notice that the bit is set to 1 as soon as the key is pressed 4 Now access the output data file at 0 0 00 99000000001000100 Notice that bits O 1 and O 5 are set to 1 These bits turned on when you set bit B O to 1 5 10 Chapter 5 Quick Start for New Users 5 Return to the data word B O wow fre enr B 0 B0 0000000000000001
525. t that operand press DEL or FUN DEL and enter new parameters Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one Once the entire instruction is entered if you want to edit the instruction s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode See page 17 4 To enter the function code press A A E 11 9 Chapter 11 Using Data Handling Instructions Copy File COP and The destination file type determines the number of words that an instruction Fill File FLL Instructions transfers For example if the destination file type is a counter and the source file type is an integer three integer words are transferred for each element in the counter type file Ladder representation fcc oad After a COP or FLL instruction is executed index register S24 is cleared to g Source C5 11 zero Dest N7 14 Length 25 Using COP FLL This instruction copies blocks of data from one location into another It uses FILL FILE no status bits If you need an enable bit program an output instruction be rll o OUT in parallel using an internal bit as the output address The following Length 5 figure shows how file instruction data is manipulated Source Destination Execution Times usec when True False COP 27 31 5 06 word 6 60 FLL 26 86 3 62 word 6 60 File to File Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Source is the address of the first wo
526. t the data monitor the display remains in the last radix you selected In the following example the display of an output file is changed from binary to hexadecimal to decimal and back to binary 1 Access the output data table file MON f ENT 0 0 00 FON 0000111100001011 The output file defaults to a binary display 2 Change the display to a hexadecimal radix using the hot key sequence IN FUN gt 0FOBH 18 29 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program 3 Change the display to a decimal radix A Fur 8 00 3851 4 Return to the binary radix display A rut 8 0 0 00 FON 0000111100001 01H Important Notice that the forces only appear in the binary radix Using the Multi Point The function allows you to monitor up to 16 non contiguous bits of data at a Function time Since the multi point list is stored with the program you can create a unique list for each micro controller program you create The multi point list stays with the program even if it is edited by programming software There are two ways to add addresses to the multi point list manually entering each address while in the multi point screen or automatically using short cut keys from the program monitor or data monitor screens You can also change or delete addresses that are already entered into the multi point list Manually Entering Addresses Follow the steps below to manually enter an addre
527. t the instruction symbol looks like typical execution time for the instruction how to use the instruction how to enter the instruction what happens to the HSC when going to the RRUN mode In addition the last section contains an application example for a paper drilling machine that shows the high speed counter instructions in use High Speed Counter Instructions in Function Mnemonic Code Name Purpose Page Applies configuration to the high speed counter hardware updates the HSC 170 High Speed Counter image accumulator enables counting when the HSC rung is true and 14 4 disables counting when the HSC rung is false HSL 171 High Speed Counter Load ee the low and high presets the output patterns and mask bit 14 15 RES 7 High Speed Counter Reset Writes a zero to the hardware accumulator and image accumulator 14 19 RAC 172 High Speed Counter Reset Writes the value specified to the hardware accumulator and image 14 20 Accumulator accumulator HSE 173 High Speed Counter tari Enable Enables or disables execution of the high speed counter interrupt f subroutine when a high preset low preset overflow or underflow is 14 21 HSD 174 High Speed Counter reached Interrupt Disable Update High Speed Provides you with real time access to the hardware accumulator value by OUT 40 14 23 Counter Image Accumulator updating the image accumulator About the High Speed The high speed counter instructions used in
528. t true execution of the HSC instruction The following example ladder rungs and instruction lists demonstrate different ways to adjust the HSC parameters 14 23 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions 14 24 Example 1 To enter the RRUN mode and have the HSC Outputs ACC and Interrupt Subroutine resume their previous state apply the following Ladder Rungs Rung 2 0 No action required entering the RRUN mode Remember that all OUT instructions are zeroed when Use SET RST instructions in place of OUT instructions in your conditional logic requiring retention Instruction List File 2 Rung 1 No action required entering the RRUN mode Sal FOG LSS SSS S SSS SSS Se HSC LOAD t Ls Counter C520 Source N7 0 Length 5 4 Rung 2 1 HSC HIGH SPEED COUNTER CU Type Encoder Res Hld CD Counter C5 0 DN High Preset 1000 Accum 0 Remember that all OUT instructions are zeroed when Use SET RST instructions in place of OUT instructions in your conditional logic requiring retention FUN GRAPHIC CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC 20 LD 171 HSL File 2 Rung 1 FUN GRAPHIC CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC 170 HSC PARAMETER NAME ADDRESS CNTR CO SRC NO LEN PARAMETER NAME ADDRESS FORCES FORCES Encoder Res H1d 1000 0000H Example 2 Chapter
529. t whenever retentive data is lost This bit Lost remains set until you clear it While set this bit causes the controller to fault prior to the first true scan of the program 5 9 Reserved NA NA 5 10 STI Lost Status This bit is set whenever the STI timer expires while the STI routine is either executing or disabled and the pending bit 5 2 0 is already set S5 11 to S5 12 Reserved NA NA 5 13 Input Filter Status This bit is set whenever the discrete input filter selection in Selection Modified the controller is made compatible with the hardware Refer to page A 6 for more information 5 14 to 55 15 Reserved NA NA S6 Major Error Code Status A hexadecimal code is entered in this word by the controller NA Not Applicab om when a major error is declared Refer to 1 13 The code defines the type of fault as indicated on the following pages This word is not cleared by the controller Error codes are presented stored and displayed ina hexadecimal format If you enter a fault code as a parameter in an instruction in your ladder program you must convert the code to decimal Application note You can declare your own application specific major fault by writing a unique value to S 6 and then setting bit S 1 13 Interrogate the value of S 6 in the user fault routine to determine the type of fault that occurred Fault Classifications Faults are classified as Non User Non Recoverable and Recoverable Error code desc
530. ta Program Files Program Files CPU Addressing Data Files Chapter 6 Programming Overview Power Up During power up the micro controller transfers the program files from the EEPROM to the RAM The retentive data is also transferred to the RAM provided it was not lost on power down and normal operation begins EEPROM RAM Backup Data CPU Workspace Retentive Data gt Retentive Data Program Files gt Program Files CPU If retentive data was lost on power down the backup data from the EEPROM is transferred to the RAM and used as the retentive data In addition status file bit S5 8 retentive data lost is set and a recoverable major error occurs when the mode is changed to RRUN RCSN or RSSN EEPROM RAM CPU Workspace Retentive Data Backup Data Retentive Data gt Program Files gt Program Files CPU For the purposes of addressing each data file type is identified by a letter identifier and has an associated allowable range for data storage File D Allowable Word Range 0 to Type Identifier Discrete Analog Output 0 0 4 Input 1 7 Status 5 32 Bit B 31 Timer T 39 Counter 31 Control R 15 Integer N 104 The addresses are made up of alphanumeric characters separated by delimiters De
531. th this name Then store the program to that memory module ATTENTION Always remove power from the HHP before inserting or removing the memory module This guards against possible damage to the module as well as undesired controller faults If a MEM MOD FULL Message Appears If the module does not have sufficient memory to store the program the message MEM MOD FULL appears Press any key to remove the message You are then returned to the memory module options screen If you still want to store the program that is currently loaded in the controller to a memory module do one of the following e Clear a program s from the memory module to make room for the program that is currently loaded See the next section Then try storing the program to the memory module again e Replace the memory module that is currently in the MicroLogix 1000 HHP with one that has more memory available Then store the program to that memory module ATTENTION Always remove power from the HHP before inserting or removing the memory module This guards against possible damage to the module as well as undesired controller faults Chapter 19 Common Procedures Clearing a Program from a Memory Module You can clear a program currently stored on a memory module by following the steps below 1 Go to the menu and choose the option MEM MODULE 2 Select CLEAR PROGRAM CLEAR gt PROGRAMI PROGRAM2 A sub menu appears listin
532. that the bit needs replacement The machine shuts down if the signal is ignored by the operator OPERATOR PANEL 00 ARA Start 1 6 Stop 1 7 Change Drill Soon Change Drill Now 0 4 Thumbwheel for Thickness in 1 4 in Drill Change Reset 5 Hole 0 6 3 Hole G 7 Hole 1 114 epet 19 1710 Drill Home Cy Drill On Off O 1 Drill Retract 0 2 Drill Forward 0 3 Drill Depth co Photo Eye Reset 1 2 4 l Counter Hold 1 3 Quadrature A B Encoder and Drive lt Photo Eye q 1 0 1 1 Reflector Conveyor Enable wired in series to the Drive 0 5 Conveyor Drive Start Stop wired in series to the Drive 0 0 20226 Paper Drilling Machine Operation Overview Undrilled books are placed onto a conveyor taking them to a single spindle drill Each book moves down the conveyor until it reaches the first drilling position The conveyor stops moving and the drill lowers and drills the first hole The drill then retracts and the conveyor moves the same book to the second drilling position The drilling process is repeated until there are the desired holes per book Appendix E Application Example Programs Drill Mechanism Operation When the operator presses the start button the drill motor turns on After the book is in the first drilling position the conveyor subroutine sets a drill sequence start bit and the drill moves toward the book When the drill has drilled through the book the drill body hits a limit switch and causes the drill
533. the Math Instructions cc ccc cece cece terete eee nee 10 1 Math Instructions Overview vo ccc eect eee eee teens 10 2 PM AM sree apace scare yo e a ys ene ann ac aha wo eet ie ae 10 4 Subtract SUB a cavid arn x cme a a a aaa a 10 5 32 Bit Addition and Subtraction oaoa auaa aeea 10 6 UII MUL o corirssisreccrerersia res gsrr eriin iape nee 10 8 Divided DINI saer E one eee ee ae 10 9 Double Divide DDV oo ccc eee tee eens 10 10 Clear GIR eoan aes tate oe hath E E EEES 10 11 SWS ROOTS QR act ousacu a tt oaa Maced doh Sade a demeh crue a aoe Siete Se 10 11 Scale Odi CL ai sienen bees a ee E EEN a me enan es 10 12 Math Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Application Example 10 15 toc iii Table of Contents MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual Using Data Handling Instructions Using Program Flow Control Instructions Using Application Specific Instructions toc iv Chapter 11 About the Data Handling Instructions ccc cece ee eee eens 11 2 Convert BCD TOD srr soserissradrsati rise tin Eaa SNARARE 11 2 Convertfrom BCD FRID coe cwantrorse auawleaes dwastewedewadare se 11 3 Decode 41 lof l0 DCD cc n acd ea eas ied Pewee edbeders ads ou gens 11 7 Encode TOFS TOA ENC oses surdina aaa ooh a abet aiaa dla h id 11 8 Copy File COP and Fill File FLL Instructions n a aaa 11 10 Move and Logical Instructions Overview 11 ccc cece eee eee ees 11 13 M ve MOVI di
534. the bin The gripper then returns to the conveyor to retrieve another part The position of the pick and place head is read by the controller via a 1000 line quadrature encoder wired to the controller s high speed counter inputs When the gripper is in the home position the Z pulse from the encoder resets the high speed counter The number of pulses the head needs to travel to reach each bin location is stored in a data table starting at address N10 and ending at N17 The controller uses indexed addressing to locate the correct encoder count from the data table and to load the information into the high preset of the high speed counter Appendix E Application Example Programs Pick and Place Machine Ladder Program Rung 2 0 The following three rungs take information from the other programmable controller and load it into the INDEX REGISTER This is used to select the proper bin location from the table starting at N7 10 Output from barcode Index Reg me 24 Bere gel e OD racine 5 0 Rung 2 1 Output from barcode Index Reg iE 0 24 SSS SS SS ee ee ee PISS 6 1 Rung 2 2 Output from barcode Index Reg Ig S 24 aaan ee a a a ee Cea 7 2 Rung 2 3 ndexes into the table of bin locations and places the correct number of encoder counts into the high preset of the high speed counter MOV MOVE Source N7 10 100 Dest N7 2 100
535. the faster the filter setting the less immune the analog inputs are to electrical noise The less immune the analog inputs are to electrical noise the faster the inputs are to update The selected setting is applied to all four analog input channels The settings supported are shown in the following table Both the analog input resolution and the analog input settling time are a function of the input filter selection Programmable Filter Characteristics 7 2 1st Notch Freq en Update Time Settling Time Resolution Hz 3 dB Freq Hz mSec mSec Bits 10 2 62 100 00 400 00 16 50 13 10 20 00 80 00 16 60 15 72 16 67 66 67 16 250 65 50 4 00 16 00 15 60 Hz is the default setting The total update time for each channel is a combination of the Update Time and the Settling Time When more than one analog input channel is enabled the maximum update for each channel is equal to one ladder scan time plus the channel s Update Time plus Settling Time When only one analog input channel is enabled the maximum update for the channel is equal to the Update Time plus one ladder scan time Chapter 7 Using Analog Update Time Examples Example 1 All 4 channels enabled with 60 Hz filter selected default settings Maximum Update Time 4 x ladder scan time 4 x 16 67 ms 4 x 66 67 ms 333 36 ms 4 x ladder scan times Each channel is updated approximately three times per sec
536. the forward signal so the drill can retract FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 i LD Drill Sequence Start B732 0 29 OSR AND OSR Drill Subr OSR B 48 0 41 L SET Drill Forward 0 3 0 8 31 Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions File 6 Rung 1 When the drill has drilled through the book the body of the drill actuates the DRILL DEPTH limit switch When this happens the DRILL FORWARD signal is turned off and the DRILL RETRACT signal is turned on The drill is also retracted automatically on power up if it is not actuating the DRILL HOME limit switch FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 l LD Drill Depth LS 1 4 0 20 l LD 1 st Pass 81 15 0 23 l ANI Drill Home LS I 5 0 14 ORB 42 U RST Drill Forward 0 3 0 41 L SET Drill Retract 0 2 0 File 6 Rung 2 When the drill is retracting after drilling a hole the body of the drill actuates the DRILL HOME limit switch When this happens the DRILL RETRACT signal is turned off the DRILL SEQUENCE START bit is turned off to indicate the drilling process is complete and the conveyor is restarted FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 f LD Drill Home LS ney es 0 22 AND Drill Retract 0 2 0 42 07 RST Drill Retract 0 2 0 42 U RST Drill Sequence Start B 32 41 L SET Conveyor Start Sto
537. the function codes for each instruction The instructions are listed in alphabetical order HHP Function Mnemonic Display Code Name Instruction Type ADD 80 Add Math ANB 13 And Block Basic AND bit input de 22 And Basic AND word output 108 And Data Handling ANI e 23 And Inverted Basic BSL 150 Bit Shift Left Application Specific BSR 151 Bit Shift Right Application Specific CLR 85 Clear Math COP 104 File Copy Data Handling CTD 6 Count Down Basic CTU 5 Count Up Basic DCD 102 Decode 4 to 1 of 16 Data Handling DDV 84 Double Divide Math DIV 83 Divide Math ENC 103 Encode 1 of 16 to 4 Data Handling AND EQU EQU 51 EQU LD EQU EQU 50 Equal Comparison OR EQU EQU H 52 FFL 113 FIFO Load Data Handling FFU 114 FIFO Unload Data Handling PEL 105 Fill File Data Handling FRD 101 Convert from BCD Data Handling AND GEQ GEQ 66 GEQ LD GEQ GEQ 65 Greater Than or Equal Comparison OR GEQ ceq H 67 AND GRT GRT 63 GRT LD GRT GRT 62 Greater Than Comparison OR GRT GRT H 64 HSC 170 High Speed Counter High Speed Counter HSD 174 Pe e aa High Speed Counter HSE 173 High Speed Counter High Speed Counter Interrupt Enable Multiple displays B 13 Appendix B Programming Reference
538. the math register 10 8 entering the instruction 10 8 execution times 10 8 function code 10 8 instruction parameters C 7 ladder representation 10 8 updates to arithmetic status bits 10 8 valid addressing modes C 7 valid file types C 7 MVM Masked Move 11 16 N navigation keys identifying 4 4 NEG Negate 11 22 Negate NEG 11 22 entering the instruction 11 22 execution times 11 22 function code 11 22 instruction parameters C 7 ladder representation 11 22 updates to arithmetic status bits 11 22 valid addressing modes C 7 valid file types C 7 NEQ Not Equal 9 4 nested branching 6 14 new rung starting 17 2 node address S 15L B 11 Not NOT 11 21 entering the instruction 11 21 execution times 11 21 function code 11 21 instruction parameters C 8 ladder representation 11 21 updates to arithmetic status bits 11 21 valid addressing modes C 8 valid file types C 8 Not Equal NEQ 9 4 AND NEQ entering the instruction 9 4 execution times 9 4 function code 9 4 instruction parameters C 8 ladder representation 9 4 valid addressing modes C 8 valid file types C 8 LD NEQ entering the instruction 9 4 execution times 9 4 function code 9 4 instruction parameters C 8 ladder representation 9 4 valid addressing modes C 8 valid file types C 8 OR NEQ entering the instruction 9 4 execution times 9 4 function code 9 4 instruction parameters C 8 ladder representation 9 4
539. the processor to clear bit S 2 7 Bit S 2 7 is valid for Series C discrete only Note that the Target Node has not yet examined the MSG packet to see if it understands your request It is replying to the initial connection At the next end of scan the EW bit is cleared 0 and the ST bit is set 1 Once the ST bit is set the processor waits indefinitely for a reply from the Target Node The Target Node is not required to respond within any given time frame At this time no other MSG instruction is serviced Note If the Target Node faults or power cycles during the time frame after the ST bit is set and before the reply is returned you will never receive a reply No other MSG instructions are able to be serviced unless this MSG is terminated in error using the TO bit This is why it is recommended you use a timer in conjunction with the TO bit to clear any pending instructions When the TO bit is set 1 it clears pending messages Typically message transactions are completed within a couple of seconds It is up to the programmer to determine how long to wait before clearing the buffer and then re transmitting 15 9 Chapter 15 Using Communication Protocols 15 10 Step 4 is not shown in the timing diagram If you do not receive an ACK step 3 does not occur Instead a NAK no acknowledge is received When this happens the ST bit remains clear A NAK indicates e the Target Node is too busy o
540. the program in the X controller without rung state indication Monitor the program rung state and X X data as itis being executed Monitor and edit data files X X X X X Change the radix X X X X X Use the search trace and multi point functions X A 1 Access the function code table X X X X X 18 23 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program Monitoring Your Controller This section shows you how to monitor the program files and data table files If a fault occurs while monitoring your controller follow the procedure on page 20 11 to clear the fault Monitoring Program Files Program files contain controller information the main instruction list program and any subroutine programs Monitoring your program files allows you to watch the instruction parameters of timers counters and accumulated values change and to see bits turn on and off as your program runs To monitor a program file follow these steps 1 From the home screen or data monitor access the program monitor display for the program won ent hs You return to the last location you were at within the program 2 Arrow to the program file you want to monitor and move through the rungs as described in the table below To Press move up and down through a program s rungs and program files a move left and right through each rung of a program When the end of a rung is reached the next rung automatically scrolls into view
541. the rung of the ladder The last element on the rung is the output that receives the action as a result of the conditional state of the inputs on the rung Each output instruction is executed by the controller when the rung is scanned and the conditions on the rung are true When the rung is not scanned or the logic conditions on the rung do not create a true logic path the output is not executed The maximum number of instructions per rung is 128 Series Connections One form of logical continuity is series AND logic This means that when all input conditions in the path are true energize the output In the above example if A and B are true energize C Parallel Connections Another form of logical continuity is parallel OR logic This means that when one or another path of logic is true energize the output In the above example if A or B is true energize C Parallel logic is formed using branches in your program Branches can be established at both input and output portions of a rung The upper limit on the number of levels which can be programmed in a branch structure is 75 Chapter 6 Programming Overview Input Branching Use an input branch in your application program to allow more than one combination of input conditions to form parallel branches OR logic conditions If at least one of these parallel branches forms a true logic path the rung logic is enabled If none of the parallel branches
542. the subroutine is scanned again Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area P000 4 B 0 0 SET and RST are retentive output instructions SET can only turn on a bit while RST can only turn off a bit These instructions are usually used in pairs with both instructions addressing the same bit Your program can examine a bit controlled by SET and RST instructions as often as necessary ATTENTION Under fatal error conditions physical outputs are turned off Once the error conditions are cleared the controller resumes operation using the data table value of the operand To access the SET instruction press SET pa 2 To access the RST instruction press RST UD 3 Branch Instructions Overview Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Using SET When you assign an address to the SET instruction that corresponds to the address of a physical output the output device wired to this screw terminal is energized when the bit is set turned on or latched When rung conditions become false after being true the bit remains set and the corresponding output device remains energized When enabled the SET instruction tells the controller to turn on the addressed bit Thereafter the bit remains on regardless of the rung condition until the bit is turned off typically by a RST instruction in another rung Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction
543. the trace feature See page 20 8 D gt ie m delete a single address from the multi point list See page 18 34 is mMm o mE delete all addresses from the multi point list See page 18 34 A ALL Fun foei force On an external input data file bit or FON output circuit See page 18 35 C force Off an external input data file bit or FOF output circuit See page 18 35 R T FUN gt FF remove a set force from an external input data file bit or output circuit See page or 18 35 re ON f search for an instruction or address See page 17 8 SEARCH access the program monitor functional area See page 17 1 N mon ent access the data monitor functional area See page 18 27 data file Te a e g I scroll through the multi point list DA return to the previous screen ESC enter data you ve typed or confirm a prompt ENT Changing the HHPs Defaults Chapter 4 Using Your Hand Held Programmer When your MicroLogix 1000 HHP arrives it has the following factory default settings Feature Default Setting Language English Contrast S eBoooo You can use the menu options to change the default settings of these features as described in the following sections Any changes you make are saved when power is cycled so you will not need to set them every time the HHP powers up Selecting the Language You can configur
544. timing 51 8 Valid for Series A C discrete only This bitis setin the COMMS menu Itis not displayed in Fault Override at Powerup Static Configuration Address is not shown in HHP data monitor When set this bit causes the controller to clear the Major Error Halted bit 1 13 and Minor error bits S 5 0 to S 5 7 on power up if the processor had previously been in the REM Run mode and had faulted The controller then attempts to enter the REM Run mode Set this bit offline only the status file of the HHP Appendix B Programming Reference Address 1 9 Bit Startup Protection Fault Classification Static Configuration Description When this bit is set and power is cycled when the controller powers up in Run mode the controller executes the user fault routine prior to the execution of the first scan of your program You have the option of clearing the Major Error Halted bit 1 13 to resume operation in the REM Run mode Ifthe user fault routine does not reset bit S 1 13 the fault mode results Program the user fault routine logic accordingly When executing the startup protection fault routine S 6 major error fault code contains the value 0016H 1 10 to 1 11 Reserved NA NA sii Run Always Static Configuration When set this bit causes the controller to clear S 1 13 before attempting to enter RUN mode when power is applied or if an unexpected reset occu
545. tion The high speed counter external reset input I 2 and the external hold input 1 3 are wired in parallel to prevent the high speed counter from counting while the reset is active The input filter delays for both the high speed counter A and B inputs 1 0 and I 1 as well as the high speed counter reset and hold inputs 1 2 and 1 3 can be adjusted Refer to chapter 18 for more information on adjusting filters Adding to File 4 Ladder Rungs Rung 4 5 interrupt occurred due to low preset reached c5 0 RET RETURN IL Rung 4 6 This rung signals the main program file 2 to initiate a drilling sequence The high speed counter has already stopped the conveyor at the correct position using its high preset output pattern data clear 0 0 0 This occurred within microseconds of the high preset being reached just prior to entering this high speed counter interrupt subroutine The main program resets the drill sequence start bit and sets the conveyor drive bit 0 0 0 upon completion of the drilling sequence interrupt occurred Drill Sequence Start due to high preset reached C5 0 B3 Eaa an an Cy IH 32 Rung 4 7 END 14 33 Chapter 14 Using High S peed Counter Instructions 14 34 Instruction List File 4 Rung 5 Interrupt occurred due to
546. tion that Ladder representation lets the timer stop and start without resetting the accumulated value ACC RTO _ RETENTIVE TIMER ON EN The RTO instruction retains its accumulated value when any of the following Timer T4 2 occurs Time Base 0 01 DN Preset 120 e Rung conditions become false A 0 e You change controller operation from the RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode to the RPRG mode Execution Times usec when The controller loses power True False e A fault occurs 38 34 27 49 Using Status Bits This Bit is Set When And Remains Set Until One of the Following accumulated value is equalto the appropriate RES instruction Timer Done Bit DN bit 13 or greater than the preset value is enabled rung conditions are true and Timer Timing Bit TT bit14 the accumulated value is less than the preset value rung conditions go false or when the done bitis set Timer Enable Bit EN bit15 rung conditions are true rung conditions go false Important To reset the retentive timer s accumulated value and status bits after the RTO rung goes false you must program a reset RES instruction with the same address in another rung Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To enter the function code press A P000 RTO ADDR P000 RTO PRE oe 120 P000 RTO ACC k k Kk k k k k 0 E P000 RTO BASE 0 01 SEC 8 20 Counter Instructions O
547. tions You can program multiple jumps to the same label by assigning the same label number to multiple JMP instructions However label numbers must be unique Important Do not jump JMP into an MCR zone Instructions that are programmed within the MCR zone starting at the LBL instruction and ending at the END MCR instruction are always evaluated as though the MCR zone is true regardless of the true state of the Start MCR instruction Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area Asterisks appear on the display to indicate that the HHP is waiting for data entry i e a number HLBL LBL P009 AN 198 0 Jump to Subroutine JSR Subroutine SBR and Return RET Ladder representation JSR JUMP TO SUBROUTINE SBR file number 10 e SBR SUBROUTINE RET _______ RETURN Execution Times usec when True False JSR 22 24 4 25 SBR 1 45 0 99 RET 31 11 3 16 The JSR SBR and RET instructions are used to direct the controller to execute a separate subroutine file within the ladder program and return to the instruction following the JSR instruction Important If you use the SBR instruction the SBR instruction must be the first instruction on the first rung in the program file that contains the subroutine Since it must be the first instruction on the rung the SBR instruction is also kn
548. tions Before you learn about the instructions in each of these groups we suggest that you read the overview This chapter contains the following overviews e Bit Shift Instructions Overview e Sequencer Instructions Overview e Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function Overview 13 1 Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions Bit Shift Instructions The following general information applies to bit shift instructions Overview Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming these instructions e File is the address of the bit array you want to manipulate You must use the file indicator in the bit array address The HHP inserts the character automatically e Control is the address of the control element that stores the status byte of the instruction the size of the array in number of bits Note that the control address should not be used for any other instruction The control element is shown below 15 13 11 10 00 Word 0 EN DN ER UL Not used Word 1 Size of bit array number of bits Word 2 Reserved Status bits of the control element may be addressed by mnemonic They include Unload Bit UL bit 10 is the instruction s output Error Bit ER bit 11 when set indicates the instruction detected an error such as entering a negative number for the length or position Avoid using the unload bit when this bit is set Done Bit DN bit 13 whe
549. tions we suggest that you read the Math Instructions Overview that follows 10 1 Chapter 10 Using Math Instructions Math Instructions Overview 10 2 The following general information applies to math instructions Entering the Instructions The following items apply when entering the instructions e Whenever you see asterisks on the display the HHP is waiting for data entry i e a number e You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key Y Then if you want to edit that operand press DEL or FUN DEL and enter new parameters Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one Once the entire instruction is entered if you want to edit the instruction s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode See page 17 4 Using Indexed Word Addresses You have the option of using indexed word addresses for instruction parameters specifying word addresses Indexed addressing is discussed in chapter 6 Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits The arithmetic status bits are found in Word 0 bits 0 3 in the controller status file After an instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated With this Bit The Controller S0 0 Carry C sets if carry is generated otherwise cleared indicates that the actual result of a math instruction does pu Overflow v not fit in the designated destination 0 2 Zero Z indicates a 0 value after a math move or logic
550. tions are situations that may arise if the communication path is somehow corrupted Some examples would be power lost at destination device or a cut cable Error conditions are typically caused from noise on the communication link faulty device s on the network etc Write Message Message Error Message Retry Timer No Response Retry Timer N7 50 T4 9 TON Shoal f eneee Fenere TIMER ON DELAY EN 9 DN Timer T4 9 DN Write Message Time Base 0 01 Error Preset 100 lt N7 50 Accum 0 lt 4 12 Write Message Start N7 50 Read Message Error N7 60 Read Message No Response N7 60 ee Read Message Start N7 60 oe Chapter 15 Using Communication Protocols Rung 2 1 The Time Out bit TO associated with each message instruction is used to clear the controllers communication buffer and message instruction Setting these bits basically places the controllers communication section in the same condition as when the controller power up These bits allow control program to reset or recover from unexpected events e g errors power problems media problems Message Error Write Message Retry Timer Time Out T4 9 N7 50 iu Time Out 4 Rung 2 2 Write message with preceding logic It is STRONGLY recommended that bit S2 0 11 active protocol bit be used to
551. to 10 ms For example the value 9 indicates that 80 90 ms was observed as the longest program cycle Interrogate this value if you need to determine or verify the longest scan time of your program S23 Reserved NA NA S24 Index Register Status This word indicates the element offset used in indexed addressing When an STI high speed counter or Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of this register is restored when execution resumes 25 to 29 Reserved NA NA 30 STI Setpoint Dynamic Configuration You enter the timebase to be used in the selectable timed interrupt STI The time can range from 10 to 2550 ms This is in 10ms increments so valid values are from 0 255 Your STI routine executes per the value you enter Write a zero value to disable the STI To provide protection from inadvertent alteration of your selection program an unconditional MOV instruction containing the setpoint value of your STI to S 30 or program a CLR instruction at S 30 to prevent STI operation If the STI is initiated while in the REM Run mode by loading the Status registers the interrupt starts timing from the end of the program scan in which the status registers were loaded 31 to 32 Reserved NA NA Address is not shown in HHP data monitor Function Codes Appendix B Programming Reference The table below provides
552. tomatic transfer from the hardware accumulator to the image accumulator that occurs each time the HSC instruction is evaluated Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area P000 4 C00 UA Operation This instruction transfers the hardware accumulator to the instruction accumulator When the OUT instruction is executed true the hardware accumulator is loaded to the instruction image accumulator CO ACC Once initialized the HSC instruction retains its previous state when going through a mode change or power cycle This means that the HSC Accumulator CO ACC and High Preset values are retained Outputs under the direct control of the HSC also retain their previous state The Low Preset Reached and High Preset Reached bits CO LP and CO HP are also retained They are examined by the HSC instruction during the high speed counter s first true evaluation in the RRUN mode to differentiate a retentive RRUN mode entry from an external or initial Accumulator CO ACC modification At the first true HSC instruction execution after going to run the Low Preset is initialized to 32 768 and the output mask and high and low output patterns are initialized to zero Use the HSL instruction during the first pass to restore any values necessary for your application You can modify the behavior of the high speed counter at RRUN mode entry by adjusting the HSC parameters prior to the firs
553. tors to couple between aluminum and ferromagnetic conduit Make an electrical connection around the plastic connector use pipe clamps and the heavy gauge wire or wire braid to hold both sections at the same potential Ground the entire length of conduit by attaching it to the building earth ground Do not let the conduit touch the plug on the cable Arrange the cables loosely within the conduit The conduit should contain only serial communication cables Install the conduit so that it meets all applicable codes and environmental specifications For more information on planning cable routes see Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication Number 1770 4 1 Software Considerations Software considerations include the configuration of the network and the parameters that can be set to the specific requirements of the network The following are major configuration factors that have a significant effect on network performance e number of nodes on the network e addresses of those nodes e baud rate The following sections explain network considerations and describe ways to select parameters for optimum network performance speed See your programming software s user manual for more information D 13 Appendix D Understanding the Communication Protocols D 14 Number of Nodes The number of nodes on the network directly affects the data transfer time between nodes Unnecessary nodes su
554. troller 1761 L32AAA Terminal doors for L16AWA 2 doors per package 1761 RPL T16A Terminal doors for L16BWA 2 doors per package 1761 RPL T16B Terminal doors for L32AWA L32BWA or L32AAA 2 doors per ppl package 1761 RPL T32X Communications door 1 door per package 1761 RPL COM DIN rail latches 2 per package 1761 RPL DIN 2 00 m 6 56 ft cable DIN to DIN for use with the MicroLogix 1000 HHP 1761 CBL HM02 aa Programmer includes 1761 CBL HM02 communication 1761 HHP B30 Memory module for 1761 HHP B30 stores 1 program 1761 HHM K08 Memory module for 1761 HHP B30 stores 8 programs 1761 HHM K64 Memory module door for 1761 HHP B30 1 door per package 1761 RPL TRM A 11 Appendix Programming Reference This appendix lists the e controller status file e function codes e instruction execution times and instruction memory usage Controller Status File The status file lets you monitor how your operating system works and lets you direct how you want it to work This is done by using the status file to set up control bits and monitor both hardware and software faults and other status information Important Do not write to reserved words in the status file If you intend writing to status file data it is imperative that you first understand the function fully The status file S contains the following words Word Function Page 0 Arithmetic
555. tructions in use HHP n Function Display Mnemonic Code Name Purpose Page Examines a bit for an On condition Itis the first normally open instruction Hr LD 20 Load in a rung or block s3 Examines a bit for an Off condition Itis the first normally closed instruction Hr LDI 21 Load Inverted in a rung or block 8 4 Examines a bit for an On condition Itis a normally open instruction placed dk AND 22 And in series with any previous input instruction in the current rung or block 8 3 This differs from the AND output instruction discussed in chapter 10 Examines a bit for an Off condition Itis a normally closed instruction ye ANI 23 And Inverted placed in series with any previous input instruction in the current rung or 8 4 block Examines a bit for an On condition Itis a normally open instruction placed LJ OR 24 Or in parallel with any previous input instruction in the current rung or block 8 3 This differs from the OR output instruction discussed in chapter 11 Examines a bit for an Off condition It is a normally closed instruction Ly ORI 25 Or Inverted placed in parallel with any previous input instruction in the current rung or 8 4 block LDT LDT 26 Load True Represents a shortas the first instruction in a rung or block 8 6 Represents a short in parallel with the previous instruction in the current ORTH ORT 27 Or True rung or block 8 6 OSR LD OSR
556. ts On overflow minor error bit S 5 0 is also set and the value 0 1 Overflow V 32 768 or 32 767 is placed in the destination The presence of an overflow is checked before and after the offset value is applied 0 2 Zero Z sets when destination value is zero 0 3 Sign S sets if the destination value is negative otherwise resets ifthe result of the Source times the Rate divided by 10000 is greater than 32 767 the SCL instruction overflows causing error 0020 Minor Error Bit and places 32 767 in the Destination This occurs regardless of the current offset Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area P000 SCL N 0 SCL R 10K 25000 P000 SCL OFST 127 P000 SCL DEST N1 377 10 13 Chapter 10 Using Math Instructions Ladder representation SCL SCALE Source I 0 4 Rate 10000 32 Offset 0 Dest N7 0 10 14 The following example takes a OV to 10 5V analog input from a MicroLogix 1000 analog controller and scales the raw input data to a value between 0 and 100 The input value range is OV to 10V which corresponds to 0 to 31 207 counts The scaled value range is 0 to 100 percent Application Example Convert Voltage Input to Percent 100 Scaled Max Scaled Value percent Scaled Min OV 31 207 10V Input Min Input Max Input Value Calculating the Linear Relationship Use the follo
557. uction parameters C 5 ladder representation 9 7 valid addressing modes C 5 valid file types C 5 Greater Than or Equal GEQ 9 8 AND GEQ entering the instruction 9 8 execution times 9 8 function code 9 8 instruction parameters C 5 ladder representation 9 8 valid addressing modes C 5 valid file types C 5 LD GEQ entering the instruction 9 8 execution times 9 8 function code 9 8 instruction parameters C 5 ladder representation 9 8 valid addressing modes C 5 valid file types C 5 OR GEQ entering the instruction 9 8 execution times 9 8 function code 9 8 instruction parameters C 5 ladder representation 9 8 valid addressing modes C 5 valid file types C 5 grounding the controller 2 1 grounding your analog cable 2 20 GRT Greater Than 9 7 guide to forcing external input data file bits 18 37 external output circuits 18 39 H hardware features 1 2 heat protection 1 12 HHP about 4 1 accessories and replacement parts A 11 changing defaults 4 17 language 4 17 LCD display contrast 4 18 connecting 3 1 dimensions A 9 features 4 2 functional areas 4 7 identifying errors 20 3 keys you use 4 4 accessing additional characters 4 5 context sensitivity 4 4 power up sequence 4 6 programming examples 16 1 specifications A 9 High Speed Counter HSC 14 4 entering parameters 14 4 entering the instruction 14 6 execution times 14 4 function code 14 6 instruction par
558. ud Rate 9600 baud Important These steps apply only to programs configured for Series A and B MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers If you have configured your program for Series C or later discrete controllers or for MicroLogix analog controllers see page 19 7 for directions on changing the baud rate 1 Enter the menu and choose the option BAUD RATE ee gt 9600 2400 The arrow points to the controller s current baud rate 19 6 Changing the Micro Controller s Communication Defaults Chapter 19 Common Procedures 2 Arrow down to the desired baud rate and select it ay et n times The MicroLogix 1000 HHP resets itself to the new baud rate and runs through the power up sequence If you configure your program to be compatible with Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers or MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers option number 7 in the menu functional area is COMMS instead of BAUD RATE This menu option allows you to change any or all of the following e the controller s active communication protocol e the default baud rates for each protocol e the default node addresses for each protocol The steps below walk you through the five sub menus of the COMMS option Press ESC at any time to exit the sub menus 1 Enter the menu and choose the option comms The first screen that appears is the Main Protocol sub menu as shown below MAIN PROTOCOL MDF1 ODH485 Use this sub me
559. ue False 20 80 4 25 To enter the function code press AN Fut Ca ee Square Root SQR Ladder representation SQR SQUARE ROOT Source N7 8 0 Dest N7 11 0 Execution Times usec when True False 71 25 6 78 Chapter 10 Using Math Instructions Use the CLR instruction to set the destination to zero All of the bits reset The destination must be a word address Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S0 0 Carry C always resets S0 1 Overflow V always resets S0 2 Zero Z always sets S0 3 Sign S always resets Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area P000 CLR DEST N11 0 When this instruction is evaluated as true the square root of the absolute value of the source is calculated and the rounded integer result is placed in the destination The source and the destination must be word addresses The instruction calculates the square root of a negative number without overflow or faults In applications where the source value may be negative use a comparison instruction to evaluate the source value to determine if the destination may be invalid Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S0 0 Carry C sets if the source is negative otherwise cleared S0 1 Overflow V always resets S0 2 Zero Z sets when destination value is zero S0 3 Sign
560. uidelines Wiring Your Controller This chapter explains how to wire your MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controller Topics include e grounding guidelines e sinking and sourcing circuits e wiring recommendations e wiring diagrams input voltage ranges and output voltage ranges In solid state control systems grounding helps limit the effects of noise due to electromagnetic interference EMI Use the heaviest wire gauge listed for wiring your controller with a maximum length of 152 4 mm 6 in Run the ground connection from the ground screw of the controller third screw from left on output terminal rung to the ground bus Important This symbol denotes a functional earth ground terminal which provides a low impedance path between electrical circuits and earth for non safety purposes such as noise immunity improvement Protective Wrap remove after wiring ATTENTION All devices that connect to the user 24V power supply or to the RS 232 channel must be referenced to chassis ground or floating Failure to follow this procedure may result in property damage or personal injury ground terminal screw to chassis ground prior to connecting any devices ATTENTION On the 1761 L10BWB 1761 L16BWB 1761 L16BBB 1761 L20BWB S5A 1761 L32BBB and 1761 L32BWB controllers the user supply 24V dc IN and chassis ground are internally connected ATTENTION Chassis ground user 24V ground and RS 232 ground are internally conne
561. umber 6 Rung 2 6 Calls the subroutine that tracks the amount of wear on the current drill bit JUMP TO SUBROUTINE SBR file number 7 Rung 4 0 Resets the hole count sequencers each time that the low preset is reached The low preset has been set to zero to cause an interrupt to occur each time that a reset occurs The low preset is reached anytime that a reset C5 0 or hardware reset occurs This ensures that the first preset value is loaded into the high speed counter at each entry into the RRUN mode and each time that the external reset signal is activated interrupt 3 hole occurred preset due to sequencer low preset reached iN SS H C530 R6 4 INTERRUPT SUBROUTINE RES 4 IL S hole peset sequencer R6 5 RES 7 hole preset sequencer R6 6 poe RES Appendix E Application Example Programs Rung 4 1 Keeps track of the hole number that is being drilled and loads the correct high speed counter preset based on the hole count This rung is only active when the hole selector switch is in the 3 hole position The sequencer uses step 0 as a null step upon reset It uses the last step as a go forever in anticipation of the end of manual hard wired external reset hole hole 3 hole selector selector preset switch switch sequencer bit
562. umber 6 Rung 2 6 Calls the subroutine that tracks the amount of wear on the current drill bit J R JUMP TO SUBROUTINE SBR file number 7 4 Rung 2 7 END Instruction List File 2 Rung 5 Calls the drill sequence subroutine This subroutine manages the operation of a drilling sequence and restarts the conveyor upon completion of the drilling sequence FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 132 JSR SBR 6 File 2 Rung 6 Calls the subroutine that tracks the amount of wear on the current drill FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 132 JSR SBR 7 Using Application Specific Instructions This chapter contains general information about the application specific instructions and explains how they function in your application program Each of the instructions includes information on e what the instruction symbol looks like e typical execution time for the instruction how to use the instruction how to enter the instruction In addition the last section contains an application example for a paper drilling machine that shows the application specific instructions in use Application Specific Instructions HHP Function Display Mnemonic Code N
563. ush MPS 8 10 entering the instruction 8 10 execution times 8 10 function code 8 10 ladder representation 8 10 using 8 10 Memory Read MRD 8 10 entering the instruction 8 11 execution times 8 10 function code 8 11 ladder representation 8 10 using 8 11 memory usage listing B 16 worksheet B 21 menu description 4 8 how to complete tasks 4 9 screen definition 4 9 MEQ Masked Comparison for Equal 9 9 Message MSG 15 1 application examples 15 12 control block layout 15 3 entering parameters 15 2 entering the instruction 15 6 error codes 15 11 execution times 15 2 function code 15 7 instruction parameters C 7 ladder representation 15 2 timing diagram 15 9 using status bits 15 4 valid addressing modes C 7 valid file types C 7 mnemonics using in instruction list programming 6 15 in logical addresses 6 8 mode changing editing modes 17 3 Index MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual changing remote controller modes 18 23 description 4 10 how to complete tasks 4 11 screen definition 4 10 model for developing a logic program 6 17 modems dial up phone D 7 leased line D 8 line drivers D 8 radio D 8 using with MicroLogix controllers D 7 modes of operation 18 22 monitoring data table files 18 26 changing the radix 18 30 operation 5 9 fault recovery procedure 20 11 of the controller 18 25 of the data 5 10 of the program 5 9
564. using this combination you can eliminate using the XIO XIC and other instructions For a detailed explanation of e LD LDI and RES instructions see chapter 8 SQO and SQC instructions see chapter 13 Event Driven Sequencer Ladder Program Rung 2 0 Ensures that the SQO always resets to step entry enable bit to 0 Due to this transition and asserts step position Eliminate this rung for retentive operation S21 eee eee ere eee a eee 15 Rung 2 1 position 1 each RRUN mode This rung actually resets the control register s position and EN the following rung sees a false to true 1 on the first scan The SQC instruction and SQO instruction share the same Control Register This is acceptable due to the careful planning of the rung state condition You could cascade SQO if you desired case asserting Outputs 0 3 R6 0 a a FD N7 10 and ends at N7 19 active also roll over to step 1 sequencer instructions SQC Compare Data Data Addresses Radix Decimal branch N7 0 0 1 2 2 4 5 6 y N7 10 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 SQC dsrman SEQUENCER COMPARE EN File N7 0 DN Mask 000F FD Source T 0 0 Control R6 0 Length 9 Position 2 4 R6 0 SQQ SEQUENCER OUTPUT EN FD File N7 10 DN Mask OOOF Dest 020 0 Control R6 0 Length 9 Position 2 4 The following
565. ut circuit remains forced until the force is removed The data file bit is unaffected FON If the controller is in RRUN the bit is forced On and the on output circuit remains forced until the force is removed The A f or A z f Affects the cursored external output circuit It removes the set force Other forces are unaffected ee Affects all forced external input bit addresses and external output circuits It removes set forces from all external input bit addresses and output circuits The displays below show an example of setting a force while in Run mode Initial conditions Bit is Off 0 No forces exist Bit is On 1 No forces exist Bit is Off Set forces do not ron affect ouput data file bits 0 Force is On FOF Bit is Off 0 Force is Off Using a Memory Module Chapter Common Procedures Several of the menu items may be required after the control program has been running This chapter gives you details about these procedures and other commonly performed tasks The common procedures included here are using a memory module clearing a program from the micro controller changing the micro controller s baud rate changing the micro controller s communication defaults You can use a memory module to store and retrieve programs To use the memory module access the menu and choose the option MEM MODULE CRON gt
566. ution of the STI subroutine can occur at any point up to the full STI interval Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program monitor functional area To enter the function code press r P007 STE a GD e STD STE Zone Example In the program that follows the STI function is in effect The STD and STE instructions in rungs 6 and 12 are included in the program to avoid having STI subroutine execution at any point in rungs 7 through 11 The STD instruction rung 6 resets the STI enable bit and the STE instruction rung 12 sets the enable bit again The STI timer increments and may time out in the STD zone setting the pending bit S2 0 and lost bit 5 10 13 17 Chapter 13 Using Application Specific Instructions Selectable Timed Start STS Ladder representation STS ___ SELECTABLE TIMED START File 5 Time 140 Execution Times usec when 13 18 True False 24 59 6 78 The first pass bit S1 15 and the STE instruction in rung 0 are included to insure that the STI function is initialized following a power cycle You should include this rung any time your program contains an STD STE zone or an STD instruction Program File 3 st STE 0 E SELECTABLE TIMED ENABLE STD 6 SELECTABLE TIMED DISABLE STI interrupt execution will not occur between STD and STE N o
567. ve protocol If these radio modems require RTS CTS handshaking configure the control line parameter to Half Duplex Modem Line Drivers Line drivers also called short haul modems do not actually modulate the serial data but rather condition the electrical signals to operate reliably over long transmission distances up to several miles Allen Bradley s AIC Advanced Interface Converter is a line driver that converts an RS 232 electrical signal into an RS 485 electrical signal increasing the signal transmission distance from 50 to 4000 feet In a point to point line driver topology configure the MicroLogix 1000 controller for DF1 full duplex protocol as long as the line drivers do not require DTR or RTS to be high in order to operate In a point to multipoint line driver topology configure the MicroLgoix 1000 controllers for DF1 half duplex slave protocol If these line drivers require RTS CTS handshaking configure the control line parameter to Half Duplex Modem DH 485 Communication Protocol Appendix D Understanding the Communication Protocols The information in this section describes the DH 485 network functions network architecture and performance characteristics It also helps you plan and operate the MicroLogix 1000 on a DH 485 network Important Only Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers support the DH 485 network DH 485 Network Descr
568. ve the correct number of reconfigure your controller files or itdoes not have the correct using programming software size data files The default or clear the program in the program is loaded controller with the HHP 0020 MINOR ERR AT END A minor fault bit bits 0 7 in S5 Correct the condition that was setat the end of scan caused the error then clear the fault using the FAULT DEL keys and enter the RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode 0022 WATCHDOG TIMEOUT The program scan time exceeded Verify if the program is caught the watchdog timeout value in a loop and correct the problem or increase the watchdog timeout value using the program configuration menu selection 0024 INVALID STI TIME An invalid STI interval exists not Set the STI interval between between 0 and 255 the values of 0 and 255 using the program configuration menu selection 0025 TOO MANY JSR S There are more than 3 subroutines Correct the user program to m nested in the STI subroutine file 5 eet the requirements and restrictions for the SR instruction then re enter RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode Chapter 20 Troubleshooting Your System preset was loaded to counter C0 when the HSC was an Up counter or the high preset was lower than or equal to the low preset when the HSC was a Bidirectional counter a Advisory Message Description Recommended Action 0027 TOO MANY JSR S Ther
569. vel ot Applicable bit address direct 0 1 S B T C R N ot Applicable bit level length contained in the 0 2048 control register BSR Bit Shift Right file indexed direct 0 1 S B N Not Applicable control direct R element level Not Applicable bit address direct 0 1 5 B T C R N Not Applicable bit level length contained in the 0 2048 control register CLR Clear destination direct indexed direct 0 1 5 B T C R N Not Applicable COP Copy File source indexed direct O l S B T C R N Not Applicable destination indexed direct O l S B T C R N Not Applicable length immediate 1 128 1 42 when destination is T C R CTD Count Down counter direct C element level Not Applicable preset contained in the 32 768 32 767 counter register accum contained in the 32 768 32 767 counter register C 3 Appendix C Valid Addresssing Modes and File Types for Instruction Parameters c 4 Instruction Description Instruction Valid Addressing Valid File Types Valid Value Parameters Mode s Ranges CTU Count Up counter direct C element level Not Applicable preset contained in the 32 7168 32 767 counter register accum contained in the 32 768 32 767 counter register DCD Decode 4 to 1 of 16 source direct indexed direct 0 1l S B T C R N Not Applicable destination direct indexed direct 0 1 5 B T C R N_ Not Applic
570. verview Chapter 8 Using Basic Instructions Once instruction entry is complete the parameters are condensed to two screens as shown here P000 RTO P 120 A P000 RTO 0 01 SEC When the controller changes from the RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode to the RPRG or FLT mode or user power is lost while the timer is timing but not yet at the preset value the following occurs e Timer Enable EN bit remains set e Timer Timing TT bit remains set e Accumulated value ACC remains the same On returning to the RRUN RCSN or RSSN mode or when power is restored the following can happen Condition Result TT bit remains set If the rung is true EN bit remains set ACC value remains the same and resumes incrementing TT bit is reset DN bit remains in its last state EN bitis reset ACC value remains in its last state If the rung is false Each Counter address is made of a 3 word data file element Word 0 is the status word containing six status bits Word 1 is the preset value Word 2 is the accumulated value 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Word 0 CU CD DN OV UN UA Not Used lt Status Word Word 1 Preset Value Word 2 Accumulator Value CU Counter Up Enable Bit CD Counter Down Enable Bit DN Done Bit OV Overflow Occurred Bit UN Underflow Occurred Bit UA Update Counter Accumulator Bit For high speed counter instruction information see cha
571. wer supply turn off The dc power supply should be powered directly from the fused secondary of the transformer Power to the dc input and output circuits is connected through a set of master control relay contacts Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit Any part can fail including the switches in a master control relay circuit The failure of one of these switches would most likely cause an open circuit which would be a safe power off failure However if one of these switches shorts out it no longer provides any safety protection These switches should be tested periodically to assure they will stop machine motion when needed The following explains power considerations for the micro controllers Isolation Transformers You may want to use an isolation transformer in the ac line to the controller This type of transformer provides isolation from your power distribution system and is often used as a step down transformer to reduce line voltage Any transformer used with the controller must have a sufficient power rating for its load The power rating is expressed in volt amperes VA Chapter 1 Installing Your Controller Power Supply Inrush The MicroLogix power supply does not require or need a high inrush current However if the power source can supply a high inrush current the MicroLogix power supply will accept it There is a high level of inrush current when a large capacitor on the input of the MicroLogix is charg
572. when the start button is pressed However there are other conditions that must also be met before we start the conveyor They are the drill must be in its fully retracted position home the drill bit must not be past its maximum useful life This rung also stops the conveyor when the stop button is pressed or when the drill life is exceeded START Drill STOP change Machine Button Home LS Button cleat oe RUN NOW Latch 10 I0 130 O20 B3 sgrnan 77 jses i I I ea esee 6 5 7 6 0 Machine RUN Latch B3 0 9 12 Chapter 9 Using Comparison Instructions Instruction List File 2 Rung 3 Starts the conveyor in motion when the start button is pressed However another condition must also be met before we start the conveyor the drill bit must be in its fully retracted position home This rung also stops the conveyor when the stop button is pressed FUN GRAPHIC PARAMETER CODE SYMBOL MNEMONIC NAME ADDRESS VALUE FORCES 20 LD START Button 1 6 0 22 AND Drill Home LS r s 0 24 l _ OR Machine RUN Latch B 0 0 23 ANI STOP Button I 7 0 23 ils ANI change drill bit NOW 0 6 0 40 Say OUT Machine RUN Latch B 0 Beginning a Subroutine in File 7 This section of ladder keeps track of the total inches of paper the current drill bit has drilled through As the current bit wears out a light illuminates on the operator panel as shown below to warn
573. wing equations to calculate the scaled units Scaled value input value x rate offset Rate scaled max scaled min input max input min 100 0 31 207 0 00320 or 32 10000 Offset scaled min input min x rate 0 0 x 00320 0 As shown below if the input value is 10 the scaled value is 032 032 10 x 0032 0 Chapter 10 Using Math Instructions Math Instructions in the Paper To demonstrate the use of math instructions this section provides ladder Drilling Machine Application Example rungs followed by the optimized instruction list for these rungs The rungs are part of the paper drilling machine application example described in appendix D You will be adding to the subroutine in file 7 that was started in chapter 9 Ladder Rungs Rung 7 1 Resets the number of 1 4 in increments and the 1 4 in thousands when the drill change reset keyswitch is energized This should occur following each drill bit change drill change 1 4 ins reset keyswitch Thousands I 0 CLR CLEAR 8 Dest N7 11 Oo peeee eee 1 4 aim increments CLR CLEAR Dest N7 10 0l 4 Rung 7 50 Keeps a running total of how many inches of paper have been drilled with the current drill bit Every time a hole is drilled the thickness in 4 ins is add
574. wing items apply when entering the instruction e Whenever you see asterisks on the display the HHP is waiting for data entry i e a number e You can return to previously entered operands by pressing this key NY Then if you want to edit that operand press DEL or FUN DEL and enter new parameters Press ENT to accept the operand and move on to the next one Once the entire instruction is entered if you want to edit the instruction s parameters you must go into the overwrite mode See page 17 4 To enter the function code press P007 11M ADDR amp Le sooni 12 8 P007 IIM MASK OOOBH Immediate Output with Mask IOM Ladder representation IOM IMMEDIATE OUT w MASK Slot 0 0 0 Mask 003F Execution Times usec when True False 41 59 6 78 Chapter 12 Using Program Flow Control Instructions This instruction allows you to update the outputs prior to the normal output scan Data from the output image is transferred through a mask to the specified outputs The program scan then resumes Entering Parameters For all micro controllers specify OO For 16 I O controllers 00 0 5 are valid and O0 6 15 are considered unused inputs they do not physically exist For 32 I O controllers O0 0 11 are valid and 00 12 15 are unused Mask Specify a Hex constant or register address Entering the Instruction You enter the instruction from within the program
575. xample program monitor display of instruction I 6 in rung 0 The display indicates that the controller is in RRUN and no forces exist on this bit R000 FR 1 6 0 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program To force On the external input file address follow the steps below 1 Press the force On key A confirmation screen appears FON C FORCE BIT ON YES ENT NO ESC Accept the confirmation to force the bit On This simulates the closing of the external input circuit However the actual open closed status of the external input circuit no longer affects the program logic For the previous example the following is now true The instruction state box is filled indicating that I 6 is true FOn appears in the upper right hand corner indicating that the input is forced On The data value shown in the lower right hand corner is now a 1 The controller s Forced I O LED is on continuously 18 35 Chapter 18 After You ve Entered Your Program 18 36 Guide to Forcing External Input Data File Bits The following occurs in the Run or Test mode e Forcing of input data file bits and resultant data changes appear in the data file displays The ladder program is scanned and ladder logic is applied e Instruction state boxes are filled for true bit instructions The table below shows the keys and key sequences involved with setting and clearing forces A confirmation screen appea
576. yed side by side as shown here 1 For operations that require you to press an arrow key the key you should press is shown bolded such as the right arrow key shown here P 5 Preface Allen Bradley Support P 6 Allen Bradley offers support services worldwide with over 75 Sales Support Offices 512 authorized Distributors and 260 authorized Systems Integrators located throughout the United States alone plus Allen Bradley representatives in every major country in the world Local Product Support Contact your local Allen Bradley representative for e sales and order support e product technical training e warranty support support service agreements Technical Product Assistance If you need to contact Allen Bradley for technical assistance please review the information in the Troubleshooting chapter first Then call your local Allen Bradley representative Your Questions or Comments on this Manual If you find a problem with this manual please notify us of it on the enclosed Publication Problem Report If you have any suggestions for how this manual could be made more useful to you please contact us at the address below Allen Bradley Company Inc Control and Information Group Technical Communication Dept 602V T122 P O Box 2086 Milwaukee WI 53201 2086 or visit our internet page at http www abmicrologix com Installing Your Controller Wiring Your Controller Connecting the System Tab

1761-6.2, MicroLogix 1000 with Hand

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents